JP7700439B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, this type of gaming machine includes a pachinko machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-112124 A (pages 39-40, FIG. 20)

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, there is a problem in that the conventional gaming machines are unable to improve the entertainment value of the game .

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game .

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention described in claim 1 is as follows:
An operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game including a judgment regarding the game;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of executing a predetermined display performance based on the result of the judgment,
The gaming machine includes:
A valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid can be set during the predetermined display performance,
A measuring means is provided for measuring a predetermined period upon the start of the valid period,
The gaming machine includes:
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner during the valid period, a specific operation corresponding performance can be executed, and when an operation different from the operation in the specific manner is started thereafter, the specific operation corresponding performance can be continuously executed;
When the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the different operation, even if the different operation is then ended and an operation in at least the specific mode is performed, the specific operation corresponding performance is not continuously executed;
The specific operation corresponding performance is configured to be continuously executed even if the operation in the specific mode is interrupted during the valid period,
This is characterized in that, when the passage of the predetermined period is measured after the interruption is started, the specific operation-responsive presentation is not continuously executed even if the interruption is then ended and an operation is performed in at least the specific mode.

[Function and Effect] According to the invention described in claim 1, the entertainment value of the game can be improved .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached, taken along the line AA in FIG. 1 . This is a left side view of the pachinko machine, showing the state in which the illumination cover has been attached, along the cross section BB of Figure 1. FIG. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a hold display. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. (a) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 1, and (b) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 2. This is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern. 13A is an example of the variable display presentation for a normal jackpot reach and a normal miss reach, and FIG. 13B is an example of the variable display presentation for a super jackpot reach and a super miss reach. 13A is an example of a variable display presentation for a jackpot super reach and a miss super reach, and FIG. 13B is an example of a variable display presentation for a jackpot super reach and a miss super reach. This is a table for determining an ending performance pattern. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the first pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a next game state setting process. A flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for pre-reading. 13 is a flowchart showing a launch control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing by the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a dispensing control process. A flowchart showing prize ball control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a ball loan control process. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing by a sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing customer waiting presentation processing by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a decision button input monitoring and presentation process by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a selection button input monitoring and presentation process performed by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance execution management process performed by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command reception process performed by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a next game status display mode setting process performed by the sub-control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a process of switching a display mode or the like by a display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern row variation display process performed by a display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific operation screen display process performed by the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a big win opening round display process by a display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win ending display process performed by the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a high probability/support state transition display process performed by a display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a low probability/support state transition display process by a display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific operation period notifying process performed by the display control device. A figure explaining the display mode during a specific operation period in the third pattern display device. A figure explaining the display mode during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the display mode during a specific operation period after a reach is achieved. This is a diagram illustrating the display mode during a specific operation period after the reach is achieved, following Figure 53. 13 is a diagram illustrating the display mode when the decision button is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the display mode when the decision button and the selection button are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. FIG. 13A is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 1 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 2 in the second embodiment. 13 is a table for setting an ending performance pattern. 13A is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 1 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 2 in the third embodiment. 13 is a table for setting an ending performance pattern. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a display mode of specific operation period end approach information in Example 4, and (b1) to (b3) are diagrams for explaining a display mode different from (a1) to (a3). (a1) to (a3) are figures explaining the display mode of the next game state approach information in Example 5, and (b1) to (b3) are figures explaining a display mode different from (a1) to (a3). 13A to 13E are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the next game state approaching information in the sixth embodiment. 13A to 13F are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the next game state approaching information in the seventh embodiment. 13A to 13F are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the next game state approaching information in the eighth embodiment. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 9. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 10. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 11. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during a jackpot round play in Example 12. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during a reach display performance in Example 13. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during a reach display performance in Example 14. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 15. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 16. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 17. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 18. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during a reach display performance in Example 19. A figure explaining a display mode different from that of Figure 76 during a specific operation period during a reach display performance. 20(a) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 1 in Example 20, and (b) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 2. This is a table for selecting the main decorative pattern change pattern of Special Chart 1 in Example 20. 20 is a table for determining an ending performance pattern according to the twentieth embodiment. A figure explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win round display effect. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the auxiliary performance decision processing by the display control device 45 of the twenty-first embodiment. 13A is a flowchart illustrating a one-shot notification lottery process performed by the display control device 45, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart illustrating a one-shot notification display process performed by the display control device 45. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an ending effect pattern determination table. A figure explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win ending display effect. A figure explaining a table for determining an ending performance pattern in Example 22. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the big win ending display effect. This is a front view of a pachinko machine of Example 23 with an illumination cover of a different size from that shown in Figure 1 attached. This is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the CC cross section with different sized illuminated covers attached. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the state in which different sizes of illuminated covers are attached in the DD cross section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light-emitting area when illumination covers of different sizes are attached. 23A and 23B are diagrams for explaining adjustment of a light emitting region in Example 24. FIG. 25 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a twenty-fifth embodiment. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 93, showing the E-section with the illuminated cover attached. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with illumination covers of different sizes attached. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 95, showing the FF cross section with different sized illuminated covers attached. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light-emitting area when illumination covers of different sizes are attached. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a sub-control device. FIG. 26 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a twenty-sixth embodiment. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 99, showing the state in which the illuminated cover is attached at the GG cross section. FIG. 2 is a front view of a pachinko machine with an illuminated cover attached that has a different light-emitting area. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 101, showing the HH cross section with different sized illuminated covers attached. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a sub-control device. FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board of Example 27. This is a cross-sectional view II of the game board shown in Figure 104, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illuminated part. A front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. A cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 106, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. A diagram showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illuminated part in Example 28. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board of Example 29. This is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 109, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. This is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 109, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area when the movable illumination section is protruding. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board of Example 30. This is an LL cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 112, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illuminated part. A front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. This is an MM cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 114, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illuminated section. 3(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the mounting direction of the decorative illumination cover and the separate decorative illumination cover of Example 31. 3A and 3B are diagrams illustrating the change in the light-emitting area of the illuminated cover of Example 32 before and after the change. 3A and 3B are diagrams illustrating the state before and after the change in the light-emitting area of the third illuminated cover of Example 33. This is a table for the special chart 1 jackpot lottery in Example 34. This is the table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. This is a table for the special chart 1 jackpot ending production. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending production. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the opening/ending time determination process performed by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening by the main control device. A rear view of the pachinko machine of Example 35. This is a table for the special jackpot lottery. This is the table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending production. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance, following Figure 129. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance, following Figure 130. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the ending presentation. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating another display mode of the ending presentation. This is a table for producing the special chart 2 jackpot ending in Example 36. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance, following Figure 134. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the ending presentation. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating another display mode of the ending presentation. This is a table for producing the special chart 2 jackpot ending in Example 37. This is a table for the special chart 1 jackpot lottery in Example 38. This is the table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. This is a time chart showing the opening timing of the large prize opening opening/closing member and the V-area opening/closing member. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. A flowchart showing the V winning area opening and closing processing by the main control device. 39 shows a table for the special chart 1 jackpot lottery in Example 39, where (a) shows the table referenced in the normal game state, and (b) shows the table referenced in the low probability support game state. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery that is referenced in the low probability support game state. This is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery that is referenced in a high probability game state. This is a time chart showing the opening timing of the large prize opening opening/closing member and the V-area opening/closing member. 13 is a flowchart showing the opening/ending time determination process performed by the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the opening/ending time determination process following Figure 148. This is a flowchart showing the opening/ending time determination process following Figure 149. A figure explaining the display mode of the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. This is a figure explaining the display mode of the presentation that takes place during the jackpot round play and during value-added play, following Figure 151. A figure explaining another display mode of the effects performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. This figure explains a different display mode from Figure 153 for the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. This figure explains a display mode different from Figures 153 and 154 for the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. FIG. 40 is a front view of the game board of Example 40. This is a table for the special jackpot lottery. This is the table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. This is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern of Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win opening interval time setting process by the main control device. This is a time chart showing the opening timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member and the starting prize device for the second special chart 1. FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board of Example 41. This is a table for drawing lots for special drawing 1. This is a table for the lottery to select the winner of Special Chart 2. This is a table for setting a specific period for a small win that occurs during value-added play after winning Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win opening interval time setting process by the main control device. This is a time chart showing the opening timing of the large prize opening opening/closing member. A figure explaining the display mode of the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. A figure explaining another display mode of the effects performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. This is a table for setting a specific period for a small win that occurs during value-added play after winning special chart 2 in Example 42. A figure explaining the display mode of the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. This is a table for setting a specific period for a small win that occurs during value-added play after winning special chart 2 in Example 43. A figure explaining the display mode of the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play. A flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and presentation processing by the sub-control device of Example 44. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a long button press effect setting process performed by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a button long press effect display process performed by the display control device. 13 is a time chart showing the long press response performance when a long press operation is performed. A time chart showing the long press response performance when a long press operation is performed in a manner different from that of Figure 179. This is a time chart showing the long press response performance when a long press operation is performed in a manner different from that of Figures 179 and 180. A figure showing the display mode of the long press response effect when a long press operation is performed. A figure showing the display mode of the long press response effect when a long press operation different from that shown in Figure 182 is performed. A figure showing the display mode of the long press response effect when a long press operation different from that shown in Figures 182 and 183 is performed. A figure showing the display mode of the long press response effect when the long press operation of Example 45 is performed. A figure showing the display mode of the long press response effect when the long press operation of Example 46 is performed. A flowchart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device of Example 48. 13 is a flowchart showing a decision button input monitoring and presentation process by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a color change lottery process by the sub-control device. This is a flowchart showing the color change lottery processing following Figure 189. 13 is a flowchart showing a long press color change effect setting process performed by the CPU of the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a long press color change effect display process performed by a CPU of the display control device. 13 is a table for selecting a color change pattern. This is a color change lottery table. 11 is a graph showing a color change display for each color change pattern. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating display modes of color changes for each color change pattern. 13 is a graph showing color changes for each color change pattern when an operation other than a long press operation is performed. A figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of color change pattern A. A figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of color change pattern B. A figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of color change pattern C. A figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of color change pattern D. 13 is a graph showing color changes for each color change pattern when an operation different from the long press operation of Example 49 is performed. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating display modes of color changes for each color change pattern. A flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and presentation processing by the sub-control device of Example 50. 13 is a table for selecting a point-getting pattern. This is a table for determining long press points for each point-getting pattern. These are the results of the long press point lottery for each point-getting pattern. 13 is a time chart of a point get pattern A. 209 is another time chart of the point get pattern A shown in FIG. 208. 13 is a time chart of a point get pattern C. 211 is another time chart of the point get pattern C shown in FIG. 210. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a display form corresponding to FIG. 208 of point get pattern A. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a display form corresponding to FIG. 209 of point get pattern A. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a display form corresponding to FIG. 210 of the point get pattern C. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a display form corresponding to FIG. 211 of point get pattern B. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device of Example 54. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance execution management process performed by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a display/sub-counter consistency confirmation process performed by the sub-control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a button long press effect display process performed by the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a display count information error display process performed by the display control device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of a display count information error. A flowchart showing the display/sub-counter consistency confirmation processing by the sub-control device of Example 55. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern row variation display process performed by a display control device. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a display mode of a remaining change count information error.

This specification also discloses the following inventions relating to gaming machines and the problems that the inventions aim to solve:

<First task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a transition display effect such as a jackpot ending effect that displays a jackpot ending image on a display device when the gaming state transitions from a predetermined gaming state such as a jackpot round gaming state to the next gaming state (for example, JP2013-230281A (pages 28-29, Figs. 9 and 10)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, this transition display effect is included in a predetermined game state when this effect is started, but in conventional gaming machines, this transition display effect may be mistakenly recognized as being included in the next game state. In this case, the player may start an operation required for the next game state (for example, an operation to launch a game ball) even during the ending effect. In that case, various disadvantages may occur due to the mistaken recognition that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the next game state. For example, when a transition is made to a support game state after a big win round game state, if the game ball is launched before the transition to the support game state, the ball will be wasted without receiving the benefit of the support game state.
The invention relating to (A1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce disadvantages caused by mistaking the current point in time when the transition display performance is being executed for the next gaming state.
In order to achieve the above object, the invention related to (A1) below has the following configuration.

(A1) an execution means for executing a transition display effect (e.g., a jackpot ending effect) for displaying a predetermined image on a display means from a predetermined timing at the end of a predetermined game state (e.g., after the end of a final round) to a start timing of the next game state (e.g., a support game state) when the game state transitions from a predetermined game state (e.g., a jackpot round game state) to a next game state (e.g., a support game state);
and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival indication information (e.g., right-hit information 44k during ending, information 44l about approach of next game state, and ending countdown information 44v, which will be described later) suggesting that the timing for starting the next game state has not yet arrived while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A1) above, when the gaming state transitions from a predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the execution means executes a transition display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing at the end of the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. During the execution of this transition display effect, the notification means notifies the player of upcoming information that suggests to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not yet arrived. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the predetermined gaming state, in other words, that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is not yet the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by the mistaken belief that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the next gaming state.

(A2) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The predetermined gaming state is a first gaming state (e.g., a jackpot round gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
the next gaming state is a second gaming state (e.g., a high probability/support state, a low probability/support state) that is a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state and allows the player to acquire a more advantageous gaming value while operating the operating means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information indicating that a beneficial gaming state has not yet arrived (for example, right-hit information 44k during ending, information 44l about approaching next gaming state, and ending countdown information 44v, which will be described later) is included in the information indicating that the timing to start the second gaming state has not yet arrived during the execution of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A2), the next gaming state (second gaming state) to which a predetermined gaming state (first gaming state) is transitioned is a favorable gaming state different from the first gaming state, and includes a gaming state in which a player can acquire a different favorable gaming value while operating the operating means. Therefore, the player is likely to operate the operating means to acquire a different favorable gaming value based on the mistaken belief that the current time when the transition display performance is being executed is the second gaming state, but since this operation is performed during the first gaming state, the player cannot acquire this different favorable gaming value. However, during the execution of the transition display performance, information suggesting that the advantageous gaming state has not yet arrived, which suggests to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not arrived, is notified, so that the player is less likely to mistakenly believe that the current time when the transition display performance is being executed is the second gaming state. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the player from operating the operating means under the mistaken belief that the different favorable gaming value can be acquired, it is also possible to reduce the amount of wasted operations. This reduces the disadvantages that may arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed for the second gaming state.

(A3) In the gaming machine described in (A2),
the first game state is a round game state in which a round game is played a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed, based on a result of a lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entry into the ball entry means being a specific result;
The transition display effect is an effect at the end of a round game state in which a predetermined image is displayed on a display means from a predetermined timing after the specific ball entry means is closed in the final round of the round game state to the start timing of the next game state (the start timing of the support game state).

According to the gaming machine described in (A3), the first gaming state is a round gaming state in which a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round being the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the ball entry means being a specific result. The transition display effect is a round gaming state end effect that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing after the specific ball entry means is closed in the final round of the round gaming state, to the start timing of the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by mistaking the current time when the round gaming state end effect is being executed for the next gaming state.

(A4) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
a variable ball entry means which changes between an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the game and a closed state in which the game ball can hardly enter the game, and the entry of the ball serves as a trigger for a lottery by the lottery means;
and an actuation ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game, the actuation ball entry being a trigger for an actuation lottery for actuating the variable ball entry means;
The second game state is a support game state in which the result of the operation lottery based on the entry of the operation ball entry means is likely to be a specific result that activates the variable ball entry means,
The information indicating that the advantageous gaming state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing to start the support gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A4), the variable ball entry means is a ball entry means that changes between an open state where the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the entry of the ball triggers a lottery in the lottery means. The operating ball entry means is a ball entry means into which the game ball enters, and the entry of the ball triggers an operating lottery to activate the variable ball entry means. The second game state is a support game state that makes it easier for the result of the operating lottery based on the entry of the ball into the operating ball entry means to be a specific result that activates the variable ball entry means. The information suggesting that the advantageous game state has not yet arrived suggests to the player that the timing to start the support game state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display performance. As a result, the player is likely to accidentally launch the game ball during the execution of the transition display performance before the transition to the support game state, in order to have the game ball enter the operating ball entry means as soon as possible in the support game state. In this regard, by viewing the information suggesting that a favorable gaming state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from the mistaken belief that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is a support gaming state.

(A5) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
the second gaming state is a high probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the specific result is higher than in a normal gaming state;
The information indicating that the advantageous gaming state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing for starting the high probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A5) above, the second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result is higher than in the normal gaming state. The information suggesting that a favorable gaming state has not yet arrived suggests to the player that the timing to start the high-probability gaming state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed. This makes it possible to reduce disadvantages caused by the player mistakingly believing that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is a high-probability gaming state.

(A6) In the gaming machine described in (A4),
The second gaming state is a supported high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the activation lottery by the activation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in a normal gaming state, and the information suggesting that a favorable gaming state has not yet arrived suggests to the player that the timing to start the supported high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A6) above, the second gaming state is a specific high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the activation lottery by the activation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in the normal gaming state. The information suggesting that a favorable gaming state has not yet arrived suggests to the player that the timing to start the supported high-probability gaming state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed. This makes it possible to reduce disadvantages caused by the player mistakingly believing that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is a supported high-probability gaming state.

(A7) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The transition display performance is a performance in which a plurality of types of images are consecutively executed in a predetermined combination,
when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival indication information indicates to a player that the timing to start the next game state has not arrived until the multiple types of images have finished being executed in succession in the specified combination.

According to the gaming machine described in (A7), the transition display performance is a performance in which multiple types of images are executed in a predetermined combination in succession. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the specific result. Therefore, in the past, if a player mistakenly believed that the end timing of the display time of a certain image in the transition display performance was the end timing of a series of transition display performances, the player might mistakenly believe that the display time of the following image is transitioning to the next game state, which could result in a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next game state has not arrived until the time when the multiple types of images are executed in succession in the predetermined combination. As a result, during the transition display performance, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information suggests that the start timing of the next game state has not arrived until the time when the multiple types of images are executed in succession in the predetermined combination, thereby reducing the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage.

(A8) In the gaming machine described in (A7),
the transition display performance has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern differs depending on the type of the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A8) above, the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns that are made up of combinations of predetermined images from among a plurality of types of images, and the combination patterns differ depending on the type of specific gaming state, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player depending on the type of specific gaming state can be shown to the player as the transition display effect.

(A9) In the gaming machine according to (A8),
The transition display effect corresponding to the specific game state of a predetermined type has a predetermined combination pattern in which the plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the transition display performance corresponding to the specific game state of another type is formed by reducing one or more images from the multiple types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (A9) above, the transition display effects corresponding to a specific type of specific gaming state have a predetermined combination pattern in which multiple types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and the transition display effects corresponding to another type of specific gaming state have a different combination pattern formed by removing one or more of the multiple types of images included in this predetermined combination pattern. This reduces the processing burden on the gaming machine when determining the transition display effects corresponding to the type of specific gaming state. Also, since the combination pattern of the transition display effects is set for each type of specific gaming state, it becomes easier to provide the player with transition display effects associated with the type of specific gaming state.

(A10) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The transition display performance is a performance in which a plurality of types of images are consecutively executed in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the identification information variable display performance corresponding to the specific result,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival indication information indicates to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not arrived until the multiple types of images have finished being executed in succession in the specified combination.

According to the gaming machine described in (A10), the transition display effect is executed by successively executing a plurality of types of images in a predetermined combination. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the identification information variable display effect corresponding to the specific result. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by the same transition display effect being displayed when the specific result is the same as the specific result that generates a certain type of specific game state, but the type of identification information variable display effect leading to that specific result is different. Furthermore, during the transition display effect, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information suggests that the start timing of the next game state has not arrived until the timing at which the successive execution of a plurality of types of images in the predetermined combination ends, so that even if the same specific result is achieved but a different transition display effect is displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced.

(A11) In the gaming machine described in (A9),
the transition display performance has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern varies depending on the length of time during which the variable identification information display performance is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A11) above, the transition display performance has a plurality of combination patterns that are made up of combinations of predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the combination patterns differ depending on the length of time that the identification information variable display performance is performed, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player can be shown to the player as the transition display performance depending on the length of time of the identification information variable display performance.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to (A9),
the transition display performance has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern varies depending on the expectation of the specific result occurring in the identification information variation display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A12), the transition display performance has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the combination patterns differ according to the expectation of a specific result occurring in the identification information variable display performance, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player according to the expectation of a specific result occurring in the identification information variable display performance can be shown to the player as the transition display performance.

(A13) In the gaming machine described in (A9),
the transition display performance has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern differs depending on the number of times the identification information variable display performance is executed from the occurrence of the specific game state last time until the occurrence of the specific game state next.

According to the gaming machine described in (A13), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the combination patterns differ according to the number of times the identification information variable display effect is executed from the occurrence of the previous specific game state until the occurrence of the next specific game state, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player can be shown to the player as the transition display effect according to the number of times the identification information variable display effect is executed from the occurrence of the previous specific game state until the occurrence of the next specific game state.

(A14) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the combination pattern differs depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the ball entry means is a specific result, or whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the variable ball entry means is a specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (A14) above, the combination pattern differs between the combinations of the multiple types of images in the transition display performance depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the ball entry means is a specific result, or whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the variable ball entry means is a specific result. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable to the player as the transition display performance depending on the difference in the trigger of the lottery.

(A15) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival indication information indicates to a player that the timing for starting the next gaming state has not yet arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A15) above, the not-yet-arrival indication information indicates to the player that the timing for starting the next gaming state has not yet arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state, thereby reducing the disadvantages that arise as a result of the player mistakingly believing that the transition to the next gaming state has occurred immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state.

(A16) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival indication information indicates to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not yet arrived, simultaneously with the execution of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A16) above, the transition display effect is executed, and at the same time, a hint is given to the player that the timing to start the next gaming state has not yet arrived, so that it is possible to reduce disadvantages that arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the game is moving to the next gaming state at the same time as the transition display effect is executed.

(A17) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival indication information indicates to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the transition-time display effect while the transition-time display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine described in (A17) above indicates to the player that the timing to start the next gaming state has not yet arrived when the transition display effect is being executed and a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the transition display effect, thereby reducing the disadvantages that arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the transition to the next gaming state will occur after the predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the transition display effect, even though the transition display effect is being executed.

(A18) An execution means for executing a transition display effect (e.g., a jackpot ending effect, a player's character selection effect in a battle-type reach development effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state (e.g., after the end of the final round, when the player's character selection starts) to a predetermined timing of the next state (e.g., the start timing of the support game state, the start timing of the battle in a battle-type reach development effect) when the game state transitions from a predetermined state (e.g., a jackpot round game state, a player's character selection state in a battle-type reach development effect) to a next state (e.g., a support game state, a battle execution state in a battle-type reach development effect);
and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival indication information (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e, right hit during ending information 44k, next game state approach information 44l, ending countdown information 44v) suggesting to the player that the timing to start the next state has not arrived while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A18), when the gaming state transitions from a predetermined state (e.g., a jackpot round gaming state, a state in which one's own character can be selected in a battle-type reach development presentation) to the next state (e.g., a support gaming state, a battle execution state in a battle-type reach development presentation), the gaming machine is provided with an execution means for executing a transition display presentation (e.g., a jackpot ending presentation, a battle-type reach development presentation) that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state (e.g., after the end of the final round, when one's own character selection begins) to a predetermined timing of the next state (e.g., the start timing of the support gaming state, the start timing of the battle in a battle-type reach development presentation), and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e, right hit information during ending 44k, next gaming state approach information 44l, ending countdown information 44v) that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display presentation. This makes it easier for players to recognize that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is a predetermined state, in other words, that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is not yet the next state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by mistakenly believing that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the next state.

(A19) In the gaming machine according to (A18),
The predetermined state is a predetermined game state (e.g., a jackpot round game state), the next state is the next game state that occurs after the predetermined game state (e.g., a support game state), the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is the end of the predetermined game state (e.g., the timing after the end of the final round), and the predetermined timing of the next state is the start timing of the next game state (the start timing of a support game state), and the gaming machine is characterized in that it notifies the yet-to-arrive indication information (e.g., information 44e indicating approach to the end of a specific operation period, information 44k indicating right-hitting during ending, information 44l indicating approach to next game state, and information 44v indicating ending countdown.

The gaming machine described in (A19) above can realize the gaming machines described in (A1) to (A17).

(A20) In the gaming machine according to (A18),
The predetermined state is a predetermined display state (a state in which one's own character can be selected) in a predetermined display presentation (for example, a battle-type reach development presentation), the next state is a next display state (a battle execution state) that occurs after the predetermined display state in the predetermined display presentation, the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing in a predetermined display presentation (for example, the timing at which one's own character selection starts in a reach development presentation), and the predetermined timing of the next state is a predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the timing at which the battle starts in a battle-type reach development presentation), and the gaming machine is characterized in that it notifies the player of the upcoming information (for example, information 44e indicating the approach of the end of a specific operation period).

According to the gaming machine described in (A20), the predetermined state is a predetermined display state (a state in which one's own character can be selected) in a predetermined display presentation (for example, a battle-type reach development presentation), the next state is a next display state (a battle execution state) that occurs after the predetermined display state in the predetermined display presentation, the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing in the predetermined display presentation (for example, the timing at which one's own character starts to be selected in a reach development presentation), the predetermined timing of the next state is a predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the timing at which the battle starts in a battle-type reach development presentation), and not-yet-arrival suggestion information (for example, specific operation period end approach information 44e) is notified. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the transition display presentation is being executed is a predetermined display state in the predetermined display presentation, in other words, that the current time when the transition display presentation is being executed is not yet the next display state in the predetermined display presentation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by the mistaken belief that the current time when the transition display presentation is being executed is the next display state in the predetermined display presentation.

(A21) In the gaming machine according to (A20),
The transition display effect (for example, a player's character selection effect in a battle-type reach development effect) is a display effect in which a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, third player information PYC, and fourth player information) are continuously executed in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result (for example, in the case of a special jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period end approaching information 44e) suggests to the player that the timing to start the next display state has not arrived until the timing at which the multiple types of images have been continuously executed in the specified combination (e.g., until the display of the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD has been completed twice).

According to the gaming machine described in (A21), the transition display effect (for example, the player's character selection effect in a battle-type reach development effect) is a predetermined combination of a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, third player information PYC, and fourth player information PYD), and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result (for example, in the case of a special jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed), and the not-yet-arrival suggestion information (for example, the specific operation period end approach information 44e) suggests to the player that the start timing of the next display state has not arrived until the predetermined combination of a plurality of types of images has been displayed in succession (for example, in the case of a special jackpot, until the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD have been displayed twice). As a result, in the past, if a player mistakenly believed that the end of the display time of a certain image in a transition display performance was the end of a series of transition display performances, the player would mistakenly believe that the display time of the following image was transitioning to the next game state, which could result in a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, during the transition display performance, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information suggests that the start timing of the next game state has not arrived until the timing at which the multiple types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination ends, thereby reducing the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage.

<Second task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the player operates the operation means within a predetermined period during which the identification information is displayed and changes (for example, a period during which the patterns are rapidly changing), an image for a volume adjustment operation is displayed to allow the player to perform a setting operation such as adjusting the volume using the operation means, but when the operation means is operated outside of the predetermined period during which the identification information is displayed and changes (for example, a reach display period), the image for the volume adjustment operation is not displayed (for example, JP 2016-193546 A (page 43, FIG. 28)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, even though the specified period during the variable display of the identification information has passed, it is easy to mistakenly believe that this specified period has not passed, and the period for volume adjustment operation passes without the player being able to perform volume adjustment operation, meaning that the player cannot enjoy the variable display of the identification information at a comfortable volume.
The invention relating to (B1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disadvantages caused by the mistaken belief that the current point in time during the display of changing identification information is capable of displaying an image for a specific operation.

(B1) an execution means for, when a player operates an operation means (e.g., the decision button 81) within a predetermined period (e.g., a display period of the normal screen 43a, the demo screen 43b, or the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c), displaying an image for a specific operation (e.g., displaying the specific operation screen 44b having a volume adjustment display) for allowing at least a specific operation (a volume adjustment operation) to be performed using the operation means, and not displaying the image for the specific operation when the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period (e.g., a reach display period);
and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period information 44a and specific operation period end approaching information 44e, which will be described later) suggesting to the player that the end timing of the period in which the image for specific operation can be displayed has not arrived during the specified period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B1) above, when the player operates the operation means within a predetermined period, the execution means executes displaying an image for a specific operation for performing at least a specific operation using the operation means, and when the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period, the display of the image for a specific operation is not executed. The notification means notifies the player of upcoming indication information that suggests to the player that the end timing of the period during which the image for a specific operation can be displayed has not yet arrived during this predetermined period. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the end timing of the period during which the image for a specific operation can be displayed has not yet arrived at the present time, in other words, that the image for a specific operation can be displayed at the present time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by the mistaken belief that the image for a specific operation can be displayed at the present time.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine, characterized in that the upcoming indication information includes a specific operation possible period notification image that notifies that the specific operation image can be displayed during the period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B2) above, the upcoming hint information includes a specific operation possible period notification image that notifies the player that it is a period during which an image for a specific operation can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a specific period during which the identification information is displayed variably is a period during which a specific operation can be performed.

(B3) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upcoming indication information includes a remaining time indication image that indicates the remaining time of the display period of the specific operation image or a remaining time indication image that indicates the remaining time of the display period of the specific operation image.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3) above, the upcoming indication information includes a remaining time indication image that indicates the remaining time during which the image for a specific operation can be displayed, or a remaining time indication image that indicates the remaining time during which the image for a specific operation can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the remaining time during which a specific operation can be performed during a specified period during which the identification information is displayed variably.

(B4) A gaming machine characterized in that, when the image for a specific operation is displayed within the predetermined period, a non-notification period is provided thereafter during which the yet-to-arrive suggestion information is not notified.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4) above, if an image for a specific operation is displayed within a predetermined period, a non-notification period is set during which the image for a specific operation is not displayed. This reduces the occurrence of images for specific operations being displayed too frequently within a predetermined period (i.e., the player performing an operation to display an image for a specific operation), preventing the player from fully viewing the effects within the predetermined period.

(B5) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the yet-to-arrive indication information continues to be notified even if the image for a specific operation is displayed within the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B5) above, the upcoming information is still notified even if an image for a specific operation is displayed within the specified period. This makes it easy for the player to correct the content of the specific operation within the specified period, even if the player has performed a specific operation that causes an image for a specific operation to be displayed.

(B6) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the yet-to-arrive indication information is displayed even while the specific operation image is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B6) above, the upcoming indication information is displayed even while the specific operation image is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the end timing of the period when the specific operation image can be displayed even when he or she is looking at the display screen for the specific operation screen after seeing the upcoming indication information and operating the operating means.

(B7) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the image being displayed during the predetermined period is visible even while the image for the specific operation is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B7) above, the image being displayed during the specified period can be viewed even while the image for a specific operation is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the image being displayed during the specified period will be like even while the screen for a specific operation is being displayed.

(B8) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the upcoming suggestion information can be displayed during a high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the high-speed fluctuation period even during the identification information fluctuation display period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B8) above, the upcoming suggestion information can be displayed during the high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the high-speed fluctuation period even during the identification information fluctuation display period. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, the period after the high-speed fluctuation period ends is the period when the player wants to see/see the information (display of the result of the fluctuation display or reach performance), so inconvenience caused by the display of an image for a specific operation can be reduced.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to (B1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the forthcoming indication information can be displayed during a transition presentation from the specific game state to the next game state when the specific game state transitions to the next game state and the specific operation image cannot be displayed in the next game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (B9) above, when a specific gaming state transitions to a next gaming state and an image for a specific operation cannot be displayed in the next gaming state, the information indicating the upcoming event can be displayed during the transition presentation from the specific gaming state to the next gaming state. This can reduce the inconvenience caused by not being able to perform a specific operation after the specific gaming state transitions to the next gaming state.

<Third task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine in which a right-hand play is performed in a gaming state with a jackpot round gaming state and a subsequent support state (for example, JP 2013-255733 A (pages 2 to 3)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in this type of gaming machine, since it is necessary to inform the player that it is a right-hand play during the big win round game state or during the game state with the support state after that, the main display screen or LED informs the player that it is a right-hand play. This right-hand play notification is also made during the ending performance that is performed after the end of the final round in the big win round game state. Therefore, even though the big win round game has ended and the support state has not started during the ending performance period, the player is tempted by the right-hand play notification to play a right-hand play, resulting in a problem of wasting balls.
The invention related to (C1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disadvantages caused by mistakenly believing that the current time is the timing to execute a right-hit game.
The invention according to (C1) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(C1) a first notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by right-hand hitting in a predetermined game state;
A second notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in a next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state;
When the predetermined game state is transitioned to the next game state, an execution means is provided for executing a transition display effect for displaying a predetermined image on a display means from the end timing of a right-hand hit game in the predetermined game state to the start timing of the next game state,
The first notification means notifies a right-hit in a first manner during right-hit play in the specified gaming state, and notifies a right-hit in a second manner that has changed to a manner different from the first manner while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (C1), the first notification means issues a right-hit notification to notify the player that a game will be played by right-hitting in a predetermined gaming state. The second notification means issues a right-hit notification to notify the player that a game will be played by right-hitting in the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state. The execution means executes a transition display performance that displays a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of right-hit play in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state when transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state. The first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a first manner during right-hit play in the predetermined gaming state, and issues a right-hit notification in a second manner that has changed to a manner different from the first manner during the execution of the transition display performance. This makes it easier for the player to realize that the current time is not during right-hit play in a specified game state, but during the execution of a transition display effect, and that it is not the timing to execute right-hit play, because of the difference in notification mode between the right-hit notification that is given until the execution of the transition display effect in a specified game state and the right-hit notification while the transition display effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time during the execution of the transition display effect as the timing to execute right-hit play.

(C2) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
the predetermined game state is a round game state in which a round game is played a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result;
the next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the end of the round gaming state on the basis that the result of the lottery is the specific result;
The transition display performance is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round game state to the start timing of the advantageous game state when the round game state is transitioned to the advantageous game state,
The first notification means performs a right hit notification in the first mode during the round of play, and performs a right hit notification in the second mode while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (C2), the predetermined gaming state is a round gaming state in which a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round being the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result. The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the end of the round gaming state, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. The transition display performance is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round gaming state to the start timing of the advantageous gaming state, when transitioning from the round gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. The first notification means performs a right hit notification in the first mode during round gaming, and performs a right hit notification in the second mode during the execution of the transition display performance. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the current time is not during round gaming but during the execution of the transition display performance, and is not the time to execute a right hit game, due to the difference in notification mode between the right hit notification during round gaming and the right hit notification during the execution of the transition display performance. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed for the timing to execute a right-hand hit in a favorable gaming state.

(C3) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The second mode is a mode in which it is more difficult for a player to perform a right-hit operation than the first mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (C3), the second mode of the right-hit notification is a mode that makes it more difficult for the player to perform a right-hit operation than the first mode of the right-hit notification. This reduces the awareness that the timing to perform a right-hit game is low when the transition display performance is being executed, thereby reducing the disadvantage caused by the player mistaking the current time when the transition display performance is being executed for the timing to perform a right-hit game in an advantageous game state. Modes that make it difficult to perform a right-hit operation include, for example, an image that discourages a right-hit operation or an image with a less noticeable mode, as described below.

(C4) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The second mode is less noticeable to a player than the first mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (C4), the second aspect of the right hit notification is less noticeable to the player than the first aspect of the right hit notification. This reduces the awareness that the timing to play a right hit game is when the transition display effect is being executed, thereby reducing the disadvantage caused by the mistaken belief that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the timing to play a right hit game in an advantageous game state. An example of a less noticeable aspect is that if the right hit notification is an image, the size of the image is small or the color of the image is light. The image of the right hit notification may gradually become smaller or the color of the image may gradually become lighter.

(C5) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification means performs a right-hit notification in a third mode, suggesting a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (C5) above, the first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a third mode, which indicates a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the transition display presentation. This allows the right-hit notification to be quickly resumed at the timing when the transition display presentation transitions to the next game state.

(C6) a first notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by right-hand hitting in a predetermined game state;
A second notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in a next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state;
An execution means for executing a transition display effect for displaying a predetermined image on a display means from the end timing of a right-hand hit game in the predetermined game state to the start timing of the next game state when the predetermined game state is transitioned to the next game state;
and a next game state approaching information notifying means for notifying a next game state approaching information indicating that the start timing of the next game state is approaching during the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (C6), the next game state approaching information notification means notifies the next game state approaching information indicating that the start timing of the next game state is approaching during the transition display performance. This makes it possible to reduce disadvantages caused by mistaking the current time during the execution of the transition display performance for the execution timing of the right-hand hit game of the next game state.

(C7) a first notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by right-hand hitting in a predetermined game state;
A second notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in a next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state;
An execution means for executing a transition display effect for displaying a predetermined image on a display means from the end timing of a right-hand hit game in the predetermined game state to the start timing of the next game state when the predetermined game state is transitioned to the next game state;
and a next game operation start time approaching information notifying means for notifying information indicating that the timing for starting the right-hand hit operation for the next game state is approaching.

According to the gaming machine described in (C7), the next gaming operation start time approaching information notification means notifies the next gaming operation start time approaching information indicating that the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next gaming state.

(C8) In the gaming machine according to (C7),
The next game operation start time approaching information notifying means notifies the next game operation start time approaching information from the transition display performance to the next game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (C8) above, the next game operation start time approaching information notification means notifies the next game operation start time approaching information from the transition display performance to the next game state. This allows the player to be aware of the right hit operation for the next game state during the transition display performance period, and to quickly perform the right hit operation at the appropriate timing after entering the next game state.

(C9) In the gaming machine according to (C7),
The gaming machine, characterized in that the next game operation start time approaching information notifying means notifies the next game operation start time approaching information during the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (C9), the next game operation start time approaching information notification means notifies the next game operation start time approaching information during the transition display performance. This allows the player to perform a right-hit operation for the next game state at an appropriate timing during the transition display performance.

<4th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine in which the player can change the volume (for example, JP 2007-089649 A (pages 41-42)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, this type of gaming machine has the problem that the operation of changing the volume by the player is not very interesting.
The invention related to (D1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the player's operation to change the volume.
The invention according to (D1) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(D1) a display means capable of displaying a display effect relating to a game;
a sound output means for outputting a sound in accordance with the display performance;
an operation means operable by a player;
a volume change control means for changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on an operation on the operation means;
The volume change control means is capable of changing the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the display effect being displayed during a period when the volume can be changed.

The gaming machine described in (D1) above includes a display means capable of displaying a display effect, a sound output means for outputting sound in accordance with the display effect, an operation means operable by a player, and a volume change control means capable of changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on an operation on the operation means, and the volume change control means is capable of changing the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effect when changing the volume, thereby improving the interest of the player in changing the volume.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (D1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the display presentation is changed to a different presentation upon volume change, the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display presentation.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2) above, when the display presentation at the time of changing the volume is changed to a different display presentation, the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display presentation. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display presentation displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimal volume can be set at the time of the change operation.

(D3) In the gaming machine described in (D1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined associable display effect, and is a sound unrelated to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined unassociable display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (D3) above, the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a previously determined display effect that can be associated, and is a sound that is not related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a previously determined display effect that cannot be associated. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort or inconvenience to the player by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a previously determined display effect that cannot be associated.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3),
The display means is capable of displaying the display effects and volume information when the volume is changed.

According to the gaming machine described in (D4) above, the display means can display the display effects and the volume information when changing the volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the display effects and listening to the sounds related to the display effects, thereby improving the interest of the player in changing the volume.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4),
The game machine is characterized in that the image of the display effect displayed during a volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (D5) above, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation. This makes it easier to change the volume because the image of the display effect is reduced during the volume change operation. In addition, since the player can check the currently displayed display effect in the reduced image while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the display effect will end during the volume change operation.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4),
A gaming machine characterized in that the image of the display effect displayed during a volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in such a manner that at least a portion of it is visible.

According to the gaming machine described in (D6) above, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in such a manner that at least a portion of it is visible. This ensures a sufficient area for displaying the image for the volume change operation, making it easier to change the volume. In addition, since the player can check the display effect being displayed by the image superimposed behind while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the display effect will end during the volume change operation.

<5th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine that performs a display effect to display information visible to a player (for example, JP-A-2006-081588 (pages 44 to 46)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem in that the pattern in which information is displayed is fixed, making the display presentation less interesting.
The invention related to (E1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the display presentation.
The invention according to (E1) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(E1)
A display means capable of displaying display effects relating to games;
A display control means for controlling the display of the display performance on the display means in a predetermined pattern,
The predetermined pattern is
a first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time in a predetermined display manner;
and a second pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and in a display manner different from the predetermined display manner.

The gaming machine described in (E1) above is equipped with a display means capable of displaying display effects related to the game, and a display control means for controlling the display of the display effects on the display means in a predetermined pattern, the predetermined pattern being a first pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode, and a second pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. This makes it possible to execute display effects with a variety of variations in which the display time and display mode for displaying the predetermined display information are different. As a result, the interest of the display effects can be improved.

(E2) In the gaming machine described in (E1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined order while shortening the predetermined display time.

According to the gaming machine described in (E2), the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order. This makes it possible to increase the variety of display effects without compromising the uniformity of the content and appearance of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

(E3) In the gaming machine described in (E1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined information displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a composite state.

According to the gaming machine described in (E3) above, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined information displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a composite state. This makes it possible to increase the variety of display effects without compromising the uniformity of the content of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

(E4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4) above, the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the specified display information is shortened, and the resulting excess time can be used to increase the variety of the display effects.

(E5) In the gaming machine described in (E1) to (E4),
The predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a big win round.

According to the gaming machine described in (E5) above, the predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a jackpot round is played. This allows for an increased variety of ending presentations after a jackpot round is played.

(E6) In the gaming machine described in (E1) to (E4),
The predetermined display information is suggestive performance information displayed during a reach performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (E6) above, the suggestive performance information is displayed during reach performance. It is possible to increase the variety of suggestive performances displayed during reach performance.

<6th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a display effect that displays information that can be seen by a player (for example, JP 2006-081588 A (pages 44 to 46)). Even in this type of gaming machine, a display that involves the operation of an operating means may be performed during the display effect.
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in this type of gaming machine, a part of the display performance is replaced with a display that requires the operation of the operating means, which reduces the entertainment value of the display performance.
The invention relating to (F1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the display presentation.
The invention according to (F1) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(F1)
A display means for displaying display effects relating to games;
An operation means operable by a player in response to the display performance;
A display control means for controlling the display of the display performance on the display means,
The display control means
an operation request execution means for controlling display of an operation request image requesting a player to operate the operation means during the display performance;
and an operation display effect execution means for performing control to display an operation display effect using the operation means during the display effect in response to an operation by a player on the operation request image,
The predetermined pattern is
a first pattern in which, when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation in response to the operation request image, predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time in a predetermined display manner;
a second pattern in which, when the operation request image is displayed and a player performs an operation on the operation request image, the specified display information is displayed for a shorter display time than the first pattern and in a display manner different from the first pattern, and the operation display presentation is executed after the display of the specified display information has ended.

The gaming machine described in (F1) above is provided with a display means for displaying display effects related to a game, an operation means operable by a player in response to the display effects, and a display control means for controlling the display of the display effects on the display means, and the display control means is provided with an operation request execution means for controlling the display of an operation request image requesting the player to operate the operation means during the display effects, and an operation display effect execution means for controlling the display of an operation display effect using the operation means during the display effects triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image, and the predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not operate on the operation request image, the predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode, and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player operates on the operation request image, the predetermined display information is displayed for a shorter display time than the first pattern and in a display mode different from the first pattern, and the operation display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined display information has ended. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the display presentation by making the operation display presentation enjoyable without significantly compromising the interest of the display presentation when the operating means is effectively operated in response to the operation request image.

(F2) In the gaming machine described in (F1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for the predetermined display time,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined order while shortening the predetermined display time.

According to the gaming machine described in (F2), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order. This makes it possible to increase the variety of the operation display presentation without compromising the uniformity of the content and appearance of the display presentation between the first and second patterns.

(F3) In the gaming machine described in (F1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for the predetermined display time,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the specified display information that was displayed in the specified order is displayed in a composite state in which the specified display time is shortened by compositely displaying the specified display information.

According to the gaming machine described in (F3), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information that was displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened by being compositely displayed. This makes it possible to increase the variety of the operation display presentation without compromising the uniformity of the content of the display presentation between the first and second patterns.

(F4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4) above, the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the specified display information is shortened, and the resulting excess time can be used to increase the variety of the operation display effect.

(F5) In the gaming machine described in (F1) to (F4),
The predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a big win round.

According to the gaming machine described in (F5), the predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a big win round. This makes it possible to increase the variety of operation display presentations that are performed during the ending presentation after a big win round.

(F6) In the gaming machine described in (F1) to (F4),
The predetermined display information is suggestive performance information displayed during a reach performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (F6), the predetermined display information is suggestive performance information that is displayed during the reach performance. This makes it possible to increase the variety of operation display performances that are performed during the suggestive performances that are displayed during the reach performance.

<7th task>
Conventionally, as an example of this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that displays an ending image after the end of a jackpot round game (for example, JP 2017-205375 A (pages 89 to 90)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the ending presentation in this type of gaming machine.
The invention relating to (G1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the ending presentation.
The invention according to (G1) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(G1)
A display means capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition;
A display control means for controlling the display of the display performance on the display means,
The display control means
A specific performance execution means for controlling execution of a specific performance during the display performance;
and an ending performance execution means for controlling the display of an ending performance displaying predetermined information during an ending period from the end of a round game, which is executed a predetermined number of times based on the result of the lottery being a specific result, from when the variable ball entry means is set to an open state in which the game ball can be entered until when the variable ball entry means is set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot be entered, to when the round game is started, the ending period being from the end of a round game, to the start of a next game.
The ending performance execution means is capable of controlling to display, in the ending performance, information related to the specific performance executed during the display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (G1), the gaming machine includes a display means capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means. The display control means includes a specific effect execution means for controlling the execution of a specific effect during the display effect, and an ending effect execution means for controlling the display of an ending effect that displays specific information during the ending period from the end of a round game that is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time when the variable ball entry means is set to an open state where the game ball can enter and the time when the variable ball entry means is set to a closed state where the game ball cannot enter, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result, to the start of the next game. The ending effect execution means is capable of controlling the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect leading up to the ending effect are associated by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues into the ending effect through the specific effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

(G2) In the gaming machine described in (G1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific performance is information indicating components of the specific performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (G2), the information related to the special effect is information indicating the components of the special effect. This makes it easier to remember the displayed effect by displaying the components of the special effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G3) In the gaming machine described in (G1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the information relating to the specific performance is information indicating the effect that the specific performance had on the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (G3), the information related to the specific performance is information indicating the impact that the specific performance had on the player. This makes it possible to appeal to players who have been impacted by the specific performance, further increasing the interest of the ending performance.

(G4) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G4), the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a specific result. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the variable display effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

(G5) In the gaming machine described in (G4),
The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect for the identification information.

According to the gaming machine described in (G5), the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is the reach display effect of the identification information. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the reach display effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

(G6) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G3),
The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect that is displayed during the round of play.

According to the gaming machine described in (G6) above, the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect that is displayed during round play. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the round display effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

(G7) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G6),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of the specific result being achieved is higher than if the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G7) above, the specific performance is a specific suggestion performance that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific performance is not executed. This makes it easier for players who understand the meaning of the suggestion to remember the specific suggestion performance, thereby improving the interest of the ending performance.

(G8) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G6),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the possibility of the specific result being achieved is higher than if the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G8), the special effect is a special notification effect that notifies the player that the possibility of a special result is higher than if the special effect is not executed. This makes it easier for players who see, hear, or experience the notification to remember the special notification effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

(G9) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G8),
the display control means includes a selection request execution means for controlling display of a selection request image for requesting a player to make a predetermined selection during the display performance;
The specific performance is executed when a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image is made.

According to the gaming machine described in (G9), the display control means includes a selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a specific selection during the display performance, and the specific performance is executed when the specific selection requested by the selection request image is made. This makes it easier to remember the specific performance when the specific selection requested by the operation request image is made, thereby improving the interest of the ending performance.

(G10) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G9),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection request image is displayed during a variable display presentation of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G10), the selection request image is displayed during the variable display performance of the identification information that allows the player to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a specific result. This makes it easier for the player to leave a strong impression of the specific performance along with the variable display performance, and increases the interest of the ending performance.

(G11) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G9),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection request image is displayed during the ending presentation simultaneously with information related to the specific presentation or after displaying information related to the specific presentation.

According to the gaming machine described in (G11) above, the selection request image is displayed during the ending presentation, either simultaneously with the information related to the specific presentation or after the information related to the specific presentation is displayed. This allows the player to reconsider whether to make a specific selection while viewing the information related to the specific presentation or after viewing the information related to the specific presentation, thereby improving the interest of the ending presentation.

(G12) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G11),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance includes a performance that is executed when the specific performance can be executed as a result of a lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition.

According to the gaming machine described in (G12) above, the special effect may be executed when it is possible to execute the special effect as a trigger of a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition.

<8th task>
Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some of these types of gaming machines are equipped with decorative parts that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document: JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4-8, figures 3-8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.
The following inventions (H0), (H00), and (H1) have been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and have an object to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

(H0) an irradiation means for irradiating light;
and a control unit that controls the state of the light irradiated from the irradiation unit to a first state that allows the first light emitting region to emit light when the light irradiated from the irradiation unit causes the first light emitting region to emit light;
The control means, when the light irradiated from the irradiation means causes a second light-emitting area to emit light, controls the state of the light irradiated from the irradiation means to a second state capable of emitting light to the second light-emitting area.

According to the gaming machine described in (H0), whether the light irradiated from the irradiation means causes the first light-emitting area to emit light or the light irradiated from the irradiation means causes the second light-emitting area to emit light can be handled by controlling the form of the light irradiated from the irradiation means, so that the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(H00) A decorative member disposed on the front side of the game machine body;
and an illumination means for emitting light toward a back side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives the light irradiated from the irradiating means to a different position,
a control means for executing a first control in which, when the predetermined area is located at a first position, the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the predetermined area located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area, and, when the predetermined area is located at a second position, a second control in which the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the predetermined area located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area.

The gaming machine described in (H00) above is provided with a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and an illumination means for irradiating light toward the back side of the decorative member. The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives light irradiated from the illumination means to different positions, so that the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined area of the decorative member. When the predetermined area is located at a first position, the control means executes a first control for causing the predetermined area located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with the light irradiated from the illumination means, and when the predetermined area is located at a second position, the control means executes a second control for causing the predetermined area located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with the light irradiated from the illumination means. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the predetermined area of the decorative member.

(H1) a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for emitting light toward a back side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light irradiated from the irradiating means to a different position,
a control means for executing a first control in which, when the specified surface is located at a first position, the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the specified surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area, and, when the specified surface is located at a second position, a second control in which the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the specified surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area.

The gaming machine described in (H1) above is provided with a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and an illumination means for irradiating light toward the back side of the decorative member. The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives light irradiated from the illumination means to different positions, so that the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member. When the predetermined surface is located at a first position, the light irradiated from the illumination means executes a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area, and when the predetermined surface is located at a second position, the light irradiated from the illumination means executes a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the predetermined surface of the decorative member.

(H2) In the gaming machine described in (H1),
The decorative member is a replaceable decorative cover disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body,
The first light-emitting region is provided on the predetermined surface of the decorative cover,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second light-emitting area is provided on the specified surface of another decorative cover that is replaced with the decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H2) above, even if the decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body is replaced with a different decorative cover, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(H3) In the gaming machine according to (H1) or (H2),
The above-mentioned illumination means is a light-emitting substrate mounted on a front portion constituting the front surface of the gaming machine body.

According to the gaming machine described in (H3) above, even if the decorative cover arranged on the front part constituting the front surface of the gaming machine body is replaced with a different decorative cover, and the light-emitting substrate is provided on the front part side instead of the decorative cover side, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(H4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H3),
The first control includes at least one of setting an irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the irradiation means to the first light-emitting region as a first irradiation angle, setting an irradiation area of the light irradiated from the irradiation means to the first light-emitting region as a first irradiation area, and setting an irradiation distance between a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the first light-emitting region and a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the irradiation means as a first irradiation distance,
The second control includes at least one of setting a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, setting a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or setting a second irradiation distance different from the first irradiation distance.

According to the gaming machine described in (H4) above, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance.

(H5) In the gaming machine described in (H2) to (H4),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second light-emitting area changes depending on the shape of the separate decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H5) above, even if the shape of the separate decorative cover changes from the shape of the original decorative cover, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(H6) In the gaming machine described in (H2) to (H5),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative cover and the separate decorative cover are replaceable without the use of tools.

The gaming machine described in (H6) above also makes it easy to carry out replacement work to suitably change the light-emitting area.

(H7) In the gaming machine described in (H1) to (H6),
The irradiation means is capable of at least one of rotating, pivoting, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving in a front-back direction and a left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine described in (H7) above, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotating, turning, or tilting, whether the light irradiated from the irradiation means illuminates the first light-emitting area or the second light-emitting area. In addition, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending the structure that can be bent with a hinge or the like, bending the flexible board, or stretching and shrinking the structure that can be stretched and contracted with a sliding mechanism or the like. The irradiation distance may be easily adjusted by movement including in the forward/backward and left/right directions.

(H8) In the gaming machine described in (H1) to (H7),
a light transmitting means for transmitting the light irradiated from the irradiating means to the first light emitting region or the second light emitting region,
The gaming machine, wherein the light transmitting means is capable of at least any of the following movements: rotation, pivoting, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and movement including forward/backward and left/right directions.

According to the gaming machine described in (H8) above, not only when the illumination means is tiltable, but also when the light-transmitting means is tiltable, at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance can be easily adjusted, as in (H7).

(H9) In the gaming machine described in (H2),
The control means changes the illumination means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed during the process of replacing the decorative cover with the different decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H9), the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed in the process of replacing the decorative cover with a different decorative cover.

(H10) In the gaming machine described in (H9),
The control means comprises an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the different decorative cover, and an output means for changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force.

According to the gaming machine described in (H10), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the different decorative cover.

(H11) In the gaming machine according to (H10),
The gaming machine, wherein the input means is a means for pushing the irradiation means into the other decorative cover in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the other decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H11), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the other decorative cover presses the illumination means during the process of replacing the decorative cover with the other decorative cover.

(H12) In the gaming machine according to (H10) or (H11),
The output means changes the illumination means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by at least one of rotating, pivoting, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving the illumination means in a front-back and left-right direction based on an input force.

According to the gaming machine described in (H12), at least one of the irradiation angle, irradiation area, and irradiation distance can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input during the process of attaching a separate decorative cover to the front part in place of the decorative cover.

The configurations described in (H2) to (H12) above may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0) and (H00) above or (I1) and (J1) described below.

<9th task>
Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some of these types of gaming machines are equipped with decorative parts that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document: JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4-8, figures 3-8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.
The invention of (I1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

(I1) a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for illuminating the decorative member with light.
a driving means for moving a predetermined surface of the decorative member, which is illuminated by the light emitted from the illuminating means, between a first position and a second position;
a control means for executing a first control to cause the specified surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means when the specified surface is moved to the first position by the driving means, and for executing a second control to cause the specified surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means when the specified surface is moved to the second position by the driving means.

The gaming machine described in (I1) above includes a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and an illumination means for irradiating the decorative member with light. The gaming machine includes a drive means capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the illumination means, between a first position and a second position, so that the illuminated portion of the decorative member is not uniform, and the illuminated portion of the decorative member can be easily shifted. The gaming machine includes a control means for executing a first control for making the predetermined surface located at the first position illuminated as a first light-emitting region by the light irradiated from the illumination means when the predetermined surface is shifted to the first position by the drive means, and a control means for executing a second control for making the predetermined surface located at the second position illuminated as a second light-emitting region by the light irradiated from the illumination means when the predetermined surface is shifted to the second position by the drive means, so that the shifting of the illuminated portion is facilitated, and the illumination direction of the light is optimized in accordance with the shifting of the illuminated portion, thereby allowing the illuminated portion to be suitably changed.

(I2) In the gaming machine described in (I1),
The gaming machine body is a pachinko machine body,
The pachinko machine body includes:
An outer frame that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine body;
an inner frame supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame with one side of the outer frame as an opening/closing axis;
a front frame attached to the inner frame so as to be freely opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, with one side of the inner frame as an opening and closing axis;
The inner frame includes a resin base that forms an outer shape of the inner frame, and a game board having a game area in which game balls attached to the resin base flow down;
The game board is provided with a pattern display device having a display screen on which a display performance during a specific game state that occurs when the pattern variation display and the pattern variation display result in a specific result are displayed, and an opening that makes the display screen visible;
The front frame includes a transparent member frame portion surrounding a transparent member that allows the game area and the display screen to be viewed,
The decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I2) above, the decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, so that the light-emitting point on the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body can be easily shifted, and the light irradiation direction can be optimized according to the shift of the light-emitting point, thereby allowing the light-emitting area to be suitably changed.

(I3) In the gaming machine described in (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached to the transparent member frame portion of the front frame of the pachinko machine body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I3) above, the decorative member is attached to the visual component frame of the front frame of the pachinko machine body, which makes it easy to shift the light-emitting point in the visual component frame of the front frame of the pachinko machine body, and by optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shift of the light-emitting point in the visual component frame, the light-emitting area in the visual component frame can be suitably changed.

(I4) In the gaming machine described in (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached behind the transparent member of the front frame of the pachinko machine body and can be seen through the transparent member.

According to the gaming machine described in (I4), the decorative member is attached behind the transparent member of the front frame of the pachinko machine body and is visible through the transparent member, which makes it easy to shift the light-emitting point behind the transparent member of the pachinko machine body, and by optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shift of the light-emitting point behind the transparent member, the light-emitting area behind the transparent member can be suitably changed.

(I5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is disposed on any one of the upper, lower, left and right sides within the playing area of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine described in (I5), the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately in any position on the upper, lower, left, or right side of the playing area of the gaming board.

(I6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is disposed on any one of the upper, lower, left and right sides within the opening of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine described in (I6), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed in any position within the opening of the gaming board, whether it is the upper, lower, left, or right side.

(I7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I6),
The amusement machine, characterized in that the illumination means comprises a light-emitting substrate and a position change means for changing the position of the light-emitting substrate relative to the specified surface of the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine described in (I7), the illumination means includes a light-emitting substrate and a position change means for changing the position of the light-emitting substrate relative to the specified surface of the decorative member, so that the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position.

(I8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I7),
The first control includes at least one of setting an irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the irradiation means to the first light-emitting region as a first irradiation angle, setting an irradiation area of the light irradiated from the irradiation means to the first light-emitting region as a first irradiation area, and setting an irradiation distance between a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the first light-emitting region and a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the irradiation means as a first irradiation distance,
The second control includes at least one of setting a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, setting a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or setting a second irradiation distance different from the first irradiation distance.

According to the gaming machine described in (I8), the decorative member is configured to move, and the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance.

(I9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I8),
An operation means for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The decorative member operates in response to operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (I9) above, even when the decorative member moves in response to the operation of the operating means, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position.

(I10) In the gaming machine described in (I9),
The decorative member operates in response to operation of the operating means during standby display, excluding when a display performance is being displayed on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine described in (I10), when the pattern display device operates in response to the operation of the operating means during standby display, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position according to the operation.

(I11) In the gaming machine described in (I9),
The decorative member operates in response to operation of the operating means while a display effect is being displayed on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine described in (I11), even if the decorative member operates while a display effect is being displayed on the pattern display device, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position according to the operation.

(I12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I11),
The above-mentioned illumination means is capable of any of the following movements in response to the movement of the decorative member: rotating, pivoting, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving in a forward/backward and left/right direction.

(I13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I12),
The control means changes the illumination means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed during the process in which the specified surface of the decorative member transitions from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine described in (I13), the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed in the process in which the specified surface of the decorative member transitions from the first position to the second position.

(I14) In the gaming machine according to (I13),
The control means comprises an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of the specified surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position, and an output means for changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force.

According to the gaming machine described in (I14), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process in which the specified surface of the decorative member moves from the first position to the second position.

(I15) In the gaming machine according to (I14),
The input means is a means for applying a force to the irradiation means to cause it to perform at least one of the following movements during the process of the specified surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position: rotating, pivoting, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving in the forward/backward and left/right directions.

According to the gaming machine described in (I15), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force applied to the irradiation means in the process in which the specified surface of the decorative member moves from the first position to the second position.

(I16) In the gaming machine according to (I14) or (I15),
The output means changes the illumination means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by at least one of rotating, pivoting, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving the illumination means in a front-back and left-right direction based on the input force.

According to the gaming machine described in (I16), at least one of the irradiation angle, irradiation area, and irradiation distance can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input during the process in which a specific surface of the decorative member moves from a first position to a second position.

The configurations described in (I2) to (I16) above may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0), (H00), (H1) above or (J1) described below.

<Task 10>
Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some of these types of gaming machines are equipped with decorative parts that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document: JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4-8, figures 3-8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.
The invention of (J1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

(J1) a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for illuminating the decorative member with light.
The gaming machine is capable of moving a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light irradiated from the irradiating means between a first position and a second position,
A detection means capable of detecting a displacement of the predetermined surface of the decorative member;
a control means for executing a first control when it is detected that the specified surface has been moved to the first position, so that the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the specified surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area, and for executing a second control when the specified surface has been moved to the second position, so that the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the specified surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area.

The gaming machine described in (J1) above is equipped with a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and an illumination means for irradiating the decorative member with light. The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the illumination means, between a first position and a second position, so that the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member. The gaming machine is equipped with a detection means capable of detecting the shift in the predetermined surface of the decorative member, so that the shift in the predetermined surface of the decorative member can be recognized. The gaming machine is equipped with a control means that, when it is detected that the predetermined surface has shifted to a first position, executes a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means, and, when the predetermined surface has shifted to a second position, executes a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means. Therefore, by recognizing the shift of the predetermined surface of the decorative member and optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shift of the predetermined surface, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed.

"Detection means" includes both non-contact and contact types.

(J2) In the gaming machine described in (J1),
The control means comprises an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of the specified surface of the decorative member changing from the first position to the second position, a contact-type detection means capable of detecting that the specified surface of the decorative member has changed from the first position to the second position based on the input force, and an output means for changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed when it is detected that the specified surface has changed from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine described in (J2) above, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process in which a specific surface of the decorative member moves from a first position to a second position.

(J3) In the gaming machine according to (J2),
The input means is a means for receiving a force generated in the process of the specified surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position, and pressing the contact-type detection means.

According to the gaming machine described in (J3) above, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by accepting the force generated in the process of the specific surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position and utilizing the force that presses the contact-type detection means.

(J4) In the gaming machine described in (J1) to (J3),
The decorative member is a transparent resin member configured to make the control means difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine described in (J4) above, the decorative member is a resin member having transparency, but is configured so that the control means is difficult to see, so that the control means is not noticeable.

(J5) In the gaming machine described in (J1) to (J4),
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting unit mounting surface of the irradiation means.

In the gaming machine described in (J5) above, the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the irradiation means, so that the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface.

(J6) In the gaming machine described in (J5),
A gaming machine characterized in that the input means is provided on either the left or right side of the illumination means when the specified surface of the decorative member is moved upward or downward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J6) above, when the specified surface of the decorative member is shifted upward or downward as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input means is provided on either the left or right side of the illumination means, so that the light-emitting area that shifts upward and downward is less likely to be blocked, and the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(J7) In the gaming machine described in (J5),
A gaming machine characterized in that the input means is provided on either the upper or lower side of the illumination means when the specified surface of the decorative member is moved leftward or rightward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J7) above, when the specified surface of the decorative member is shifted to the left or right when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input means is provided on either the upper or lower side of the illumination means, so that the light-emitting area that shifts to the left and right is less likely to be blocked, and the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(J8) In the gaming machine described in (J5),
The gaming machine, wherein the control means is provided on the rear side of the irradiation means.

According to the gaming machine described in (J8), the control means is provided on the rear side of the irradiation means, so that the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately without blocking the light-emitting area being shifted, while ensuring a sufficient light-emitting area on the front side of the control means.

(J9) In the gaming machine according to (J8),
The input means is provided on the rear side of the irradiation means in a position where, when the specified surface of the decorative member is displaced in an upward or downward diagonal direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the force generated in the process of the specified surface displaced in an upward or downward diagonal direction can be input.

According to the gaming machine described in (J9), when the specified surface of the decorative member is shifted in an upward or downward diagonal direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input means is provided on the rear side of the irradiation means in a position where the force generated in the process of the specified surface shifting in an upward or downward diagonal direction can be input, so that the input means does not interfere with the shift of the decorative member and can change the light-emitting area appropriately without blocking the shifted light-emitting area.

The configurations described in (J2) to (J9) above may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0), (H00), (H1) or (I1) above.

<11th task>
A typical example of a conventional gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a lottery based on the detection of a gaming ball in a specific ball entry part results in a specific result, the gaming state may be shifted to an opening/closing gaming state in which the specific ball entry part is opened or closed (for example, see Patent Document: JP 2011-239836 A (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the game with conventional pachinko machines.
The invention of (K1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

(K1) a game board having a game area where game balls flow down;
A ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific game state advantageous to a player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on a display means as a result of a variable display of a pattern that can be visually recognized by a player;
a state transition means for transitioning to an open/close game state in which an open/close game is executed a predetermined number of times, the open/close game being executed once from an open state in which the specific ball entry means can enter a game ball to a closed state in which the specific ball entry means cannot easily enter a game ball, when the variable display of the patterns is stopped and displayed as a specific combination of patterns based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result;
and a specific period control means for changing a specific period that can be determined in advance in the open/close game state in accordance with the number of times the pattern changes at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (K1) above, the game situation, such as the number of times the pattern changes at the time a specific result is achieved, can be appropriately reflected in the open/close game state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(K2) In the gaming machine described in (K1),
The specific period is at least one of an opening period which notifies the start of the opening and closing game state, an interval period between each opening and closing game, and an ending period which notifies the end of the opening and closing game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (K2) above, the gaming situation can be appropriately reflected in the open/close gaming state by changing the specific period.

(K3) In the gaming machine according to (K1) or (K2),
The specific period control means changes the specific period in accordance with the number of fluctuations from the time when the immediately preceding specific result was reached to the time when the specific result is reached.

According to the gaming machine described in (K3) above, the number of games played from the time when the previous specific result was reached to the time when the specific result was reached can be appropriately reflected in the open/close gaming state.

(K4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (K1) to (K3),
The specific period control means changes the specific period in the opening and closing game state transitioned from a number-limit high probability game state in which a state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result than in the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of fluctuations occurs.

According to the gaming machine described in (K4) above, the open/close gaming state can be appropriately reflected depending on whether the state is an open/close gaming state transitioned from a normal gaming state or an open/close gaming state transitioned from a high probability gaming state with a limited number of plays.

(K5) In the gaming machine according to (K4),
The specific period control means changes the specific period to a first time that is shorter than the reference specific period in a first state in which the number of fluctuations that has been consumed among the predetermined number of fluctuations is less than the number of fluctuations remaining.

The gaming machine described in (K5) above can further enhance the role of the zone where open/close games occur consecutively, and can effectively reflect the game situation in the open/close game state.

(K6) In the gaming machine according to (K5),
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the first state, the variable display control means sets the variable display time to a first variable display time that is shorter than a reference variable display time.

The gaming machine described in (K6) above can shorten the time it takes for the variable display to occur, further enhancing the role of the zone where opening and closing games occur continuously.

(K7) In the gaming machine according to (K5) or (K6),
The specific period control means changes the specific period in the first state to a second period that is longer than at least the first period.

According to the gaming machine described in (K7) above, a balance can be achieved by including a longer specific period in the first state.

(K8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (K5) to (K7),
The specific period control means changes the specific period to the second time that is at least longer than the first time in a second state in which the number of variations that has been consumed out of the predetermined number of times is longer than the remaining number of variations.

According to the gaming machine described in (K8) above, a balance can be achieved by including a longer specific period in the second state (e.g., the so-called stuck state).

(K9) In the gaming machine according to (K8),
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display control means, in the second state, sets the variable display time to a second variable display time that is at least longer than the first variable display time.

The gaming machine described in (K9) above can reduce the likelihood of the player leaving the high probability gaming state in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state).

(K10) In the gaming machine according to (K8) or (K9),
The specific period control means changes the specific period in the second state to a period at least shorter than the second period.

The gaming machine described in (K10) above can reduce the sense of drag in the open/close gaming state in the second state (e.g., the so-called stuck state).

(K11) In the gaming machine according to (K10),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable display control means sets the variable display time in the second state to a variable display time that is at least shorter than the second variable display time.

According to the gaming machine described in (K11) above, a high-speed consumption zone with a short fluctuation time is provided even in the second state (for example, a so-called stuck state), making it possible to create a game that quickly shows the flow from the fluctuation there to the opening and closing game.

<Twelfth Assignment>
A typical example of a conventional gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a lottery based on the detection of a gaming ball in a specific ball entry part results in a specific result, the gaming state may be shifted to an opening/closing gaming state in which the specific ball entry part is opened or closed (for example, see Patent Document: JP 2011-239836 A (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the game with conventional pachinko machines.
The following invention (L00) has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

(L00) A counting means for counting numerical information relating to a game;
A display means capable of displaying the numerical information;
a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance based on the occurrence of a specific event;
A selection means for selecting a predetermined period during which the predetermined performance is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event,
The length of the predetermined period varies depending on the numerical information,
The longer the length of the predetermined period, the more advantageous information the predetermined presentation includes for a player.

According to the gaming machine described in (L00), the length of a predetermined presentation selected based on the occurrence of a specific event changes according to numerical information related to the game, so that the entertainment value of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the numerical information displayed on the display means.

(L01) In the gaming machine described in (L00),
The counting means counts numerical information relating to a game being executed and displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (L01) above, the interest of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the numerical information related to the game being executed and displayed on the display means.

(L02) In the gaming machine according to (L00) or (L01),
The counting means counts numerical information displayed on the display means which increases or decreases as a game is played.

According to the gaming machine described in (L02) above, the entertainment value of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the numerical information displayed on the display means, which increases or decreases as the game is played.

(L03) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L00) to (L02),
A game board having a game area where game balls flow down;
A ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means;
and a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific game state advantageous to a player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
The display means is capable of displaying the numerical information together with a predetermined display effect based on a lottery as to whether or not the specific gaming state will occur.

According to the gaming machine described in (L03), the entertainment value of the game can be improved by the predetermined display effect based on the lottery of whether or not a specific gaming state will occur, which is displayed on the display means, and the counting status of the numerical information.

(L04) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L00) to (L03),
The counting means counts number information related to a game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the specific game state will be generated,
The display means is capable of displaying the number information together with a predetermined display effect based on a lottery as to whether or not the specific game state will occur.

According to the gaming machine described in (L04), the entertainment value of the game can be improved by a predetermined display effect based on a lottery to determine whether or not a specific game state will occur, which is displayed on the display means, and by the counting status of the number of times information related to the game in which the lottery to determine whether or not a specific game state will occur is performed.

(L05) In the gaming machine according to (L03) or (L04),
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect when the specific event occurs based on a lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (L05) above, the interest of the game can be increased by the occurrence of a specific event based on a lottery by the lottery means.

(L06) In the gaming machine according to (L03) or (L04),
The selection means selects the predetermined period during which the predetermined presentation is to be performed based on the occurrence of the specific event based on a lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (L06) above, the interest of the game can be increased by selecting a specific period during which a specific performance is performed based on the occurrence of a specific event based on a lottery by the lottery means.

(L07) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L03) to (L06),
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of a variable display of a pattern that can be visually recognized by a player;
a state transition means for transitioning the state of the specific ball entry means to an open/close game state in which a predetermined number of open/close games are executed, the open/close game state being one time from an open state in which the specific ball entry means can enter a game ball to a closed state in which the specific ball entry means cannot enter a game ball, when the variable display of the patterns is stopped and displayed as a specific combination of patterns based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result indicating the occurrence of the specific event;
a specific period control means for changing a specific period including an opening period, which is a predetermined period during which the predetermined performance notifying the start of the opening/closing game state is performed, and an ending period, which is a predetermined period during which the predetermined performance notifying the end of the opening/closing game state is performed, in accordance with at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time the specific result is obtained when the result of the lottery is the specific result;
an image display control means for controlling display of a specific period corresponding image corresponding to the specific period;
The image display control means displays the advantageous information during the display of the specific period corresponding image in accordance with a display period of the specific period corresponding image.

According to the gaming machine described in (L07) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased according to the display time of the specific period corresponding image.

(L08) In the gaming machine according to (L07),
The image display control means displays an image corresponding to the specific period corresponding to an image with a longer display period the longer the specific period, and displays more advantageous information the longer the display period of the specific period corresponding image.

According to the gaming machine described in (L08) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased depending on the length of the display period of the specific period corresponding image.

(L09) In the gaming machine according to (L08),
The image display control means displays an opening period corresponding image having a longer display period the longer the opening period, and displays more advantageous information the longer the display period of the opening period corresponding image.

According to the gaming machine described in (L09) above, the interest of the opening and closing gaming state can be increased depending on the length of the display period of the opening period corresponding image.

(L10) In the gaming machine described in (L08),
The image display control means displays an ending period corresponding image having a longer display period the longer the ending period is, and displays the advantageous information that is more advantageous the longer the display period of the ending period corresponding image.

According to the gaming machine described in (L10), the interest of the opening and closing gaming state can be improved depending on the length of the display period of the ending period corresponding image.

(L11) In the gaming machine described in (L08),
The image display control means displays an opening/ending period corresponding image having a longer display period the longer the total time of the ending period and the ending period, and displays the advantageous information that is more advantageous the longer the display period of the opening/ending period corresponding image.

According to the gaming machine described in (L11) above, the interest of the opening and closing gaming state can be improved depending on the length of the display period of the opening and ending period corresponding image.

(L12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L11),
The image display control means is capable of displaying other information different from the advantageous information in the specific period corresponding image, and when the other information is displayed, the advantageous information is difficult to display.

According to the gaming machine described in (L12) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased depending on whether or not other information different from the advantageous information is displayed.

(L13) In the gaming machine described in (L12),
The image display control means of the gaming machine is characterized in that the longer the period during which the other information is displayed, the more difficult it is to display the advantageous information.

According to the gaming machine described in (L13) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased depending on the length of time during which different information is displayed.

(L14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L13),
The specific period control means changes the specific period according to the type of the symbol and the number of variations at the time when the specific result is achieved.

According to the gaming machine described in (L14) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased depending on the type of symbol and the number of times it changes at the time a specific result is achieved.

(L15) In the gaming machine described in (L14),
The specific period control means is capable of changing the specific period to a first period when the type of the pattern is a first type, and is capable of changing the specific period to a second period longer than the first period when the type of the pattern is a second type.

According to the gaming machine described in (L15) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be improved depending on the length of the specific period, which varies depending on the type of symbol and the number of times it changes at the time the specific result is reached.

(L16) In the gaming machine according to (L14) or (L15),
The specific period control means changes the specific period in the opening and closing game state transitioned from a number-limit high probability game state in which a state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result than in a normal game state continues until a predetermined number of fluctuations are reached.

The gaming machine described in (L16) above can increase the interest of the open/close gaming state when a specific result is achieved in a high probability gaming state with a limited number of times.

(L17) In the gaming machine described in (L16),
The specific period control means changes the specific period to a period longer than the first period when the number of variations that have been consumed out of the predetermined number of times is greater than the number of variations remaining, even if the type of the pattern is the first type.

According to the gaming machine described in (L17) above, when the number of fluctuations that has been consumed out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is greater than the number of fluctuations remaining, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased according to the number of fluctuations remaining.

(L18) In the gaming machine described in (L16),
The specific period control means changes the specific period to a period longer than the second period when the number of variations that have been consumed out of the predetermined number of times is greater than the number of variations remaining, even when the type of the pattern is the first type.

According to the gaming machine described in (L18), even if the type of the symbol is the first type and not the second type, if the number of fluctuations consumed out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is greater than the number of fluctuations remaining, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be improved according to the number of fluctuations remaining.

(L19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L18),
A setting means is provided for setting the likelihood that the result of the lottery will be the specific result in a stepwise manner using a plurality of set values;
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous information is information indicating the setting value.

According to the gaming machine described in (L19) above, the interest in the open/close gaming state can be increased depending on whether or not information indicating the set value is displayed.

(L20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L18),
The variable display control means, when the result of the lottery is the specific result, does not notify the player of whether or not the result of the lottery is a high probability game state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result than a normal game state in a next game state which occurs after the specific game state, from the time of the variable display until the time of displaying the previous specific result,
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous information is information indicating whether or not the high probability gaming state will be achieved in the next gaming state.

The gaming machine described in (L20) above can increase the interest of the open/close gaming state in terms of whether or not the next gaming state will be a high probability gaming state.

<Task 13>
A typical example of a conventional gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a lottery based on the detection of a gaming ball in a specific ball entry part results in a specific result, the gaming state may be shifted to an opening/closing gaming state in which the specific ball entry part is opened or closed (for example, see Patent Document: JP 2011-239836 A (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the game with conventional pachinko machines.
The following invention (M00) has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.
(M00) a counting means for counting numerical information relating to a game;
A display means capable of displaying the numerical information;
A performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance based on the occurrence of a specific event;
A selection means for selecting a predetermined period during which the predetermined performance is to be performed based on the occurrence of the specific event;
The predetermined period varies in length depending on the numerical information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the likelihood of an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player occurring varies depending on the length of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (M00) above, the likelihood of an advantageous gaming state occurring changes depending on the length of a predetermined presentation selected based on the occurrence of a specific event, so the entertainment value of the game can be improved depending on the counting status of the numerical information displayed on the display means.

(M01) In the gaming machine described in (M00),
The counting means counts numerical information relating to a game being executed and displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (M01) above, the interest of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the numerical information related to the game being executed and displayed on the display means.

(M02) In the gaming machine according to (M00) or (M01),
The counting means counts numerical information displayed on the display means which increases or decreases as a game is played.

According to the gaming machine described in (M02) above, the entertainment value of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the numerical information displayed on the display means, which increases or decreases as the game is played.

(M03) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M00) to (M02),
A game board having a game area where game balls flow down;
A ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not the specific game state occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means,
The counting means counts number information relating to a game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the specific game state will occur.

According to the gaming machine described in (M03), the interest of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the number of times information regarding the game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific game state will occur.

(M04) In the gaming machine described in (M03),
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect when the specific event occurs based on a lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (M04) above, the interest of the game can be increased by the occurrence of a specific event based on a lottery by the lottery means.

(M05) In the gaming machine according to (M03) or (M4),
The selection means selects the predetermined period during which the predetermined presentation is to be performed based on the occurrence of the specific event based on a lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (M05) above, the interest of the game can be increased by selecting a specific period during which a specific performance is performed based on the occurrence of a specific event based on a lottery by the lottery means.

(M06) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M03) to (M05),
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of a variable display of a pattern that can be visually recognized by a player;
a state transition means for transitioning, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result indicating the occurrence of the specific event, to an open/close game state in which an open/close game is executed a predetermined number of times, with the specific ball entry means executing an open/close game from an open state in which the specific ball entry means can enter a game ball to a closed state in which the specific ball entry means cannot easily enter a game ball as one time, as the specific game state, or for transitioning, when a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means during the open/close game state enters the specific area, to a high probability game state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result than in a normal game state after the open/close game state ends;
A specific period control means for changing a specific period that can be determined in advance in the open/close game state, which is the predetermined period during which the predetermined performance is performed, according to at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the specific result;
a specific ball entry opening/closing control means for controlling a specific ball entry opening/closing member for opening and closing the specific ball entry part of the specific ball entry means in the opening/closing game state to an open state and a closed state in a predetermined specific ball entry opening/closing pattern;
a specific area opening/closing control means for controlling a specific area opening/closing member for opening and closing the specific area in the opening/closing game state to an open state and a closed state in a predetermined specific area opening/closing pattern;
When the number of variations of the pattern at the time when the specific result is reached is the first number of variations, the opening timing of the specific ball entry section opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern tend to match, and a game ball that enters while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member is open tends to enter the specific area.
When the number of times the pattern changes at the time the specific result is reached is the second number of times, the opening timing of the specific ball entry section opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern are unlikely to match, and a game ball that enters while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member is open is unlikely to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (M06) above, the rate at which the ball lands in a specific area changes depending on the number of times the pattern changes at the time a specific result is reached, which can increase the interest of the open/close gaming state.

(M07) In the gaming machine according to (M06),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of times the pattern changes at the time the specific result is reached is a first number of times of change, the specific period is different from the specific period at the second number of times of change, making it easier for the opening timing of the specific ball entry section opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern to match, and making it easier for a gaming ball that enters while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member is open to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (M07) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be improved by simple control of varying the specific period that can be determined in advance in the open/close gaming state.

(M08) In the gaming machine according to (M06),
the specific period control means, when the result of the lottery is the specific result, varies a specific period including an opening period, which is the predetermined period during which the predetermined performance for notifying the start of the opening/closing game state is performed, and an interval time between each opening/closing game, according to at least the type of the symbol and the number of times the symbol changes at the time when the specific result is achieved;
A gaming machine characterized in that, at the first number of fluctuations, the specific period when the type of the pattern is a specific pattern and at the first number of fluctuations is different from the specific period when the type of the pattern is the specific pattern and at the second number of fluctuations, making it easier for the opening timing of the specific ball entry section opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern to match, and making it easier for a gaming ball that enters while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member is open to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (M08) above, even if the type of pattern at the time of the specific result is the same specific pattern, the rate at which the ball enters the specific area changes depending on the number of times it changes, so the interest of the open/close gaming state can be improved.

(M09) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M07) to (M08),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the number of times the pattern changes at the time the specific result is reached is a first number of times of change, the specific period becomes shorter than the specific period at the second number of times of change, making it easier for the opening timing of the specific ball entry section opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern to match, making it easier for a gaming ball that enters while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member is open to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (M09) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be improved by simple control of shortening a specific period that can be determined in advance in the open/close gaming state.

(M10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M09),
The specific period is an opening period that notifies the start of the opening/closing gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (M10) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be improved by simple control of shortening the opening period.

(M11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M09),
The specific period is an interval period between each opening and closing game.

According to the gaming machine described in (M11) above, it is possible to increase the interest of the open/close game state with simple control even during the open/close game state.

(M12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M10),
The first variation number is a number of times that the number of variations that has been consumed is greater than the number of variations that remains when the opening/closing game state transitions from a high probability game state in which a state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to become the specific result than the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of variations is reached, among the predetermined number of variations;
The second number of fluctuations is a number of fluctuations that has been consumed out of the predetermined number of fluctuations and is less than the remaining number of fluctuations when the open/close game state transitions from the number-limit high probability game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (M12) above, the interest of the opening and closing gaming state can be improved in that the rate of balls entering a specific area increases as the number of fluctuations consumed in the number-cut high probability gaming state increases (Maharu).

(M13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M10),
The first variation number is a number of times that the number of variations that has been consumed is less than the remaining number of variations when the opening/closing game state transitions from a number-limiting high probability game state in which a state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to become the specific result than the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of variations is reached, among the predetermined number of variations,
The second number of fluctuations is a number of times that has been consumed among the predetermined number of fluctuations and is greater than the remaining number of fluctuations when the open/close game state transitions from the number-limit high probability game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (M13) above, the interest in the open/close gaming state can be improved in that the fewer the number of fluctuations consumed in the number-limit high probability gaming state, the higher the rate of the ball entering the specific area.

<14th assignment>
A typical example of a conventional gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a lottery based on the detection of a gaming ball in a specific ball entry part results in a specific result, the gaming state may be shifted to an opening/closing gaming state in which the specific ball entry part is opened or closed (for example, see Patent Document: JP 2011-239836 A (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the game with conventional pachinko machines.
The invention of the following (N00) has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

(N00) an operation means for receiving a player's operation regarding a game;
A counting means for counting first number information based on an operation of the operating means in a first mode;
a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition based on operation in a second mode has been achieved in a state in which the operation has been changed to a second mode when the first number information counts a first predetermined number, and a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs when it is determined that the predetermined condition has been achieved.

According to the gaming machine described in (N00), after the first number information based on the operation in the first mode counts to a first predetermined number, it is changed to the operation in the second mode, and if a predetermined condition based on the operation in the second mode is achieved, a specific event that is advantageous to the player is obtained, thereby making the game more interesting.

(N01) In the gaming machine described in (N00),
The specific event is a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (N01) above, if a predetermined condition based on the operation in the second mode is achieved, a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of a favorable gaming state is given, thereby making the game more interesting.

(N02) In the gaming machine according to (N00) or (N01),
The counting means counts second number information based on the operation of the operating means in the second mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination means determines whether or not a predetermined condition based on operation in the second mode has been achieved before the second number information based on operation in the second mode counts a second predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (N02) above, the interest of the game can be increased in terms of whether or not a predetermined condition based on the operation in the second mode can be achieved before the second number information based on the operation in the second mode counts to a second predetermined number.

(N03) In the gaming machine described in (N02),
the first number information is number information counted based on an operation in the first mode that can be performed during the variably displayed identification information displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second number information is number information counted based on an operation in the second mode that can be performed during the varying display of the identification information displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine described in (N03) above can increase the interest of playing the game while the identification information is being displayed in a changing manner.

(N04) In the gaming machine described in (N02),
the first number information is number information displayed on the display means together with a varying display of the identification information displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second number information is number information displayed on the display means together with the varying display of the identification information displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine described in (N04) above can increase the interest of playing the game while the identification information is being displayed in a changing manner.

(N05) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N00) to (N04),
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for notifying that the first number information has reached the first predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (N05) above, the interest of the game can be increased by recognizing the intermediate progress that the first number information has reached the first predetermined number.

(N06) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N00) to (N05),
A game board having a game area where game balls launched based on the operations in the first mode and the second mode flow down;
A first ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game ball based on an operation in the first mode;
A second ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game ball based on the operation in the second mode;
A specific ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific area into which the game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter;
A first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first ball entry means;
A second detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second ball entry means;
a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific game state advantageous to a player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means and the second detection means;
a variable display control means for controlling the display means to display the result of the lottery by the lottery means as a result of a variable display of the identification information that can be visually recognized by a player;
a state transition means for transitioning to an open/close game state in which an open/close game is executed a predetermined number of times, with one open state being one in which the specific ball entry means can enter a game ball and the specific ball entry means can enter a closed state in which the specific ball entry means cannot enter a game ball, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, or for transitioning to a high probability game state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result than in a normal game state until a predetermined number of variations is reached after the open/close game state ends, when a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means during the open/close game state enters the specific area;
A specific period control means for changing a specific period that can be determined in advance in the open/close gaming state in accordance with at least the number of times that the identification information changes at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the specific result;
a specific ball entry opening/closing control means for controlling a specific ball entry opening/closing member for opening and closing the specific ball entry part of the specific ball entry means in the opening/closing game state to an open state and a closed state in a predetermined specific ball entry opening/closing pattern;
and a specific area opening/closing control means for operating a specific area opening/closing member that opens and closes the specific area in the opening/closing game state in a predetermined specific area opening/closing pattern between an open state and a closed state,
The counting means counts, as the predetermined number of fluctuations, a sum of a number of fluctuations of the identification information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first detection means as the first number information and a number of fluctuations of the identification information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second detection means as the second number information;
the determining means determines that the predetermined number of variations has been reached when, in the high probability gaming state, as the first condition, a first number of variations of the variable display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first detection means have been performed, and, as the second condition, a second number of variations of the variable display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means have been performed,
When the change in the display of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means at the time when the specified result is reached is within the first change count, the opening timing of the specific ball entry portion opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern are unlikely to match, and the game ball that entered while the specific ball entry portion opening/closing member was open is unlikely to enter the specific area,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the changing display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means at the time when the specific result is reached is within the second number of changes, the opening timing of the specific ball entry section opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening/closing pattern are more likely to match, making it easier for a gaming ball that enters while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member is open to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (N06) above, the rate at which the ball enters the specific area changes depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time a specific result is reached, which can increase the interest of the open/close gaming state.

(N07) In the gaming machine according to (N06),
The counting means starts counting until the changing display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means reaches the second number of changes when the changing display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first detection means does not reach the specified result within the first number of changes.

According to the gaming machine described in (N07) above, even if a specific result is not achieved within the first number of variations, the interest in the open/close gaming state can be increased until the second number of variations is reached.

(N08) In the gaming machine according to (N07),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a counting start notification means for notifying that counting will begin until the varying display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means reaches the second number of variations when the varying display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first detection means does not reach the specified result within the first number of variations.

According to the gaming machine described in (N08) above, even if the operation mode changes midway, the player can be made aware of this in advance, which can increase the interest of the open/close gaming state.

(N09) In the gaming machine according to either (N07) or (N08),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a ball entry possibility notification means for notifying that there is an increased possibility that a gaming ball that entered while the specific ball entry section opening/closing member was open will enter the specific area when the changing display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first detection means does not result in the specific result within the first number of changes.

According to the gaming machine described in (N09), even if the specific result is not achieved within the first number of fluctuations, the player is made aware that there is an increased possibility that the ball will land in the specific area if the specific result is achieved within the second number of fluctuations, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the opening and closing gaming state.

(N10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) to (N09),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a launch notification means for notifying the player to launch a gaming ball toward the second ball entry means when the changing display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first detection means does not result in the specified result within the first number of changes.

According to the gaming machine described in (N10) above, even if the launch destination changes midway, the launch operation can be smoothly changed, improving the interest of the opening and closing game state.

(N11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) to (N10),
The first ball entry means is provided in an area of the game area where a game ball shot by a left hit can enter,
The second ball entry means is provided in an area of the game area where a game ball shot with a right hit can enter.

The gaming machine described in (N11) above allows the firing operation to be changed so that the entire gaming area can be used, thereby increasing the interest of the open/close gaming state.

(N12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) to (N11),
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming value awarded when the varying display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first detection means results in a specific result is different from a gaming value awarded when the varying display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means results in a specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (N12) above, the interest of the open/close gaming state can be increased by creating a difference in the gaming value obtained depending on whether or not a specific result is obtained within the first number of fluctuations.

<Task 15>
A typical example of a conventional gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a lottery based on the detection of a gaming ball in a specific ball entry part results in a specific result, the gaming state may be shifted to an opening/closing gaming state in which the specific ball entry part is opened or closed (for example, see Patent Document: JP 2011-239836 A (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, with conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the game.
The following invention (O00) has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

(O00) A game board having a game area where game balls flow down;
A variable ball entry means has a predetermined opening and closing member and is variable between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the game ball and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the game ball;
A counting means for counting numerical information relating to a game;
and a state change means for changing a state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means to a state in which it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means based on the numerical information reaching a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (O00), the ease of scoring into the variable scoring means changes depending on the counting status of the numerical information related to the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(O01) In the gaming machine described in (O00),
The state change means maintains a state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means until the number information reaches the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (O01) above, the ease of scoring into the variable scoring means changes according to the counting situation when the numerical information related to the game reaches a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(O02) In the gaming machine according to (O00) or (O01),
The state change means maintains a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the variable ball entry means for a predetermined period of time after the number information reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (O02) above, when the numerical information related to the game reaches a predetermined number, it becomes easier to score into the variable scoring means for a predetermined period of time, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(O03) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O02),
The counting means counts numerical information relating to a game after an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player has ended.

The gaming machine described in (O03) above can increase the interest of the player in the game after the end of a favorable gaming state.

(O04) In the gaming machine according to (O03),
The counting means counts numerical information relating to gaming during a specific period after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

The gaming machine described in (O04) above can increase the interest of the player in the game during a specific period following the end of a specific game state that is advantageous to the player.

(O05) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O02) to (O04),
The state change means maintains a state in which it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means for the specified period, and then returns the state to a state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means.

The gaming machine described in (O05) above can increase the interest of the game during a predetermined period until the variable ball entry means returns to a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means.

(O06) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O05),
A ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A detection unit that detects a game ball that has entered the ball entry section;
A lottery unit that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a specific game state advantageous to a player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the detection unit,
The counting means counts number information relating to a game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the specific game state will occur.

According to the gaming machine described in (O06), the interest of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the number information related to the game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific game state will occur.

(O07) In the gaming machine according to (O06),
A ball entry means as the ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An opening and closing ball entry means as the ball entry section that opens and closes between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter;
A first specific ball entry means through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A second specific ball entry means as the variable ball entry means by which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A first detection means as the detection unit for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means;
A second detection means as the detection unit for detecting a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
a lottery unit serving as the lottery unit that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a specific game state advantageous to a player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection unit and the second detection unit;
a variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on a display means as a result of a variable display of identification information that can be visually recognized by a player;
a first state transition means for transitioning to a first open/close game state in which an open/close game is executed a first number of times, with one time being an open state in which the first specific ball entry means can enter a game ball and a closed state in which the first specific ball entry means cannot enter a game ball, when the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means is a first specific result (e.g. a jackpot), and transitioning to a high probability game state after the end of the first open/close game state to at least one of a support state in which the lottery is more likely to become the first specific result than in a normal game state, the open/close ball entry means is more likely to become an open state more frequently than in the normal game state, and the open/close ball entry means is in the open state for a longer period of time than in the normal game state, or a non-support state in which the open/close ball entry means is not in the support state;
and a second state transition means for transitioning to a second open/close game state in which an open/close game is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times, the open/close game being executed once from an open state in which the second specific ball entry means can enter a game ball to a closed state in which the second specific ball entry means cannot easily enter a game ball, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in a second specific combination (e.g., a small win) based on the result of a lottery based on the detection of a game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means being a second specific result (e.g., a small win),
The state changing means is
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting means is within the period of the first number of fluctuations, the game ball is made difficult to enter the ball while the second specific ball entry means is in an open state;
When the number of times the pattern changes at the time when the second specific result is reached as counted by the counting means is within a period of a second number of times of change, the game machine is made in a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the game machine while the second specific ball entry means is in an open state.

According to the gaming machine described in (O07) above, the ease of a ball entering the second specific ball entry means changes depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time the lottery result becomes the second specific result, so the interest of the second opening and closing game state can be improved.

(O08) In the gaming machine according to (O07),
a specific period control means for changing a specific period that can be determined in advance in the second opening/closing game state in accordance with at least the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the result of the lottery becomes a second specific result,
The state changing means is
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting means is within the period of the first number of fluctuations, the specific period is set to the first specific period, thereby making it difficult for game balls to enter the ball while the second specific ball entry means is in an open state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the second specific result is reached as counted by the counting means is within a period of a second number of changes, the specific period is set to a second specific period that is longer than the first specific period, thereby making it easier for a gaming ball to enter the ball while the second specific ball entry means is in an open state.

According to the gaming machine described in (O08) above, the ease of a ball entering the second specific ball entry means changes depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time the lottery result becomes the second specific result, so the interest of the second opening and closing game state can be improved.

(O09) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O08),
The state change function of this gaming machine is characterized in that, when a first specific result occurs, the state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means is maintained until the numerical information becomes a predetermined number, and, when a second specific result occurs, the state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means is maintained even after the numerical information becomes the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (O09), the ease of scoring into the variable scoring means changes depending on the type of specific result and the counting situation triggered by the numerical information relating to the game reaching a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game.

For example, when a specific result occurs during a value-added game state, the player is not explicitly informed of whether it is the first or second specific result, and a common display presentation is provided until the numerical information regarding the game during the value-added game state reaches a predetermined number, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation as to whether the variable ball entry means will change to a state where it is easier for the game ball to enter it.

(O10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O02) to (O08),
The state change function of this gaming machine is characterized in that after maintaining a state in which it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the variable entry means for the specified period, if a third specific result occurs as the specific result, the state change function returns the variable entry means to a state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable entry means.

The gaming machine described in (O10) above can increase the interest of the game during a predetermined period until the variable ball entry means returns to a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means.

(O11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O10),
The state change function of this gaming machine is characterized in that it switches between a state in which it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means and a state in which it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means, depending on numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (O11), the gaming value based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means can be assigned in a balanced manner according to the numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game in the value-added gaming state.

(O12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O10),
The state change function of this gaming machine is characterized in that the state in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means is gradually switched depending on numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (O12), the gaming value awarded based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means can be increased or decreased in stages according to the numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game in the value-added gaming state.

<16th task>
Conventionally, as an example of this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific operation corresponding presentation during a predetermined display presentation when the operation of an operation means such as an operation button or an operation lever is performed in a specific manner within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (for example, JP 2015-112124 A (pages 39-40, FIG. 20)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, the problem is that it is not possible to suitably improve the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation.
The inventions relating to (P1-0), (P2-0), and (P4-0) below have been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can optimally increase the interest of specific operation-responsive presentations.
The inventions relating to the following (P1-0), (P2-0), and (P4-0) have the following configurations in order to achieve the above object.

(P1-0) an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game;
A game machine including: a performance execution means for causing a display means to execute a predetermined display performance based on a result of the determination by the main control means;
The performance execution means includes:
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, a specific operation corresponding performance can be executed during the predetermined display performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if it is determined that no operation in the specific mode has been performed on the operating means within a period during which the presence or absence of operation in the specific mode is determined, execution of the specific operation corresponding presentation is continued.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-0) above, even if the operation of the operation means in a specific mode is interrupted after the specific operation-responsive presentation has started, if the operation in the specific mode is resumed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode is determined, the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation will continue, so there is no need to restart the operation of the operation means from scratch and wait for the specific operation-responsive presentation to return to the state it was in before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be suitably improved.

(P1-1) In the gaming machine described in (P1-0),
The performance execution means includes:
an operation detection means for detecting an operation of the operation means by a player at a predetermined interval during the valid period;
When the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, a determination is made as to whether or not to continue the execution of the specific operation corresponding presentation based on whether or not the operation of the operating means by the player is detected at a determination timing set at each specific interval longer than the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response presentation has started, if the player resumes operating the operation means by the judgment timing, the execution of the specific operation response presentation will continue, so there is no need to restart the operation of the operation means from scratch and wait for the specific operation response presentation to return to the state it was in before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved.

(P1-2) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means continues to execute the specific operation-responsive effect even after the judgment timing based on detection of operation of the operation means by the player at the judgment timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-2) above, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response presentation has started, if the player resumes operating the operation means by the judgment timing, the specific operation response presentation will continue to be executed after this judgment timing, so there is no need to restart the operation of the operation means from scratch and wait for the specific operation response presentation to return to the state it was in before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved.

(P1-3) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1) or (P1-2),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means ends the specific operation-responsive effect at the judgment timing based on the fact that no operation of the operation means by the player is detected at the judgment timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-3) above, after the specific operation response presentation has started, if the detection of the player's operation ceases and the player does not resume operating the operation means by the judgment timing, the specific operation response presentation will end at this judgment timing, making it easier to reduce neglect of operations. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be suitably improved.

(P1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P1-1) to (P1-3),
The effect execution means continues to execute the specific operation corresponding effect until the judgment timing arrives when the operation means is operated in a specific manner and no operation is detected other than at the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-4) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response presentation has started, the specific operation response presentation can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved.

(P1-5) In the gaming machine described in (P1-4),
The effect execution means continues executing the specific operation corresponding effect until the judgment timing arrives when, after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, no operation is detected other than at the judgment timing, and further continues executing the specific operation corresponding effect based on the detection of operation of the operating means by the player at the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-5) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response effect has started, the player can enjoy the specific operation response effect until the judgment timing arrives, and if the player resumes the operation, the player can further enjoy the specific operation response effect. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response effect can be improved in an optimal manner.

(P1-6) In the gaming machine described in (P1-4) or (P1-5),
The effect execution means continues executing the specific operation-responsive effect until the judgment timing arrives when, after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, no operation is detected at any time other than the judgment timing, and terminates the execution of the specific operation-responsive effect at the judgment timing based on the fact that no operation of the operating means by the player is detected at the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-6) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response presentation has started, the specific operation response presentation can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives, but if the operation is neglected, the specific operation response presentation can no longer be enjoyed. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved.

(P1-7) In the gaming machine described in (P1-4),
The effect execution means continues executing the specific operation corresponding effect until the judgment timing arrives when, after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, no operation is detected other than at the judgment timing, and at the judgment timing, a lottery is conducted based on the detection of operation of the operating means by the player, and if the result of the lottery is a winning result, further continues executing the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-7) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response effect has started, the player can enjoy the specific operation response effect until the judgment timing arrives, and if the player resumes the operation and wins the lottery, the player can further enjoy the specific operation response effect. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response effect can be improved in an optimal manner.

(P1-8) In the gaming machine described in (P1-7),
The effect execution means continues executing the specific operation corresponding effect until the judgment timing arrives when, after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, no operation is detected other than at the judgment timing, and at the judgment timing, a lottery is conducted based on the detection of operation of the operating means by the player, and if the result of the lottery is a loss, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is terminated.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-8) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response effect has started, the player can enjoy the specific operation response effect until the judgment timing arrives. If the player resumes the operation and wins the lottery, he or she can continue to enjoy the specific operation response effect, but if the player loses, he or she cannot enjoy the specific operation response effect any more. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response effect can be appropriately improved.

(P2-0) an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game;
A game machine including: a performance execution means for causing a display means to execute a predetermined display performance based on a result of the determination by the main control means;
The performance execution means includes:
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, a specific operation corresponding performance is executed during the predetermined display performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if an operation other than the operation in the specific mode is performed within a period during which the presence or absence of an operation in the specific mode of the operating means is determined, execution of the specific operation corresponding presentation is continued.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-0) above, even if an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed after the specific operation corresponding effect has started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continues, so there is no need to start over from scratch with the operation of the operating means just because an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. As a result, the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be improved in an optimal manner.

(P2-0A) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0),
The performance execution means includes:
showing the results of the different operations during execution of one of the predetermined display effects;
A gaming machine characterized in that the result of the different operation shown during the execution of one of the predetermined display effects is also shown during the execution of the next predetermined display effect or during the execution of a subsequent predetermined display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-0A) above, the results of different operations performed during the execution of one specific display effect are displayed during the execution of the specific display effect as well as during the execution of subsequent specific display effects. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the interest of the specific operation-responsive effects through different operations.

(P2-0B) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0),
The performance execution means includes:
The display mode of the specific operation corresponding performance is changed according to a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the judgment,
The specific operation corresponding presentation is characterized in that, when the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner and then an operation different from the specific manner is performed, the difference in the display manner of the specific operation corresponding presentation suggests the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the judgment.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-0B), the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved by the difference in the display mode of the specific operation response presentation according to the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the judgment. In addition, during the specific operation response presentation, an operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed, and a suggestion of the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the judgment is given, which is an interesting feature. As a result, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved.

(P2-1) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0B),
The effect execution means changes the display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect depending on a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the judgment.

The gaming machine described in (P2-1) above can effectively improve the interest of specific operation-responsive effects by changing the display mode of the specific operation-responsive effects according to the predetermined conditions obtained as a result of the judgment.

(P2-2) In the gaming machine described in (P2-1),
The specific operation corresponding presentation is characterized in that, when the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner and then an operation different from the specific manner is performed, the difference in the display manner of the specific operation corresponding presentation suggests the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the judgment.

The gaming machine described in (P2-2) above provides an interesting element in that during the specific operation-responsive presentation, a suggestion of a predetermined condition is given as a result of a judgment made by performing an operation different from the specific mode of operation.

(P2-3) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0) or (P2-1),
The specific operation-responsive presentation is characterized in that the display mode differs when no operation of the operation means by the player is detected at the judgment timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-3) above, when the operation of the operating means is released after the specific operation response presentation has started, the difference in the display state after the release can suitably increase the interest of the specific operation response presentation.

(P2-4) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0) or (P2-3),
The specific operation responsive presentation is characterized in that the way in which the display mode changes differs when, after the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner, no operation of the operation means by the player is detected at the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-4) above, when the operation of the operating means is released after the specific operation response presentation has started, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved by the difference in the way in which the display state changes after the release.

(P2-5) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0) or (P2-3),
The specific operation-responsive presentation is characterized in that, after the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner, the manner in which the display mode changes differs when there is no detection of operation of the operation means by the player at the judgment timing, and when there is detection of operation of the operation means by the player after the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-5) above, after the specific operation response presentation has started, the operation of the operating means is released, but when the operation is resumed, the way in which the display mode changes can suitably increase the interest of the specific operation response presentation.

(P2-6) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0) or (P2-3),
The specific operation-responsive presentation is a gaming machine characterized in that, after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, there is no detection of operation of the operating means by the player at the judgment timing, and the execution or non-execution of a specific notification differs depending on whether or not there is detection of operation of the operating means by the player after the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-6) above, after the specific operation-responsive presentation has started, the operation of the operating means is released, but if the operation is then resumed, the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be appropriately improved depending on whether or not a specific notification is executed.

(P2-7) In the gaming machine described in (P2-6),
The specific notification is a notification of whether or not the specific operation corresponding presentation will resume.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-7) above, after the specific operation response presentation has started, the operation of the operating means is released, but if the operation is then resumed, the interest of the specific operation response presentation can be appropriately improved by notifying the player whether the specific operation response presentation has resumed or not.

(P2-8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (P2-0) or (P2-1) to (P2-7),
The predetermined condition is an expectation that the result of the judgment will be a specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-8) above, the difference in the display mode of the specific operation response effect indicates the likelihood that the judgment result will be a specific result, so that the interest of the specific operation response effect can be suitably increased.

(P2-9) In the gaming machine described in (P2-8),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined condition is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific operation corresponding presentation determined according to the expectation level.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-9) above, the difference in the change pattern of the display mode of the specific operation response effect suggests the expectation that the judgment result will be a specific result, so that the interest of the specific operation response effect can be suitably improved.

(P3-1) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1),
The effect execution means executes a predetermined effect for a predetermined period of time without terminating the specific operation corresponding effect when no operation of the operation means is detected during execution of the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P3-1) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation means is operated in a specific manner, the specific operation-responsive presentation is not terminated and the specific presentation is executed for a specified period of time, so that the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be improved more effectively than if the presentation were terminated when the detection of the operation was interrupted.

(P3-2) In the gaming machine described in (P3-1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that continues the specific operation corresponding effect for the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (P3-2) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation means is operated in a specific manner, the specific operation-responsive presentation continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the presentation has a unity before and after the operation detection is interrupted, and the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be improved more effectively than if the presentation were to end when the operation detection is interrupted.

(P3-3) In the gaming machine described in (P3-2),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that continues to change the display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect for the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (P3-3) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation means is operated in a specific manner, the change in the display mode continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, since there is continuity in the change in the display mode before and after the detection of the operation is interrupted, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation compared to a case in which the presentation is ended when the detection of the operation is interrupted.

(P4-0) an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game;
A game machine including: a performance execution means for causing a display means to execute a predetermined display performance based on a result of the determination by the main control means;
The performance execution means includes:
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, a specific operation corresponding performance is executed during the predetermined display performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when an operation different from the specific operation mode is performed after the operation means is operated in a specific mode, the result of the judgment can be suggested by the mode of another mode different from the specific operation corresponding mode executed during the specific operation corresponding mode and the mode of the specific operation corresponding mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The gaming machine described in (P4-0) creates an interesting effect in that, during a specific operation-responsive presentation, an operation different from the specific mode of operation is performed to give a hint as to the result of the judgment based on the mode of another presentation different from the specific operation-responsive presentation and the mode of the specific operation-responsive presentation. As a result, the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be improved in an optimal manner.

(P4-1) In the gaming machine described in (P3-1),
The predetermined effect is a different effect from the specific operation corresponding effect that is executed for the predetermined period of time.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-1) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation means is operated in a specific manner, a presentation different from the specific operation-responsive presentation is executed for a predetermined period of time, so that the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be improved by the presentation effect different from the specific operation-responsive presentation, compared to the case where the presentation is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted.

(P4-2) In the gaming machine described in (4-0) or (P4-1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the separate effect is an effect that is executed for the specified period of time and that suggests or notifies the player that there has been no more operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-2) above, if the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner and the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation, a different presentation can be displayed for a specified period of time to inform the player that the operation needs to be resumed. This can preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation compared to ending the presentation when the detection of the operation is interrupted.

(P4-3) In the gaming machine described in (4-0) or (P4-1),
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect for the predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-3) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, the specific operation-responsive presentation is executed for a specified period until the judgment timing arrives, so that the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be improved more appropriately than if the presentation were to end when the detection of the operation was interrupted.

(P4-4) In the gaming machine described in (P4-3),
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect for the predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives, and then, at the judgment timing, suggests or notifies the player that there is no longer any operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-4) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, the specific presentation is executed for a specified period until the judgment timing arrives, and then the player can be informed at the judgment timing that he or she needs to resume the operation. This can preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation compared to ending the presentation when the detection of the operation is interrupted.

(P4-5) In the gaming machine described in (P4-3),
The effect execution means executes the predetermined effect for the predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives, and then executes an effect that suggests or notifies the player of the end of the specific operation corresponding effect at the judgment timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-5) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-responsive presentation after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner, the specific presentation is executed for a specified period until the judgment timing arrives, and then the player can be notified of the end of the presentation at the judgment timing, so that the interest of the specific operation-responsive presentation can be improved more appropriately than if the presentation were to end when the detection of the operation was interrupted.

(P5-0) In the gaming machine described in any one of (P1-0) to (P4-5),
The performance execution means includes:
and a performance continuation selection means for selecting whether or not to continue the operation-responsive performance during a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid and during which the operation of the operation means is being performed in a specific mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation means is operated in a specific manner, if it is determined that the player is subsequently operating the operation means at a judgment timing set at each specific interval longer than the predetermined interval, and if the result of the presentation continuation lottery is to continue the execution of the specific operation corresponding presentation, the execution of the specific operation corresponding presentation is continued from the next specific interval onwards.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-0) above, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continues based on the detection of an operation at the judgment timing and the result of the lottery for the effect continuation, so that the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be improved more appropriately than if the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continues only if the operation continues to be detected.

(P5-1) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1),
The effect execution means is provided with an effect continuation lottery means for drawing lots to determine whether or not to continue the operation-responsive effect within a valid period during which operation of the operating means is valid and during a period during which the operating means is operated in a specific manner, and if it is determined that the player is operating the operating means at the judgment timing and the result of the effect continuation lottery is to continue the execution of the specific operation-responsive effect, the gaming machine continues the execution of the specific operation-responsive effect at the next specific interval.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-1) above, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continues based on the detection of an operation at the judgment timing and the result of the lottery for the effect continuation, so that the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be improved more appropriately than if the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continued as long as the operation detection continued.

(P5-2) In the gaming machine described in (P5-0) or (P5-1),
The effect continuation lottery means is characterized in that, at the judgment timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the operation-responsive effect will be continued at the next specific interval.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-2) above, the lottery for the continuation of the effect is held at the judgment timing, so there are more chances to draw the lottery than if the specific operation corresponding effect was determined by lottery at the start of the effect, and the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be improved in an optimal manner.

(P5-3) In the gaming machine described in (P5-0) or (P5-1),
The effect continuation lottery means is characterized in that it draws, at an interval shorter than the specific interval, whether or not to continue the operation-responsive effect at the next specific interval.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-3) above, the lottery for the continuation of the effect is held at intervals shorter than the specific interval, so there are more opportunities to draw the lottery than if it were drawn at the judgment timing, and this makes it possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-responsive effect.

(P5-4) In the gaming machine described in (P5-0) or (P5-1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific manner and there is no longer any detection of operation of the operating means by the player within the valid period, the effect execution means continues the operation-responsive effect even after there is no longer any detection of operation of the operating means based on the result of the effect continuation lottery.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-4) above, if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response effect has started, whether or not to continue the execution of the specific operation response effect is determined according to the result of the effect continuation lottery. This increases the variety of effects when the detection of the player's operation is interrupted, thereby making it possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation response effect.

<Task 17>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a numerical value change effect during a specified display effect, in which numerical information changes in response to an operation such as pressing an operation button or pulling an operation lever during a valid operation period (for example, JP 2015-116229 A (pages 99-100, FIG. 83)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, there is a problem in that this type of gaming machine cannot improve the entertainment value of the display effects that accompany the numerical value change effects any further.
The invention related to (Q0) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of display effects accompanied by numerical change effects.
The invention relating to (Q0) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(Q0) an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game;
A game machine including: a performance execution means for causing a display means to execute a predetermined display performance based on a result of the determination by the main control means;
The performance execution means includes:
a numerical information display effect execution means for executing a numerical information display effect for displaying numerical information during the predetermined display effect based on the operation of the operation means within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid;
The numerical information display effect execution means executes a specific change effect in which, when predetermined numerical information is displayed in the numerical information display effect, the predetermined numerical information is changed to different specific information.

The gaming machine described in (Q0) above can improve the entertainment value of the display effects that include numerical value change effects.

(Q1) In the gaming machine described in (Q0),
The numerical information display performance execution means executes the specific change performance so that the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display performance does not become specific suggestive information that suggests the specific information.

The gaming machine described in (Q1) reduces misunderstandings about the results of the display effects and improves the reliability of the display effects, making the display effects involving numerical change effects more entertaining.

(Q2) In the gaming machine described in (Q1),
The specific change presentation is characterized in that when the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display presentation becomes the specific suggestion information as a result of increasing or decreasing the numerical information based on the operation of the operating means, the specific suggestion information is changed to non-specific information that does not suggest the specific information.

The gaming machine described in (Q2) above can improve the reliability of the display effects.

(Q3) In the gaming machine described in (Q1),
The specific change presentation is characterized in that, when the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display presentation becomes the specific suggestion information as a result of increasing or decreasing the numerical information based on the operation of the operating means, non-specific information that does not suggest the specific information is added to the specific suggestion information.

The gaming machine described in (Q3) above can improve the reliability of the display effects.

(Q4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (Q1) to (Q3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the numerical information display effect is a numerical change effect in which the numerical information displayed during the specified display effect increases or decreases based on the operation of the operating means within a valid period in which the operation of the operating means is valid.

The gaming machine described in (Q4) above can improve the reliability of display effects involving numerical change effects.

(Q5) In the gaming machine described in (Q4),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the numerical value change presentation increases or decreases a numerical value according to the number of times the operating means is operated.

The gaming machine described in (Q5) above can improve the reliability of display effects that involve numerical change effects that change numerical information according to the number of times the operating means is operated.

<18th Assignment>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine that executes a presentation that changes predetermined information during a display presentation (for example, JP 2015-116229 A (pages 99-100, FIG. 83)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, with this type of gaming machine, there is a problem in that changes in the specified information may not be displayed correctly, making it impossible to improve the reliability of the display performance including changes in the specified information.
The invention of (R0) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the reliability of display presentation, including changes in specified information.
The invention according to (R0) below has the following configuration in order to achieve the above object.

(R0) an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game;
A display control means for outputting a display command for causing the display means to display a display performance including predetermined information;
a sub-control means for outputting an instruction command to the display control means to instruct the display control means to change the predetermined information from one piece of information to another piece of information, based on a result of the determination by the main control means or based on an operation of the operation means,
an error determination means for determining whether an error has occurred in which the other information designated by the designation command does not match the predetermined information displayed by the display command;
and an error handling means for performing a predetermined error handling process corresponding to the error when the error occurs.

According to the gaming machine described in (R0) above, when an instruction is given to change the specified information from one piece of information to another piece of information based on the result of a judgment by the main control means or the operation of the operating means, if the instructed other piece of information does not match the specified information displayed by the display control means, an error handling process is carried out to deal with the error, which reduces the loss of enthusiasm of the player due to the error and improves the interest of the display presentation including the change in the specified information.

(R1) In the gaming machine described in (R0),
A gaming machine comprising an error notification means for notifying an occurrence of the error.

According to the gaming machine described in (R1) above, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the specified information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes changes in the specified information.

(R2) In the gaming machine described in (R1),
the display control means includes means for outputting, when the change in the predetermined information has been executed, a completion command indicating that the change in the predetermined information has been executed to the sub-control means;
The sub-control means is characterized in that it includes an error determination means for determining whether an error has occurred in which the other information indicated by the instruction command does not match the specified information indicated by the completion command.

According to the gaming machine described in (R2) above, when the sub-control means has instructed a change in other information but the display control means is unable to execute a change in the specified information, the occurrence of the error is reported, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the specified information, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the display presentation that includes a change in the specified information.

(R3) In the gaming machine according to (R1) or (R2),
The predetermined information is game display information that changes based on the result of judgment by the main control means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R3) above, when the sub-control means has instructed a change in the gaming display information but the display control means is unable to execute the change in the gaming display information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the gaming display information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes the change in the gaming display information.

(R4) In the gaming machine described in (R3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the game display information is game numerical information that changes based on the result of judgment by the main control means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R4) above, when the sub-control means has instructed a change in the gaming numerical information but the display control means is unable to execute the change in the gaming numerical information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the gaming numerical information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes the change in the gaming numerical information.

The game value information is, for example, the number of remaining fluctuations or the number of fluctuations that have been consumed in a special state or a time-saving state.

(R5) In the gaming machine according to (R1) or (R2),
The predetermined information is operation display information which changes based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R5) above, when the sub-control means has instructed a change in the operation display information but the display control means is unable to execute the change in the operation display information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the operation display information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes the change in the operation display information.

(R6) In the gaming machine described in (R5),
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation display information is operation numerical information which changes based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R6) above, when the sub-control means has instructed a change in the operation numerical information but the display control means is unable to execute the change in the operation numerical information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the operation numerical information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes changes in the operation numerical information.

(R7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (R1) to (R6),
The error notification means displays the error as a display information error image during a display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (R7) above, an error is displayed as a display information error image during the display performance, making it easier to notice the occurrence of an error.

The pachinko machine of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 4 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached in the AA section of FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is a left side view of the pachinko machine 10, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached in the BB section of FIG. 1. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 42 (a) and the hold display (b).

In the following examples, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up, down, left, right, front, back (or rear, front) are described based on the state when the game board is viewed from the front, i.e., the front view of the game board.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 which forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to the game island of the amusement hall (hall), an inner frame 12 which is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side (e.g. the left side in a front view) of the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis J1, and a front frame set 14 which is attached so as to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side (e.g. the left side in a front view) of the inner frame 12 as an opening/closing axis J2.

The outer frame 11 is made of wooden plate materials and has a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each plate material is attached with removable fasteners such as small screws. In this embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the up-down direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may also be made of resin or a light metal such as aluminum.

The inner frame 12 is roughly divided into a resin base 12a (see FIG. 2) as the main component that forms its outer shape, and a game board 30 (see FIG. 7) that is attached to the resin base 12a. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the inner frame 12 is also provided with a front frame set 14 that can be opened to one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Specifically, the resin base 12a is a plate-like member whose external shape is roughly rectangular when viewed from the front, and which has an opening (an opening of the same size as the play area 30a (see Figure 7) described below) centered at roughly the center.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed with the vertical opening and closing axis J2 as the axis on the left side when viewed from the front. In detail, the front frame set 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as the opening and closing base end side and the right side as the opening and closing tip end side when viewed from the front.

The game board 30 (see Figure 7) is detachably attached to the rear side of the resin base 12a so that the game area 30a is positioned in the opening of the resin base 12a.

Now let us explain the front frame set 14 in more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, it can be opened forward around the opening/closing axis J2 that extends vertically to the left when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, when viewed from the front, the front frame set 14 is broadly divided into a lower dish portion 13 located at the bottom, an upper dish portion 21 located above the lower dish portion 13, and a glass frame portion 23 located above the upper dish portion 21.

The front frame set 14 is formed by attaching the lower dish portion 13, the upper dish portion 21, and the glass frame portion 23 to respective locations on the front side of the base plate body 14a, which is a resin molded part of the front frame set 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate portion 13 is an integrated part that includes the parts that form the lower plate 15 and the parts that surround that part, and is fixed to the lowest part of the base plate body 14a when viewed from the front by fasteners such as screws so that it is located at the lowest part of the front frame set 14. This lower plate portion 13 is equipped with the lower plate 15 and the ball removal lever 17 on its front side.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the lower tray 15, which serves as a ball receiving tray, is provided from the left end to a point that is two-thirds of the width of the front frame set 14 when it is divided into approximately three equal parts, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. The ball removal lever 17 is used to remove (discharge) the game balls in the lower tray 15, and by moving this ball removal lever 17 to the left in Figure 1, a specified location (e.g., approximately the center location) on the bottom of the lower tray 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be removed downward to the outside through the opening on the bottom of the lower tray 15.

The game ball launching handle 18 is disposed to the right of the lower tray 15 and protrudes forward. In response to the player's operation of the game ball launching handle 18, the launching device 229 (see Figures 3 and 8) shoots the game ball toward the game board 30 (see Figure 7). The separate operation described below may be the operation of the game ball launching handle 18.

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output unit 24 is provided at two locations, one on the left and one on the top of the front frame set 14 when viewed from the front, and is formed of multiple output ports for outputting sound from speakers provided inside or on the back of the front frame set 14. Only a portion of these output ports is shown in FIG. 1, and the entirety is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper tray section 21 is an integrated part of the parts that form the upper tray 19 and the parts that surround that part, and is fixed to the lower part of the base plate body 14a when viewed from the front with fasteners such as screws so that it is located at the lower part of the front frame set 14 (above the aforementioned lower tray 15), and is provided with the upper tray 19 as a tray for receiving game balls. Here, the upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray for temporarily storing game balls and guiding them toward the launching device 229 while aligning them in a row.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper tray 21 is provided with various operation buttons on its upper surface that are operated by the player. These operation buttons include a frame button 80 consisting of multiple push buttons provided on the upper surface of the upper tray 21 near the ball storage space of the upper tray 19. The frame button 80 includes a decision button 81, and a left selection button 82 and a right selection button 83 located on both the left and right sides of the decision button 81. In addition to the push button type, the button may be, for example, a lever type or a touch sensor type. The separate operation described below may be the operation of the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame 23 has a window 101 formed on the upper side of the upper dish 21 and various decorative illuminations provided around the window 101.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a window 101 of an approximately vertically elongated elliptical shape formed in the center of the glass frame 23 located above the upper tray 21 so that most of the play area 30a (see FIG. 7) of the play board 30 can be seen from the outside. In detail, the window 101 is approximately vertically elongated elliptical with a hollow center (opening 101a), and a glass unit (not shown) is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 so as to cover the opening 101a with a glass plate 137 of an approximately vertically elongated elliptical shape or the like. The glass unit 140 has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. Note that the approximate center of the window 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may be adjusted to match that shape. In addition, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material may be used as long as it is a transparent plate with a certain strength.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame 23 is provided with various illumination parts 300 (first illumination part 301, second illumination part 302, and third illumination part 303) around the window part 101. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is provided with a first illumination part 301 (left side illumination part) with built-in LEDs, etc., at the left side around the window part 101 when viewed from the front, a second illumination part 302 (right side illumination part) with built-in LEDs, etc., at the right side around the window part 101, and a third illumination part 303 (upper illumination part) with built-in LEDs, etc., at the upper part around the window part 101. These illumination parts are controlled to change the light emission mode, such as lighting and blinking, according to changes in the game state at the time of a jackpot or a specified reach, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during the game.

In this pachinko machine 10, the first illumination unit 301, the second illumination unit 302, and the third illumination unit 303 function as jackpot lamps, and notify the player that a jackpot has been hit by lighting up or blinking when a jackpot has been hit. In addition, the first illumination unit 301 and the second illumination unit 302 of this pachinko machine 10 are equipped with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up when prize balls are being paid out, and an error display lamp 106 that lights up when a specified error occurs.

A small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided at the lower right corner of the periphery of the window portion 101, allowing part of the surface of the inner frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 to be viewed. A specific portion of this small window 107 is made flat, so that a certificate stamp or the like affixed to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be easily read by machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

In addition, a ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged at the lower right of the window portion 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills or cards (e.g., prepaid cards) inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. The ball lending operation unit 120 may further be provided with a degree display unit (not shown). This degree display unit (not shown) displays the remaining balance information of the card or the like. In addition, in pachinko machines where game balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 120 is not necessary. Therefore, decorative stickers or the like are attached to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 120. This allows the ball dispensing operation unit to be shared between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to Figure 7. As shown in Figure 7, the game board 30 is equipped with a wooden (e.g., plywood) game board 30b that is rectangular when viewed from the front and has both left corners removed, and its peripheral portion (the outer portion of rails 51, 52 described below) is attached in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12. The game area 30a, which is approximately the center of the front side of the game board 30, can be seen from the front outside of the front frame set 14 through the glass plate 137 of the approximately elliptical window portion 101 shown in Figure 1 of the base plate body (not shown) of the front frame set 14.

The game board 30 also includes a general winning hole 31, a variable winning device 32, a start winning device for special symbol 1 33a, a start winning device for special symbol 2 33b, a start opening for normal symbols 34, and a variable display unit 35. These are respectively disposed in the through holes formed by router processing in the game board 30, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The special pattern 1 start winning device 33a is a so-called navel type start opening (start chucker) that does not have an electric device that opens and closes the ball entry opening through which the game ball enters. The special pattern 2 start winning device 33b is a so-called electric chute type start opening (start chucker) that has an electric device that opens and closes the ball entry opening through which the game ball enters. The normal pattern start opening 34 is a start opening (through chucker) that opens the electric device of the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b a predetermined number of times due to the game ball passing through a gate (through gate). The variable winning device 32 is a winning device that has an electric device (door member) that opens and closes the large winning opening based on the lottery results of the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b. The opening and closing of the electric device is not limited to the rotating type shown in the figure, but may be a type that moves linearly forward and backward or left and right.

The special chart 1 start winning device 33a is a starting hole that can receive game balls that have flowed down the left side game area 30al provided on the left side of the variable display unit 35, rolling on the stage section 47B and dropping from directly above. Above the special chart 1 start winning device 33a, a stage section 47B is provided that causes the game balls that have flowed down the left side game area 30al to oscillate (go back and forth) horizontally. Game balls that have fallen from directly above the special chart 1 start winning device 33a on the stage section 47B enter the special chart 1 start winning device 33a.

The special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is a start opening provided in a position where the game ball can enter in the right game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display unit 35. A normal symbol start opening (through gate) 34 is provided above the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. If the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage detection to the normal symbol start opening 34 is a win, the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is opened, allowing the game ball to enter.

The right-side game area 30ar may be configured to allow some of the game balls launched into the right-side game area 30ar to pass through the normal symbol starting hole 34, or it may be configured to allow all of the game balls launched into the right-side game area 30ar to pass through the normal symbol starting hole 34.

The variable winning device 32 is located diagonally below and to the left of the starting winning device 33b for special chart 2, and only game balls flowing down the right game area 30ar can enter the device. In other words, game balls launched by hitting to the right can enter the variable winning device 32 if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state.

The general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning device for special symbol 1 33a, the start winning device for special symbol 2 33b, and the start hole for normal symbols 34 are each provided with a detection switch (not shown) that detects the entry or passage of a game ball, and entries into the start winning device for special symbol 1 33a, the start winning device for special symbol 2 33b, and the start hole for normal symbols 34 are detected individually by the respective detection switches.

In addition, balls entering the general winning port 31, the starting winning device for special chart 1 33a, and the starting winning device for special chart 2 33b are detected by a detection switch (a winning port switch, not shown), and balls entering the variable winning device 32 are detected by a detection switch (a count switch, not shown), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15) based on the output of this detection switch.

For example, when a ball enters the special 1 starting winning device 33a or the special 2 starting winning device 33b, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball enters the general winning port 31 or the variable winning device 32, ten prize balls are paid out. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various numbers.

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting hole 34, this passage is detected by a detection switch (a passage detection switch, not shown), but even if the ball enters the normal symbol starting hole 34, the game ball is not paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, and game balls that do not enter the various winning devices are guided through this outlet 36 toward a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls. In addition to this, various components (gimmicks) such as windmills may also be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 7, the variable display unit 35 includes a first pattern display device 40 that variably displays a first pattern (e.g., a special pattern) as identification information when the player wins the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, a second pattern display device 41 that variably displays a second pattern (e.g., a normal pattern) when the player passes through the normal pattern start opening 34, and a third pattern display device 42 that variably displays a third pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern) when the player wins the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b. The third pattern display device 42 may be, for example, a display device dedicated to display performance, or a light-transmitting resin plate such as an acrylic panel that can display images and is provided in place of or together with the glass plate 137.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first pattern display device 40 is provided with a first segment display unit 40a, which is, for example, a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light-emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. This first segment display unit 40a emits variable light based on the balls entering the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7, the first pattern display device 40 is provided with a reserve lamp 40c that indicates the number of reserved variable displays in the first segment display unit 40a. The reserve lamp 40c is configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 as well.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the third symbol display device 42 is provided with first to fourth reserved indicators H1 to H4 corresponding to the four reserved lamps 40c and the reserved indicator TH corresponding to the currently active variation pattern. FIG. 9(a) shows the start of the pattern variation display corresponding to the reserved indicator TH when the reserved number is 4, the confirmation of a miss in the pattern variation display corresponding to the reserved indicator TH when the reserved number is 4, or the variation display of the decorative symbol (third symbol) consisting of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub decorative symbol FZ in the pattern variation display corresponding to the reserved indicator TH when the reserved number is 4. The first to fourth reserved indicators H1 to H4 and the reserved indicator TH are displayed in colors according to the likelihood of a jackpot.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 9(b), in order of decreasing probability of a jackpot, the colors are white, blue, red, and rainbow in the order of increasing probability of a jackpot. A white hold indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold does not indicate a possibility of a jackpot combination, or that the probability of a jackpot combination is low. A blue hold indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold is more likely to be a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the white hold, but is less likely to be a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the red hold. A red hold indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold is more likely to be a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the blue hold. A rainbow hold indicates that the probability of a jackpot is the highest, and that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold is confirmed to be a jackpot combination. Note that FIG. 9(a) shows that the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 and the hold display TH are white.

The first segment display unit 40a generates a variable display state of the first pattern (the light emission variable mode of each segment light emission unit in this embodiment) by randomly or sequentially changing the light emission of each segment light emission unit based on the ball entering the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, and when the light emission variable stops, displays whether it is a jackpot or a miss according to the light emission display mode. In addition to whether it is a jackpot or a miss, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot may be displayed. For example, displaying the first symbol (e.g., numbers, letters, etc.) with light means the first jackpot, displaying the second symbol (e.g., numbers, letters, etc.) with light means the second jackpot, displaying the third symbol (e.g., numbers, letters, etc.) with light means the third jackpot, and displaying the fourth symbol (e.g., numbers, letters, etc.) with light means a miss. Furthermore, because the light-emitting display by the first segment display unit 40a does not mean anything to an average player, it is a display that does not tell (or is difficult to tell) whether it is a jackpot or a miss, or what type of jackpot it is, just by looking at it.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot round based on a specific type of jackpot, the game ball enters a support state that supports the game ball to easily enter the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. During the support state, the player hits the ball to the right to make the game ball enter the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. When the game ball hit from the right passes through the normal symbol start hole 34, the lottery for the second symbol to determine whether it is a win or lose and the result is displayed in an extremely short time. If the lottery for the second symbol results in a win, the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is opened for a predetermined time. Therefore, during the time-saving state or the probability change state, the game ball that passes through the normal symbol start hole 34 is more likely to enter the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b.

In addition, as the first pattern display device 40, a single or multiple LEDs capable of emitting at least two colors may be adopted. Specifically, in the case where two LEDs capable of emitting red and blue light are adopted as the first pattern display device 40, the color of light emitted by each LED is alternately changed to generate a variable display state of the first pattern (the color of light emitted by each LED). For example, when both LEDs stop in a red light emitting state, it indicates a first big win, when one LED stops in a red light emitting state and the other LED goes out, it indicates a second big win, when both LEDs stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates a third big win, and when both LEDs stop in a light emitting state of different colors, it indicates a miss. In addition, at least one of the first segment display unit 40a and the hold lamp 40c constituting the first pattern display device 40 may be constituted by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display device, or other types of display devices, and may be configured to display on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 in particular. In addition, the pattern displayed by the first pattern display device 40 may be a configuration in which multiple types of letters are displayed, multiple types of symbols are displayed, multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors are displayed.

The second symbol display device 41 has a display section 41a for the second symbol, for example a "○", a display section 41b for the second symbol, for example an "X", and a hold lamp 41c. Each time the game ball passes through the third start hole 34, the display pattern (normal pattern) by the display sections 41a and 41b changes, and when the changing display stops at a predetermined pattern, the lower side start winning device 33b for special symbol 2 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the third start hole 34 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times that it has been held is displayed by lighting the hold lamp 41c. The display sections 41a and 41b have an LED (light-emitting diode) inside, and the display is changed by switching the light emitted by this LED (or the light on the lamp). In addition, at least one of the second pattern display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device, or may be configured to display on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42.

In the third pattern display device 42, when the first pattern display device 40 displays the variation of the first pattern and a specified display (stop display) based on winning the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, the third pattern display device 42 displays the variation of the third pattern and a specified display (stop display) accordingly. In addition to the display performance triggered by winning the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, the third pattern display device 42 also displays the display performance during the specific game state to which it transitions after winning the jackpot.

The third pattern display device 42 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 45 described later. On the third pattern display device 42, three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R, left, center, and right, are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 9. Each decorative pattern row L, M, and R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns, and these decorative patterns are variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42 so that each decorative pattern row L, M, and R is scrolled. In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) has a large liquid crystal display, for example, 11 inches in size. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47A is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the third pattern display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.) may be used.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 7 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (or it may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize), and in the event of a jackpot, it is repeatedly operated between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize and the normal closed state. The period from when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state to when it is in the closed state is called a round. In the jackpot state, this round game is repeated a predetermined number of times.

In this way, in the big win round game, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated between the open state and the normal closed state, many game balls enter the variable winning device 32 (win), and a large number of game balls are paid out in response to the win, making it an advantageous game state for the player. However, in the big win round game, the period during which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is extremely short, and it may be difficult for game balls to win even in the open state, but since such a big win round game is switched to the support state after the end of the game, the player's balls are less likely to decrease, making it an advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is capable of transitioning between a normal game state (game ball consumption state) in which the number of game balls inserted (the number of game balls fired into the game area 30a by the launching device 229) is greater than the number of prize balls paid out (the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning device for special chart 1 33a, the start winning device for special chart 2 33b, etc.), and an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot round game state and a support state which occurs thereafter) in which the number of prize balls paid out is greater than or the same as the number of game balls inserted, or the difference therebetween is smaller than the normal game state.

More specifically, when a game ball wins the special winning device 33a for special winning chart 1 or the special winning device 33b for special winning chart 2, the third pattern of the third pattern display device 42 is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40. The variable display based on the winning of the special winning device 33b for special winning chart 2 is changed in priority to the variable display based on the winning of the special winning device 33a for special winning chart 1, but it is also possible to change in the order of the winning of the special winning device 33a for special winning chart 1 and the special winning device 33b for special winning chart 2. When it is determined that the display of the first segment display unit 40a and the third pattern display device 42 after each change has stopped is a symbol and combination indicating a jackpot that has been set in advance, a jackpot round game state is generated.

The variable winning device 32 is configured so that its large winning port 32a is in a predetermined open state. Specifically, the passage of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the open state is regarded as one round, and the large winning port 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, or 16 rounds). In addition, the number of times that the game ball has passed through the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number is displayed by the reserved lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, and 40c4 (collectively referred to as reserved lamps 40c). The reserved lamps 40c are lit in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, and 40c4. The reserved lamps 40c may be configured to display reserved on a part of the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 30 is provided with two rails 51, 52 for guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 229 (see FIG. 3) to the top of the game board 30, and the game balls launched in response to the rotation of the game ball launching handle 18 are guided to a predetermined game area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 of the two rails 51, 52, which will be described later. The two rails 51, 52 are long, stainless steel metal strips, and are attached to the game board 30 on both the inside and outside. The inner rail 51 is formed in a shape that is approximately a vertical ellipse, excluding the area from the upper left diagonal to the lower right diagonal in a clockwise direction, when viewed from the front of the game board 30. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side) faces the inner rail 51. In this case, the guide rail is made up of an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52, and the portion where these rails 51, 52 are parallel with a certain distance between them (the portion on the left side when facing the ball) forms the ball guide passage 49. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in the shape of a groove that has an abutment surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove that is open on the front side.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 51 (upper left in FIG. 7). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the top of the game board 30 from returning back into the ball guide passage 49. In addition, when the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, a return rubber 54 is located at a position on the outer rail 52 that corresponds to the maximum flight part of the game ball (upper right in FIG. 7: the part corresponding to the tip of the outer rail 52). Therefore, a game ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and bounces back. The outer rail 52 is a long stainless steel metal strip, which makes the flight of the game ball smoother, that is, reduces the frictional resistance of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 7, the play area 30a is divided from the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right in FIG. 7) to the right tip of the inner rail 51 (lower right in FIG. 7) by a wall 56 on the play area 30a side of the first pattern display device 40 and a wall 55 (shown by a dashed line in FIG. 7) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for attaching a sticker SL (which may be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, with a manufacturing number written on it). By attaching a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp to the lower right corner of the game board 30, it is possible to ensure uniqueness between the game board 30 and the certificate stamp.

Next, the play area 30a of the play board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the play area 30a is defined in a substantially vertically oval shape by the inner periphery (inner and outer rails) of the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and in this embodiment in particular, the play area 30a defined on the surface of the play board 30 is configured to be large.

In this embodiment, the play area 30a is the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, excluding the guide rail area which is the parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51, 52. Therefore, when referring to the play area 30a, the guide rail portion is not included, so the left limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the inner rail 51, not the outer rail 52. The right limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the wall portion 55 (part of the inner frame 12). The lower limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the inner rail 51. The upper limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the outer rail 52.

Although detailed drawings are omitted, game balls are supplied to the launching device 229 one by one from a ball outlet (not shown) of the front frame set 14 (a ball outlet leading from the downstream end of the upper tray 19).

Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the pachinko machine 10 (actually the back of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and predetermined control boards are stacked front to back (for example, the payout control board 311a in FIG. 8 described later is on the front side in the rear view, and the power supply control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located further back than the payout control board 311a). In addition, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism 352) for supplying game balls and a resin protective cover 353 are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are mounted separately on multiple (three) mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. 3, which are used as each control board unit, and each control board unit is individually attached to the back of the inner frame 12 or the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, the sub-control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232, and each is unitized, while the payout control device 311, launch control device 312, and power supply device 313 are mounted on the mounting base 231, and each is unitized.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout mechanism 352 is configured by arranging various components (a tank 355, a tank rail 356, a case rail 357, a payout device 358, and a power switch board 382, which will be described later) in an inverted L-shape when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the payout mechanism 352 and protective cover 353 are also integrated into one unit, and this unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack, so here this unit is referred to as the "back pack unit 203".

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached unit by unit without using any tools, and in addition, a support shaft is provided in part so that it can be opened and closed relative to the back of the inner frame 12 or the game board 30. This is also a design that makes it possible to easily check hidden components, etc., even if the back pack unit 203 and other components are stacked one on top of the other.

In addition, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a winning detection mechanism for detecting the passage of game balls through various winning holes. Specifically, a winning hole switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning hole 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided in the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch that counts winning balls. In addition, an operating hole switch (not shown) for the special winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and an operating hole switch (not shown) for the special winning device 33b for special drawing 2 are provided at positions corresponding to the special drawing 1 start winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 start winning device 33b, respectively, and the entry of game balls into the special drawing 1 start winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 start winning device 33b are detected by the respective operating hole switches. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the normal pattern start hole 34, and the passage of game balls into the normal pattern start hole 34 is detected by the gate switch.

The winning port switch (not shown) of the general winning port 31 and the gate switch of the starting port 34 for normal symbols are connected to a panel connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), which is in turn connected to a main control board 261a (see FIG. 8) in the main control device 261 described below. In addition, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to a large winning port relay terminal board (not shown), which is also connected to the main control board 261a. In contrast, the operation port switches of the starting winning device 33a for special symbol 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special symbol 2 are directly connected to the main control board 261a without going through a relay board.

Others are not shown, but the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening 32a, and the special drawing 2 start winning device 33b is provided with an operating opening solenoid for opening the electric device.

The detection results detected by each of the winning detection mechanisms are input to the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, which will be described later, and the main control board 261a transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control board 311a. The payout of a predetermined number of game balls is then carried out based on the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and the sub-control device 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 is equipped with a main control board 261a including a CPU 501 that mainly controls, a ROM 502 that stores a game program, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, an input/output port 505 that communicates with various devices, a random number generator (not shown) used in various lotteries, and a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization, and the main control board 261a is housed in a board box 263 (enclosure means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 is equipped with a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected unopenably by a sealing unit 261c, thereby sealing the board box 263.

The sub-control device 262 further comprises a CPU 551 which controls the audio and lamp display and the display control device 45 according to instructions from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, and a sub-control board 262a which includes a ROM 552, a RAM 553, a bus line 554 and an input/output port 555, etc., and this sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Power supplied from a power supply board, which will be described later, is output to the display control device 45 via the sub-control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control device 311, launch control device 312, power supply device 313 and card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 is equipped with a control board including a CPU which is the center of control, as well as ROM, RAM, various ports, etc. The launch control device 312 is equipped with a launch control board. The power supply device 313 is equipped with a power control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 8) in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 generates and outputs the specified power supply voltage required by the various control devices, etc. The launching device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type launching component that launches game balls by striking them with a launching hammer (not shown) that can move back and forth according to whether or not electricity is applied to a launch solenoid (not shown). As the launching device 229, various types of components may be employed, such as a mechanical launching component that launches game balls by striking them with a launching hammer that operates according to the drive of a launching motor, or an electromagnetic launching component that launches game balls by generating an electromagnetic field. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and the card unit (not shown), and receives commands for ball lending operations by the player and outputs them to the payout control device 311. In a cash machine in which game balls are directly loaned from a ball lending device or the like to the upper tray 19 without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 is not necessary.

The dispensing control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313 and the card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the dispensing control device 311, similar to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and box cover constituting the board box 311b (enclosure means) are connected by a sealing unit (sealing means) in an unopenable manner, thereby sealing the board box 311b.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, when the state return switch 311c is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 8) is rotated slowly in the forward direction, and the ball jam is resolved (returned to the normal state).

The power supply monitoring board 261b is also provided with a RAM erase switch 323. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when power is restored, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, since the state before the power outage is stored and retained when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall closes), if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, you can turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism 352.

The rear pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 at the top that opens upward, and this tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently slopes downward toward the downstream side, and further, a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

The tank rail 356 is also provided with a vibrator 360 for applying vibrations to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Furthermore, the vibrator 360 does not come into surface contact with the tank rail 356, but rather comes into contact with the two screws, so that the vibrations from the vibrator 360 are transmitted to the tank rail 356 more effectively. Therefore, if a ball jam occurs near the tank rail 356, the ball jam is eliminated by driving the vibrator 360.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is provided with a dispensing relay board (not shown) that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned ON or OFF by switching the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism 352, which extends from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown), is made of a conductive resin material (e.g., conductive polycarbonate resin) and is partially grounded. This prevents noise caused by static electricity from being generated by the game balls.

As shown in FIG. 3, an inner frame open detection switch 388 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12 to detect when the inner frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, an output is sent from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer for use in the hall (inside the pachinko parlor).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using FIG. 8. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a sub-control device 262, a display control device 45, an audio output control device 47, a power supply device 313, and the like. Each of these devices will be explained in detail below.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

RAM 503 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 313 even after the power to pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and RAM 503 has memory and areas for temporarily storing various types of data, etc.

In other words, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes normal processing to the end, so that the RAM 503 only needs to store and hold the contents of the counter buffer and reserved ball storage area at the time of power off (including the time of a power outage; the same applies below), and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off when the power is turned back on. Specifically, there is no need to provide a dedicated backup area in the RAM 503 for storing the values of each register and I/O, etc., regarding the game information during normal processing when the power is cut off. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal S1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when a power outage occurs, the power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

The CPU 501, which incorporates the ROM 502 and RAM 503, is connected to an input/output port 505 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543 (described later), a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub-control device 262, a first pattern display device 40, a second pattern display device 41, and other switches (not shown). The main control device 261 also has a function of controlling the variable display of the first pattern on the first pattern display device 40 and the variable display of the second pattern on the second pattern display device 41.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, is configured so that data can be retained (backed up) by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 513 is equipped with memory and areas for temporarily storing various types of data, etc.

In the event that the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the RAM 513 stores and holds information about the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power supply is turned back on, so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power supply was turned off. In other words, the storage of this RAM 513 is performed when the power supply is turned off by the NMI interrupt processing and the latter half of the payout control processing steps, and conversely, the stored information in the RAM 513 is restored during the power restoration processing when the power supply is turned on.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the main control device 261, the launch control device 312, the payout motor 358a, etc.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to operate when a certain condition is met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 outputs a launch permission signal S7 to the main control device 261 on the condition that all of the following have been input: a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the above-mentioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10), a touch detection signal S5 output when the player touches the game ball launch handle 18, and a launch maintenance signal S6 output when the launch stop switch 18a provided on the game ball launch handle 18 for stopping launching has not been operated. In addition, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is input from the game ball launch handle 18 to the launch control device 312, and the launch control device 312 outputs this volume signal S10 to the main control device 261.

That is, the launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level) during the period in which it is in the launch permission state, and the launch permission signal S7 is OFF (low level) during the period in which it is OFF (low level) during the period in which it is OFF (low level). That is, the main control device 261 repeatedly outputs to the launch control device 312, at a predetermined repeating period, a launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls a launch solenoid (not shown) that launches the game ball, and a ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls a ball feed solenoid that sends the game ball to the launch rail. The amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined in the main control device 261 based on the volume signal S10, and for example, the greater the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18, the greater the amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal). The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and the game ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18. Conversely, while the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, the main control device 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312, and the launch device 229 does not launch any game balls.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) in the third pattern display device 42. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input of the input port 527 is connected to the output of the sub-control device 262, and the output of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526. In addition, the output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via the bus line 531, and the output of the output port 529 is connected to the third pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative pattern display in the third pattern display device 42 based on various commands sent from the main control device 261 after being edited by the sub-control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on third pattern display device 42, and the display contents of third pattern display device 42 are changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative patterns to be displayed on third pattern display device 42. Image controller 526 adjusts the timing of CPU 521, video RAM 524, and output port 529 to mediate data reading and writing, and also reads display data stored in video RAM 524 from character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing and displays it on third pattern display device 42.

The sound output control device 46 controls the sound output in the sound output unit 24a. This sound output control device 46 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and executes processing to control the output of normal sound and the output of specific sound in accordance with the display performance in the third pattern display device 42. In addition, the sound output control device 46 controls the adjustment of the volume through the operation of the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83, as described below. The ROM stores programs and sound data for the sound output processing. The sound output unit 24a is equipped with an amplifier and speaker for outputting sound, etc.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates a +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supplies to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. Note that the firing control device 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V power supply, +5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a, housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the 24 V AC voltage in the power supply unit 541, and if the time that this voltage falls below 22 V exceeds, for example, 20 milliseconds, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred, and outputs a power outage signal S1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal S1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the power failure processing, even after the 24 volts AC monitored by the power supply unit 541 has fallen below 22 volts for more than 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power failure processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAM 503 is cleared in the main control device 261, and when the payout control device 311 receives an initialization command from the main control device 261, the data in the RAM 513 is cleared.

Meanwhile, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) has three decorative symbol rows L, M, R, left, center, and right, as shown in FIG. 9, and three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are displayed in a variable manner for each of the decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. In this embodiment, the series of symbols is composed of main decorative symbols SZ, each of which is numbered "0" to "9," and secondary decorative symbols FZ, which are diamond-shaped picture symbols. The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and secondary decorative symbols FZ are arranged between each main decorative symbol SZ to form a series of decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. The main decorative symbols SZ and secondary decorative symbols FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with a periodicity.

In this case, the series of decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (i.e., in order of decreasing main decorative pattern SZ numbers) in the left decorative pattern column L, and in the center decorative pattern column M and right decorative pattern column R, the series of decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (i.e., in order of increasing main decorative pattern SZ numbers). Then, the variable display stops in the order of left decorative pattern column L → right decorative pattern column R → center decorative pattern column M, and when it stops, if the main decorative pattern SZ is aligned in a jackpot pattern combination (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main decorative pattern SZ) on any of the five effective lines on the third pattern display device 42, namely the upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, right upward line L4, and left upward line L5, a special game video is displayed as a jackpot.

The main decorative pattern SZ is composed of a number section SZa in which numbers are drawn, and a decorative section SZb in which characters such as people and animals are decoratively drawn. For example, the main decorative pattern SZ "1" arranged in the three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R is each composed of a number section SZa "1" and a decorative section SZb in which the same character (a different character from "2" to "9") is drawn within a frame surrounding the "1". The same is true for the main decorative patterns SZ "2" to "9".

Next, we will explain the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses random numbers related to the operation of the reels and other random numbers used for play to perform the lottery (jackpot lottery: jackpot lottery for the first pattern) and pattern display settings for the first pattern display device 40, the lottery (winning lottery for the second pattern) and pattern display settings for the second pattern display device 41, and the lottery and settings related to the variable display of the decorative pattern (third pattern) for the third pattern display device 42.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the random numbers related to the operation of the reels are a jackpot random number counter C1 used to draw a jackpot on the first pattern display device 40, a jackpot pattern counter C2 used to select a jackpot pattern on the first pattern display device 40, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a second pattern random number counter C4 used to draw a jackpot on the second pattern display device 41, and an initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 used to set the initial value of the second pattern random number counter C4.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10, this pachinko machine 10 uses, as other random numbers for use in the game, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a stop pattern to roughly identify the type of variation pattern when selecting a variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the third pattern display device 42, variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used to select the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the third pattern display device 42, and a second pattern loss pattern counter C5 used to select a loss pattern of the second pattern display device 41. Each of the counters mentioned above is configured by a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a group of complete miss fluctuation patterns consisting of multiple types of complete miss fluctuation patterns, "stop pattern 1" indicates a group of front and rear miss reach fluctuation patterns consisting of multiple types of front and rear miss reach fluctuation patterns, "stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear misses consisting of multiple types of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear misses, and "stop pattern 3" indicates a jackpot fluctuation pattern group consisting of multiple types of jackpot fluctuation patterns.

All of these counters C1-C5, CINI1-CINI2, CS1-CS3 are loop counters that add "1" to the previous value each time they are updated (hereinafter referred to as "update") and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 503 shown in FIG. 10. RAM 503 also has one execution area and a reserved ball storage area consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area, second reserved area, third reserved area, fourth reserved area), and each of these areas is configured to store values such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot pattern counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 in chronological order according to the winning history of the game balls in the special chart 1 start winning device 33a and the special chart 2 start winning device 33b. The entry of the game ball into the special chart 1 start winning device 33a and the special chart 2 start winning device 33b is also called the establishment of the start condition. Each value stored in the execution area is called the change display of the executed portion, and each value stored in the reserved ball storage area is also called the change display of the unexecuted portion.

Specifically, if the start condition is met during a period when neither the executed nor unexecuted variable display is stored in the execution area and reserved ball storage area, the executed variable display is stored in the execution area. If the start condition is met during a period when the executed variable display is stored in the execution area, the unexecuted variable display is stored in the first reserved area, the second reserved area, the third reserved area, and the fourth reserved area in that order. When the executed variable display is stored in the execution area, a variable non-execution condition is met that does not execute the pattern variable display for the unexecuted variable display stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The unexecuted change displays stored in the first reserve area, second reserve area, third reserve area, and fourth reserve area are also called the first reserve, second reserve, third reserve, and fourth reserve.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 10. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "599", for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "599"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter (value = 0 to 599) similar to the jackpot random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 19) described later. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 when the game ball wins the special chart 1 start winning device 33a or the special chart 2 start winning device 33b.

The winning value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot, is set to two types, one for low probability and one for high probability. The number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot at low probability is two, with a value of "150,450", and the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot at high probability is 16, with a value of "50-57,350-357". In other words, the jackpot probability at low probability is 1/300, and at high probability is 16/300. Note that high probability refers to a state in which a jackpot is reached by a predetermined probability-changing pattern, for example, and the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value, that is, a so-called "probability change", and normal time (low probability) refers to a time when such a probability change state is not in place. In addition, the high probability state (high probability state) continues after the high probability jackpot or latent high probability jackpot ends (after the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize device 32 opens for, for example, 16 rounds) until the next jackpot or a predetermined number of fluctuations have occurred. In this embodiment, the high probability state continues until 100 fluctuations have occurred after the end of the jackpot round.

The jackpot symbol counter C2 determines the symbol (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the first segment display unit 40a changes) when the first segment display unit 40 of the first symbol display device 40 stops changing during a jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "99", for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "9"). The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later) in the same manner as the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 when the game ball wins the special chart 1 start winning device 33a or the special chart 2 start winning device 33b.

The jackpot lottery table using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot pattern counter C2 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11(a) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special pattern 1, and (b) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special pattern 2.

As shown in (a), in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "0" and "9", the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with the "7" pattern, as described below. Next, when the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "10" and "49", the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the second symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with odd numbers excluding "7", such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Also, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "50" and "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the first symbol, and the even number patterns are lined up, such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". If the jackpot random number counter C1 is a miss, regardless of the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2, the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol, and the decorative patterns are a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in (b), in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "0" and "19", the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with the "7" pattern, as described below. Next, when the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "20" and "49", the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the second symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with odd numbers excluding "7", such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Also, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "50" and "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the even number patterns are lined up, such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". If the jackpot random number counter C1 is a miss, regardless of the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2, the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol, and the decorative patterns are a combination that indicates a miss.

The relationship between the jackpot symbol and the type of win will be explained. This relationship is common to the special jackpot 1 lottery table and the special jackpot 2 lottery table. If the jackpot symbol is a "7" symbol, the type of win will be a 16R special jackpot with 16 rounds and a special jackpot state. If the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol such as a "1", "3", "5", or "9", the type of win will be an 8R special jackpot with 8 rounds and a special jackpot state. If the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol such as a "2", "4", "6", or "8", the type of win will be an 8R normal jackpot with 8 rounds and no special jackpot state.

The relationship between the winning type and the ending time is explained below. The opening time is the time for the opening performance from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the first round. The opening time is set to 10 seconds, which is the same for all winning types. The opening time is the same for the special chart 1 and special chart 2 jackpot lottery tables.

The relationship between the winning type and the ending time is explained. The ending time is the time for the ending performance from the end of the final round to the start of the next game state. In the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, the ending time for the 16R certainty jackpot is set to 35 seconds, and the ending time for the 8R certainty jackpot and 8R normal jackpot is set to 25 seconds. In the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, the ending time for the 16R certainty jackpot is set to 30 seconds, and the ending time for the 8R certainty jackpot and 8R normal jackpot is set to 20 seconds. The ending time for the special chart 2 jackpot is set to 5 seconds shorter than the ending time in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table. This allows the player to see more information at the end of a jackpot round based on winning the start winning device 33a for special chart 1, but by shortening the ending presentation time when two or more consecutive jackpots occur, such as when winning the start winning device 33b for special chart 2, the player can reduce the feeling of repetition caused by the same presentation being shown multiple times, when the same presentation would have been obvious if it had been shown once.

The relationship between the type of win and the number of times the support state is applied is explained below. The support state is a state in which the result of the lottery for normal symbols is more likely to be a win, and the opening time of the electric role is longer or the number of times it is opened is increased so that the game ball is more likely to enter the special chart 2 starting winning device 33b after the end of the jackpot round play than in the normal play state. The support state is a play state in which right-hand hitting is performed. In the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, the support state for the 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot is set to 100 times. In the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, the support state for the 16R special jackpot and 8R special jackpot is set to 100 times, but the support state for the 8R normal jackpot is set to 0 times.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "238", for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to select a "reach before or after" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops one space before or after the reach decorative pattern after the reach occurs in the third pattern display device 42, a "reach other than a back and forth miss" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops other than before or after the reach decorative pattern after the reach occurs, and a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs. For example, C3=0 to 201 corresponds to a complete miss, C3=202 to 208 corresponds to a back and forth miss reach, and C3=209 to 238 corresponds to a reach other than a back and forth miss. The contents of the lottery (drawing of the reach) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 may be set individually depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability or high probability state, whether the fluctuation time shortening function of the first pattern display device 40 is inactive or active, how many balls are in operation when the first pattern starts to fluctuate, etc. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described later), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 when the game ball wins the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b.

Of the three fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, "0 to 198" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "198"); the fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, "0 to 240" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "240"); and the fluctuation type counter CS3 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, "0 to 162" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "162"). In the following description, the fluctuation type counter CS1 will also be referred to as the "first fluctuation type counter," the fluctuation type counter CS2 as the "second fluctuation type counter," and the fluctuation type counter CS3 as the "third fluctuation type counter."

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a group of rough decorative pattern variation patterns, such as the reach type of the decorative pattern (third pattern) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete miss. Next, from the group of variation patterns determined by the first variation type counter CS1 in this way, another variation pattern is determined by the second variation type counter CS2.

The variation pattern of the decorative pattern for special chart 1 is determined using the table for selecting the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern shown in FIG. 12. The variation pattern of the decorative pattern for special chart 2 is also determined in the same way.

In the embodiment described later, the numerical information regarding the game may be the points acquired if the gaming machine is one in which points are acquired each time a variation pattern of the decorative pattern for special pattern 1 or the decorative pattern for special pattern 2 is selected. These points may be counted, and the likelihood of an advantageous gaming state occurring may vary depending on the total number of points acquired. Specifically, the points acquired for each variation during the variation display performance are counted, the acquired points are displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and a period during which an opening performance is performed is selected based on the winning of the jackpot lottery, but the length of the period of the opening performance is set to vary depending on the number of points acquired. In this gaming machine, the likelihood of a V winning probability occurring in the embodiment described later varies depending on the length of the period of the opening performance.

That is, when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any one of "0" to "9", if the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30", "31" to "140", or "141" to "198", a super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a jackpot super reach A (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "31" to "140", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a jackpot super reach C (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "141" to "198", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a jackpot super reach E (fluctuation time: 120 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach F (fluctuation time: 120 seconds) is determined. It has been decided that the special effects of the jackpot super reaches A and C will be to announce jackpot suggestion information suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot by pressing the decision button 81 within a specified valid period, and that the jackpot super reach E will announce jackpot suggestion information and execute a revival effect that is performed when a provisional stop that is out of reach is changed to a jackpot combination.

When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is either "10" to "39" or "40" to "89", if the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65", the normal reach group (jackpot normal reach group) is determined, and if it is "66" to "132" or "133" to "198", the super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot normal reach A (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot normal reach B (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "66" to "132", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a jackpot super reach A (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach B is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "133" to "198", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "121", a jackpot super reach C (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined. The occurrence frequency is almost the same for the jackpot normal reach A, the jackpot super reach A, B, and the jackpot normal reach C, D. For normal jackpot reach A, and super jackpot reach A and C, it is decided that jackpot suggestion information will be announced using the decision button 81.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any value between "0" and "201", a complete miss is determined, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any value between "202" and "208", either a normal lead with a front-to-back miss or a super reach with a front-to-back miss is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any value between "209" and "238", either a normal reach with a non-front-to-back miss or a super reach with a non-front-to-back miss is determined. In this way, if the jackpot lottery is a miss, it is set up so that a complete miss is more likely to occur.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "0" to "201", the detailed type of fluctuation pattern is determined as follows. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", a complete miss A (fluctuation time: 10 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", a complete miss B (fluctuation time: 15 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", a complete miss C (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) is determined. Note that even in the case of complete misses A, B, and C, jackpot suggestion information may be notified using the decision button 81. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether a jackpot has been hit or not just based on whether or not jackpot suggestion information has been notified.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "202" to "208", the detailed type of fluctuation pattern is determined as follows. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", a front and rear miss normal reach A (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", a front and rear miss super reach A (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "151" to "170", a front and rear miss super reach C (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "171" to "198", if the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "199", a front and rear miss super reach E, F (fluctuation time: 100 seconds) is determined. Similarly to the above, normal reach A with a miss before or after, and super reach A and C with a miss before or after may or may not display jackpot suggestion information. The fluctuation time (100 seconds) of super reach E and F with a miss before or after corresponds to a pattern in which jackpot super reach E and F appear to have a revival effect but end with a miss. Therefore, even in jackpot super reach E and F, it is difficult for the player to determine the result of the fluctuation display until the revival effect is performed, except when it is suggested by the jackpot suggestion information.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "209" to "238", if the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", a normal reach A (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) that is a miss other than before and after is determined, and when the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", a super reach A (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) that is a miss other than before and after is determined, just like when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "202" to "208". When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", a super reach C (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) that is a miss other than before and after is determined. As described above, a normal reach A that is a miss other than before and after, and a super reach A and C that are a miss other than before and after may also notify jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are then obtained during the start winning processing.

The size and range of each counter described above are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to set the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 to different prime numbers, and to set the numbers to be unsynchronized under any circumstances.

Next, an example of the variable display performance of the main decorative pattern SZ will be described. Fig. 13(a) is an example of the variable display performance of the normal big win reach A and the normal miss reach A, and Fig. 13(b) is an example of the variable display performance of the super big win reach A and the super miss reach A.

First, the jackpot normal reach A and the miss normal reach A will be explained. The third symbol display device 42 displays the main decorative symbol SZ in front of the normal background (i.e., the normal screen 43a is displayed). Based on the occurrence of the start winning, the display of the variation of the main decorative symbol SZ starts. This variation display is a high-speed variation (i.e., the high-speed variation screen 43c is displayed). During the high-speed variation, the jackpot suggestion information may be notified. Whether or not to notify may be determined by lottery based on the value of the variation type counter CS2. The notification of the jackpot suggestion information is first performed by displaying an image prompting the press of the decision button 81 during the high-speed variation, and by pressing the decision button 81 while this image is displayed, an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result is displayed. For example, when an image saying "Chance!" is displayed, it suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot result. As a result, when an image prompting the press of the decision button 81 is displayed during the high-speed variation, the player presses the decision button 81 to know whether there is a high possibility of a jackpot result. After the notification image is erased, the main decorative symbols SZ in the right and left columns are displayed as stopped combinations (i.e., the normal reach display screen 43f is displayed), and either a jackpot or a missed reach combination is displayed as a confirmed combination (i.e., the all symbols stopped screen 43e is displayed).

Instead of an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result, a movable part may be activated by pressing the decision button 81.

Next, the jackpot super reach A and miss super reach A will be explained. Based on the occurrence of a start winning, the high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ starts. During the high-speed fluctuation, an image is displayed encouraging the user to press the decision button 81, and by pressing the decision button 81, an image is displayed suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result. After the main decorative pattern SZ is stopped and displayed as a reach combination, the pattern indicating the reach combination changes to the development pattern HZ, and the reach development performance is executed (i.e., the development reach display screen 43g is displayed). For example, in the reach development performance, if the player PY clears the mission, a jackpot result is obtained, and if the player PY fails the mission, a reach miss result is obtained. After this performance, either a jackpot or a reach miss combination is stopped and displayed by the development pattern HZ, and then the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed as a confirmation.

Another example of the variable display effect will be explained. Figure 14 (a) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach C and the miss normal reach C, and (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach E and the miss super reach E.

First, the big win super reach C and the miss super reach C will be described. In the super reach C, the reach development performance is executed for a longer time than in the super reach A. For example, in the super reach C, a confrontation performance between the player PY and the enemy character TK in the reach development performance is displayed. In addition, in the super reach C, as a part of the button suggestion performance, a selection image is displayed in which a predetermined selection and decision are made using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82. Specifically, at the start of the confrontation performance, a character selection performance is executed using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82. For example, a plurality of selectable players PY are displayed, and the preferred player PY is selected using the selection button 82 and decided by the decision button 81. The enemy character TK displayed after the selection of the player PY is determined to be an appropriate character according to the possibility (expectation) of a big win result. As a result, whether the player PY is likely to win (whether a big win result is likely) is suggested depending on the relationship between the player PY and the enemy character TK. When the player PY and the enemy character TK are decided, they attack each other. If the result is a jackpot, an image that makes the player PY confident of victory (an image in which the surroundings of the player PY shine) is displayed. If the result is a miss, an image that makes the player PY expect to lose (an image in which the surroundings of the enemy character TK shine black) is displayed. After this kind of performance, either a jackpot or miss combination is displayed statically using the development pattern HZ, and then the main decorative pattern SZ confirms the combination.

Instead of an image that gives the player PY confidence that he will win, a movable prop may be activated.

Next, the jackpot super reach E and the miss super reach E will be explained. In the super reach E, the reach development performance is executed for a longer time than in the super reach A. For example, in the super reach E, the showdown performance is also displayed in the reach development performance. In the showdown performance, a character selection performance is executed. In the case of a reach miss result, an image predicting the defeat of the player PY is displayed. In the case of a jackpot result, an image predicting the defeat of the player PY is displayed, followed by an image encouraging the player PY to press the decision button 81. When the decision button 81 is pressed, the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 flashes intensely with strong light emission (strong light emission flashing screen 43g-1). After the display screen 42a flashes, an image confirming the victory of the player PY is displayed, and the jackpot combination is displayed with the development pattern HZ and then confirmed with the main decoration pattern SZ.

Instead of the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 flashing vigorously with strong light, the movable part may be driven by pressing the decision button 81.

In this embodiment, a specific effect is performed once during each reach effect, but a specific effect may be performed multiple times in succession. For example, during one variable display game, a pseudo consecutive effect may be performed in which a reach miss effect is performed multiple times in succession, or a consecutive notice effect may be performed in which a notice effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is performed in succession. The numerical information related to the game in the embodiment described below may be the number of pseudo consecutive effects or the number of consecutive notices. In this case, the device is equipped with a function for counting the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number of consecutive previews, a third pattern display device 42 capable of displaying the information on the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number of consecutive previews, a function for executing the pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews based on the decision to execute the pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews, and a function for selecting the period during which the pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews are performed based on the decision to execute the pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews, and the length of the period for the pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews changes depending on the information on the number of pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews, and the longer the period for the pseudo consecutive wins or the consecutive previews, the more information the player will include.

Next, we will explain the ending effects. Figure 15 shows a table for determining the ending effect pattern.

After the big win round play ends, the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending performance that displays images to give the player a rest, congratulate the player for reaching the final round, suggest or inform the player of information useful for the game, and inform the player of various cautions. In this embodiment, the ending performance displays images combined in a predetermined pattern. The ending information 44j that constitutes the ending performance pattern includes, for example, next game state suggestion information 44w (indicated as "one more time" or "chance" in the figure) that suggests a transition to a probability change state or time-saving state after the big win round play ends, manufacturer information 44x (indicated as "logo" in the figure) that indicates the manufacturer, card removal forget prevention information 44y (indicated as "prepaid card" in the figure) that warns the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card, and addiction prevention information 44z (indicated as "enjoy moderately" in the figure) that warns the player that pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation. The next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal prevention information 44y, and the addiction prevention information 44z are displayed for, for example, 10 seconds each, and the manufacturer information 44x is displayed for 5 seconds.

The ending performance of the 16R guaranteed jackpot on special chart 1 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in that order over a 35-second period. In the case of the 16R guaranteed jackpot on special chart 2, the ending performance is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal reminder information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in that order over a 30-second period.

The ending performance of the 8R special jackpot on special chart 1 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order over a 25-second period. The ending performance of the 8R special jackpot on special chart 2 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order over a 20-second period. The ending performance of the 8R normal jackpot on special charts 1 and 2 is similar to the 8R special jackpot ending performance on special charts 1 and 2 described above, except that the next game state suggestion information 44w is "chance" (indicating that the next game state will be a time-saving state).

As shown in FIG. 10, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used to draw the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of "0" to "250", for example, and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described below) and is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal symbol start winning device 34. There are 149 random number values that can be used to win, and the range is "5 to 153".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter (value = 0 to 250) similar to the second symbol random number counter C4, and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 19) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described later), and is stored in the second symbol reserved storage area of RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start winning device 34.

In other words, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol reserved storage area that is separate from the reserved ball storage area, and the second symbol reserved storage area is provided with one execution area for the second symbol and four reserved areas for the second symbol (second symbol reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the values of the second symbol random number counter C4 in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls in the normal symbol start winning device 34.

The second symbol missing pattern counter C5 is updated once each time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 19 described later is executed once, and its value is updated and acquired in the second symbol missing pattern buffer of the counter buffer, and when the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol reserved ball storage area, the second symbol missing pattern counter C5 updated and acquired in the second symbol missing pattern buffer is also stored in the second symbol reserved ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is a failure, the display unit 41b with "x" drawn on it is lit and displayed based on the value of the second symbol missing pattern counter C5 in the second symbol reserved ball storage area. Note that the second symbol missing pattern counter C5 may not be provided, and the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4. In other words, if the second symbol random number counter C4 wins, the display section 41a with a "○" is lit, and if it loses, the display section 41b with an "X" is lit.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 16 to 26. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing which is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing which is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing which is started by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing, the start winning processing executed in the timer interrupt processing, the look-ahead lottery processing executed in the start winning processing, and the NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the main processing.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 22, first, in step S601, the process of reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("599" in this embodiment), and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

Then, in the next step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and are each cleared to "0" when they increment by 1 after their counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "599", "9", and "250", respectively). The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

Then, in step S604, the start winning process is executed in response to the winning of the start winning device 33a for special chart 1 and the start winning device 33b for special chart 2. This start winning process will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 23, which will be described later.

Then, in step S605, launch control processing is executed. This launch control processing is explained below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

Specifically, in step S721, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control device 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. 8. If the launch permission signal S7 is ON, proceed to step S722, and if it is OFF, terminate this process. In step S722, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 outputs the launch control signal S8 and ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312, controls the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and proceeds to step S723. In step S723, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a launch operation command indicating that a game ball launch operation has been performed. After performing the launch control process in this manner, the CPU 501 temporarily terminates this timer interrupt process.

The start-up winning process performed by the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to Figure 23.

In step S701, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the game ball has won the special game 1 start winning device 33a or the special game 2 start winning device 33b based on the detection information of the operation port switch. If the game ball has won, the process proceeds to step S702, and if not, the process ends.

In step S702, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the number of pending balls N in operation of the first pattern display device 40 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of pending balls N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S703; if not, the process ends. In step S703, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 increments the number of pending balls N in operation by 1. In step S704, the main control device 261 converts the number of pending balls N incremented in step S703 into a pending ball storage area designation command, and sets it so that it can be output to the sub-control device 262 together with a pre-reading variable pattern designation command described later.

In step S705, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 obtains random numbers related to the winning or losing of the first symbol and the determination of the variation pattern of the third symbol. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the first free area of the first to fourth reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. 10.

In step S706, the main control unit 261 executes a pre-reading lottery process that is carried out prior to the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 19 described above.

The advance reading lottery process will be explained with reference to Figure 24.

In step S711, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a look-ahead lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot is reached at the time of storage based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is in a special state or a normal state). The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as described above.

In step S712, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the advance lottery is a jackpot, it determines which jackpot pattern will be selected, which corresponds to the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area.

In step S713, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the fluctuation pattern (jackpot presentation pattern) to be used when a jackpot occurs. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in that order, in the same manner as in the fluctuation start process described above, and determines in advance the fluctuation pattern.

If it is determined in step S711 that the result of the advance reading lottery is not a jackpot, in step S714, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the result of the advance reading lottery to a stop pattern that will stop and display a losing pattern.

In step S715, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 predetermines the fluctuation pattern (miss performance pattern) to be used when a miss occurs, and sets the miss fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and predetermines the fluctuation pattern.

In step S716, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the addition of the presentation time, that is, the addition of the presentation time of the big win variation pattern determined in step S713 or the miss variation pattern determined in step S715. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, a variation pattern is determined in advance, including an increase in presentation time due to the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the middle decorative pattern row on the third pattern display device 42 sliding to a stop (an increase in the time until the decorative pattern of the middle decorative pattern row slides and is displayed stopped).

In step S717, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern previously determined in step S713, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the miss fluctuation pattern previously determined in step S505.

In step S718, if steps S712 and S713 have been passed, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the big win pattern of the first pattern display device 40 determined in step S712 (the "first specific win pattern," "second specific win pattern," or "non-specific win pattern"); if steps S714 and S715 have been passed, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the losing pattern of the first pattern display device 40 determined in advance in step S714.

In step S719, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a performance time addition designation command corresponding to the performance time addition previously determined in step S716, and ends this process.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal S1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 26. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 26 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main control unit 261. For a predetermined time after the power outage signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the main control unit 261 can execute its processing, and the NMI interrupt process is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process in FIG. 26, in step S801, information about the occurrence of a power outage is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, a flag is set for the information about the occurrence of a power outage and the information is stored in the backup area.

Next, the main processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started in response to a reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes an initial setting process associated with power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. In step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a wait process, for example, for about one second, to wait for the sub-control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

Then, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON) or not, and if it is OFF, proceeds to step S105, and if it is ON, proceeds to step S113. In the following step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether the power failure occurrence information flag is set or not). Also, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates a RAM judgment value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 503. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return to the initial state when you turn on the power, for example when the hall opens for business, you turn on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 323 is ON, the process moves to the initialization process of RAM 503 (step S113, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the process moves to the initialization process of RAM 503 (step S113, etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization process of RAM 503.

In the next step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. In this manner, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

In addition, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power-on command to the sub-control board 262a. This power-on command includes a command for identifying the type of pachinko machine, so that the sub-side, such as the sub-control board 262a or the display control device 45, can identify the type of machine based on the content of the command.

In addition, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt permission and transitions to normal processing (see FIG. 17) described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power outage recovery) is executed, provided that the power outage occurrence information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step S108, the power outage occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sends a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Details will be described later, but when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control device 261, it returns and starts payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a command to return the sub-control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit). Furthermore, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 17) described later. For example, even if a power failure occurs during normal processing, the process will be executed up to the last step of the normal processing (the "RAM access prohibited" step shown in FIG. 17) before entering the power failure state, so that after power is restored, the process will be executed from the first step of normal processing, step S201.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 17. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 17, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as commands updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines whether there is winning detection information, and if there is winning detection information, it transmits a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls to the payout control device 311. In addition, in conjunction with the first pattern change display (change display of the first segment display section 40a) of the first pattern display device 40, the third pattern display device 42 also displays the change of the decorative pattern (third pattern), and when the first pattern display device 40 displays the change of the first pattern, a change pattern designation command, a decorative pattern designation command, a full stop command (confirmation command), etc. are transmitted to the sub control device 262 in the external output process.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the first symbol starts to change, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of commands are sent for each external output process of normal processing (i.e., three every 4 msec) in the order of change pattern designation command → performance command (a command for designating changes in change time, etc.) → decorative symbol designation command, and a full stop command is sent when the change time has elapsed. Also, after the first symbol starts to change, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of commands are sent for each external output process of normal processing (i.e., three every 4 msec) in the order of change pattern designation command → performance command → decorative symbol designation command, and a full stop command is sent when the change time has elapsed.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) that is variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and then transmitted from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. Based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command, the display control device 45 controls the third pattern display device 42 to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The decorative pattern designation command is a command for designating whether the varying display performance of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42 will be a first jackpot, a second jackpot, a third jackpot, or a miss. The decorative pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and then transmitted from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the display of the third pattern display device 42 so that the display result of the varying pattern of the decorative pattern is a result (first jackpot, second jackpot, third jackpot) according to the decorative pattern designation command transmitted.

The all stop command is a command to instruct the stopping of the changing pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) displayed in a changing manner on the third pattern display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and then transmitted from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. Based on the all stop command transmitted, the display control device 45 controls the third pattern display device 42 to stop displaying the changing pattern of the decorative pattern.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 may also transmit a variation pattern designation command and a performance command (a command for designating a change in the variation time, etc.) to the sub-control device 262 during the external output process of the normal process (step S201). In other words, the time to be added to the variation time (the time added due to the sliding performance of the decorative pattern described above) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, and the performance command is used to appropriately instruct the sub-control device 262 on such an added time. Therefore, after the first pattern starts to vary, a predetermined number of commands (e.g., three) are sent out each time the external output process of the normal process is performed (i.e., three every 4 msec) in the order of variation pattern designation command → performance command → decorative pattern designation command, and a full stop command may be sent out when the variation time has elapsed.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are each incremented by 1, and are each cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment). The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. 10.

Next, in step S203 in FIG. 17, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal, and lower tray full signal received from the payout control device 311. Then, in step S204, a first pattern change process is executed to cause the first pattern display device 40 to display the first pattern change. This first pattern change process determines whether a jackpot has occurred and sets the change pattern of the first pattern. However, details of the first pattern change process will be described later.

In step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a next game state setting process to set the jackpot lottery probability in the next game state after the jackpot game state ends. The next game state setting process will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a large prize opening opening/closing process to open or close the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 in the large prize round game state. That is, the large prize opening 32a is opened for each round in the large prize state, and for each round, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 32a has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 32a. Then, when either of these conditions is met, the opening of the large prize opening 32a for that round is stopped and closed, and if there are remaining rounds, the opening of the large prize opening 32a is repeated for the remaining number of rounds.

In the embodiment described later, a gaming machine is provided with a function for counting the number of variations and other game-related numbers, and when a predetermined count is reached, makes it easier for a gaming ball to enter a predetermined ball entry section that was difficult to enter until the predetermined count was reached. In this type of gaming machine, the object of counting is a specific advantageous gaming state after the end of a big win round (for example, the number of variations during a probability variation state without a support state such as a latent probability variation), but regardless of whether or not it is a specific advantageous gaming state, it may also be a machine that counts the number of variations until the next big win occurs after the end of a big win round. In other words, in this type of gaming machine, the number of times that a player is stuck after the end of a big win round may be counted, and when a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) is reached, a time-saving state may be generated from the gaming state at that time (for example, a normal gaming state) until a specified number of times (for example, 901 to 1000 times) is reached. This makes it easier to enter the electric chute until the specified number of times is reached, so it can function as a rescue when a player is stuck.

In addition, the object of the count is not limited to the number of times the latent high probability change state changes, but if the advantageous game state after the end of a jackpot round includes both a predetermined number of times of time-saving states and a predetermined number of times of high probability change states, the number of times the time-saving states and the high probability change states may be counted.

In other words, in this type of gaming machine, during the time-saving state, the electric chute opens frequently and for a long time, so the game balls are often picked up, making it difficult for the game balls to enter the attacker for small prizes downstream, but when the number of fluctuations exceeds 100 times, the time-saving state is exhausted, and the state changes to only the special probability state from the 101st to 200th times. In the special probability state, the electric chute opens frequently, but the opening time is normal, so the game balls that do not enter the electric chute flow down to the attacker for small prizes downstream, making it easier for them to enter the attacker for small prizes. This allows the machine to win prize balls in the small prize game state in accordance with the timing when the advantageous game state after the end of the big prize round game changes from the special probability state with time-saving state to the special probability state without time-saving state.

In step S207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. In brief, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start winning device 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time and the second symbol is displayed on the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41. Then, the second symbol is selected by lottery based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4. When the second symbol is in a winning state, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an opening process of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b, which opens the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b for a predetermined time, as shown in step S208. Although not described, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3.

In addition, in step S209, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not power failure information has been set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power failure information flag is set). If power failure information has not been set, the process proceeds to step S210, and if power failure information has been set, the process proceeds to step S213.

Then, in step S210, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2, and the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S211, S212). That is, in step S211, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to "0" when it is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("599" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503. Similarly, the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). The updated value of the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

In addition, in step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to "0" when the counter values are incremented by 1 after reaching their maximum values (in this embodiment, "198", "240", and "162"). The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S208 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it becomes possible to randomly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the second pattern random number counter C4).

Also, in step S209, if the power failure occurrence information is set and the process proceeds to step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Next, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power failure notification command indicating that the power has been immediately cut to the other control devices. Next, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops outputting control signals. Next, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates a RAM judgment value and saves it in the backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of the RAM 503. Next, in step S217, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

Next, the first pattern change process in step S204 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In FIG. 18, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not a jackpot is currently being won. The jackpot includes the period during the special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and the period during a predetermined time after the special game ends. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the first symbol display device 40. If the jackpot is not being won and the first symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S403, where the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of pending balls N of the first symbol display device 40 is greater than "0". At this time, if the jackpot is being won or the number of pending balls N is "0", the process ends as is.

Also, if it is not during a jackpot, nor during the variable display of the first symbol, and the number of active reserved balls N>0, proceed to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number of active reserved balls N. In step S405, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the reserved ball storage area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved 2 urea, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be explained in detail using the flowchart in FIG. 19. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is in a special state or a normal state), and as mentioned above, in the normal low probability state, the winning value (2 balls) is "150,450" out of the values "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, and in the high probability state, the winning value (4 balls) is "50,150,350,450".

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that there is a jackpot, in step S502, it determines the jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, i.e., which of the first to third symbols to be displayed on the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 should be selected. In other words, it determines the jackpot pattern ("first jackpot pattern", "second jackpot pattern", or "third jackpot pattern") corresponding to the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 based on the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table or special chart 2 jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 11) which shows the correspondence between the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 and the patterns.

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the fluctuation pattern (jackpot presentation pattern) at the time of the jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in that order, without using the stop pattern selection counter C3, and determines the fluctuation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2, it is determined whether the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 is displayed in the "stop pattern 3" of a normal jackpot (non-specific jackpot), or whether the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 is displayed in the "stop pattern 4" of a guaranteed jackpot (specific jackpot). The type of the "stop pattern 3" or "stop pattern 4" determined in this way is further determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In other words, a group of rough decorative pattern variation patterns, such as the reach type of the decorative pattern (third pattern) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., is determined. Next, from the group of rough decorative pattern variation patterns determined in this way, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a more detailed decorative pattern variation mode is determined, such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (in this embodiment, the middle decorative pattern) stops after the reach occurs to a predetermined time. In addition, the following relationships in the case of a jackpot, that is, the relationship between the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop pattern time, are each specified in advance by a jackpot table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the reel is not a jackpot, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the stop pattern to a losing pattern, i.e., a stop pattern that causes the first segment display section 40a of the first pattern display device 40 to stop and display the fourth symbol.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the fluctuation pattern (miss performance pattern) at the time of a miss, and sets the miss fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, it is determined which of the stop patterns to use: "Stop pattern 1" which is a "reach before and after" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops just one before and after the reach decorative pattern after the reach occurs in the third pattern display device 42, "Stop pattern 2" which is a "reach other than a reach before and after" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops other than before and after the reach decorative pattern after the reach occurs, and "Stop pattern 0" which is a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs. For example, if the determined stop pattern is "Stop pattern 1" which is a reach before and after, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative pattern (third pattern) such as a normal reach or a super reach is specified is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, and a rough variation pattern group of the decorative pattern is determined. It is assumed here that a normal reach is determined. Next, from the group of normal reach variation patterns of the rough decorative patterns thus determined, another variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a more detailed decorative pattern variation mode is determined, such as setting the elapsed time from the occurrence of a reach until the final stop decorative pattern (in this embodiment, the middle decorative pattern) stops to a predetermined time. Note that the following relationships in the case of a miss, that is, the relationship between the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop pattern time, are each predefined by a table for misses, etc.

In this embodiment, one of the above-mentioned tables for losses is, for example, one that is adopted when the probability is low, the fluctuation time reduction function of the first pattern display device 40 is in effect, and the number of pending operations of the first pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the first pattern is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", this corresponds to no reach (complete miss), "202 to 208" corresponds to a reach for a miss before or after, and "209 to 238" corresponds to a reach other than a miss before or after.

Next, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the addition of the presentation time, that is, determines the addition of the presentation time of the big win variation pattern determined in step S503 or the miss variation pattern determined in step S505. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, a variation pattern is determined that includes an increase in presentation time due to the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the middle decorative pattern row on the third pattern display device 42 sliding to a stop (an increase in the time until the decorative pattern of the middle decorative pattern row slides and is displayed stopped).

In addition, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in step S503, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the miss fluctuation pattern determined in step S505.

Next, in step S508, if steps S502 and S503 have been passed, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the big win pattern of the first pattern display device 40 determined in step S502 (the "first specific win pattern," "second specific win pattern," or "non-specific win pattern"); if steps S504 and S505 have been passed, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the losing pattern of the first pattern display device 40 determined in step S504.

Next, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a performance time addition designation command corresponding to the performance time addition determined in step S506.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, if step S402 is YES, i.e., the first symbol is being displayed while changing, the process proceeds to step S407, where the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the change time of the first symbol has elapsed. This change time of the first symbol is determined based on the change pattern and the performance time addition determined as described above with reference to FIG. 19, that is, the change time of the first symbol is determined according to the change pattern of the first symbol, and when this change time has elapsed, step S407 is determined to be YES. If the change time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the varying display of the first pattern on the first pattern display device 40. In other words, the varying display of the first segment display section 40a of the first pattern display device 40 is continued, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variable display of the first symbol and sets the stopped symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. In other words, if the first jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, this first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed with the first symbol. If the second jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, this first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed with the second symbol. If the third jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, this first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed with the third symbol. If a losing symbol is determined in step S504 of FIG. 19, after the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 changes, the first segment display unit 40a stops and displays the fourth symbol (indicating a loss).

Next, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a full stop command to instruct the stopping of the changing pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) displayed in a changing manner on the third pattern display device 42, and ends this process.

Next, the next game state setting process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S561, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not a guaranteed jackpot has been reached based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If a guaranteed jackpot has been reached, the process proceeds to step S562; if not, the process proceeds to step S564.

In addition, if the gaming machine generates a special jackpot by passing through a specific area (V area) in the jackpot opening 32a, the determination of whether or not a special jackpot has occurred may be made based on whether or not the gaming ball has entered the V area.

In the embodiment described later, the first counting information based on the operation in the first mode of the operating means is counted, and when the first counting information counts a first predetermined number, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition based on the operation in the second mode is achieved in a state where the operation is changed to the operation in the second mode, and when the predetermined condition is achieved, an event that makes it easier to enter the V area is generated as a specific event. This specific event may be an indication that the variable display performance being executed is a performance with a high probability of winning. For example, the number of consecutive hits information (first counting information) based on the consecutive hits of the decision button 81 is counted, and when the number of consecutive hits information counts a predetermined number (first predetermined number), it is determined whether or not the energy full charge (predetermined condition) based on the long press operation of the decision button 81 is achieved in a state where the operation is changed to the long press operation of the decision button 81 (operation in the second mode), and when it is determined that the energy is full, it may be suggested that the performance has a high probability of winning. Also, if it is determined that a predetermined condition for performing a one-hit kill technique has been met when, for example, a long joystick pull has been performed instead of a long press of the decision button 81, it may be possible to indicate that this is a performance with a high probability of a big win.

In step S562, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the table for drawing the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2 shown in FIG. 11 to the value at the time of high probability, and proceeds to step S563. In step S563, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a high probability support state transition command, and ends this process. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of high probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time of the next jackpot determination.

In step S564, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not a normal jackpot has been reached based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If a normal jackpot has been reached, the process proceeds to step S565; if not, the process ends.

In step S565, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 of the special chart 1 and special chart 2 jackpot lottery table to the low probability value, and proceeds to step S566. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the low probability value as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when determining the next jackpot.

In step S566, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the reference in step S564 was the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table. If the reference is the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, the process proceeds to step S567; if not, the process proceeds to step S569. In step S567, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a low-probability support state transition command. The low-probability support state transition command is a command that indicates the occurrence of 100 time-saving states after the end of the jackpot round play of a normal jackpot.

In step S568, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the reference in step S564 was the table for the special jackpot 2 lottery. If the reference is the table for the special jackpot 2 lottery, the process proceeds to step S569; if not, the process ends. In step S569, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a low probability state transition command. The low probability state transition command is a command indicating that no time reduction will be applied after the end of the jackpot round of a normal jackpot.

Next, we will explain the process of opening and closing the big prize opening in step S206 mentioned above. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening.

In step S581, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the round start flag is on. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S583; if not, the process ends. In step S583, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is time to start the nth round (the first round if it is the first). If it is time to start the nth round, the process proceeds to step S585; if not, the process ends.

In step S585, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the large prize opening 32a, and the process proceeds to step S587. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the solenoid to open the door of the large prize opening 32a in the variable prize device 32. In step S587, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not it is the end timing of the nth round. The end timing of each round, i.e., the opening time of the large prize opening 32a, is predetermined based on the value of the large prize pattern counter C2. When the value of the large prize pattern counter C2 is 90 to 99, the opening time of the large prize opening 32a is set to a short time that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter. When the value of the large prize pattern counter C2 is other than the above, a sufficient time is set for the upper limit number of game balls to enter.

If it is the end timing of the nth round in step S587, proceed to step S589, otherwise terminate this process. In step S589, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the large prize opening 32a and proceeds to step S591. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the solenoid to close the door of the large prize opening 32a in the variable prize device 32. The time for which the large prize opening 32a is closed between each round, i.e., the interval time between rounds, is determined in advance.

In step S591, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S593; if not, the process returns to step S583. In step S593, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the round start flag and ends this process.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step S901, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets a stack address and an interrupt mode. In step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

Then, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 determines whether or not power failure information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. Also, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 calculates a RAM judgment value, and in the following step S906, it determines whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power failure, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of the RAM 513 is saved correctly.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial settings of the RAM 513 when power is restored. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is sent from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and when the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command from the main control device 261, in step S907, it performs the initial settings of the RAM 513 when power is restored. In other words, it initializes the RAM area and starts controlling the payout of game balls.

Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control unit 261 is initialized and a payout initialization command is sent from the main control unit 261 to the payout control unit 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control unit 261.

Next, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 performs initial settings of the peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral devices are timer control devices called CTCs (Counter/Timer Circuits), and the CTCs are set to a predetermined value to generate timer interrupts every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Next, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the interrupt permission and proceeds to the payout control process described below.

On the other hand, if no power outage information is set in step S904, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 similarly clears all areas of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910) and performs initialization processing (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 28.

In FIG. 28, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores commands from the main control device 261. The commands stored here include 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 balls), a payout return command for instructing the payout control device 311 to start payout control, and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout control device 311 to initialize payout, totaling 17 types of commands.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a payout permission has been received. In other words, it determines whether or not a payout return command or a prize ball command has been received. In addition, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks a state return switch (not shown), and if it determines that a state return operation should be started, it executes the state return operation.

Then, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 executes the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full/unfull state according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray becomes full, the setting of the lower tray full state is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the setting of the lower tray full/unfull state is executed.

In addition, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 executes the setting of the tank ball absent state or the tank ball absent release state according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absent state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absent switch, and when the tank ball is absent, the tank ball absent state is executed, and when the tank ball is no longer absent, the tank ball absent release state is executed.

Then, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 determines whether or not there is a condition that requires notification, and if there is, notifies the user via a 7-segment LED provided in the dispensing control device 311.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls are not in a payout-disabled state and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (steps S1007 and S1008 are both NO), the process proceeds to step S1009 and the prize ball control process (FIG. 29 described below) is started. Also, if the prize balls are in a payout-disabled state or the total number of prize balls is 0 (either step S1007 or S1008 is YES), the process proceeds to the loan ball payout process.

Then, in steps S1010 to S1012, the loan ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the loan ball is not in a state where it cannot be paid out and a loan ball payout request has been received from the card unit (steps S1010: NO, S1011: YES), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the loan ball control process (FIG. 30 described below) is started. If the loan ball is not in a state where it cannot be paid out or a loan ball payout request has not been received (steps S1010: YES or S1011: NO), the subsequent vibration motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 executes control of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 3) (vibration motor control). Then, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1015, and if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 sets information on the occurrence of a power outage, and in step S1016, creates a RAM judgment value. Then, the process enters an infinite loop in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 29, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out prize balls. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a stop process for the payout motor 358a is performed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and whether the game balls are being counted normally is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game balls are not being counted normally, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and execute a stop process for the payout motor 358a, and then the process returns to the payout control process in FIG. 28.

Furthermore, if the game ball count is normal, proceed to step S1106, and determine whether the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the total number of winning balls and payout has been completed. If payout has been completed, execute the stop process of the payout motor 358a in step S1107, and then return to the payout control process in FIG. 28.

In addition, in the ball loan control process shown in FIG. 30, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to dispense the loaned balls. In the following step S1202, it is determined whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, where the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and a stop process for the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether the game balls are being counted normally is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game balls are not being counted normally, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and execute a stop process for the payout motor 358a, and then the process returns to the payout control process in FIG. 28.

Furthermore, if the game ball count is normal, proceed to step S1206, and determine whether the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the specified number of loaned balls (25 balls) and payout has been completed. If payout has been completed, stop processing of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then return to the payout control processing of FIG. 28.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 at the time of power cut due to a power outage or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 by this NMI interrupt. Similarly, for a predetermined time after the power outage signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the payout control device 311 processing can be executed. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal S1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 26. The contents are as explained in FIG. 26.

Next, the main processing and normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to Figs. 31 and 32. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, and this main processing is started in response to a reset when the power is turned on. Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262.

First, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the initial setting process associated with power-on. Specifically, it performs port setting (port I/O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 ms interval timer, LCD command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (sub-command strobe interrupt).

In addition, in step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power-off process is incomplete. Specifically, it determines whether all of the lamps (such as the circular illumination section 102 and the central illumination section 103) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are turned off and whether the speaker is muted. If the power-off process is incomplete, the process proceeds to step S2004; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2003.

Next, in step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is destroyed, and if it is destroyed, proceeds to step S2004, and if not, proceeds to step S2007. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs a read/write check of the RAM area of the sub-controller 262. Then, in step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal or not. If the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal, proceeds to step S2006, and if it is abnormal, proceeds to step S2012. In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 writes data for checking RAM destruction for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM destruction check data to determine that the RAM is destroyed if there is an abnormality in reading the data.

Then, in step S2007, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power has been turned on after being turned off. If the power has been turned on after being turned off, the process proceeds to step S2008; if not, the process proceeds to step S2009.

In step S2008, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area that stores information that would cause problems for the system if the data were cleared, and is an area for information that should be kept unless the RAM area is destroyed. Examples include a subcommand reception buffer and power-on information. When the main control unit 261 turns off the power and the sub-controller 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main control unit 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S2009, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets interrupt permission. In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the initial values of the RAM of the sub-control device 262. In step S2011, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the performance initialization flag to "1" and transitions to normal processing shown in FIG. 32.

In step S2012, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a RAM abnormality notification and enters an infinite loop. For example, the notification may be made by turning on a specific lamp unconditionally.

As shown in FIG. 32, in step S2101, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2102; if not, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp output processing. Specifically, it performs lamp output in accordance with the changing pattern presentation of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S2103, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on command is issued to notify the user for 30 seconds. Specifically, the power-on notification is issued by displaying an image on the third pattern display device 42 notifying the user that the power has been turned on, or by lighting the lamps on the illumination unit 300 in a pattern notifying the user that the power has been turned on.

In step S2104, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a customer waiting performance. Specifically, it switches between titles and still images. In other words, it displays a so-called demo screen.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of updating the display of the number of reserved items for the first pattern change. Specifically, this process of updating the display of the number of reserved items is a process for displaying the display corresponding to the reserved lamp 40c of the first pattern display device 40 on the third pattern display device 42 as well.

In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring and presentation processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring and presentation processing is intended to provide model-specific presentations in response to pressing of a frame button in pachinko machines that are equipped with frame buttons that can be pressed by the player (for example, the up selection button 71, down selection button 72, frame button 80, etc., as shown in FIG. 1). Therefore, this processing is not necessary in pachinko machines that do not have such frame buttons.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp editing processing. Specifically, the CPU 551 performs processing to edit the lamp lighting pattern in the illumination unit 300 that corresponds to (synchronizes with) the changing pattern presentation of the decorative pattern in the third pattern display device 42.

In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs sound editing and output processing. Specifically, the CPU 551 performs processing to play a sound (output voice, music, sound effects, etc.) that corresponds to (synchronizes with) the decorative pattern change pattern presentation on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a performance execution management process. Specifically, it performs time management to synchronize the lamps, sounds, and liquid crystal performance (the decorative pattern changing pattern performance on the third pattern display device 42).

When this LCD presentation (for example, the reach display presentation of the jackpot/miss super reach A to E) is to be synchronized with a presentation in which the operable illumination unit in the game board 30 described below operates as a movable part, a part operation pattern designation command equivalent to the display variation pattern designation command is set and transmitted to the drive control unit that operates the movable part.

In step S2110, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of a random number that determines the decorative pattern variation pattern and the sound lamp performance to be performed by the third pattern display device 42. Specifically, this random number may take a value between "0" and "32767", for example, and may return to "0" when it reaches the upper limit value "37268".

In step S2111, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, it performs processing corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main controller 261, it transmits a display command obtained by converting this variation pattern designation command to the display controller 45. The variation pattern designation command may be output as is. When the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a decorative pattern designation command from the main controller 261, it transmits a stop display command obtained by converting this decorative pattern designation command to the display controller 45. When a notice command is generated in addition to the stop display command in the command conversion of the decorative pattern designation command, the notice command is also transmitted to the display controller 45. An example of this notice command is the presence or absence of a school of fish as a notice. When the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a full stop command (confirmation command) from the main controller 261, it transmits the full stop command as is to the display controller 45.

When the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main controller 261, the CPU 551 transmits a lamp lighting command, which is a command converted from the variation pattern designation command, to the illumination controller that controls the illumination unit 300. The CPU 551 also transmits a sound output command, which is a command converted from the variation pattern designation command, to the sound output controller 46 that controls the sound output unit 24.

In step S2112, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a command output process to output a command to the display control device 45, etc. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits various commands, such as the display command and stop display command, to the display control device 45.

In step S2113, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 has been corrupted. If the RAM has not been corrupted, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop.

Here, the customer waiting performance processing of step S2104 shown in FIG. 32 by the sub-control device 262 will be explained using FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing by the sub-control device 262.

In step S2221, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 30 seconds or more have passed since power was turned on. If 30 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2222; if not, the process ends. In step S2222, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a command to display the normal screen on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to step S2223. In step S2223, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1.

In step S2224, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a firing operation command has been received. If not, the process proceeds to step S2225; if so, the process proceeds to step S2229.

In step S2225, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the normal screen was displayed. If 60 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2226; if not, the process ends. In step S2226, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a demo screen display command to cause the third pattern display device 42 to display a demo screen, and then proceeds to steps S2227 and S2228.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the demo screen display flag to 1 in step S2227, and sets the normal screen display flag to 0 in step S2228, and ends this process.

In step S2229 described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the demo screen display flag is 1. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S2230; if not, the process ends. In step S2230, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a normal screen display command for displaying a normal screen on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to steps S2231 and S2232.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1 in step S2231, and sets the demo screen display flag to 0 in step S2232, thereby terminating this process.

Here, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process of step S2106 shown in FIG. 32 by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and rendering process by the sub-control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 34, the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring and performance processing. Specifically, first, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs decision button input monitoring and performance processing. Specifically, when the display screen 42a requests the player to operate the decision button 81 to instruct the execution of a predetermined performance, it is displayed that the execution of a predetermined performance is instructed in response to the player pressing the decision button 81. For example, when the decision button 81 is requested to be pressed, an image corresponding to the decision button 81 and a text image saying "Press!" are displayed.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring and presentation processing, and ends this processing. Specifically, when the player is requested to operate the selection buttons 82, 83 on the display screen 42a to indicate a predetermined selection, a display is displayed indicating that the predetermined selection will be made in response to the selection operation of the selection buttons 82, 83 by the player. For example, when the pressing of the selection buttons 82, 83 is requested, images to be selected (e.g., multiple character images) encouraging the pressing of the selection buttons 82, 83 and a text image such as "Please select a character" are displayed.

Next, the above-mentioned decision button input monitoring and performance process will be described in detail. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and performance process.

In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 monitors input to the decision button 81. In step S2312, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 detects pressing of the decision button 81, it proceeds to the determination steps from step S2313 onwards, and if not, it ends this process.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the normal screen display flag is 1 (step S2313), whether the demo screen display flag is 1 (step S2314), whether the high-speed fluctuation flag is 1 (step S2315), whether the jackpot opening flag is 1 (step S2316), and whether the jackpot ending flag is 1, and if none of these are 1, proceeds to step S2321.

In step S2321, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the button suggestion performance flag is 1. The button suggestion performance flag is set to 1 during the period in which an image requesting pressing of the Decision button 81 is displayed in the button suggestion performance, and is set to 0 when the period ends (the request to press the Decision button 81 ends). If the button suggestion performance flag is 1, proceed to step S2322. If not, end this processing. In step S2322, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the Decision button 81 has been pressed during the period in which the image requesting pressing of the Decision button 81 was displayed, sets a button suggestion performance execution command, and ends this processing.

Return to step S2313. In the determination steps from step S2313 to step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it is time to perform a volume change operation.

Specifically, if the normal screen display flag is 1 (normal screen is being displayed) in step S2313, if the demo screen display flag is 1 (demo screen is being displayed) in step S2314, or if the high speed changing flag is 1 (main decorative pattern SZ is changing at high speed) in step S2315, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2320. In step S2320, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display specific operation screen display command for displaying a specific operation screen. The specific operation screen is a screen for controlling the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24.

Also, if the jackpot opening flag is 1 (opening performance in progress) in step S2316, the process proceeds to step S2317. In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 5 seconds have passed since the start of the opening performance in order to determine whether or not it is time to display a specific operation screen during the opening performance. If 5 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2320, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2318.

Also, if the jackpot ending flag is 1 (ending performance in progress) in step S2318, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 3 seconds have passed before the end of the ending performance in order to determine whether or not the timing has come when a specific operation screen (e.g., a volume operation screen) can no longer be displayed during the ending performance. If 3 seconds have not passed before the end of the ending performance, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned step S2320, where a display command for the specific operation screen for display is set. If not, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned step S2321, but as the determination is negative, the process ends as is.

Next, the details of the selection button input monitoring and rendering process described above will be explained. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the selection button input monitoring and rendering process.

In step S2331, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 monitors input to the selection buttons 82 and 83. In step S2332, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not pressing of the selection buttons 82 and 83 has been detected. If pressing has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2333; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2333, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a specific operation screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334; if not, the process proceeds to step S2335. In step S2334, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the specific operation screen. Specifically, the volume level is increased or decreased.

In step S2335, it is determined whether or not a button suggestion performance selection screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334, and if it is not, the process ends. In step S2334, similar to the above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the button suggestion performance operation screen. Specifically, one of the options is selected on the suggestion performance screen showing options (such as the selection of player PY described above with reference to FIG. 14). This ends the process.

Next, the performance execution management process of step S2109 shown in FIG. 32 by the sub-control device 262 will be explained using FIG. 37.

In step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs processing when a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command is received. The processing when a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command is received is described below. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the processing by the sub-control device 262 when a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command is received.

In step S2411, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a command to specify a variation pattern for pre-reading has been received. If a command to specify a variation pattern for pre-reading has been received, the process proceeds to step S2412; if not, the process ends.

In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a reserved ball storage area designation command has been received. If a reserved ball storage area designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2413; if not, the process ends.

In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the currently received read-ahead variation pattern designation command in the reserved ball storage area designated by the reserved ball storage area designation command. The RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with reserved ball storage areas that correspond to the reserved ball storage areas (execution area and first to fourth reserved areas) provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the received command in one of the first to fourth reserved areas designated by the read-ahead variation pattern designation command.

In step S2414, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the table for selecting reserved display patterns to determine the reserved display pattern that corresponds to the currently received pre-reading variable pattern designation command. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 converts the determined reserved display pattern into a reserved display command for display, and sets it so that this reserved display command for display and the reserved ball storage area designation command described above can be output to the display control device 45. This ends the process.

<Opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process>
Returning to the performance management execution process shown in Fig. 37, in step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs an open/close mode (big win) display setting process. This open/close mode (big win) display setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 39.

In step S2431, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received an opening command, it proceeds to step S2432, otherwise it proceeds to step S2434.

In step S2432, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the display opening command.

In step S2434, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received an ending command, it proceeds to step S2435; otherwise, it terminates this process.

In step S2435, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets an ending command for display and ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the performance management execution process shown in Fig. 37, in step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a variable display mode setting process. This variable display mode setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 40.

In step S2471, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received a variation pattern designation command, it proceeds to step S2472, and if not, it proceeds to step S2480.

In step S2472, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a process to shift the data stored in the reserved ball storage area provided in the RAM 553. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side in sequence. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area → execution area, second reserved area → first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved urea, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

In step S2473, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display variation pattern designation command for displaying on the third pattern display device 42 the decorative pattern variation corresponding to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553, and proceeds to step S2474. The display variation pattern designation command is a display command for executing the decorative pattern variation display in a variation pattern such as, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B, jackpot super reach A-E, front and rear miss normal reach A, B, front and rear miss super reach A-D, non-front and rear miss normal reach A, B, non-front and rear miss super reach A-D, and complete miss A-F.

In step S2474, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 judges whether the variation pattern designation command is a command with a button suggestion effect. Specifically, the variation pattern designation command determines whether or not there is a button suggestion effect using the value of the variation type counter CS2 and the table for selecting the main decorative pattern variation pattern. If there is a button suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S2475, and if not, the process ends.

In step S2475, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display button suggestion effect designation command for displaying a button suggestion effect on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to step S2476. In step S2476, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the button suggestion effect flag to 1.

In step S2477, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a decorative pattern designation command has been received. If a decorative pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2478; if not, the process ends. Instead of determining whether or not a decorative pattern designation command has been received, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 may determine whether or not it is time to end the variable time according to the received variable pattern designation command. In this case, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a variable pattern designation command, it reads the variable time from the command, measures the variable time using a timer, and determines the end timing of the variable time.

In step S2478, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command (confirmation command) to stop (confirm) the varying display of the decorative pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in Fig. 37, in step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a next game state display mode setting process. This next game state display mode setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 41.

In step S2491, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a high probability/support state transition command has been received. If so, the process proceeds to step S2492; if not, the process proceeds to step S2493.

In step S2492, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a high probability/support state transition command for display on the third pattern display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly inform the player of the transition to the high probability/support state, and ends this process.

In step S2493, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a low probability/support state transition command has been received. If so, the process proceeds to step S2494; if not, the process proceeds to step S2495.

In step S2494, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a low probability/support state transition command for display on the third pattern display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly inform the player of the transition to the low probability/support state, and ends this process.

In step S2495, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a low-probability state transition command has been received. If a low-probability state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2496; if not, the process ends.

In step S2496, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a low probability state transition command for display on the third pattern display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly inform the player of the transition to the low probability state, and ends this process.

Next, the normal processing of the display control device 45 and the switching processing of the display mode, etc. will be described with reference to Figs. 42 and 43. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the display control device. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing the switching processing of the display mode, etc. by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 42, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a command input process to input and process various commands transmitted from the sub-control device 262, and then proceeds to step S3002. Examples of the various commands include a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demo start command, and a symbol row change start command.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of switching the display mode, etc. (display of the pattern row variation, big win opening, big win ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, this process of switching the display mode, etc. will be explained using FIG. 43.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a normal screen display command has been received. If a normal screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3102; if not, the process proceeds to step S3103. The display command is a command sent from the sub-control device 262, and is a command to allow the third pattern display device 42 to display a normal screen when the power to the pachinko machine is turned on, or a command to return the display mode of the third pattern display device 42 to the normal mode that displays the normal screen after the end of the jackpot round.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a normal screen on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 9, the normal screen is a screen in which the main decorative symbol SZ and the secondary decorative symbol FZ are displayed in a stopped state in front of the normal background image in a manner that does not constitute a jackpot combination. The normal background image is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a demo screen display command has been received. If a demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3104; if not, the process proceeds to step S3105. The demo screen display command is a command received from the sub-control device 262, and is a command for instructing a switch from the normal screen to the demo screen when a predetermined time has elapsed without the player firing a game ball.

In step S3104, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a demo screen on the third symbol display device 42. The demo screen is an image that introduces the game method and features, and is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3105, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display variation pattern designation command has been received. If a display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3106; if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third pattern display device 42 to start varying the main decorative pattern SZ and the secondary decorative pattern FZ of the three decorative pattern columns L, M, and R shown in FIG. 9, and finally perform a varying display that stops and displays the patterns. Specifically, the variable display control of the main decorative pattern SZ and the secondary decorative pattern FZ is a control that executes steps S3003 to S3007, which will be described later. The pattern column variable display process executed in this step S3106 will be described later.

In step S3107, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display specific operation screen display command set in the above-mentioned step S2320 has been received. If the display specific operation screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3108; if not, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3108, the CPU 521 of the display control device performs the specific operation screen display process described below.

In step S3109, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display opening command has been received. If a display opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3110; if not, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 to start displaying a jackpot opening image. The jackpot opening image is an image that is displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is confirmed as a jackpot combination, and is an image that celebrates the jackpot win. Furthermore, once the jackpot opening display is finished, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 then starts displaying a jackpot round image. The jackpot round image is an image that is displayed during the jackpot round, and is, for example, a bonus image that can only be seen during the jackpot round. The jackpot opening image and jackpot round image are stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45. The jackpot opening/round display process executed in this step S3110 will be described later.

In step S3111, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display ending command has been received. If a display ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3112; if not, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3112, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 to start displaying a jackpot ending image. The jackpot ending image is stored in the video RAM of the display control device 45. The jackpot ending display process executed in step S3112 will be described later.

In step S3113, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a high probability support state transition command for display has been received. If a high probability support state transition command for display has been received, the process proceeds to step S3114; if not, the process proceeds to step S3115.

In step S3114, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the high probability/support state transition display process described below.

In step S3115, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a low probability/support state transition command for display has been received. If a low probability/support state transition command for display has been received, the process proceeds to step S3116; if not, the process ends.

In step S3116, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the low probability/support state transition process for display, which will be described later. This ends the process.

Returning to FIG. 42, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the stopping pattern, and proceeds to step S3004. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a predetermined stopping pattern from among a group of selectable stopping patterns determined by a display variation pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. In the case of a jackpot variation pattern, the predetermined stopping pattern is determined from among odd or even patterns. In the case of a miss variation pattern, the predetermined stopping pattern is determined from among front and rear miss patterns, non-front and rear miss patterns, and complete miss patterns.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to step S3005.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern indicated by the display variable pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. For example, if the command indicates a normal jackpot reach A, the variable display mode corresponding to the normal jackpot reach A is determined. Each of the variable display modes described above is stored in the program ROM of the display control device 45.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the auxiliary effect (the display mode of a suggestive image such as a message to be provided to the player) and proceeds to step S3006. The suggestive image is an image that suggests that the pattern change display executed by the third pattern display device 42 may result in a jackpot combination.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third pattern display device 42.

Specifically, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a pattern change display image on the third pattern display device 42, it controls the display of the third pattern display device 42 so as to perform a pattern change display of the main decorative pattern SZ and the secondary decorative pattern FZ in each decorative pattern column L, M, R according to the change display mode determined in step S3004, and a change display that finally stops according to the stopping pattern determined in step S3003.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control to display a jackpot round image on the third pattern display device 42. If it is a jackpot round image, an image indicating the current round number is displayed along with a bonus image that is displayed during the jackpot round. In addition, if there is a resident image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 42, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control to display the resident image on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs hold display control to execute hold display on the third pattern display device 42.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes processing corresponding to the hold display command for display received from the sub-control device 262. When the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the hold display command for display received from the sub-control device 262, it reads out from the program ROM 552 and executes a hold display execution program corresponding to the hold display pattern indicated by the received hold display command for display. The hold display execution program has predetermined execution patterns of hold displays in the first to fourth hold display areas and execution patterns of hold displays in the hold display areas.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs a process to shift the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area each time the decorative pattern change display finishes execution. Specifically, when the decorative pattern change display finishes execution, the reserved display in the execution display area is erased, and the reserved display is shifted as follows: first reserved display area → execution display area, second reserved display area → first reserved display area, third reserved display area → second reserved display area, fourth reserved display area → third reserved display area. If the number of reserved balls is 0, a reserved display is displayed in the execution display area.

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a specific operation period notification process that notifies the third pattern display device 42 of a period during which a specific operation, such as changing the volume, can be performed. The specific operation period notification process will be described later.

In step S3009, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a right-hit notification process to cause the player to perform a right-hit operation on the third pattern display device 42. The right-hit notification process will be described later.

In step S3010, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a next game state approaching status notification process to notify the third symbol display device 42 that the next game state is approaching. The next game state approaching status notification process will be described later.

In step S3011, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing, such as demo display.

In step S3012, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process returns to step S3001; if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, the pattern row change process described above in step S3106 will be explained using FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the pattern row change process.

In step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the high-speed fluctuation of the right, center, and left main decorative patterns Sz on the third pattern display device 42 for a predetermined period of time. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets a high-speed fluctuation flag, indicating that high-speed fluctuation is occurring, to 1. The high-speed fluctuation flag is set in the RAM 523.

In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the ongoing variable display includes a reach. Specifically, this is determined based on the received display variable pattern designation command. If there is a reach, the process proceeds to step S3204, and if there is no reach, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3204, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is reach timing. If it is reach timing, proceed to step S3205, otherwise proceed to step S3208. In step S3205, the left and right main decorative patterns Sz are stopped at a predetermined reach combination, and the center main decorative pattern Sz continues to change. Since the high-speed change ended when this reach was displayed, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed change flag to 0 in step S3206, and sets the reach change flag to 1 in step S3207, indicating that the reach change is in progress.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a stop display command has been received. If a stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3209; if not, the process ends. In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the main decorative pattern Sz during the reach fluctuation, and stops the right, center, and left main decorative patterns Sz in a predetermined combination. If there is no effect that causes the pattern to change again at this point, the stopped pattern is confirmed. As a result, in step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the reach fluctuation flag to 0.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a stop display command has been received in the non-reach variable display. If a stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3212; if not, the process ends. In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the right, center, and left main decorative patterns Sz in a predetermined combination. If there is no effect of changing again at this point, the stopped patterns are confirmed. As a result, in step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed variable flag to 0. This ends the process.

Next, the specific operation screen display process shown in step S3108 described above will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the specific operation screen display process.

In step S3221, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a specific operation screen on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display specific operation screen display command in step S3107 described above. The specific operation screen is a screen on which the player can turn up or down the volume by operating the selection buttons 82 and 83.

In step S3222, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a selection operation command based on the player pressing the selection buttons 82, 83 has been received. If a selection operation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3223; if not, the process proceeds to step S3224. In step S3223, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a change in the volume on the third pattern display device 42 depending on which of the selection buttons 82, 83 has been operated.

In step S3224, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a decision command based on the player pressing the decision button 81 has been received. If a decision command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3225; if not, the process proceeds to step S3226. In step S3225, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the display of the specific operation screen. In other words, if the decision button 81 is pressed without pressing the selection buttons 82, 83 while the specific operation screen is displayed, the display of the specific operation screen is terminated.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether 30 seconds have passed since the start of displaying the specific operation screen. If 30 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S3225, where the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S3227.

In step S3227, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops. If it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops, the process proceeds to step S3225, and the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. In other words, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops.

In step S3228, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending performance. If it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending performance, the process proceeds to step S3225, where the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. In other words, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 3 seconds before the end of the ending performance.

Next, the jackpot opening round display process shown in step S3110 described above will be explained using FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening round display process.

In step S3231, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a jackpot opening image on the third pattern display device 42 based on the display opening command received in step S3109 described above. Next, in step S3232, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays opening right-hit explanation information explaining the playing method for the next round of play on the third pattern display device 42 during the period of this opening performance.

Next, in step S3233, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the timing for the end of the opening performance has arrived. If it has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3234; if not, the process ends.

In step S3234, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the opening image and displays a jackpot round image. In step S3235, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right-hit information during a round to inform the player to hit right during the jackpot round, along with the display of the jackpot round image. The display mode of this right-hit information during a round is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 in a manner that is noticeable to the player. Here, it is displayed larger than the right-hit information displayed during non-rounds, which will be described later, and is therefore referred to as an enlarged display.

In step S3236, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether 10 balls have been won (winning detection) at the big prize opening 32a (its detection switch) during one round, or whether the opening period of the big prize opening 32a has elapsed for 30 seconds. If 10 balls have been won or the big prize opening 32a has been open for 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3237, otherwise the process returns to step S3234. In step S3237, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the big prize round is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S3238, otherwise the process returns to step S3234.

In step S3238, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the jackpot round image. Next, in step S3239, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display (enlarged display) of the right-hit information during the round. This ends the process.

Next, the jackpot ending display process shown in step S3112 described above will be explained using FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending display process.

In step S3241, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a jackpot ending image on the third symbol display device 42 based on the display ending command received in step S3111 described above. In addition, in step S3242, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot round flag to 1, which indicates that the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

In addition, in step S3243, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the specific operation reception flag during the ending to 1, which indicates that a specific operation is being received during this ending period, and proceeds to step S3244. The specific operation is a volume change operation that is executed by pressing the decision button 81 during the ending period.

In step S3244, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability support state transition flag or the low probability support state transition flag is 1. If the high probability support state transition flag or the low probability support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3245; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3251.

In step S3245, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right-hit information during the ending on the third pattern display device 42 to inform the player that the playing method in the high probability/support state, etc. to which the player is transferred after the ending performance is right-hit. This right-hit information during the ending is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable to the player than right-hit information during the round. For example, the right-hit information during the ending is displayed in a reduced size that is sufficiently smaller than the right-hit information during the round. In addition to displaying the right-hit information during the ending, a countdown display is also performed to count down the ending period.

In step S3246, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period. If it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, the process proceeds to step S3247; if not, the process ends.

In step S3247, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 uses the right-hit information during the ending to display next game state approaching information on the third pattern display device 42 to inform the player that the next game state is approaching. The next game state is the game state to which the player transitions after the ending performance ends, and in this case is the high probability/support state.

In addition, in step S3248, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45, upon notifying that it is 3 seconds until the end of the ending period, sets the ending specific operation reception flag, which indicates that reception of specific operations during the ending period has ended, to 0, and proceeds to step S3249.

In step S3249, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is time for the ending period to end. If it is time for the ending period to end, the process proceeds to step S4250; if not, the process ends.

In step S4250, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the next game state approach information using the right-hit information during the ending. At the same time, the countdown display of the ending period ends as the count time expires. In step S4251, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot ending flag to 0. This ends the process.

Next, the high probability/support state transition display process shown in step S3114 described above will be explained using FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the high probability/support state transition display process.

In step S3261, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag is 0 or not, based on the receipt of the high probability/support state transition command for display in step S3113 described above. In other words, it determines whether the game state at the time when the special jackpot was won was in a high probability/support state. If the high probability/support state transition flag is 0 (i.e., the game state was in a low probability state when the special jackpot was won), the process proceeds to step S3262, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3263.

In step S3262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability/support state transition flag to 1. In step S3263, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3264; if not, the process proceeds to step S3266.

In step S3264, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the background screen during the transition to the high probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. In step S3265, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right hit information during the high probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. The right hit information during the high probability/support state is displayed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to notice it than the right hit information during the ending. For example, the right hit information during the high probability/support state is displayed in a larger size than the right hit information during the ending.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is time to end the high probability/support state. In this embodiment, the high probability/support state ends when the number of changes is 100. If it is time to end the high probability/support state, proceed to step S3267; if not, end this process.

In step S3267, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the enlarged display of the right-hit information during the high probability/support state. In step S3268, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability/support state transition flag to 0. This ends the process.

Next, the low probability/support state transition display process shown in step S3116 described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the low probability/support state transition display process.

In step S3271, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag is 1 based on the low probability/support state transition flag received in step S3115 described above. If the high probability/support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3272; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3274.

In step S3272, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability/support state transition flag to 0 and proceeds to step S3273. In step S3273, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability/support state transition flag to 1.

In step S3274, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3275; if not, the process proceeds to step S3276.

In step S3275, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a screen during the low probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. Also, in step S3276, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right hit information during the low probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. Like right hit information during the high probability/support state, right hit information during the low probability/support state is displayed in a manner that is more noticeable to the player than right hit information during the ending.

In step S3277, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the timing to end the low probability/support state has arrived. If it has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3278; if not, the process proceeds to step S3279.

In step S3278, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the right-hit information during the low probability/support state from the third pattern display device 42. In step S3279, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability/support state transition flag to 0. This ends the process.

Next, the specific operation period notification process shown in step S3008 described above will be explained using FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart explaining the specific operation period notification process.

In step S3301, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a normal screen display command has been received. If a normal screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3302; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3302, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays specific operation period information on the third pattern display device 42. The specific operation period information is information that notifies the player that a specific operation using the decision button 81 can be performed during the period. The specific operation is, for example, pressing the decision button 81 to display a volume change operation screen.

In step S3303, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a demo screen display command has been received. If a demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3302 to display information during the specific operation period, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3304, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display opening command has been received. If a display opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3305; if not, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3305, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is time to display the above-mentioned specific operation period information in the jackpot opening performance. The display timing of the specific operation period information in the jackpot opening performance is 5 seconds after the start of the jackpot opening performance. If it is time to display it, proceed to step S3302, and if not, proceed to step S3306.

In step S3306, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display variation pattern designation command has been received. If a display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307; if not, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3307, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag is 1. If the high probability/support state transition flag is 1, the process ends because the device is in a high probability/support state and specific operations such as changing the volume cannot be performed, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays specific operation period end approaching information on the third pattern display device 42. The specific operation period end approaching information is information that notifies the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching. The specific operation is, for example, an operation for changing the volume.

In step S3309, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is time to end the display of the specific operation period end approach information. If it is time to end the display, the process proceeds to step S3310, and if not, the process ends.

In step S3310, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the specific operation period end proximity information from the third pattern display device 42 and ends this process.

In step S3311, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display ending command has been received. If a display ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3312; if not, the process ends.

In step S3312, the CPU 521 of the table control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag or the low probability/support state transition flag is 1. In other words, it determines whether the game state to be transitioned to after the ending performance is a high probability/support state or a low probability/support state. If the high probability/support state transition flag or the low probability/support state transition flag is 1, proceed to step S3308 and display specific operation period end proximity information on the third pattern display device 42. If neither the high probability/support state transition flag nor the low probability/support state is 1 (it is 0), proceed to step S3313.

In step S3313, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 transitions to the normal low probability state after the ending performance ends, and so displays information on the third pattern display device 42 during the specific operation period during the ending period as well as during the jackpot round. This ends the process.

Next, the display mode during a specific operation period in the third pattern display device 42 will be explained using Figure 51. Figures 51 (a) to (e) are diagrams explaining the display mode during a specific operation period in the third pattern display device 42.

The period during which the normal screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 is a period during which the player performs a specific operation, such as changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24, by pressing the decision button 81. The sound output from the sound output unit 24 is sound that is output in conjunction with the start of the variable display on the third pattern display device 42, during the variable display, during the jackpot game state, during the advantageous game state after the jackpot ends, etc.

On the third pattern display device 42, during the period when the normal screen 43a is displayed as shown in (a), specific operation period information 44a is displayed to inform the player that a specific operation such as changing the volume can be performed. For example, this is text information saying "Volume can be changed" displayed in the upper right corner of the normal screen 43a of the third pattern display device 42.

In addition, the third pattern display device 42 displays information 44a during a specific operation period even during the period in which the demo screen 43b is displayed, as shown in (d). The demo screen 43b may be a still image or a video.

When the player presses the decision button 81 during the period in which the specific operation period information 44a is displayed on the normal screen 43a or demo screen 43b, the third pattern display device 42 displays a specific operation screen 44b for the volume change operation as shown in (b). The specific operation screen 44b may be displayed in place of the normal screen 43a or demo screen 43b, or may be displayed superimposed on a part of the normal screen 43a or demo screen 43b.

The specific operation screen 44b includes a change information display section 44c that displays information that can be changed by a specific operation, and an operation method display section 44d that shows the player how to perform the specific operation. For example, in the case of a volume change operation screen, the change information display section 44c is a volume display section that displays the current volume and the range in which the volume can be changed. The operation method display section 44d is a volume change method display section that illustrates the operation method for changing the volume using, for example, the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83. The operation method display section 44d illustrates the volume change methods, in which pressing the decision button 81 determines the volume, pressing the left selection button 82 lowers the volume, and pressing the right selection button 83 increases the volume.

When the player presses the right selection button 83, the change information display section 44c displays how the current volume (the third volume level out of five levels) will be changed to the next higher volume, as shown in (c). When the player presses the left selection button 82, the change information display section 44c displays how the current volume will be changed to the next lower volume.

When the player presses the decision button 81, the third pattern display device 42 displays the normal screen 43a instead of the specific operation screen 44b, as shown in (e).

Next, the display mode during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative pattern Sz will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 (a) to (h) are diagrams explaining the display mode during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative pattern Sz.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays a normal screen 43a, and in the upper right corner of the screen, the specific operation period information 44a, which indicates "Volume Change Possible", is displayed. When the start condition is met, as shown in (b), the display screen 42a displays a high-speed fluctuation screen 43c in place of the normal screen 43a. At the same time that the normal screen 43a switches to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, the specific operation period information 44a switches to the specific operation period end approach information 44f. The specific operation period end approach information 44e is information that informs the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching. For example, information that suggests that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching is added to the specific operation period information 44a. Specifically, for example, as shown in (b) to (d), the periphery of the text image of "Volume Change Possible" flashes in different colors at predetermined time intervals to suggest that the end timing is approaching. The blinking display may be at a fixed time interval, but may also blink at shorter intervals as the end timing approaches. This allows the player to realize that the period during which the specific operation can be performed is still on, but that the end timing is approaching.

As shown in (e), the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is erased at a predetermined timing before the end of the high-speed fluctuation. In other words, the operation of changing the volume (pressing the decision button 81) is possible even during high-speed fluctuation, but must be performed at the latest while the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is being displayed. The timing at which the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is erased is the timing immediately before the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c switches to the left pattern stop screen 43d (see (e) and (f)). This makes it possible to reliably show the player whether the fluctuation display during the high-speed fluctuation will be a complete miss or a reach.

After a predetermined time, the left pattern stop screen 43d becomes the all pattern stop screen 43e. When the stopped pattern is a complete miss on the all pattern stop screen 43e, if there is no pending start condition establishment as shown in (g), the all pattern stop screen 43e returns to the normal screen 43a as shown in (i). As shown in (i), the normal screen 43a is the same as the all pattern stop screen 43e, but the specific operation period information 44a is displayed again. On the other hand, even if the stopped pattern is a complete miss on the all pattern stop screen 43e, if there is pending start condition establishment as shown in (h), the all pattern stop screen 43e is changed to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c as shown in (j), and the specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed, and the display mode from (b) onwards is repeated.

In this way, by looking at the specific operation period end approach information 44e, the player can recognize up to what point during the high-speed fluctuations a specific operation, such as changing the volume, is possible.

Next, the display mode during a specific operation period after a reach is achieved will be explained using FIG. 53. FIG. 53 (a) to (o) are diagrams explaining the display mode during a specific operation period after a reach is achieved.

In the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (a) and the developed reach display screen 43g shown in (b), the volume cannot be changed during the reach display period, so the specific operation period information 44a is hidden. In the all-symbol stop screen 43e shown in (c), the reach display result is a jackpot combination. The specific operation period information 44a is also hidden while the all-symbol stop screen 43 is displayed. After the jackpot combination is confirmed, the all-symbol stop screen 43 is replaced by the opening screen 43h. On the opening screen 43, opening information 44f (e.g., text information congratulating the player such as "Congratulations") is displayed to inform the player of the jackpot establishment shown in (d), and then opening right-hit explanation information 44g (e.g., text information "Aim right" and a right arrow) is displayed to explain the operation method during the round play to the player during the opening. Even when the opening screen 43 is displayed, the specific operation period information 44a is not displayed during the periods (d) and (e). This is to ensure that this information is visible to players.

The specific operation period information 44a continues to be displayed from the end of the display period of the opening right hit information 44g shown in (e) until the end of the jackpot round state. In other words, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed during the end of the display period of the opening right hit information 44g and during the period from the start of the jackpot round state shown in (f) to the end of the jackpot round state shown in (g).

Specifically, the round screen 43i shown in (g) displays right-hit during round information 44h, which indicates in a manner that is easy for the player to visually confirm that right-hit is being played during the jackpot round state, and round number information 44i, which indicates the progress of the jackpot round state, along with specific operation period information 44a. Right-hit during round information 44h is information that clearly indicates that right-hit is being played, for example, in large letters or illustrations. Round number information 44i indicates that it is the first round.

In addition, the round screen 43i shown in (h) displays information about right-hand hits during a round 44h, round number information 44i indicating the final round (16th round), and information about a specific operation period 44a.

After the final round is completed, the round screen 43i is replaced by the ending screen 43j shown in (i). The ending screen 43j displays ending information 44j indicating that it is the ending period. The ending screen 43j also displays countdown information that counts down the ending time.

The ending information 44j consists of, for example, ending countdown information 44v shown in (i) to (o), next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (i), manufacturer information 44x shown in (j), card removal prevention information 44y shown in (k) and (l), and addiction prevention information 44z shown in (m) to (o).

The ending countdown information 44v is a display that counts down the ending time. The ending countdown information 44v counts down, for example, in one-second increments as time passes. For example, (i) is immediately after the start of the ending period, so "ending time: 35 seconds left" is displayed, (j) is 10 seconds after the beginning of the ending, so "ending time: 25 seconds left" is displayed, (k) is 15 seconds after the beginning of the ending, so "ending time: 20 seconds left" is displayed, (l) is 16 seconds after the beginning of the ending, so "ending time: 19 seconds left" is displayed, (m) is 32 seconds after the beginning of the ending, so "ending time: 3 seconds left" is displayed, (n) is 33 seconds after the beginning of the ending, so "ending time: 2 seconds left" is displayed, and (o) is 34 seconds after the beginning of the ending, so "ending time: 1 second left" is displayed.

The next game state suggestion information 44w suggests that the game state after the ending period ends will be a probability variable state, or a normal state with a support state. Here, the text information "One more time" suggests that a high probability/support state will occur next. If a low probability/support state will occur next, the text information "Chance!" is displayed. The next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds.

Manufacturer information 44x is, for example, a logo indicating the manufacturer (for example, text information such as "SANYO"). Manufacturer information 44x is displayed for, for example, five seconds. Information to prevent forgetting to remove card 44y is, for example, a graphic image indicating a prepaid card and a text image such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove your prepaid card." Information to prevent forgetting to remove card 44y is displayed for, for example, ten seconds. Addiction prevention information 44z is, for example, text information such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation." Addiction prevention information 44z is displayed for, for example, ten seconds.

In this way, a series of ending information 44j is displayed for 35 seconds on the ending screen 43j.

Ending screen 43j displays right-hit during ending information 44k, which is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable to the player than right-hit during round information 44h. For example, right-hit during ending information 44k is displayed in a size that is significantly smaller than right-hit during round information 44h. As a result, the player is given the illusion that right-hit play during the round has ended. This makes it easier to deter the player from hitting the right during the ending period.

The ending screen 43j displays specific operation period end approaching information 44e. The specific operation period approaching information 44e is displayed, for example, from the start of the ending performance shown in (i) to the end of the ending performance shown in (l). If the jackpot that includes the ending period is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot with a support state, specific operations cannot be performed during the high probability or low probability support state to which the player transitions after the ending period ends. For example, if the sound output from the sound output unit 24 in a high probability or low probability support state is louder than the previous game state in order to stimulate the player's interest, the ending period is the last opportunity to change the sound, so displaying the approaching end of the sound change operation can help the player play more comfortably.

Next game state approaching information 44l is displayed on the ending screen 43j. Next game state approaching information 44l is information that informs the player that the timing to move to the next game state is approaching. For example, next game state approaching information 44l is information that flashes around right hit information 44k during the ending. Next game state approaching information 44l is displayed for 3 seconds before the end of the ending period while the addiction prevention display 44z shown in (m) to (o) is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the right hit display will resume.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established following FIG. 53 will be described using FIG. 54. FIG. 54(a)-(o) is a diagram explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established following FIG. 53.

As shown in (a), after the ending performance of the guaranteed jackpot state has ended, a high probability state screen 43k is displayed on the display screen 42a. The high probability state screen 43k is the same as the normal screen 43a in that the main decorative pattern Sz is displayed, but the background image is displayed in a manner that makes it clearly distinguishable from the normal screen 43a in terms of color and display content. On the high probability state screen 43k, right hit information 44m during high probability/support state is displayed. Right hit information 44m during high probability/support state is displayed in a manner that is more noticeable (enlarged) to the player than right hit information 44k during the ending.

The above-mentioned right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state approach information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v can reduce the risk of the player accidentally performing a right-hit operation at an unnecessary timing during the ending presentation, resulting in the game ball being wasted. In addition, this information can be used to launch the game ball in time with the start timing of the high probability/support state shown in (a).

As shown in (b) to (f), after the transition to the high probability/support state, right-hit information 44m continues to be displayed on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, the high probability state reach display screen 43f, and the all symbol stop screen 43e. Right-hit information 44m during the high probability/support state is hidden in line with the opening screen 43h shown in (g). After the opening right-hit explanation information 44g shown in (j) is displayed, right-hit information 44h is displayed during the round.

Here, as shown in (f), the reach fluctuation during the high probability state is determined by a combination (for example, "666") indicating an 8R normal jackpot without a support state (0 times). Therefore, since the next game state is a low probability state without a support state, the ending screen 43l shown in (k) to (m) does not display the right-hand hitting information 44k during the ending or the approaching information 44l of the next game state, but displays the ending countdown information 44v. This ending countdown information 44v can reduce the disadvantage caused by the player starting a left-hand hitting game for the next game state during the ending performance period. In other words, when playing a left-hand hitting game during the ending performance period, the winning ball is paid out by making the ball enter the special chart 1 start winning device 33a, but since the ball also enters the out hole without winning, there is a possibility that the number of balls held will be reduced. If the ending countdown information 44v can properly grasp the end timing of the ending time, such a situation can be reduced.

On the ending screen 43l, the next game state approach information 44l is not displayed, and the specific operation period information 44a continues to be displayed.

As shown in (n), when the ending performance ends, the normal screen 43a, which is a low probability state with no support state, is displayed. The specific operation period information 44a continues to be displayed until this timing. As shown in (o), when the normal screen 43a changes to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, if there is a hold, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed as specific operation period end approaching information 44e. From this point on, the screen display will be the same as that shown in FIG. 52(c) onwards.

In this way, right-hit information and specific operation period information 44a are displayed in an appropriate manner depending on whether the game state that occurs after the ending performance ends is a high probability support state (the same goes for a low probability support state) or a low probability state with no support state, making it easier for the player to understand the timing when a right-hit operation is required and the timing when the sound can be changed.

Next, the display mode when the decision button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIGS. 55(a) to (g) are diagrams explaining the display mode when the decision button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation.

As shown in (a), while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed, specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed, and a text image saying "Volume can be changed" is flashing. When the player presses the decision button 81 at this timing, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed as shown in (b). The high-speed fluctuation screen 43c may be displayed behind the specific operation screen 44b. As long as the player is aware that the volume is fluctuating rapidly, the specific operation can be performed with confidence.

If the player leaves the specific operation screen 44b displayed without operating the selection buttons 82, 83 as shown in (c) and (d), the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed while the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, as shown in (c) and (d). This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the specific operation period will end unless a specific operation such as changing the volume is performed.

If the player still leaves the selection buttons 82, 83 unoperated, the specific operation screen 44b will be hidden before the left symbol stop screen 43d appears as shown in (e). This ensures that the player can see the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f) or the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (g) even if the player leaves the specific operation screen 44b displayed.

The specific operation screen 44b may not only be displayed within one variable display period, but may be displayed over multiple consecutive variable display periods. The display time of the specific operation screen 44b over multiple variable display periods may be set so that volume change operations can be performed. A configuration in which multiple variable displays are performed before receiving an operation from the player to decide to end the display of the specific operation screen 44b may be used. In this case, the specific operation screen 44b may be displayed in a reduced size so that the result of the variable display can be seen, or the variable display may be displayed in a reduced size without reducing the specific operation screen 44b.

Next, the display mode when the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation will be explained using FIG. 56. FIGS. 56(a) to (g) are diagrams explaining the display mode when the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation.

As shown in (a), when the player presses the decision button 81 while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed. As shown in (b), when the selection buttons 82 and 83 are operated while the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, a volume change is displayed in the change information display section 43c. When the player presses the decision button 81 in this state, the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is returned to at that timing as shown in (d). This allows the fluctuation display from the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c to the left pattern stop screen 43d shown in (e), the all pattern stop screen 43e shown in (f), or the normal reach screen 43f shown in (g) to be fully displayed.

If a specific operation is performed while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed, the setting may be such that the specific operation cannot be performed for a period of time after the specific operation has been performed once. This is because the high-speed fluctuation period is short, and even if the specific operation screen 44b is displayed again, there is a high possibility that there will not be enough time left to perform the specific operation. On the other hand, if a specific operation is performed while the round screen 43i is displayed, there is enough time left to perform the specific operation again, so the specific operation screen 44b may be displayed again.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
When the game state transitions from a jackpot round game state to the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, a jackpot ending presentation is executed in which an ending screen 43j is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the end of the round game in the jackpot round game state to the start of the next high probability/support state, etc., and the display control device 45 performs processing of step S3241 in the jackpot ending processing;
During execution of the jackpot ending presentation, right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state approach information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v are displayed to indicate to the player that the timing to start a game state requiring a right hit, such as the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, has not yet arrived, and the display control device 45 has the function of performing the processing of steps S3244 to S3251 in the jackpot ending processing.

According to this configuration, when the game state transitions from a jackpot round game state to the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, the display control device 45 executes a jackpot ending effect in which an ending screen 43j is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in step S3241 during the jackpot ending process from the end of the round game in the jackpot round game state to the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. During the execution of this jackpot ending effect, the display control device 45 displays right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state approach information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v in step S3247 during the jackpot ending process, which indicate to the player that the start timing of a game state requiring a right hit, such as the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, has not yet arrived. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is a jackpot round game state, in other words, that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is not yet the next high probability/support state, etc. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by mistakenly believing that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is the next next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A1) above.

In addition, the big win round gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The high probability/support state, etc. is a game state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the big win round game state, and is a game state in which the player can obtain advantageous game value by operating the game ball launching handle 18.
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are information that indicates to the player that the timing to start a high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed.

According to this configuration, the next high probability/support state, etc., to which the player transitions from the jackpot round game state advantageous to the player is a game state that is advantageous to the player, and is a game state in which the player can acquire advantageous game value by operating the game ball launching handle 18 as a trigger. Therefore, the player is likely to operate the game ball launching handle 18 to acquire advantageous game value based on the mistaken belief that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is a high probability/support state, etc., but since this operation is performed during the jackpot round game state, the player cannot acquire this advantageous game value. However, during the execution of the jackpot ending performance, the right-hit information 44k during the ending, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are notified to the player, which indicate that the start timing of the high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived, so that it is difficult to mistakenly believe that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is a high probability/support state, etc. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the game ball launch handle 18 under the mistaken belief that another advantageous game value can be acquired, and thus it is possible to reduce the number of wasted operations. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from the mistaken belief that the current time when the big win ending performance is being performed is a high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A2) above.

In addition, the big win round game state is a game state in which a round game is played a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time from when the big win opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of the big win lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the special winning device 1 starting winning device 33a or the special winning device 2 starting winning device 33b.
The jackpot ending presentation is a presentation at the end of a round game state in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 from 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round game state to the start of the next high probability/support state, etc.

According to this configuration, the jackpot round game state is a game state in which a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round being the time from when the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the special winning device 1 start winning device 33a or the special winning device 2 start winning device 33b. The jackpot ending performance is a performance in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 from the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round game state to the timing of the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by mistaking the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed for the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, it is the gaming machine described in (A3) above.

In addition, a ball entry means that changes between an open state where a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state where a game ball is difficult to enter, and the ball entry serves as a trigger for a big win lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, and a special winning device 33b for special chart 2;
The game ball is a ball entry means into which the game ball enters, and the entry of the ball triggers a normal pattern lottery that activates a special pattern 2 start winning device 33b.
The high probability support state is a support game state that makes it easier for the result of the normal pattern lottery based on the ball entering the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b to be a winning result that activates the electric device of the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b.
The right-hit information 44k during ending, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start a high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed.

According to this configuration, the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is a ball entry means that changes between an open state where the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the ball entry triggers the big win lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The normal symbol start hole 34 is a ball entry means into which the game ball enters, and the ball entry triggers the normal symbol lottery that activates the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. The high probability/support state, etc. are support game states that make it easier for the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the ball entry into the normal symbol start hole 34 to be a winning result that activates the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. The right hit information 44k during the ending, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived during the execution of the big win ending performance. As a result, in order for the player to quickly place the game ball in the normal symbol starting hole 34 in a high probability/support state, etc., it is easy for the player to accidentally launch the game ball during the execution of the jackpot ending performance before transitioning to the high probability/support state, etc. In this regard, by looking at the next game state approach information 44l, etc. during the execution of the jackpot ending performance, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by mistakenly determining that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is a high probability/support state, etc. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (A4).

In addition, the high probability/support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a jackpot result is higher than in a normal gaming state.
The right-hit information 44k during ending, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed.

According to this configuration, the high probability/support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will result in a jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state. The next gaming state approach information 44l, etc., indicates to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending performance is being executed. This makes it possible to reduce disadvantages caused by mistakenly believing that the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed is a high probability/support state. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A5) above.

The high probability/support state is a high probability game state with support in which the probability that the result of the big win lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a big win result and the probability that the result of the operation lottery by the operation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in a normal game state.
The right-hit information 44k during ending, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed.

According to this configuration, the high probability/support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the normal pattern lottery by the normal pattern starting hole 34 will be a winning result are higher than in the normal gaming state. The next gaming state approach information 44l, etc., indicates to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending performance is being executed. This makes it possible to reduce disadvantages caused by mistaking the current time when the jackpot ending performance is being executed for the high probability/support state. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A6) above.

In addition, the big win ending performance is a performance in which a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending performance pattern,
When the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot result, the ending presentation pattern is displayed in a different pattern according to the type of the jackpot result.
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until the multiple types of images have finished being executed consecutively in the ending presentation pattern.

According to this configuration, the big win ending performance is executed by consecutively executing a plurality of types of images in a predetermined ending performance pattern. When the result of the big win lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a big win result, the ending performance pattern is displayed in a different pattern according to the type of the big win result. Therefore, in the past, if a player mistakenly recognized that the end timing of the display time of a certain image (for example, an image showing manufacturer information) in the big win ending performance is the end timing of a series of big win ending performances, the player may mistakenly recognize that the display time of the subsequent image (for example, an image showing information to prevent forgetting to remove a card or an image showing information to prevent addiction) has been shifted to the next high probability/support state, etc., and may be disadvantaged by this. However, in the present invention, the next game state approach information 44l, etc., suggests to the player that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until the timing when the consecutive execution of a plurality of types of images in the ending performance pattern is completed. As a result, during the big win ending presentation, the next game state approach information 44l indicates that the timing to start the next game state has not yet arrived until the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in a predetermined ending presentation pattern, thereby reducing the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A7) above.

In addition, immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state, information may be displayed that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived. For example, immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round state, right-hit during round information 44h is replaced by right-hit during ending information 44k. During the period in which right-hit during ending information 44k is displayed, it is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived.

With this configuration, the right-hit information during ending 44k indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state, so that it is possible to reduce disadvantages that arise as a result of the player mistakingly believing that the transition to the next high probability/support state, etc. has occurred immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A15).

In addition, information may be displayed at the same time as the big win ending performance is executed, suggesting to the player that the timing to start the next high probability, support state, etc. has not yet arrived. For example, right-hit information 44k during the ending suggests to the player that the timing to start the next high probability, support state, etc. has not yet arrived, at the same time as the big win ending performance is executed.

With this configuration, the right-hit-during-ending information 44k indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived at the same time as the big win ending performance is executed, so that it is possible to reduce disadvantages that arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the player is transitioning to the next gaming state at the same time as the big win ending performance is executed. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A16).

In addition, the next game state approach information 44l indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until a certain time has elapsed since the execution of the jackpot ending performance (3 seconds before the end of the ending period. For example, in the case of a 16R special jackpot (special 1) ending performance, this is 32 seconds after the start of the ending performance).

This configuration indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived when a jackpot ending performance is in progress and a predetermined time has elapsed since the performance. This reduces the disadvantages that arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the next high probability/support state, etc. will be entered after a predetermined time has elapsed since the performance of the jackpot ending performance, even though the jackpot ending performance is in progress. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A17) above.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
a step S3221 process in the specific operation screen display process of the display control device 45, in which when the player operates the decision button 81 within a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the display of the high speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display to 5 seconds before the high speed fluctuation stops, or the period up to 3 seconds before the end of the ending period), a specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed so that at least the decision button 81 can be used to adjust the volume, and when the decision button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period during the display of the high speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display (for example, during the reach display period), the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is not displayed;
and processing of step S3308 in the specific operation period notification processing of the display control device 45, which notifies the player of specific operation period end approaching information 44e, which indicates to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment has not yet arrived during a specified period.

According to this configuration, in the process of step S3221 in the specific operation screen display process, if the player operates the decision button 81 within a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display to 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops, or the period until 3 seconds before the end of the ending period), the display control device 45 displays at least the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment to allow the player to perform a volume adjustment operation using the decision button 81, and does not display the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment if the decision button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, the period after 3 seconds have passed since the end of the reach display period or the ending period). In the process of step S3308 in the specific operation period notification process, the display control device 45 notifies the player of the specific operation period end approach information 44e, which suggests to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment has not arrived during the predetermined period. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time during which the identification information variation display is in progress is not yet the end of the period during which the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed, in other words, that the current time during which the identification information variation display is in progress is the time when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from the mistaken belief that the current time is the time when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B1) above.

The specific operation period end approaching information 44e also includes a specific operation possible period notification image (e.g., text information such as "Volume can be changed") that notifies the user that the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed.

According to this configuration, the specific operation period end approaching information 44a includes a specific operation possible period notification image (e.g., text information such as "Volume can be changed") that notifies the player that this is the period during which the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the specified period during which the high-speed changing screen 43c displaying the changing identification information is a period during which the volume adjustment operation can be performed. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B2) above.

In addition, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within a predetermined period during which the high-speed changing screen 43c is displayed while displaying the changing identification information, a non-notification period may be set after which the specific operation period end approach information 44e is not notified.

According to this configuration, if the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within a predetermined period during which the rapid fluctuation screen 43c is displayed while the identification information is fluctuating, a non-notification period is set during which the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is not notified. This reduces the possibility that the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is frequently displayed within the predetermined period during which the rapid fluctuation screen 43c is displayed while the identification information is fluctuating (i.e., the player performs an operation to display the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume), causing the player to be unable to fully see the identification information fluctuating display. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B4) above.

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e may continue to be notified, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed during the jackpot ending period.

According to such a configuration, the specific operation period end approach information 44e may be continuously notified, for example, if the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed during the big win ending period. If the big win ending period is extended, it becomes easier for the player to modify the content even after performing the specific operation that displays the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B5) above.

The specific operation period end approach information 44e is also displayed while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b even when he or she is looking at the specific operation screen 44b after viewing the specific operation period end approaching information 44e and operating the decision button 81. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B6) above.

In addition, even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed, the image being displayed for a specified period of time (e.g., the rapidly changing screen 43c) can be viewed.

With this configuration, the image being displayed during the specified period can be seen even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the image being displayed during the specified period (e.g., the high-speed changing screen 43c) will be like even while the specific operation screen 44b is being displayed. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B7) above.

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the display period of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, but cannot be displayed after the display period of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c has elapsed, even during the identification information fluctuation display period.

According to this configuration, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the display period of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information changing display period, and cannot be displayed after the display period of the high-speed changing screen 43c has passed, even during the identification information changing display period. As a result, even during the identification information changing display period, the period after the high-speed changing period is when the player wants to see/see the information (display of the result of the changing display or reach performance), and therefore inconvenience caused by the specific operation screen 44b being displayed can be reduced. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (B8).

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the ending presentation in the jackpot round gaming state when the jackpot round gaming state transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc., and the specific operation screen 44b cannot be displayed in the next high probability/support state, etc.

According to this configuration, when the jackpot round gaming state transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc., and the specific operation screen 44b cannot be displayed in the next high probability/support state, etc., the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the ending presentation in the jackpot round gaming state. This can reduce the inconvenience caused by the inability to adjust the volume after the jackpot round gaming state transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B9) above.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
In the jackpot round game state, a right-hit notification is performed to notify the player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand. In this case, a step S3235 is performed in the jackpot opening round display process of the display control device 45.
A process of step S3265 in the high probability/support state transition display process of the display control device 45 or a process of step S3276 in the low probability/support state transition display process, which performs a right-hit notification to notify the player that a game will be played by right-hitting in the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state that occurs after the end of the jackpot round game state;
When a transition is made from a jackpot round game state to a next high probability/support state, etc., a jackpot ending presentation is executed to display ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the end timing of the right-hit game in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc., comprising a process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process of the display control device 45;
The display control device 45, in processing of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display processing, issues a right-hit notification in a first state (e.g., enlarged displayed right-hit information during round 44h) during right-hit play in the jackpot round playing state, and in processing of step S3244 in the jackpot ending display processing, issues a right-hit notification in a second state (reduced displayed right-hit information during ending 44k) that has changed to a state different from the first state while the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

According to this configuration, the display control device 45 performs a right-hit notification to notify the player that a right-hit game will be played in the jackpot round game state in step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process. The display control device 45 performs a right-hit notification to notify the player that a right-hit game will be played in the next high probability/support state, etc., that occurs after the end of the jackpot round game state in step S3265 in the high probability/support state transition display process or in step S3276 in the low probability/support state transition display process. In step S3241 in the jackpot ending process, when transitioning from the jackpot round game state to the next high probability/support state, etc., the display control device 45 executes a jackpot ending performance that displays ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the end timing of the right-hit game in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. In step S3235 of the jackpot opening/round display process, the display control device 45 performs a right-hit notification in a first mode (enlarged display) during right-hit play in the jackpot round game state, and in step S3244 of the jackpot ending display process, performs a right-hit notification in a second mode (reduced display) that is changed to a mode different from the first mode during the execution of the jackpot ending performance. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the current time is not during right-hit play in the jackpot round game state, but during the execution of the jackpot ending performance, and that it is not the timing to execute the right-hit game, based on the difference in notification mode between the right-hit notification that is performed until the jackpot ending performance is executed in the jackpot round game state and the right-hit notification during the execution of the jackpot ending performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by mistaking the current time during the execution of the jackpot ending performance as the timing to execute the right-hit game. For example, the gaming machine described in (C1) above.

The jackpot round game state is a round game state in which a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round being the time from when the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 being a jackpot result. The next high probability/support state, etc. is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the jackpot round game state ends, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot result. The jackpot ending performance is executed from the end timing of the final round in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc., when transitioning from the jackpot round game state to the high probability/support state, etc. The display control device 45 issues a right hit notification in the first mode (enlarged display of round right hit information 44h) during the jackpot round game, and issues a right hit notification in the second mode (reduced display of ending right hit information 44k) during the execution of the jackpot ending performance.

According to this configuration, the jackpot round game state is a round game state in which a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round being the time from when the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed, based on the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 being a jackpot result. The next high probability/support state, etc. is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the jackpot round game state ends, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot result. The jackpot ending performance is executed from the end timing of the final round in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc., when transitioning from the jackpot round game state to the high probability/support state, etc. The display control device 45 performs a right hit notification in the first mode (enlarged display) during the jackpot round game, and performs a right hit notification in the second mode (reduced display) during the execution of the jackpot ending performance. This makes it easier for the player to realize that the current time is not during a jackpot round play but during the execution of a jackpot ending performance, and that it is not the right time to play a right hit game, because of the difference in the notification mode between the right hit notification during a jackpot round play and the right hit notification during the execution of a jackpot ending performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by mistaking the current time during the execution of a jackpot ending performance for the right hit play in a high probability/support state, etc. For example, the gaming machine described in (C2) above.

In addition, the right hit notification mode (second mode) in the jackpot ending performance is less noticeable to the player than the right hit notification mode (first mode) in the jackpot round game state. For example, right hit information 44k during the ending is displayed in a smaller size than right hit information 44h during the round.

According to this configuration, the mode of right-hit notification during the jackpot ending performance (second mode) is less noticeable to the player than the mode of right-hit notification during the jackpot round play state (first mode). This makes it difficult to recognize that the timing to play right-hit is when the jackpot ending performance is being executed, and therefore reduces the disadvantage caused by mistaking the current time during the execution of the jackpot ending performance for the timing to play right-hit in a high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (C4).

In addition, in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 performs a right hit notification in a third mode suggesting a return from the second mode to the first mode at the end of the jackpot ending presentation (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end of the presentation). For example, it displays next game state approach information 44l with right hit information 44j flashing during the ending.

According to this configuration, in step S3247 of the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in the third mode, which suggests a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the jackpot ending presentation (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself). This makes it possible to quickly resume the right-hit notification when the jackpot ending presentation transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (C5) above.

The number of display patterns of the ending information 44j may be increased even more than in Example 1. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is made different depending on the type of win and the type of variation pattern. This will be explained with reference to Figs. 57 and 58. Fig. 57(a) is a table for drawing the big win for special chart 1 in Example 2, and (b) is a table for drawing the big win for special chart 2. Fig. 58 is a table for setting the ending performance pattern.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "0" and "9", the decorative pattern is a 16R jackpot with a set of "7". When the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "10" and "39", the decorative pattern is an 8R jackpot with odd numbers excluding "7", such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". When the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "40" and "89", the decorative pattern is an 8R normal jackpot with even numbers, such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". When the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "90" and "99", the decorative pattern is a 2R jackpot with a set of "341". The 2R jackpot also comes with 100 support states.

As shown in (b), in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "0" and "19", the decorative pattern is a 16R jackpot with a set of "7". When the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "20" and "49", the decorative pattern is an 8R jackpot with odd numbers excluding "7", such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". When the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "50" and "89", the decorative pattern is an 8R normal jackpot with even numbers, such as "2", "4", "6", and "8". When the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "90" and "99", the decorative pattern is a 2R jackpot with a set of "341". The 2R jackpot also comes with 100 support states.

The display control device 45 determines the type of jackpot and the type of variation pattern based on the display variation pattern designation command and the stop display command received from the sub-control device 262. Note that the stop display command is a command converted from the decorative pattern designation command, and therefore contains information that identifies the type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 58, the ROM 522 of the display control device 45 stores an ending presentation pattern setting table that associates the jackpot type, the variation pattern type, and the ending presentation pattern. The correspondence between the jackpot type, the variation pattern type, and the ending presentation pattern will be explained. In the following, the case where the lottery result based on winning the start winning device 33a for special chart 1 is a jackpot is referred to as "Special 1", and the case where the lottery result based on winning the start winning device 33b for special chart 2 is a jackpot is referred to as "Special 2".

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach C, D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is preset to 35 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in that order. This ending presentation pattern is the same as the ending presentation pattern described in Example 1 with reference to Figure 53. This ending presentation pattern is the presentation pattern that players will see most often in the case of a 16R probability change (special 1) jackpot.

The display time for the next game state suggestion information 44w is 10 seconds, the display time for the manufacturer information 44x is 5 seconds, the display time for the card removal prevention information 44y is 10 seconds, and the addiction prevention information 44z is 10 seconds. In FIG. 58, the next game state suggestion information 44w is abbreviated to "One more time" based on its display content, the manufacturer information 44x is abbreviated to "Logo" based on its display content, the card removal prevention information 44y is abbreviated to "Prepaid card" based on its display content, and the addiction prevention information 44z is abbreviated to "Enjoy in moderation" based on its display content.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach A, B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds), a different ending presentation pattern from the above is adopted. That is, the pattern is that the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in that order. Bonus video 44n is an image that cannot be seen during a reach or jackpot round, and is an image that attracts the player's interest. Since it is rare for a 16R probability change (special 1) jackpot to occur in Super Reach A or B, the player's satisfaction can be increased by showing bonus video 44n instead of addiction prevention information 44z.

When the jackpot type is 16R special (Special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach E, F (fluctuation time: 120 seconds), an ending presentation pattern different from the above is adopted. That is, it is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and light-emitting staring prevention information 44o are displayed in that order. Light-emitting staring prevention information 44o is, for example, text information such as "Please be careful not to stare at a strong light for long periods of time" or an equivalent illustration. When a 16-variable (special 1) jackpot is reached with Super Reach E or F, the long fluctuation time, the display of a confrontation image that emits a strong light in the development reach performance, and the revival performance that flashes the screen (strong light flashing screen 43g-1 described with reference to FIG. 14) at the end of the development reach performance are accompanied by a strong strain on the player's eyes, so by showing the light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o instead of the addiction prevention information 44z, it is possible to make it easier for the player to take measures that take into consideration the strain on the eyes, such as stopping to gaze at the screen and resting their eyes while the light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o is displayed, or moving their face away from the screen more than before after the transition to the next game state. Note that in FIG. 58, the light-emitting gaze prevention information o is abbreviated to "strong light" based on its display content.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 2) and the variation pattern type is Super Reach A, B, Super Reach C, D, Super Reach E, F, the ending presentation pattern is basically the same as the above-mentioned 16R probability change (Special 1) and Super Reach A, B, Super Reach C, D, Super Reach E, F, but the difference is that manufacturer information 44x is omitted. This makes it possible to show the player an ending presentation that takes into account the difference in the variation pattern type, even in the case of a Special 2 jackpot. Also, by omitting manufacturer information 44x from the ending presentation pattern in the case of a Special 2 jackpot, it is possible to reduce the time burden on the player when jackpots such as Special Chart 2 jackpots occur consecutively.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach A, B (fluctuation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is preset to 25 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability (Special 2) and the fluctuation pattern type is Normal Reach A, B (fluctuation time: 20 seconds), Super Reach A, B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds), Super Reach C, D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is preset to 20 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order.

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach A, B (fluctuation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is preset to 25 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order. In FIG. 58, the next game state suggestion information 44w is a text image of "Chance!", which suggests that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state, but that the support state will be attached 100 times, and is therefore abbreviated to "Chance".

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 2) and the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach A, B (fluctuation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is preset to 20 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order. In FIG. 58, the next game state suggestion information 44w is a text image of "See you again!", which suggests that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state and there is no support state, so it is abbreviated to "See you again".

When the jackpot type is 2R probability (special 1), the fluctuation pattern type is a pattern in which "341" is aligned without going through a reach (fluctuation time: 15 seconds), the ending time is preset to 5 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is, for example, a pattern in which only manufacturer information 44x is displayed. Even if manufacturer information 44x is displayed after the patterns are aligned to "341", it is difficult for the player to realize that this is a jackpot state, so it is possible to transition to a high probability/support state in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to realize.

When the jackpot type is 2R probability (Special 2), the fluctuation pattern type is a pattern in which "341" is completed without going through a reach (fluctuation time: 15 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which only the bonus information 44p is displayed. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine with settings, the bonus information 44p is a video or still image that suggests the current setting information. Regardless of whether the player realizes that they are in a jackpot state, if they can know the current setting information, they can enjoy the subsequent high probability/support state even more.

The 2R variable probability jackpot is a jackpot that transitions to a high probability/support state without informing the player of this fact, so the next game state suggestion information 44w is not set as an ending presentation pattern. Also, the opening time of the large prize opening 32a in each round of the 2R variable probability jackpot is set to a short time that makes it difficult for game balls to be released, so no prize balls are paid out, and so the card removal prevention information 44z is not set as an ending presentation pattern. Also, the fluctuation time of the 2R variable probability jackpot is short, so it is difficult for the player to become addicted to the game, so the addiction prevention information 44z is not set as an ending presentation pattern.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to present the ending presentation that is predicted to be most appropriate for the player at that time, depending on the type of jackpot and the type of variation pattern.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment,
The big win ending performance has a plurality of ending performance patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs depending on the type of the big win round game state.

According to this configuration, the big win ending performance has multiple ending performance patterns that are made up of a combination of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending performance patterns differ depending on the type of big win round game state, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player depending on the type of big win round game state can be shown to the player as the big win ending performance. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A8) above.

In addition, the jackpot ending performance according to the jackpot round game state of a predetermined type (for example, 16R probability (special 1)) has a predetermined ending performance pattern in which multiple types (for example, four types) of images are combined in a predetermined combination,
For a big win ending presentation according to a big win round game state of another type (for example, 8R probability change (special 1)), another ending presentation pattern is formed by reducing one or more images from among a plurality of types of images included in a predetermined combination pattern.
In addition, for a jackpot ending presentation according to a jackpot round game state of another type (for example, 2R special (special 1)), a different ending presentation pattern is formed by reducing a plurality of images (for example, three types) from among the plurality of types of images included in a predetermined combination pattern.

According to this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation corresponding to a predetermined type of jackpot round game state has a predetermined combination pattern in which multiple types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and the jackpot ending presentation corresponding to another type of jackpot round game state has a different combination pattern by removing one or more of the multiple types of images included in this predetermined combination pattern. This reduces the processing burden on the gaming machine when determining the jackpot ending presentation corresponding to the type of jackpot round game state. Also, since the combination pattern of the jackpot ending presentation is set for each type of jackpot round game state, it becomes easier to provide the player with a jackpot ending presentation associated with the type of jackpot round game state. For example, the gaming machine described in (A9) above.

In addition, the big win ending performance is a performance in which a plurality of types of images are executed in succession in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the big win lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a big win result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the variation pattern corresponding to the big win result,
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until the timing when multiple types of images have been executed in succession in a specified combination has ended.

According to this configuration, the jackpot ending performance is performed by continuously executing multiple types of images in a predetermined combination. When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot result. This reduces the disadvantage caused by the same jackpot ending performance being displayed when the same jackpot result as the jackpot result that generates a certain type of jackpot round game state is obtained, but the type of variation pattern leading to the jackpot result is different. In addition, the next game state approach information 44l, etc. indicates to the player that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until the timing when the multiple types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination is completed, so that even if the same jackpot result is obtained but a different jackpot ending performance is displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced. For example, the gaming machine described above in (A10).

In addition, the big win ending performance has a plurality of ending performance patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending performance pattern differs depending on the length of time during which the identification information variable display performance based on the variable pattern is performed.
For example, in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, which clearly has a shorter fluctuation time than other jackpots, there is only one ending performance pattern, so the time is shorter than the ending performance of other jackpots.

According to this configuration, the big win ending performance has multiple ending performance patterns that are made up of a combination of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending performance patterns differ depending on the length of time that the identification information variable display performance based on the variable pattern is performed, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player can be shown to the player as the big win ending performance depending on the length of time of the identification information variable display performance. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A11) above.

In addition, the big win ending performance has a plurality of ending performance patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs according to the expectation of a big win result occurring in the identification information variation display presentation based on the variation pattern.
For example, in the case of Super Reach E or F, which has the highest probability of winning, the fluctuation time is the longest and is accompanied by intense blinking of the screen, so an ending performance pattern including light emission gaze prevention information 44o is displayed.

According to this configuration, the big win ending presentation has multiple ending presentation patterns that are made up of a combination of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending presentation patterns differ depending on the expectation of a big win result occurring in the identification information variable display presentation based on the variation pattern, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player can be shown as the big win ending presentation to the player depending on the expectation of a big win result occurring in the identification information variable display presentation. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A12).

In addition, the ending presentation pattern has a different combination of multiple types of images in the jackpot ending presentation depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which is triggered by the ball entering the start-winning device 33a for special chart 1, is a jackpot result, or whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which is triggered by the ball entering the start-winning device 33b for special chart 2, is a jackpot result.
For example, the ending performance pattern of the special 1 big win includes the manufacturer information 44x, but the ending pattern of the special 2 big win does not include the manufacturer information 44x. Also, for example, in the case of an 8R normal big win, when the ball enters the special 2 start winning device 33b as a trigger, the support state is not attached, so the content of the next game state suggestion information 44w is made different from the case when the ball enters the special 1 start winning device 33a as a trigger.

With this configuration, the ending performance pattern has a different combination of multiple types of images in the jackpot ending performance depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a is a jackpot result, or the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b is a jackpot result. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferred by the player as the jackpot ending performance depending on the difference in the trigger of the jackpot lottery. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A14).

In the gaming machine of Example 2, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is made different depending on the type of win or the type of variation pattern, but the display pattern of the ending information 44j may be made different depending on other conditions. Specifically, in this example, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is made different depending on the situation leading up to the occurrence of the current jackpot. This will be explained with reference to Figures 59 and 60. Figure 59(a) is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 1 in Example 3, and (b) is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 2. Figure 60 is a table for setting an ending performance pattern.

In this embodiment, different ending presentation patterns are set depending on the situation leading up to the occurrence of the current jackpot (the jackpot occurrence situation). The jackpot occurrence situation is the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot, the type of the previous jackpot, etc.

The relationship between the winning type and the ending time will be explained. In the first embodiment, the ending time was set according to the winning type (whether it was a special chart 1 jackpot or a special chart 2 jackpot, and the number of jackpot rounds), but in this embodiment, the ending time only differs according to whether it was a special chart 1 jackpot or a special chart 2 jackpot. In other words, the ending time for a special chart 1 jackpot is 35 seconds for all 16R special chart jackpots, 8R special chart jackpots, and 8R normal jackpots. The ending time for a special chart 2 jackpot is 30 seconds for all 16R special chart jackpots, 8R special chart jackpots, and 8R normal jackpots.

Next, the relationship between the probability of the winning type and the number of electric support times will be explained. In Example 1, the probability of the winning type and the number of electric support times for the special chart 1 and special chart 2 probability of the winning type were 100 times, but in this example, the probability of the winning type and the number of electric support times for the special chart 1 and special chart 2 probability of the winning type are different in that they are limited to the next time.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability (special 1) and the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is less than 100, the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in that order. This can increase the satisfaction of having a jackpot with only a few changes since the previous jackpot.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability (special 1) and the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 100 or more but less than 200, the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and first addiction prevention information 44z1 are displayed in that order. The first addiction prevention information 44z1 is the same text information as the addiction prevention information 44z in Example 1, stating "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation."

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (special 1) and the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 200 or more, the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and second addiction prevention information 44z2 are displayed in that order. The second addiction prevention information 44z2 is text information such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation. Please be careful not to get addicted" which appeals to the player more strongly than the first addiction prevention information 44z1 to prevent addiction, and an illustration appealing to prevent addiction.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability (special 2), the ending performance pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in this order, regardless of whether the previous jackpot was a 16R or 8R jackpot. The fact that the jackpot is a special chart 2 jackpot means that the jackpot was won during a high probability/support state or a low probability/support state. In other words, the jackpot may have been won without many fluctuations since the previous jackpot, and the jackpot may have been won without a significant reduction in the number of prize balls acquired in the previous jackpot. In addition, the prize balls acquired in the jackpot are unlikely to be less than those acquired in the previous jackpot. Therefore, in this situation, it is more interesting to increase the player's satisfaction by showing the bonus video 44n than to appeal to the player to prevent addiction.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability change (special 1), if the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is less than 100, the ending performance pattern is displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n, as in the case of the above-mentioned 16R probability change (special 1). If the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 100 or more but less than 200, the first addiction prevention information 44z1 is displayed instead of the bonus video 44n, as in the case of the above-mentioned 16R probability change (special 1). If the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 200 or more, the second addiction prevention information 44z2 is displayed instead of the first addiction prevention information 44z1, as in the case of the above-mentioned 16R probability change (special 1).

When the jackpot type is 8R probability (special 2) and the previous jackpot was 16R probability (special 1) (special 2), the ending presentation pattern is displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal reminder information 44y, and bonus video 44n. This is because although the prize balls acquired in the current jackpot are less than the prize balls acquired in the previous jackpot, since 16 rounds' worth of prize balls were acquired in the previous jackpot, the player may still have balls to spare.

If the jackpot type is 8R probability (special 2), but the previous jackpot was 8R probability (special 1) (special 2) or 8R normal (special 1), the ending presentation pattern will be displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal prevention information 44y, and first addiction prevention information 44z1. The prize balls acquired in this jackpot are the same as those acquired in the previous jackpot, but since the previous jackpot only acquired 8 rounds' worth of prize balls, there is a possibility that the player may not have enough balls to spare.

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1), the ending performance pattern displayed is the same as when the jackpot type is 8R special (special 1).

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (Special 2), the ending presentation pattern is displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal prevention information 44y, and second addiction prevention information 44z2, even if the previous jackpot was 16R special (Special 1) (Special 2), 8R special (Special 1) (Special 2), or 8R normal (Special 1). This is because, no matter which of the above jackpots the previous jackpot was, the player will be returned to a low probability/unsupported state after the jackpot, which means there is a possibility that the number of balls held will be significantly reduced.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to present the ending presentation that is predicted to be most appropriate for the player at that time, based on the situation from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment,
The big win ending performance has a plurality of ending performance patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs depending on the number of times the identification information variable display presentation is executed from the occurrence of the previous big win round game state to the occurrence of the next big win round game state.

According to this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation has multiple ending presentation patterns that are made up of a combination of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending presentation patterns differ depending on the number of times the identification information variable display presentation is executed from the occurrence of the previous jackpot round game state until the occurrence of the next jackpot round game state, so that a combination of images that is preferable to the player can be shown to the player as the jackpot ending presentation depending on the number of times the identification information variable display presentation is executed from the occurrence of the previous jackpot round game state until the occurrence of the next jackpot round game state. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A13).

The gaming machine of Example 1 displays the specific operation period end approaching information 44e by flashing the specific operation period information 44a, but the specific operation period end approaching information 44e may be displayed in a manner different from that of Example 1. This will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIGS. 61(a1)-(a3) are diagrams for explaining the display manner of the specific operation period end approaching information in Example 4, and (b1)-(b3) are diagrams for explaining a display manner different from (a1)-(a3).

Here, assume that this high-speed fluctuation is a complete miss and the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 20 seconds. The high-speed fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and only the specific operation period information 44a is displayed for the first 5 seconds, and then from 5 seconds to 15 seconds, the specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed. After 15 seconds has passed, the high-speed fluctuation ends, so the specific operation period end approach information 44e disappears.

As shown in (a1), from the start of the fluctuation until 5 seconds, the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42. Five seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the top right of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c displays the first specific operation period end approaching information 44e1, which flashes the specific operation period information 44a, as in Example 1, as shown in (a2). At the same time, the second specific operation period end approaching information 44e2 is displayed in a different display mode from the first specific operation period end approaching information 44e1, informing the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching.

Specifically, as shown in (a2), to the left of the first specific operation period end approach information 44e1, the second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 is displayed in text information such as "10 seconds left. Please change the volume quickly." Adding time information makes it easier for the player to understand. The high-speed fluctuation ends 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and as shown in (a3), the left pattern stop screen 43d appears, and the first specific operation period end approach information 44e1 and the second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 are hidden.

This second specific operation period end approaching information 44e2 allows the player to clearly understand that the end of the specific operation period is approaching.

Next, we will explain other display modes with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 displays specific operation period information 44a in the upper right corner of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c. This specific operation period information 44a is displayed as the third specific operation period end approaching information 44e3, which is displayed dimly as time passes, as shown in (b2). When the high-speed fluctuation approaches the end, the third specific operation period end approaching information 44e3 completely disappears on the left pattern stop screen 43d, as shown in (b3).

This third specific operation period end approaching information 44e3 allows the player to intuitively understand that the end of the specific operation period is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 includes the second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 (for example, a text image such as "10 seconds left. Please change the volume as soon as possible") indicating the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. It is also possible to merely suggest, such as "Please change the volume as soon as possible", without including time information.

According to this configuration, the specific operation period end approaching information 44e includes second specific operation period end approaching information 44e2 (e.g., a text image such as "10 seconds left. Change the volume quickly" or "Change the volume quickly") that indicates (suggests) the remaining time during which the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the remaining time during which a specific operation can be performed during a specified period during which the identification information is variably displayed. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (B3) above.

In the gaming machine according to Example 1, the right-hit during ending information 44k is displayed flashing at the end of the ending period as the next game state approaching information 44l, but the next game state approaching information 44l may be displayed in a different manner. This will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIGS. 62(a1)-(a3) are diagrams for explaining the display manner of the next game state approaching information 44l in Example 5, and (b1)-(b3) are diagrams for explaining a display manner different from (a1)-(a3).

As shown in (a1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending screen 43j at the same time that the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed. In the upper left corner of the ending screen 43j, right-hit information during the ending 44k is displayed, as in Example 1. This right-hit information during the ending 44k is displayed as the first next game state approach information 44l1 by flashing, as in Example 1, as shown in (a2).

At this time, to the right of the first next game state approaching information 44l1, second next game state approaching information 44l2 is displayed in a manner different from the first next game state approaching information 44l1, informing the player that the start timing of the next game state is approaching (in other words, the end timing of the current game state is approaching). Specifically, the second next game state approaching information 44l2 is text information such as "Not yet" that informs the player that it is not yet time to start hitting to the right in the next game state (high probability support state or low probability support state).

As shown in (a3), the first next game state approach information 44l1 and the second next game state approach information 44l2 are hidden when the screen switches to the high probability state screen 43k, where the next game state starts. On the high probability state screen 43k, right hit information 44m during high probability/support state is displayed to inform the player to hit right, instead of the first next game state approach information 44l1 and the second next game state approach information 44l2.

This second next game state approach information 44l2 allows the player to clearly understand that the start timing of the next game state is approaching.

Next, we will explain other display modes with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the timing when the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed, and the right hit during ending information 44k is displayed. As shown in (b2), the right hit during ending information 44k is displayed in a flashing manner as the first next game state approaching information 44l1. At this time, the third next game state approaching information 44l3, which is illustration information indicating that the next game state has not yet occurred, is displayed to the right of the first next game state approaching information 44l1. The third next game state approaching information 44l3 is an image showing an image of a hand stopping an arrow indicating a right hit, which was displayed as the right hit during ending information 44k (which is the first next game state approaching information 44l1 at the timing shown in (b2)).

When the ending period ends, as shown in (b3), the first next game state approach information 44l1 and the third next game state approach information 44l3 are hidden, and the high probability state screen 43k and the right hit information during high probability/support state 44m are displayed.

This third next game state approach information 44l3 allows the player to intuitively understand that the end of the ending period is approaching and that the start of the next game state is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment,
The right-hit notification mode (second mode) in the big win ending performance is a mode that makes it more difficult for the player to perform a right-hit operation than the right-hit notification mode (first mode) in the big win round game state. For example, the second mode is the right-hit information during ending 44k indicated by the characters "right hit" and a right-facing arrow, and the first mode is the second next game state approach information 44l2 indicated by the character information "Not yet!" displayed near the right-hit information during ending 44k and an illustration that prevents right hitting. The character information "Not yet!" and the illustration that prevents right hitting can dissuade the player from performing a right hit operation.

According to this configuration, the right-hit notification mode (first mode) during the jackpot ending performance is a mode that makes it more difficult for the player to perform a right-hit operation than the right-hit notification mode (second mode) during the jackpot round play state. This makes it more difficult to recognize that the timing to perform a right-hit game is when the jackpot ending performance is being executed, and therefore reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time during the execution of the jackpot ending performance for the timing to perform a right-hit game in a high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (C3).

The next game state approaching information 44l may be displayed in a display manner different from that of Examples 1 and 5. Specifically, the next game state approaching information 44l with content different from that of Examples 1 and 5 is displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIGS. 63(a) to (e) are diagrams explaining the display manner of the next game state approaching information 441 in Example 6.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending screen 43j at the timing when the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed, and right-hit information during the ending 44k is displayed. Three seconds before the end of the ending period, the right-hit information during the ending 44k gradually expands as shown in (b) to be displayed as fourth next game state approaching information 44l4, which informs the player that the next game state (a game state requiring a right hit) is approaching. At the same time, to the right of the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4, a fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 is displayed, which counts down the time until the end of the ending period to inform the player that the start timing of the next game state is approaching. In (b), the number "3" is displayed in a circle to inform the player that there are three seconds until the start of the next game state.

As shown in (c), when one second has passed since (b), the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 is enlarged compared to the timing of (b). The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "2" in a circle, indicating that two seconds remain.

As shown in (d), when one second has passed since (c), the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 is enlarged even more than at the timing of (b). The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "1" in a circle, indicating that one second is remaining.

As shown in (e), when the ending period ends and the next high probability/support state begins, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 are hidden, and high probability/support state right hit information 44m, which is larger than the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 shown in (d), is displayed.

The fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 allow the player to more intuitively understand that the end of the ending period is approaching and the start of the next game state is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment,
In addition, the display control device 45 performs a right hit notification in a third mode suggesting a return from the second mode to the first mode at the end of the big win ending performance (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending performance to the end). For example, it displays a fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 that gradually enlarges the right hit information 44j during the ending. It also displays a fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 that counts down the time from 3 seconds before the end of the ending performance to the end.

According to this configuration, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in the third mode, which suggests a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the jackpot ending presentation (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself). This makes it possible to quickly resume the right-hit notification when the jackpot ending presentation transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (C5) above.

The next game state approach information 44l may be displayed in a display manner different from that of Examples 1, 5, and 6. Specifically, in this embodiment, the next game state approach information 44l is displayed continuously until a timing different from that of Examples 1, 5, and 6 so that the game ball launched based on the next game state approach information 441 can enter the game at the first opening timing of the electric role of the start winning device 33b for special chart 2 in the next high probability/support state, etc. Description will be given with reference to Figure 64. Figure 64 (a) to (f) are diagrams explaining the display manner of the next game state approach information 441 in Example 7.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending screen 43j at the timing when the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed, and right-hit information 44k during the ending is displayed.

During the big win round, many game balls pass through the normal symbol starting hole 34 by hitting the right hand side, so in (a), all four reserved lamps 41c that reserve the change of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 41 indicate that there is a reserved ball. After the ending period ends, that is, at the same time as the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state occurs, the normal symbol starts to change. In the support state, the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning result with almost all probability. If the first lottery for the normal symbol is a winning result, the timing of the first opening of the electric device of the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc. is 5 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. The time until the game ball launched by the right hitting operation enters the opening special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is 4 seconds after the launch.

Here, assume that the display mode of the next game state approach information 441 is set so that the player hits to the right at the same time as the ending period ends, as in Examples 1, 5, and 6. The first game ball hit to the right at the same time as the ending period ends passes through the normal symbol starting hole 34, so the number of reserved normal symbols increases. However, because of the time relationship described above, this first game ball does not win in the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b. In this sense, this first game ball is wasted. The wider the time interval in the time relationship described above, the more game balls will be wasted.

In this embodiment, the display timing of the next game state approach information 441 is delayed so that the first game ball will enter the special chart 2 start winning device 33b. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approach information 44l5 start to be displayed from the timing 2 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 is a display that gradually enlarges the ending right hit information 44k from this timing so that the reduced image showing the ending right hit information 44k becomes an enlarged image showing the high probability/support state right hit information 44m after 3 seconds. At this timing, the ending right hit information 44k is a quarter of the size of the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 is a display that counts down the remaining time (3 seconds) from this timing until the resumption of right hit in the next high probability/support state. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 is displayed as a circled number "3."

As shown in (c), one second before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 displays the right hit during ending information 44k enlarged to one-third the size of the right hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "2" in a circle.

As shown in (d), at the start of the next high probability/support state, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 is displayed as an enlarged display of the right hit during ending information 44k, which is two-thirds the size of the right hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 is displayed as a circled number "1."

As shown in (e), one second after the start of the next high probability/support state, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 displays the ending right hit information 44k enlarged to the same size as the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. In other words, the high probability/support state right hit information 44m is displayed in place of the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 has erased the circled text. In other words, the countdown has ended. At this point, the player begins the right hit operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state. At this time, the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is in an open state based on the fact that the first normal symbol lottery has been won. The game ball launched at the time of (e) reaches the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b 4 seconds later, that is, 5 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state. In this way, after the player stops hitting the right during the ending period, the game ball launched first by the player wins the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b at the first opening timing of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball launched first by the player from being wasted.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment,
The display control device 45 displays a fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 (countdown information until the start timing of the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc.) indicating that the start timing of the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching.

According to this configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5, which indicates that the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by not being able to properly grasp the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. An example is the gaming machine described in (C7) above.

The display control device 45 displays fifth next game state approach information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the timing to start the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching from the big win ending performance to the next high probability/support state, etc. (the period from 2 seconds before the end of the big win ending performance to 1 second after the start of the next high probability/support state).

According to this configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 (countdown information) during the big win ending presentation, which indicates that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce disadvantages caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. An example is the gaming machine described in (C8) above.

The next game state approach information 44l may be displayed at a different timing from that of Example 7. Specifically, in this embodiment, the next game state approach information 44l is displayed until a different timing from that of Example 7 so that the game ball launched based on the next game state approach information 441 before the end of the ending period can enter the game at the first opening timing of the electric role of the start winning device 33b for special chart 2 in the next high probability/support state, etc. The explanation will be made with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 (a) to (f) are diagrams explaining the display mode of the next game state approach information 441 in Example 8.

As shown in (a), 6 seconds before the end of the ending period, the ending screen 43j displays addiction prevention information 44z and right-hit information during the ending 44k.

If the first normal symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the timing of the first opening of the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc., is set to be earlier than in Example 7, for example, 2 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. The time it takes for the game ball launched by right-hit operation to enter the open special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is set to be 4 seconds after launch, the same as in Example 7.

In this embodiment, the timing of displaying the next game state approaching information 441 is brought forward compared to embodiment 7 so that the first game ball will enter the special chart 2 start winning device 33b. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 start to be displayed 5 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 starts to expand the right-hit during ending information 44k from this timing. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "3" in a circle as a countdown display from this timing.

As shown in (c), four seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 expands the right hit during ending information 44k to one-third the size of the right hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "2" in a circle as a countdown display.

As shown in (d), three seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 expands the right hit during ending information 44k to two-thirds the size of the right hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "1" in a circle as a countdown display.

As shown in (e), two seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 expands the right hit during ending information 44k to the same size as the right hit during high probability and support state information 44m. In other words, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 is replaced with the right hit during high probability and support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 erases the circled characters, indicating the end of the countdown. At this point, the player begins the right hit operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed two seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state. At this time, the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is in an open state based on the fact that the first normal symbol lottery has been won. The game ball launched at the time of (e) reaches the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b four seconds later, that is, two seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state. In this way, after the player stops hitting to the right during the ending period, the game ball launched first by the player wins in the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b at the first opening timing of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b.

As a result, even if the timing of the first opening of the electric device of the special chart 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc. is earlier than in Example 7, for example, 2 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state, etc., it is possible to prevent the first game ball fired by the player from going to waste.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment,
The display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the timing to start the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching during the jackpot ending presentation (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending presentation to 2 seconds before the end).

According to this configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching during the jackpot ending presentation (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending presentation to 2 seconds before the end). This allows the player to execute the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. at the appropriate timing during the jackpot ending presentation. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (C9) above.

This embodiment differs from the previous embodiments in that the sound output during the volume change operation is associated with the display effect. In addition, the display mode of the next game state approach information also differs from the previous embodiments. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the big win round game in Example 9.

In Example 1, the specific operation period information 44a is text information saying "Volume can be changed", and this text information functions as specific operation period end approaching information 44e that flashes as the ending time approaches. In this example, the specific operation period information 44a is text information saying "Volume can be changed by pressing the button during the ending", as shown in (b) to (g). The specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed as a seek bar or indicator image that indicates the elapsed time of the ending performance. As a result, when the seek bar or indicator image approaches the end time, it can be intuitively recognized that the end of the specific operation period is approaching (i.e., the start timing of the next game state is approaching).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the player presses any of the frame buttons 80, the screen switches from the ending screen 43j to the specific operation screen 44b. That is, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b not only by pressing the decision button 81, but also by pressing the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83. In other words, during the ending performance, unlike during the reach display performance or the big win round display performance, the operation means such as the frame button 80 is not operated, so if any operation means is operated while the specific operation period information 44a is displayed, it is determined that a volume change operation has been performed, making it easier for the player to change the volume. Of course, if the gaming machine requires the player to hold their hand over a specified area of the display screen 42a instead of pressing the frame button 80 during the reach display performance or the big win round display performance, the screen may be switched to the specific operation screen 45b by holding their hand over the display screen 42a.

During the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the addiction prevention information 44z shown in (e), if any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b as shown in (i). When the decision button 81 is pressed at the time of switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the addiction prevention information 44z "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" is output in a voice at volume 3. As shown in (j), when either the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, which change the volume, is operated on this specific operation screen 44b, the sound output unit 24 outputs the addiction prevention information 44z "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" at the changed volume. This voice is output at the changed volume every time the player presses the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 as a volume change operation.

As a result, after switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the player does not know what is being displayed as the ending information 44j at that time because the ending information 44j is hidden behind the specific operation screen 44b, but the player can change the volume while listening to the sound corresponding to the ending information 44j that will be displayed when the volume is changed. Therefore, even if a volume change operation is performed during the ending presentation period, the ending information 44j can be communicated to the player.

If the volume change operation occurs during the display period of the next game state approach information 44w, the sound "One more time" is output; if the volume change operation occurs during the display period of the manufacturer information 44x, the sound "SANYO" is output; and if the volume change operation occurs during the display period of the card removal prevention information 44y, the sound "Please be careful not to forget to remove your prepaid card" is output.

In addition, if the ending information 44j changes to different ending information 44j during a volume change (for example, if it changes from forgetting to remove card information 44y to addiction prevention information 44z), a sound corresponding to the changed ending information 44j (for example, a sound that says "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation," which corresponds to addiction prevention information 44z) is output. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound that corresponds to the ending information 44j that is being displayed at the time of the change operation.

If the display effect when the volume is changed is a previously determined display effect that cannot be associated (for example, a changing display effect that displays a rapidly changing screen 43c that cannot be output as sound), the sound is not related to the display effect (sound effects such as "volume 1, volume 2" or "beep, beep"). This makes it possible to prevent discomfort or inconvenience to the player by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a previously determined display effect that cannot be associated.

In addition, for example, addiction prevention information 44z may be faintly reflected behind the specific operation screen 44b. This reflection is to the extent that the characters of the addiction prevention information 44z are not recognized. For example, at least a part of it (for example, the outline of the display information in the case of addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed superimposed in a visible manner behind the specific operation screen 44b. Since the ending information 44j can be faintly confirmed while performing a volume change operation, the volume change operation can be performed with confidence without worrying that the ending display performance will end while performing a volume change operation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment 9 includes a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying a display performance, a sound output unit 24 that outputs sound in accordance with the display performance, a decision button 81, a left selection button 82, and a right selection button 83 that constitute a frame button 80 that can be operated by a player, and a sound output control device 46 that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on the operation on the frame button 80. The sound output control device 46 can change the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the ending display performance displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, a sound such as "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" corresponding to the addiction prevention information 44z). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display performance when changing the volume, thereby improving the interest of the player in changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

In addition, if the ending display effect at the time of changing the volume changes to a different display effect (for example, if it changes from an ending display effect displaying information 44y to prevent forgetting to remove cards to an ending display effect displaying information 44z to prevent addiction), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed ending display effect (for example, a sound saying "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" corresponding to the addiction prevention information 44z). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect being displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimal volume can be set at the time of the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

The operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that can be associated (for example, an ending display effect that displays information 44y to prevent forgetting to remove the card and information 44z to prevent addiction that can be output as sound), and is a sound that is not related to the display effect (sound effects such as "volume 1, volume 2" or "beep, beep") when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated (for example, a changing display effect that displays high-speed changing screen 43c that cannot be output as sound). This makes it possible to prevent discomfort or inconvenience to the player by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D3).

In addition, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in such a way that at least a portion of it (for example, the outline of the display information in the case of addiction prevention information 44z) is visible. This ensures a sufficient area for displaying the image for the volume change operation, making it easier to change the volume. Furthermore, since the player can check the display effect being displayed by the image superimposed behind while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the display effect will end during the volume change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D6).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the ending screen 43j (ending information 44j) was not displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 while the specific operation screen 44b was being displayed, but in this embodiment, it is displayed. This point will be explained with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the big win round play in embodiment 10.

Figures 67(a)-(h) are the same as Figure 66, so please refer to the explanation there for the common content. The display area for the ending information 44j is wider than that of Figure 66, and each piece of ending information 44j is displayed in the same display area.

Next, as shown in (i) and (j), when the player presses the frame button 80, the third symbol display device 42 displays the specific operation screen 44b. The specific operation screen 44b displays the ending information 44j, the change information display section 44c, and the operation method display section 44d. The ending information 44j is displayed in a part of the display area of the ending information 44j in the ending screen 43j, in a reduced size than when the ending screen 43j is displayed. For example, the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed as the addiction prevention information reduced display section 44z3, in which the text "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" is reduced to a size that can be recognized by the player. The reduced ending information 44j, the change information display section 44c, and the operation method display section 44d are displayed in the display area of the ending information 44j in the ending screen 43j. In this way, by using a common display area for the ending screen 43j and the specific operation screen 44b, switching between the display areas becomes smoother, and the screen can be presented to the player in a cohesive manner.

In addition, in accordance with the volume change operation, audio corresponding to the ending information 44j is output at the changed volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the ending information 44j and listening to the audio corresponding to the ending information 44j. Furthermore, since the player can check the displayed ending information 44j in a reduced image while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the ending display performance will end while performing the volume change operation.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 10, the third pattern display device 42 can display the ending display effect (e.g., the reduced anti-addiction information display 44z3) and volume information (e.g., the change information display section 44c showing the volume) when changing the volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the ending display effect and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, thereby improving the interest of the player in changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

In addition, the image of the ending display effect displayed during the volume change operation (e.g., reduced anti-addiction information display 44z3) is a reduced image compared to the image of the ending display effect displayed before the volume change operation (e.g., anti-addiction information 44z). This makes it easier to change the volume because the image of the ending display effect is reduced during the volume change operation. Furthermore, since the player can check the ending display effect being displayed in the reduced image while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the ending display effect will end during the volume change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D5).

In Example 10, the ending information 44j was displayed in a reduced size, but in this embodiment, it is displayed in a different way. This will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a big win round game in Example 10.

(a) to (h) are the same as in FIG. 66, so please refer to that explanation for the common content. Ending information 44j displays not only text information, but also corresponding illustration information, etc. Therefore, the display area of ending information 44j is wider than that of FIG. 66 and FIG. 67.

During the ending period from (b) to (g), for example during the display period of the addiction prevention information 44z shown in (e), if any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b as shown in (i) and (j). When the volume change operation is performed, the third pattern display device 42 displays the ending information 44j and the change information display section 44c side by side and at approximately the same size. In other words, the display area of the ending information 44j before the volume change operation is divided into the display area of the ending information 44j after the volume change operation (e.g., the addiction prevention information split display section 44z4) and the display area of the change information display section 44c.

Specifically, the display area of the ending information 44j before the volume change operation is provided with a text information display area 44j1 in which text information is displayed in the upper half, and an illustration information display area 44j2 in which illustration information is displayed in the lower half. After the volume change operation, the text information display area 44j1 is left as is, and the illustration information display area 44j2 is switched to the changed information display section 44c. By dividing the display area of the ending information 44j in this way, the display area of the ending information 44j can continue to be used even if the screen changes. This makes the switching of the display area smoother and reduces eye fatigue for the player.

The reduced operation display section 44d is provided within the display area of the change information display section 44c. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the ending information 44j, which is arranged next to the change information display section 44c at approximately the same size, and while listening to the sound related to the ending display performance.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 11, the third pattern display device 42 can display the ending display effect (e.g., the addiction prevention information split display 44z4) and the volume information (e.g., the change information split display section 44c1 indicating the volume) side by side when changing the volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the ending display effect lined up next to the change information split display section 44c1 and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, thereby improving the interest of the player in changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the volume change operation was performed during the ending presentation, but it may also be performed during the big win round display presentation. This point will be explained with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during a big win round play in embodiment 12.

In this embodiment, the specific operation period information 44a is text information stating "Volume can be changed by pressing and holding for 2 seconds or more." During the big win round display performance, a display performance that requires the operation of the frame button 80 is executed, so pressing and holding the frame button 80 for 2 seconds or more is adopted as a method that does not overlap with the operation of these frame buttons 80. If an operating means other than the frame button 80 is used, a different operating method is used.

The operation sound when changing the volume during the jackpot round display effect is a sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, the intro sound or chorus sound of the song being asked when a song title guessing quiz display effect is being executed during the jackpot round display effect). For example, as shown in (a), the round screen 43i displays "Take the quiz. If you get 50% or more correct, you can see a special video" as the round display effect 44h1. Next, as shown in (b), round quiz information 44h2 is displayed as the round display effect 44h1.

As shown in (b) and (c), the mid-round quiz information 44h2 is question information such as "Question 1: What is the title of this song?", option information such as "1. AAA, 2. BBB, 3. CCC", and mid-round operation information 44h3 indicating how to operate the frame button 80 in the quiz performance. The mid-round quiz operation information 44h3 indicates that a normal press (one press) of the decision button 81 will confirm the option, a normal press of the left selection button 82 will move the option down, and a normal press of the right selection button 83 will move the option up.

As shown in (d), when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 to 20 seconds) has elapsed since the mid-round quiz information 44h2, the mid-round quiz answer information 44h4 is displayed. The mid-round quiz answer information 44h4 indicates whether the option selected by the player is correct or incorrect. If the answer is incorrect, it is possible that the low volume is the cause, so as shown in (e), the mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5 is displayed. The mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5 is text information that encourages the player to change the volume, for example, by saying "Try changing the volume." After the mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5 is displayed for a short period of time of about 3 seconds, the second question and onwards are displayed as shown in (f) and (i).

When the frame button 80 is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b. In this embodiment, the specific operation screen 44b displays, as shown in (g), volume change suggestion information during the round 44h5, a reduced quiz information display section 44h6, and an operation method display section 44d showing volume operation. When a volume change operation is performed using the left selection button 82 or right selection button 83, the intro music or chorus sound corresponding to the quiz question is output at the changed volume, as shown in (h).

This allows the player to change the volume while listening to sounds related to the jackpot round display effect when performing a volume change operation, improving the interest of the player in changing the volume. Also, if the jackpot round display effect when the volume is changed changes to a different display effect (for example, if the display effect changes from the song that is the first question to the song that is the second question in a song title guessing quiz display effect), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect (for example, the intro sound or chorus sound of the second song). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to sounds related to the jackpot round display effect that is displayed at the time of the change operation, making it possible to set the optimal volume when performing the change operation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 12 includes a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot round display performance, a sound output unit 24 that outputs sound in accordance with the jackpot round display performance, a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player, and an audio output control device 46 that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on the operation of the frame button 80. The audio output control device 46 can change the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the jackpot round display performance displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, when a song title guessing quiz display performance is being executed in the jackpot round display performance, the intro sound or chorus sound of the song to be played. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display performance when changing the volume, which improves the interest of the player in changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

In addition, if the jackpot round display effect changes to a different display effect when the volume is changed (for example, if the display effect of a song guessing quiz changes from the song that is the first question to the song that is the second question), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect (for example, the intro sound or chorus sound of the second song). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect that is being displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimal volume can be set when the change operation is performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, a volume change operation has been described as an example of a specific operation of the present invention, but the specific operation may be an operation other than a volume change operation, for example, a character selection operation in a duel-type reach display presentation. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of the specific operation period during the reach display presentation in embodiment 13.

When the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 42 transitions from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a transition display performance in which a predetermined image is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. Specifically, when the reach display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 42 transitions from a player's character selectable state of a battle-type reach development performance to a battle execution state of a battle-type reach development performance, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a player's character selection performance in which a player's character selection performance image is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 as shown in (a) to (c) from the player's character selection start timing of the player's character selection state shown in (a) to the battle start timing of the battle execution state shown in (d).

The player character selection effect is a display effect in which the first player PY1, second player PY2, and third player PY3 are displayed as player characters selectable by the player, and each player is introduced in turn while issuing a message highlighting their own characteristics. Specifically, the player character selection effect first displays the first player PY1 issuing the first player information PYA of "decide with a bang" as shown in (a), then displays the second player PY2 issuing the second player information PYB of "decide quietly" as shown in (b), and finally displays the third player PY3 issuing the third player information PYC of "decide moderately" as shown in (c).

The first player information PYA suggests to the player that if the first player PY1 is selected, the subsequent reach display effects will have flashy lights, sounds, and movable parts. The second player information PYA indicates to the player that if the second player PY2 is selected, the subsequent reach display effects will have these effects quieter. The third player information PYC indicates to the player that if the third player PY3 is selected, the subsequent reach development display effects will have the balance of these effects moderately controlled.

The first player information PYA through the third player information PYC are displayed in order within the selection time. If the player does not perform a selection operation after the selection time has elapsed, as shown in (d), a battle reach with the enemy character TK is started using a character (e.g., the first player PY1) that is automatically selected by lottery within the gaming machine.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player of upcoming information suggesting that the timing to start the next state has not arrived while the transition display performance is being executed. Specifically, as shown in (a) to (c), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player of specific operation period information 44a and specific operation period end approach information 44e suggesting that the timing to start the showdown execution state has not arrived while the transition display performance is being executed.

The specific operation period information 44a displays, for example, text information such as "Select player with button," indicating that pressing any of the frame buttons 80 will allow the player to select their own character in a duel-type reach. The specific operation period end proximity information 44e is displayed as a seek bar or indicator image indicating the remaining time for accepting operation of the frame buttons 80 for the player's character selection performance as a valid operation.

When the frame button 80 is operated effectively, the change information display section 44c is displayed as shown in (e), (f), and (h). The change information display section 44c displays the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3 that the player can select. The player operates the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 to select the desired character. The player is notified of the period during which the selection operation is possible by the specific operation period end proximity information 44e described above. After selecting the desired character, if the player waits until the start timing of the showdown reach, the showdown performance will start with the selected character. Alternatively, if the decision button 81 is operated, a waiting image such as "Please wait a moment" will be displayed, and then the showdown performance will start with the selected character.

This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the player's character selection display is being executed is a state in which the player's character can be selected; in other words, the current time when the player's character selection display is being executed is not yet the next battle execution state. This therefore reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the player's character selection display is being executed is the next battle execution state (or that the timing for the start of the next battle execution state is immediately ahead) (for example, the disadvantage of selecting an unintended character and seeing a reach development display that is different from the player's preference).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 13, when the game state transitions from a predetermined state (a state in which a player's character can be selected in a battle-type reach development presentation) to the next state (e.g., a battle execution state in a battle-type reach development presentation), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an execution function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 which executes a transition display presentation (player's character selection presentation) that displays a player's character selection presentation image on the third pattern display device 42 from a predetermined timing of the player's character selection state (the player's character selection start timing) to a predetermined timing of the next battle execution state (e.g., the battle start timing), and a notification function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 which notifies the player of non-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e indicating the remaining time of the player's character selection presentation) that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next battle execution state has not arrived during the execution of the player's character selection presentation. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the player's character selection display is being executed is a state in which the player's character can be selected; in other words, the current time when the player's character selection display is being executed is not yet the next battle execution state. This therefore reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the player's character selection display is being executed is the next battle execution state (or that the timing to start the next battle execution state is immediately ahead) (for example, the disadvantage of selecting an unintended character and seeing a reach development display that is different from the player's preference).

In the above-mentioned Example 13, the players PY displayed in the battle-type reach display performance were the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3 in a fixed pattern, but the players PY may change to different patterns depending on the results of the big win lottery. This point will be explained with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display performance in Example 14.

When the display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 42 transitions from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a transition display effect in which multiple types of images are displayed successively in a predetermined combination on the third pattern display device 42 from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot result, the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result. When the result is a miss, the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of reach display effect that leads to the miss result. In other words, the transition display effect in this embodiment is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result that the player is expected to achieve.

For example, in the case of a reach display effect that anticipates a normal jackpot, three players PY1 to PY3 are displayed in succession as in Example 13, and the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed in succession. In the case of a reach display effect that anticipates a special jackpot, four players PY1 to PY4 are displayed in succession, and the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed in succession. In addition, the display mode of a specific player may be different between the reach display effect that anticipates a normal jackpot and the reach display effect that anticipates a special jackpot.

The specific operation period end approach information 44e is a seek bar or indicator image that indicates to the player that the timing for starting the next competition execution state has not arrived until the timing when the execution of multiple types of images in succession in a predetermined combination is completed. The first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed in order within the selection time indicated by the specific operation period end approach information 44e.

As a result, during the player's character selection presentation, the specific operation period end approach information 44e indicates that the start timing of the next showdown execution state has not yet arrived until the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in a predetermined combination, reducing the risk of suffering a disadvantage caused by mistaking the start timing of the next showdown execution state (or that the start timing of the next showdown execution state is immediately approaching) (for example, the disadvantage of seeing a reach development presentation that is different from the player's preference due to selecting an unintended character).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 14, the player's character selection presentation involves a sequence of a predetermined combination of multiple types of images (e.g., the first player PY1 to the fourth player PY4, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD), and the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result that the player is expected to receive as a result of the jackpot lottery (e.g., in the case of a special jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed), and the specific operation period end proximity information 44e indicates to the player that the start timing of the next showdown execution state has not arrived until the sequence of a predetermined combination of multiple types of images has ended (e.g., in the case of a special jackpot, until the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed within the selected time, and in the case of a normal jackpot, until the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed within the selected time). As a result, during the player's character selection presentation, the specific operation period end approach information 44e indicates that the start timing of the next showdown execution state has not yet arrived until the timing at which multiple types of images are displayed in succession in a predetermined combination has ended, reducing the risk of suffering a disadvantage caused by mistaking the start timing of the next showdown execution state (or that the start timing of the next showdown execution state is immediately approaching) (for example, the disadvantage of seeing a reach development presentation that is different from the player's preference due to selecting an unintended character). This is an example of the gaming machine described in (A21).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, one pattern was determined for one type of big win ending display effect, but in this embodiment, a pattern that is displayed for a shorter time is determined for one type of big win ending display effect, which is different. This point will be explained with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the big win round game in embodiment 15.

After the end of the jackpot round game state shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls the display of the jackpot ending display performance in a predetermined pattern on the third symbol display device 42. In this embodiment, the jackpot round game state shown in (a) is a jackpot round game state of a special 1-character jackpot (16R), and the jackpot ending display performance is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed.

The predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which the predetermined display information (predetermined ending information 44j consisting of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y) is displayed for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y), and a second pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time (e.g., 10 seconds) and in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. The first pattern is a pattern in which the information is displayed in the order shown in FIG. 66 of the above-mentioned Example 9. The second pattern is a pattern of the big win ending display performance shown in (b) and subsequent pages. Details of the second pattern will be described later.

In this way, in this embodiment, the big win ending display performance can be executed in a variety of variations in the display time and display mode for displaying the specified ending information 44j. As a result, the entertainment value of the big win ending display performance can be improved.

The first and second patterns may be selected internally by the gaming machine, for example, by a lottery held by the display control device 45 (a lottery held by obtaining random numbers based on the reception of a display variable pattern command). With this configuration, different patterns of ending presentations can be executed even for the same type of jackpot. Also, the player may be able to select whether the jackpot round display presentation will be executed in the first or second pattern at the beginning of the jackpot ending display presentation. With this configuration, the jackpot ending display presentation can be made closer to the player's preferences. Also, the jackpot ending display presentation may be executed in only the second pattern. With this configuration, a jackpot ending display presentation that has never been seen before can be shown to the player.

The second pattern will be explained in a little more detail. The first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a combined state (simultaneous display state in which the information is displayed simultaneously). Specifically, the second pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y that were displayed in order in the first pattern are displayed simultaneously as shown in (b).

This allows for an increased variety in the jackpot ending display effects without compromising the uniformity of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns.

The length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. Specifically, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the length of the entire display period is 35 seconds in both cases. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, by shortening the display time for displaying the above-mentioned specified ending information 44j, a new display effect can be executed by utilizing the surplus time generated before displaying the bonus video 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect.

The new display effect is, for example, ending quiz display effect 44p1. In ending quiz display effect 44p1, text information "Take the quiz. If you get it right, you'll see a special video" is displayed as shown in (c). The quiz is displayed as ending quiz information 44p2 as shown in (d) to (f). Operations during the quiz are displayed as ending quiz operation information 44p3. These are the same as round quiz information 44p2 and round quiz operation information 44p3 shown in FIG. 69 of Example 12.

The time to answer the ending quiz is displayed as specific operation period end approach information 44e. If the player does not answer within the answer time, it is assumed that the player has selected a preset option, and it is determined whether the answer is correct or not. Whether the answer is correct or not is displayed as ending quiz answer information 44p4, as shown in (g) and (k). If the quiz is answered correctly, ending quiz correct answer bonus information 44p5 (special live music video) is displayed as a special bonus as bonus video 44n, and if the quiz is incorrect, ending quiz incorrect answer bonus information 44p7 (normal live music video) is displayed as a normal bonus.

When any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed and held during the quiz in accordance with the specific operation period information 44a ("Press and hold for 2 seconds or more to change the volume"), the ending quiz information 44p2 is reduced and displayed in the reduced ending quiz information display section 44p6, as shown in (i) and (j), and the change information display section 44c and the operation method display section 44d are also reduced and displayed, allowing the volume to be changed while watching the quiz. If the volume is changed during the quiz, the intro or chorus of the song being asked is output, as in Example 12.

In this way, the new display effects that can be displayed by executing the second pattern of big win round display effects allow for volume adjustment during the quiz, the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n changes depending on whether the quiz is answered correctly, and the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. This makes it possible to increase the variety of ending display effects that will attract the player's interest.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 15 is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying a jackpot ending display performance related to a game, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of the jackpot ending display performance on the third symbol display device 42 in a predetermined pattern, and the predetermined pattern has a first pattern in which the predetermined display information (for example, predetermined ending information 44j consisting of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y) is displayed for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y), and a second pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time (for example, 10 seconds) and in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. This makes it possible to execute the jackpot ending display performance in various variations in which the display time and display mode for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j are different. As a result, the interest of the jackpot ending display performance can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E1).

The first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a combined state (simultaneous display state in which the information is displayed simultaneously). This makes it possible to increase the variety of the jackpot ending display presentation without compromising the uniformity of the content of the jackpot ending display presentation between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E3).

In addition, the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern (for example, 35 seconds). As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is shortened, and a new display effect (quiz display effect during ending 44p1) can be executed using the surplus time generated before displaying the bonus video 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect. This new display effect allows the volume to be adjusted during the quiz, the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n changes depending on whether the quiz is answered correctly or incorrectly, and the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. This allows for an increase in the variety of ending display effects. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

The predetermined ending information 44j is ending presentation information after a jackpot round is played. This allows for an increased variety of ending presentations after a jackpot round is played. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E5).

In the above-mentioned Example 15, new ending information (ending quiz display effect 44p1) was displayed before the last ending information to be displayed (bonus video 44n) by executing the second pattern of the jackpot round display effect, but in this example, the last ending information to be displayed (bonus video 44n) is changed to a longer version by executing the second pattern of the jackpot ending display effect. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 73. Figure 73 is a diagram explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game in Example 16.

Specifically, by executing the second pattern of the big win ending display performance, as shown in (b), a predetermined ending information 44j (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y) is displayed in a combined state for, for example, 10 seconds, and then, as shown in (c) to (h), the bonus video 44n is displayed for the remaining ending time (25 seconds). At the beginning of the bonus video 44n, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed. The specific operation period information 44a displays text information such as "You can change the volume, light intensity, and sound quality by pressing and holding during music." The specific operation period information 44a may be erased after being pressed and held. When the frame button 80 is pressed and held, as shown in (d), the bonus video n is reduced and displayed in the bonus video split display section 44n1, and a change information display section 44c is displayed that allows the user to select whether to change the volume, light intensity, sound quality, or "back." If the user selects the volume, a volume change information display section 44c1 that allows the user to change the volume is displayed as shown in (e) and (i). If light intensity is selected, a light intensity change information display section 44c2 that allows the light intensity to be changed is displayed as shown in (f) and (j). If sound quality is selected, a sound quality change information display section 44c3 that allows the sound quality to be changed is displayed as shown in (g) and (k). After changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality by operating the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83, pressing the decision button 81 returns to the change information display section 44c. If "Back" is selected in the change information display section 44c, the display returns to the state in which the bonus video 44n is displayed full screen as shown in (h). Note that it may be set so that the display returns to the state in which the bonus video 44n is displayed full screen when a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed after returning to the change information display section 44c.

In this way, in the jackpot ending display performance executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the specified ending information 44j is shortened, and the generated excess time is used to lengthen the display time of the bonus video 44n, and by making it possible to display the change information display section 44c for changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality during the display time of the bonus video 44n, it is possible to increase the variety of display performances while ensuring a long period during which the volume, etc. can be adjusted.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 16, the display period of the big win ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the display period of the big win ending display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the big win ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the ending countdown information 44v, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y) is shortened, and the display time of the bonus video 44n is lengthened by using the generated surplus time, and the change information display section 44c for changing the volume, light amount, and sound quality during the display time of the bonus video 44n can be displayed, so that the period during which the volume, etc. can be adjusted can be long, and the variety of the display effects can be increased. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

In the above-mentioned Examples 15 and 16, the big win ending display performance using the second pattern (composite display) was performed internally by the gaming machine, but in this example, the big win ending display performance using the second pattern (composite display) is performed based on the player's operation. This point will be explained with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the big win round play in Example 17.

The display control device 45 controls the display of an operation request image that requests the player to operate the frame button 80 during the big win ending display performance shown in (b) to (f). Specifically, as shown in (b) and (c), the operation request image is specific operation period information 44a with the text information "Volume, light intensity, sound quality change acceptance time". The specific operation period information 44a is a seek bar or indicator image that indicates the elapsed time (remaining time) of the volume, etc. change acceptance time (10 seconds).

The display control device 45 controls the display of operation display effects (display effects for changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality) using the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. If the player does not operate the frame button 80 on the operation request image, and if a special chart 1 certain jackpot (16R) is achieved by Super Reach C or D, the game will transition to the next game state after the display of the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z has ended.

The predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not operate on the operation request image, predetermined ending information 44j (for example, in the case of a special chart 1 guaranteed jackpot (16R) due to a Super Reach C or D, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) are displayed for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display manner (one by one in order), and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player operates on the operation request image, this predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a shorter display time (for example, 5 seconds) than the first pattern and in a display manner different from the first pattern (all at the same time), and a display effect for changing the volume, etc. is executed after the display of the predetermined ending information 44j has ended.

As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated in response to the operation request image, the entertainment value of the big win ending display presentation can be improved by allowing the player to enjoy the change display presentation of the volume, etc., without significantly compromising the entertainment value of the big win ending display presentation.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, information to prevent forgetting to remove the card 44y, and information to prevent addiction 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened (e.g., all at the same time for 5 seconds).

In detail, if the player operates the operation request image during the volume changeable time, the post-specific operation waiting information 44a3, which shows text information saying "Please wait a moment before operating to change the volume" as shown in (g), is displayed until the end of the volume changeable time. The predetermined ending display 44j displayed according to the second pattern is displayed after the display of the post-specific operation waiting information 44a3 has ended.

This allows for an increased variety of changes to the volume and other display effects without compromising the uniformity of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns.

In addition, the display period of the big win ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the display period of the big win ending display effect executed in the second pattern (35 seconds). As a result, in the big win ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened (to 5 seconds), and the generated surplus time (20 seconds) can be used to provide a period (10 seconds) for displaying the volume change operation effect and a period (10 seconds) for displaying the bonus video 44n. The period for displaying the volume change operation effect is displayed as specific operation period end approach information 44e with text information "volume, light amount, sound quality change possible time". The specific operation period end approach information 44e is a seek bar or indicator image that indicates the elapsed time (remaining time) of the volume change possible time (10 seconds). In this way, the variation of the volume change display effect can be increased while ensuring the period for adjusting the volume, etc.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 17 is equipped with a third pattern display device 42 that displays display effects related to the game including a big win ending display effect, a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player in response to the display effects, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of display effects on the third pattern display device 42, including displaying the big win ending display effect in a predetermined pattern. The display control device 45 has an operation request execution function that controls the display of an operation request image (specific operation period information 44a) that requests the player to operate the frame button 80 during the big win ending display effect, and an operation display effect control function that controls the display of an operation display effect (a display effect that changes the volume, light amount, and sound quality) using the frame button 80 during the big win ending display effect in response to the player's operation of the operation request image. The predetermined pattern has a first pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (one by one in order), and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation on the specific operation period information 44a and the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a shorter display time (e.g., 5 seconds) than the first pattern and in a display mode different from the first pattern (all at the same time), and a change display performance of the volume, etc. is executed after the display of the predetermined ending information 44j is completed. As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated on the operation request image, the interest of the big win ending display performance can be improved by enjoying the change display performance of the volume, etc. without significantly impairing the interest of the big win ending display performance. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, information to prevent forgetting to remove cards 44y, and information to prevent addiction 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened (e.g., all at the same time for 5 seconds). This makes it possible to increase the variety of change display effects such as volume without compromising the uniformity of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F3).

In addition, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the specified ending information 44j is shortened, and the generated surplus time can be used to secure a period in which the volume, etc. can be adjusted, and the variety of display effects for changing the volume, etc. can be increased. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F4).

The predetermined ending information 44j is ending presentation information after a big win round. This allows for an increased variety of changes to the display presentation, such as volume changes, that are performed during the ending presentation after a big win round. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F5).

In the above-mentioned Example 17, the big win round display performance according to the second pattern was a pattern in which the display time of the predetermined ending information 44j was shortened by simultaneously displaying the predetermined ending information 44j, but in this example, the difference is that the display time is shortened by a different display mode. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the big win round game in Example 18.

The first pattern, as shown in (b) and (c), is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, information to prevent forgetting to remove the card 44y, and information to prevent addiction 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one) for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), and the second pattern, as shown in (f) to (h), is a pattern in which, when the player performs an operation in response to the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order.

In detail, in the second pattern, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in order for 5 seconds, one by one, in the form of manufacturer information 44x (1 second), card removal prevention information 44y (2 seconds), and addiction prevention information 44z (2 seconds).

This allows for an increased variety of display effects for changing volume, etc., without compromising the uniformity of the content and appearance of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 18, the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one in order) for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while keeping the predetermined order (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in order for 5 seconds). This allows the variation of the change display performance, such as the volume, to be increased without compromising the uniformity of the content and appearance of the display performance between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

In the above-mentioned Examples 17 and 18, the control according to the second pattern has been executed in the big win ending display performance, but the control according to the second pattern may be executed in other display performances, for example, in the reach display performance. This point will be explained with reference to Figs. 76 and 77. Fig. 76 is a diagram explaining the display mode in the specific operation period during the reach display performance in Example 19. Fig. 77 is a diagram explaining a display mode different from that in Fig. 76 in the specific operation period during the reach display performance.

First, refer to FIG. 76. The display control device 45 controls the display of the display effects, including the reach display effects displayed in a predetermined pattern, on the third pattern display device 42. As shown in (a), the third pattern display device 42 displays an advanced reach display screen 43g, and a showdown-type reach advanced effect is being executed in which the player's character PY and the enemy character TK face off against each other.

In the reach development performance of this embodiment, as shown in (b), a development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed, which suggests the possibility that the reach will be a hit. The development reach suggestion image 43g2 is a performance in which a frame with four hidden letters is displayed, and the letters are revealed one by one, suggesting in a predetermined manner the possibility that the reach will be a hit, for example, at the timing when the last letter is revealed (or at a timing before that). The predetermined manner is, for example, a manner in which the periphery of the letters is displayed in a color suggesting a hit (for example, the same color as the other letters if the expectation of a hit is low, red if the expectation of a hit is high, and rainbow if a hit is confirmed). To suggest this, the development reach suggestion image 43g2 displays text information such as "If a rainbow pattern appears, is it likely to win?" The development reach suggestion image 43g2 is a performance in which one letter is revealed every two seconds, so in normal cases, the performance time is eight seconds.

The display control device 45 controls the display of an operation request image that requests the player to operate the frame button 80 during the reach development performance. The operation request image is specific operation period information 44a that is displayed simultaneously with the display of the development reach suggestion image 43g2. The specific operation period information 44a displays text information such as "This performance will last 8 seconds. If you want to know sooner, press the button." It is suggested that by operating the frame button 80, it is possible to shorten this 8-second development reach suggestion performance and know the result. The operation of the frame button 80 has a valid period of 8 seconds during which the development reach suggestion image 43g2 changes. The elapsed time of the valid period of the frame button 80 is displayed by displaying specific operation period end approach information 44e simultaneously with the display of the specific operation period information 44a.

The display control device 45 controls the display of an operation display effect (fast-forward display effect) using the frame button 80 during a reach display effect, triggered by the player's operation of the frame button 80 in response to an operation request image. This allows the player to shorten the 8-second development reach suggestion effect and know the result.

This development reach suggestion effect is displayed in a predetermined pattern. The predetermined pattern has a first pattern that is displayed when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation in response to the operation request image, and a second pattern that is displayed when an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation in response to the operation request image.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time in a predetermined display mode. Specifically, the first pattern is a pattern in which the four characters that make up the development reach suggestion image 43g2, the first development reach suggestion information g2a, the second development reach suggestion information g2b, the third development reach suggestion information g2c, and the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d, are revealed one by one in sequence at two-second intervals (for a total of eight seconds).

The second pattern is a fast-forward display effect in which the specified display information is displayed for a shorter display time than the first pattern and in a different display mode than the first pattern, and the result display of the effect is displayed after the display of the specified display information has ended. Specifically, in the second pattern, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d, which are the four characters that make up the development reach suggestion image 43g2, are displayed one by one at 1-second intervals (for a total of 4 seconds), and the result display of the fast-forward display effect is displayed when the display content of the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is determined.

The first and second patterns will now be described in more detail.
In the first pattern, the first character's first development reach suggestion information g2a is revealed to be "ge" at 6 seconds remaining as shown in (c), the second character's second development reach suggestion information g2b is revealed to be "ki" at 4 seconds remaining as shown in (d), the third character's third development reach suggestion information g2c is revealed to be "a" at 2 seconds remaining as shown in (e), and the fourth character's fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is revealed to be "tsu" at 0 seconds remaining as shown in (f), ending with this pattern. If the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is rainbow colored as shown in (f), it is suggested that the expected probability of the relevant reach being a hit is extremely high.

After the rainbow color appears, as shown in (g), in the confrontation-type reach development performance, the attack image 43g4 that the player's character PY issues to the enemy character TK is displayed in rainbow color, suggesting a high probability of victory, and as shown in (h), the player's character PY wins, and a winning symbol is displayed in the reach development performance. On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as the other characters, it is suggested that the expectation that the reach will be a winning one is not that high. In this case, as shown in (j), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in normal color, and as shown in (k), the player's character PY loses to the enemy character TK, and a losing symbol is displayed in the reach development performance in many cases.

See FIG. 77 for the second pattern. In the second pattern, the suggestive effect of the first pattern is fast-forwarded to 4 seconds. When the frame button 80 is pressed while the specific operation period information 44a is being displayed, the specific operation period end approaching information 44e changes from, for example, "8 seconds remaining" to "Fast-forwarding, 3 seconds remaining," indicating that the fast-forward effect has been selected.

At the timing of 3 seconds remaining as shown in (b), the first character, the first development reach suggestion information g2a "ge" is revealed, at the timing of 2 seconds remaining as shown in (c), the second character, the second development reach suggestion information g2b "ki" is revealed, at the timing of 1 second remaining as shown in (d), the third character, the third development reach suggestion information g2c "a" is revealed, and at the timing of 0 seconds remaining as shown in (e), the fourth character, the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d "tsu" is revealed and the game ends. In the second pattern of suggestion performance, the result is displayed earlier than in the first pattern of suggestion performance, so a bonus image that uses this extra time is inserted in the showdown-type reach development performance after the suggestion performance ends.

The bonus image is a defense image 43g5 in which the player's character PY defends against an attack by the enemy character TK, as shown in (f). When the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is rainbow-colored, the defense image 43g5 is displayed in rainbow color, suggesting that the reach is sure to be a hit. In this case, the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d may be displayed in red, and the defense image 43g5 may be displayed in rainbow color for the first time, so that the timing of the player's surprise coincides with the display timing of this bonus image. After that, an attack image 43g4 (rainbow color) is displayed as shown in (g), and a winning symbol in the reach development performance is displayed stationary as shown in (h). On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as the other characters, it is suggested that the expectation of the reach being a hit is not so high. In this case, as shown in (j), the defense image 43g5 is displayed in the normal color even in the bonus image, as shown in (k), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in the normal color, and as shown in (l), the player's character PY loses to the enemy character TK, and the losing symbol is often displayed in the reach development performance.

As a result, the interest of the reach display presentation can be improved by allowing the fast-forward display presentation to be enjoyed without significantly reducing the interest of the reach display presentation when the frame button 80 is effectively operated in response to the operation request image and when the frame button 80 is not operated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 19 is provided with a third pattern display device 42 that displays display effects related to the game including a reach display effect, a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player in response to the display effect, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of display effects on the display means, including displaying the reach display effect in a predetermined pattern, and the display control device 45 is provided with an operation request execution function that controls the display of an operation request image (information during a specific operation period 44a) that requests the player to operate the frame button 80 during the reach display effect, and an operation display effect execution function that controls the display of an operation display effect (fast-forward display effect) using the frame button 80 during the reach display effect in response to the player's operation on the operation request image, and the predetermined pattern is a pattern in which an operation request image is displayed and and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed for a shorter display time (for example, 4 seconds) than the first pattern and in a display mode different from the first pattern (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are displayed one by one at 1 second intervals), and the result of the fast-forward display performance is displayed after the display of the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 has ended. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the reach display presentation by allowing the player to enjoy the fast-forward display presentation without significantly compromising the interest of the reach display presentation when the frame button 80 is effectively operated in response to the operation request image. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined development reach suggestion images 43g2 are displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (e.g., 8 seconds) (e.g., the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are displayed in order at 2 second intervals), and the second pattern is a pattern in which predetermined development reach suggestion images 43g2 are displayed in a shortened state with the predetermined display time shortened (e.g., 1 second intervals for 4 seconds) while maintaining the predetermined order. This makes it possible to increase the variety of fast-forward display effects without compromising the uniformity of the content and presentation of the reach display effects between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

The predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is suggestion performance information (first development reach suggestion information g2a to fourth development reach suggestion image g2d) that is displayed during the reach development performance. This makes it possible to increase the variety of fast-forward display performances that are performed during the suggestion performances that are displayed during the reach development performance. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F6).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the big win ending display effect was not connected in terms of its content to the reach display effect that led to that big win ending display effect, but in this embodiment, the reach display effect and the big win ending display effect are linked in terms of their content, which is different. This point will be explained using Figures 78 to 81.

Figure 78 (a) is a table for drawing the special chart 1 big win in Example 20, and (b) is a table for drawing the special chart 2 big win. Figure 79 is a table for selecting the special chart 1 main decorative pattern variation pattern in Example 20. Figure 80 is a table for determining the ending performance pattern in Example 20.

The display control device 45 can control the display of information related to a specific performance executed during a display performance in an ending performance. This allows the ending performance and the display performance leading up to the ending performance to be associated with each other through the specific performance, and the entertainment value of the display performance can be increased because the entertainment value of the ending performance continues through the specific performance.

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a specific result, for example, a variable display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the variable display effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is the reach display effect of the identification information, for example, the reach display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the reach display effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

A specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific effect is not executed. A specific suggestion effect is, for example, a confrontation effect between the player's character PY and the enemy character TK, or a mission clear effect by the player's character PY. This makes it easier for players who understand the meaning of the suggestion (that it has a lower occurrence rate than normal reaches A, B and super reaches A, B, and therefore is more likely to result in a hit when it does appear than normal reaches A, B and super reaches A, B) to remember the specific suggestion effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 78, the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table and the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table are different from the above-mentioned embodiment in that in the case of a 16R special jackpot, the special jackpot continuation and the number of support rounds continue until the next jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, the special jackpot continuation and the number of support rounds obtained by the 16R special jackpot are differentiated so that they are greater than other special jackpots (100 rounds).

As shown in FIG. 79, the table for selecting the main decorative pattern change pattern of the special chart 1 is set so that in the case of a 16R sure-variant jackpot (the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 0 to 9), the jackpot super reach E (120 seconds) is selected in all cases. The performance system of the super reach E is the battle system. In the case of an 8R sure-variant jackpot (the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 10 to 49), the super reach C or D is selected in all cases. The performance system of the super reach C or D is the battle system. In the case of an 8R normal jackpot (the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 50 to 99), the normal reach A or B or the super reach A or B is selected. In other words, in this embodiment, the reach performance that may result in a 16R sure-variant jackpot, the reach performance that may result in an 8R sure-variant jackpot, or the reach performance that may result in an 8R normal jackpot is distinguished by the type of reach performance. The table for selecting the main decorative pattern change pattern of the special chart 2 is similar.

As shown in FIG. 80, the ending presentation pattern determination table corresponds to the main decoration symbol variation pattern selection table described above. The ending presentation pattern of the 16R probability change (special 1) is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and light emission gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in sequence, and then EF victory rush entry information 44α1 is displayed as a special presentation. The EF victory rush entry information 44α1 is information that indicates to the player that this big win round game state has occurred through super reach E and F (by defeating enemy characters TKE and TKF, which will be described later), and that a rush presentation will begin in which the probability change will continue and the number of support times will continue until the next big win. Similarly, in the 16R special (special 2) mode, next game state suggestion information 44w, combined card removal prevention information 44y and light emission gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in sequence, followed by EF victory rush entry information 44α1. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display effect that generated the ending display effect and what kind of advantageous game state will occur from now on.

The ending presentation pattern of 8R probability change (special 1) is a pattern in which the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and manufacturer information 44x, and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order, and then the CD rush entry information 44α2 is displayed. The CD rush entry information 44α2 is information that indicates to the player that this big win round game state occurred after passing through super reach C and D (by defeating the enemy characters TKC and TKD described later), and that a rush presentation with a probability change continuation and 100 support times will begin. Similarly, in 8R probability change (special 2), the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and manufacturer information 44x is displayed, and then the CD rush entry information 44α2 is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display presentation that caused this ending display presentation and what kind of advantageous game state will occur from now on.

The ending performance pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on normal reach A and B is a pattern in which the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forget prevention information 44y and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order, and then the chance mode entry information 44α3 is displayed. The ending performance pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on super reach A and B is a pattern in which the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forget prevention information 44y and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order, and then the chance mode entry information 44α3 is displayed. The chance mode entry information 44α3 is information that suggests to the player that a chance performance with 100 support times will start. In addition, in the ending performance pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on super reach A and B, mission clear mode entry information indicating that the mission performance in super reach A and B has been cleared may be displayed instead of the chance mode entry information 44α3.

Next, referring to Figure 81, the display mode of the third pattern display device 42 will be explained.
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win round display effect.

The display control device 45 executes a specific effect during the reach development effect, for example, in the case of Super Reach C, a confrontation effect between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKC, in the case of Super Reach D, a confrontation effect between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKD, in the case of Super Reach E, a confrontation effect between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKE, and in the case of Super Reach F, a confrontation effect between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKF. Here, a big win super reach E is determined as the reach development effect, and as a result of the confrontation between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKE, an effect in which the player's character PY wins is executed as the specific effect.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of the player's character PY) during the reach development performance. As in the above-mentioned Example 13, there are three types of player characters PY: first character PY1, second character PY2, and third character PY3. The selection request image is specific operation period information 44a ("Push and hold to change player"). The player's character PY can be selected by deciding on the first character PY1 without operating the frame button 80 in the current state (remaining as the first character PY1), or by operating the frame button 80 to change to the second character PY2 or third character PY3.

As shown in (b), it is assumed that the first character PY1 is selected as a result of the selection of the player's character PY. The performance of a showdown between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed when the player's character PY is selected as requested by the selection request image. This makes it easier to remember the specific performance as well as the fact that a specific selection has been made as requested by the operation request image, thereby improving the interest of the ending performance.

As a result of the battle performance, as shown in (c), the player's character PY (first character PY1) wins against the enemy character TKE, and the development symbols HZ are displayed as a "777" jackpot combination. After that, as shown in (d), after the 16R jackpot round play ends, the jackpot ending performance begins.

The display control device 45 is capable of controlling the display of information related to the specific performance executed during the reach development performance in the ending performance. The information related to the specific performance is EF victory rush entry information 44α1 if it is either jackpot super reach E or F, and is CD victory rush entry information 44α2 if it is either jackpot super reach C or D. This associates the ending performance with the display performance leading up to the ending performance through the specific performance, and the entertainment value of the display performance continues into the ending performance through the specific performance, thereby improving the entertainment value of the ending performance.

The big win ending performance is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (e), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (f), and the combined information of the card removal prevention information 44y and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o shown in (g) are displayed in order, and then the EF victory rush entry information 44α1 shown in (h) is displayed. The EF victory rush entry information 44α1 is displayed as text information such as "Enter the rush after your own character A defeats the enemy character E!". When the display of the EF victory rush entry information 44α1 ends as shown in (i), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (j), and the state transitions to the "rush after your own character A defeats the enemy character E" state in which the high probability and support state continues until the next big win. Note that your own character A refers to the first character PY1.

The information related to the specific effect (EF victory rush entry information 44α1) is information indicating the components of the specific effect, for example, "Enter rush after player's character A defeats enemy character E!" indicating the components of the confrontation effect between player's character PY1 and enemy character TKE, but it may also be information indicating the player's character selected by the player, "Enter rush after player's character A wins!", information indicating the enemy character selected as the player's opponent, "Enter rush after defeating enemy character E!", or information indicating that a confrontation reach has been reached, "Enter rush after breaking through EF confrontation zone!". These also make it easier to remember the displayed effects by displaying the components of the specific effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 20 is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of the display effect on the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 has a specific effect execution function that controls the execution of a specific effect during the display effect, and a round that is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being from when the variable winning device 32 is set to an open state in which a game ball can enter the game ball, to when it is set to a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the game ball, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. and an ending performance execution function that controls the display of an ending performance that displays predetermined information during the ending period from the end of a round game to the start of the next game, and the ending performance execution function can control the display of information (EF victory rush entry information 44α1, CD victory rush entry information 44α2) related to a specific performance (for example, a confrontation performance between the player's character PY and specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, TKF) executed during a display performance (for example, a reach development performance) in the ending performance. This allows the ending performance and the display performance leading up to the ending performance to be associated by the specific performance, and the fun of the display performance continues into the ending performance through the specific performance, improving the interest of the ending performance.

In addition, the information related to the special effects is information that indicates the components of the special effects (for example, information such as "After your character A defeats enemy character E, a rush begins!" that indicates the components of the confrontation effect between your character PY and enemy character TKE). By displaying the components of the special effects, it becomes easier to remember the displayed effects, which further increases the interest of the ending effects. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

The display effect in which the special effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information (for example, a variable display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ) that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a special result or not. This makes it easier to remember the special effect along with the variable display effect, improving the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G4).

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information (for example, a reach display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ). This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the reach display effect, which can increase the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G5).

The specific performance is a specific suggestion performance (for example, a confrontation performance between the player's character PY and specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, and TKF) that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific performance is not executed. This makes it easier for players who understand the meaning of the suggestion to remember the specific suggestion performance, thereby increasing the interest of the ending performance. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G7).

The display control device 45 also has a selection request execution function that controls the display of a selection request image (specific operation period information 44a) that requests the player to make a specified selection during the display performance (either select the current status without operating the frame button 80, or select a changed version by operating the frame button 80), and the specific performance is executed when the specified selection requested by the selection request image is made. This makes it easier to remember the specific performance along with the fact that the specified selection requested by the operation request image has been made, thereby improving the interest of the ending performance. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

The selection request image is displayed during the variable display performance of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a specific result (during the reach development performance using the development pattern HZ). This makes it easier to leave a strong impression of the specific performance along with the variable display performance, improving the interest of the ending performance. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G10).

In the above-mentioned Example 20, the display of a specific reach display effect as a specific effect executed during the display effect was reviewed (played back) in the big win ending display effect, but it is also possible to review an effect other than the specific reach display effect. This point will be explained with reference to Figures 82 to 85.

Figure 82 is a flowchart explaining the auxiliary performance determination process by the display control device 45 of Example 21. Figure 83 (a) is a flowchart explaining the one-shot announcement lottery process by the display control device 45, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the one-shot announcement display process by the display control device 45. Figures 84 (a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the ending performance pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific effect is not executed. The specific notification effect is, for example, a one-shot notification effect that is produced by activating a one-shot notification device IP arranged around the third pattern display device 42 and causing it to appear in front of the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42. This makes it easier for players who see, hear, or experience the notification to remember the specific notification effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

The specific notification effect may be an effect that causes the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 to emit strong light, so long as it is an effect that notifies the player that a specific result is more likely to occur than if the specific effect is not executed. Also, the specific notification effect may be an effect in which a specific pattern that is normally difficult to see, formed on a transparent light guide plate arranged in front of the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42, is displayed as a visible pattern by emitting light from an LED arranged on the side of the transparent light guide plate. Also, the specific notification effect may be an effect in which a specific image appears during a reach display effect, or an effect in which an image displayed during a reach display effect changes to a specific form.

The auxiliary performance determination process will now be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of displaying various suggestive images in step S3401. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a one-shot announcement lottery process (described later) in step S3402, and performs a one-shot announcement display process (described later) in step S3403.

The one-shot announcement lottery process will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a jackpot fluctuation pattern command has been received in step S3411. Specifically, if a display jackpot fluctuation pattern designation command has been received from the sub-control device 262, the process proceeds to step S3412, and if not, the process ends. In step S3412, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter for internally determining whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement in the event of a jackpot result, and in step S3413, determines whether or not the value is a win for the execution of the one-shot announcement performance. If the one-shot announcement performance is a win, the process proceeds to step S3414, where the one-shot announcement flag is set from 0 to 1. If the one-shot announcement flag is not a win, the process ends with the one-shot announcement flag set to 0.

The one-shot notification display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in step S3421, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 judges whether the one-shot notification flag is 1 or not. If the one-shot notification flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3422, and if not, the process ends. In step S3422, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 judges whether the one-shot notification is set. If the one-shot notification is set, the process proceeds to step S3423, where a one-shot notification effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and after the one-shot notification effect is executed, the process returns the one-shot notification flag from 1 to 0 in step S3424, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the one-shot notification is not set, the process proceeds to step S3424, where the one-shot notification flag is returned from 1 to 0, and the process ends. The setting of whether or not to have a one-shot notification may be selected by the player as described later, or may be selected within the gaming machine. If the player can select it, the player's preference for the one-shot notification can be reflected. If the selection could be made within the gaming machine, it would be possible to reduce the disadvantages that would be caused by the player continuing to watch the one-shot announcement (strained eyes, lack of interest in anything other than the one-shot announcement) or the disadvantages that would be caused by not continuing to watch the one-shot announcement (lack of excitement due to the one-shot announcement).

The table for determining ending performance patterns will now be described. Figure 84 (a) shows the contents of the table for determining ending performance patterns shown in Figure 58 that correspond to 16R special (special 1), and (b) shows the contents of the table for determining ending performance patterns shown in Figure 58 that correspond to 8R special (special 1). The following explanation also applies to the other cases.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (a) is executed and the one-shot notification is set to none, the jackpot ending display performance is the same as the case shown in FIG. 58, in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in that order. When the jackpot super reach A or B is executed and the one-shot notification is set to yes, the jackpot ending display performance is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification performance change suggestion information 44γ, the manufacturer information 44x, the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forget prevention information 44y, and the bonus video 44n are displayed in that order. The one-shot notification performance change suggestion information 44γ is information that suggests a change operation to change the setting of whether or not the one-shot notification performance is yes or no. The same applies when the jackpot super reach C to F is executed.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (b) is executed and no one-shot notification is set, the jackpot ending display performance displays the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y in that order, as in the case shown in FIG. 58. When the super reach A or B is executed and one-shot notification is set, the jackpot ending display performance displays the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and one-shot notification performance change suggestion information 44γ, the manufacturer information 44x, the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forget prevention information 44y, and the bonus video 44n in that order. The same applies when normal reach A or B and jackpot super reach C or D are executed.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win ending display effect.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of whether or not to display a one-shot announcement effect) during a reach development effect (for example, a mission clear effect based on a super reach A). The selection request image is specific operation period information 44a ("Press and hold to change whether or not to display a one-shot announcement effect"). Specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed together with specific operation period information 44a, and the time (for example, 10 seconds) during which the presence or absence of a one-shot announcement effect can be selected is counted. If 10 seconds pass without any operation of the frame button 80, it is determined that a one-shot announcement effect will be displayed.

The choice of whether or not to have a one-shot announcement effect can be made by leaving the status quo (with the one-shot announcement effect) as described above without operating frame button 80, or by operating frame button 80 as shown in (b) to change to no one-shot announcement effect. Operating frame button 80 displays change information display section 44c, and by operating left selection button 82 or right selection button 83, the user can select no one-shot announcement effect. Pressing decision button 81 will confirm the selected mode.

As a result of the selection, it is assumed that a one-shot announcement effect has been selected. The mission clear effect is executed when the selection of whether or not to have a one-shot announcement effect is made as requested by the selection request image. This makes it easier to remember a particular effect as well as making it clear that a specific selection has been made as requested by the operation request image, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

During the mission clear performance, as shown in (d), the one-shot announcement device IP falls from the top of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and the many LEDs arranged in front of the one-shot announcement device IP and the light-emitting devices arranged around the display screen 42a light up to produce a one-shot announcement performance. The one-shot announcement performance may output a sound that gives the impression of a one-shot announcement in conjunction with the light emission. After the light emission ends, the one-shot announcement device IP is stored above the display screen 42a. In the mission clear performance in which the one-shot announcement performance is performed, as shown in (e), the player's character PY clears the mission, and the development pattern HZ is displayed as a stopped combination of, for example, "666". After that, as shown in (f), the jackpot round play of 8R ends, and the jackpot ending performance begins.

When the player has selected not to display a single notification, the jackpot ending performance is displayed in a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (g), manufacturer information 44x shown in (h), and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (i) are displayed. When the player has selected to display a single notification, the combined information of light-emitting staring prevention information 44o (text information stating "Please be careful not to stare at a strong light") and single notification performance change suggestion information 44γ ("If your eyes get tired easily, you can also select not to display a single notification") shown in (j), next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (k), manufacturer information 44x and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (l) are displayed. In addition, next game state approach information 44l6, which indicates the remaining time until the jackpot ending performance, is also displayed.

In this way, the display control device 45 can control the display of information related to the specific performance (the light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o described above) executed during the reach development performance in the ending performance. The information related to the specific performance is information indicating the components of the specific performance, for example, the information "Please be careful not to continue looking at the strong light" indicating the light that constitutes the one-shot announcement performance in the light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o. In addition, the information related to the specific performance may be information that reminds the player of a specific color when a one-shot announcement role device IP capable of emitting light of multiple colors emits a specific light, indicating a confirmed jackpot. This makes it easier to remember the display performance by displaying the components of the specific performance, thereby further improving the interest of the ending performance.

In addition, information related to the special effects is information indicating the effect that the special effects had on the player, such as the above-mentioned one-shot announcement effect change suggestion information 44γ "If your eyes get tired easily, you can choose not to have one-shot announcement." This is information that suggests to the player that if there is another opportunity to choose whether or not to have one-shot announcement effects for the next or subsequent reach development effects, they should choose the option they did not choose this time (no one-shot announcement). This makes it possible to appeal to players whose eyes are affected by the strong light from the special effects to rest their eyes, thereby further increasing the interest of the ending effects.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 21, the information related to the special effect is information indicating the components of the special effect (for example, "strong light" in the light gaze prevention information 44o "Please be careful not to stare at a strong light for long periods of time"). This makes it easier to remember the displayed effect by displaying the components of the special effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

In addition, the information related to the special effect is information indicating the effect that the special effect had on the player (for example, one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ "If your eyes get tired easily, choose B next time"). This makes it possible to appeal to players who have been affected by the special effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G3).

The special effect is a special notification effect (a one-shot notification effect using a one-shot notification device IP) that notifies the player that the possibility of a special result is higher than if the special effect is not executed. This makes it easier for players who see, hear, or experience the notification to remember the special notification effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G8).

The display control device 45 also has a selection request execution function that controls the display of a selection request image (change information display section 44c) that requests the player to make a specified selection (selection of whether or not to make a one-shot announcement) during the reach development presentation, and the specific presentation (one-shot announcement presentation) is executed when the specified selection requested by the selection request image is made. This makes it easier to remember the specific presentation along with the fact that the specified selection requested by the operation request image has been made, thereby improving the interest of the ending presentation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

In the above-mentioned Example 21, it was possible to select whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement effect during the reach display effect, but the selection of whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement effect may be made during other display effects. This point will be explained with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86 is a diagram explaining a table for determining the ending effect pattern in Example 22. Figure 87 is a diagram explaining another display mode of the big win ending display effect.

That is, the selection request image is displayed during the ending performance, for example, at the same time as information related to a specific performance (for example, information to prevent gazing at the light emission 44o). This allows the player to reconsider whether to make a specific selection after seeing the information related to the specific performance, thereby improving the interest of the ending performance.

The table for determining the ending performance pattern will be explained. (a) corresponds to the 16R special chance (special chance 1) shown in FIG. 84, and (b) corresponds to the 8R special chance (special chance 1) shown in FIG. 84.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (a) is executed, when the one-shot announcement is set, and when no operation has been performed to change the one-shot announcement presentation to on or off using the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 described below, the jackpot ending display presentation will display in sequence a combination of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1, manufacturer information 44x, next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n. When the jackpot super reach A or B is executed, the one-shot announcement is set, and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 described later is changed to have the one-shot announcement presentation on or off, the jackpot ending display presentation displays the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1, the combined information of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w, the one-shot announcement presentation change operation information 44γ2, and the bonus video 44n in that order. The same applies when the jackpot super reach C to F is executed.

The one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 is information proposing a change operation to change the setting of whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is enabled in this jackpot ending display effect. The one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 is information indicating the content of the change operation to change whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is enabled when a change operation is performed by operating the frame button 80 on the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (b) is executed, the one-shot announcement is set, and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 has not been changed to have the one-shot announcement presentation, the jackpot ending display presentation is displayed in the order of the composite information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, and the card removal forget prevention information 44y. When the jackpot super reach A or B is executed, the one-shot announcement is set, and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 has been changed, the jackpot ending display presentation is displayed in the order of the composite information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, and the card removal forget prevention information 44y, and the one-shot announcement presentation change operation information 44γ2. The same applies when jackpot normal reach A or B or jackpot super reach C or D is executed.

Next, the display mode of the third pattern display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win ending display effect. Note that the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win round display effect is the same as in FIG. 85, so the description will begin from the start of the big win ending display effect.

When the one-shot announcement is set to Yes and the one-shot announcement is executed during the reach presentation leading to the big win ending display presentation, as shown in (a), a combination of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 is displayed. When the one-shot announcement is set to Yes, the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 is text information saying "If your eyes get tired easily, press the button to select no one-shot announcement." During the display period of the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1, the specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed, indicating the time during which the one-shot announcement presentation change operation will be accepted. Throughout the display period of the ending display presentation, the next game state approach information 44l6 is displayed, indicating the remaining time of the ending display presentation.

If the frame button 80 is not pressed while the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed (10 seconds after the beginning of the ending effect), in other words, if the player does not wish to change whether or not the one-shot notification effect is on, the big win ending display effect will display the manufacturer information 44x shown in (b) (5 seconds) and the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (c) (10 seconds) in that order.

If a change operation is performed while the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed, that is, if the player wishes to change whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is on, the big win ending display effect will display a composite information (5 seconds) of manufacturer information 44x and next game state suggestion information 44w, as shown in (d). In addition, while this composite information is being displayed, post-specific operation waiting information 44a3 is displayed to inform the player that they are waiting until the start of the operation to change the one-shot announcement effect. The post-specific operation waiting information 44a3 is text information stating, "Please wait a moment until the operation to change the one-shot announcement effect is performed."

After the display of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w has finished, as shown in (e), one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 (10 seconds) is displayed to allow the player to change the one-shot announcement effect. The one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 displays a change information display section 44c that displays whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is on, and an operation method display section 44d that shows the method of changing the one-shot announcement effect to whether or not it is on. In addition, specific operation period end approach information 44e that indicates the remaining time for this change operation is also displayed.

As shown in (f), when the player operates the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 to select no one-shot announcement effect and presses the decision button 81, the one-shot announcement effect is set to no one in the next game state.

When the one-shot announcement is set and the one-shot announcement is executed during the reach presentation leading to the big win ending display presentation, only the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 is displayed in (a), and text information such as "If you want to see the one-shot announcement presentation this time, press the button to select one-shot announcement" may be displayed. When the player presses the button, the one-shot announcement presentation change operation information 44γ2 is displayed as in (e) to (f). After the change operation is completed, the remaining ending information 44j is displayed as shown in (g), and the game moves to the next game state. In this way, by the player selecting one-shot announcement during the ending display presentation, the one-shot announcement presentation can be displayed in the next game state. This makes the player want to see the one-shot announcement presentation this time in the ending presentation, and can maintain his or her motivation to play.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 22, the selection request image (one shot announcement effect change suggestion information 44γ) is displayed during the ending display effect. This makes it easier to leave a strong impression of the specific effect (one shot announcement effect) along with the ending display effect, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G11).

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 23 is configured so that the third illumination unit (top lamp) 303 can be replaced with another third illumination unit (another top lamp) 604 of a different size and shape. In addition, even when the third illumination unit 303 is replaced with the other third illumination unit 604, the decorative effect can be optimized. The specific configuration is described below.

Figure 88 is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 23 with an illuminated cover of a different size attached to it than that of Figure 1. Figure 89 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the CC cross section when an illuminated cover of a different size is attached. Figure 90 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the DD cross section when an illuminated cover of a different size is attached. Figures 91(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the adjustment of the light-emitting area when an illuminated cover of a different size is attached.

The third illumination section 303 consists of a configuration that is fixed to the front frame set 14 and a configuration that is detachable from the front frame set 14.

Specifically, the third illumination unit 303 is configured to be fixed to the front frame set 14 and includes a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light and a control mechanism 608 that controls the manner of light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, and is configured to be detachable from the front frame set 14 and includes a third illumination cover 609 that covers the front side of the light irradiation device 607. The third illumination cover 609 can be replaced with a different third illumination cover 610 of a different size and shape from the third illumination cover 609.

The third illumination cover 609 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The third illumination cover 609 may be colorless or colored, and may be surface-treated to have a frosted glass-like texture. The third illumination cover 609 may be provided with a diffusion member (diffusion plate) having irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiation device 607, or an irregularity for diffusing the light from the light irradiation device 607 may be provided on the inner surface of the third illumination cover 609. This allows the third illumination cover 609 to make the light irradiation device 607 difficult for the player to see. In addition to the third illumination cover 609 (i.e., the third illumination unit 303), the separate third illumination cover 610, the first illumination unit 301, and the second illumination unit 302 are also configured in the same way.

The third illuminated cover 609 constitutes a cover for the third illuminated section 303, and is attached to the location sandwiched between the sound output section 24 of the front frame set 14, with its upper end formed horizontally along the inside of the upper edge of the inner frame 12 and its front end protruding slightly forward beyond the sound output section 24. The third illuminated cover 609 is formed as a first light-emitting area 605 in which the left and right sides, top and bottom surfaces, etc. emit light with the front surface as the center.

The separate third illumination cover 610 constitutes a cover for the separate third illumination section 604, and is attached to the location sandwiched between the sound output section 24 of the front frame set 14, but its upper end is formed above the upper edge of the inner frame 12, and its front end protrudes slightly forward compared to when the third illumination cover 609 is attached. In other words, the separate third illumination cover 610 can be attached to the same location as the third illumination cover 609, but is formed as a larger illumination cover than the third illumination cover 609. The separate third illumination cover 610 is formed as a second light-emitting area 606 with a wider range than the first light-emitting area 605 on the left and right sides, top surface, bottom surface, etc. centered on its front surface. The second light-emitting area 606 of the separate third illumination cover 610 changes depending on its shape.

The third separate illuminated cover 610 is attached to the location sandwiched between the sound output unit 24 of the front frame set 14 by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third separate illuminated cover 610 in the front-rear direction. The slide mechanism 602 is composed of slide grooves 603 formed on the upper and lower sides of the inner surface of the cover of the sound output unit 24.

The slide groove 603 is formed at the front and back so that the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be attached vertically to the front frame set 14, but the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 may also be attached by inserting them diagonally downward into the front frame set 14. The slide groove 603 may also be such that the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be attached and removed in the vertical direction to the front frame set 14.

When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached (i.e., when the front surface of the third illuminated cover 609 is located at the first position), the control mechanism 608 executes a first control to cause the front surface of the third illuminated cover 609 located at the first position to emit light as the first light-emitting area 605 with the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607. The first control is a control of the inclination, position, light-emitting intensity, light-emitting area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 to suitably emit light from the first light-emitting area 605 with the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607. In this embodiment, the first control is an attitude control to maintain or shift the light irradiation device 607 to a vertical attitude.

When the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached (i.e., when the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 is located at the second position), the control mechanism 608 executes a second control to cause the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 located at the second position to emit light as the second light-emitting area 606 with the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607. The second control is a control of the inclination, position, light-emitting intensity, light-emitting area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 appropriately emits light in the second light-emitting area 606. In this embodiment, the second control is a posture control in which the light irradiation device 607 is maintained or shifted to a posture inclined slightly upward.

As a result, even if the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 illuminates the first light-emitting area 605 (i.e., the third illuminated cover 609) or the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 illuminates the second light-emitting area 606 (i.e., the separate third illuminated cover 610), the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately by optimizing the irradiation of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607. Even if the third illuminated cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine body is replaced with the separate third illuminated cover 610, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately. Even if the shape of the separate third illuminated cover 610 has changed from the shape of the third illuminated cover 609 before the change, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed (or from a state in which the second control can be executed to a state in which the first control can be executed; the same applies below) during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the separate third illumination cover 610 on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine body. This allows the light emitting area to be suitably changed during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine body with the separate third illumination cover 610.

The third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 are provided with a locking mechanism 622 that allows them to be locked and replaced on the front frame set 14 without using tools. The locking mechanism 622 is composed of, for example, a claw portion 623 provided on the front frame set plate 14a and a claw hole portion 624 provided on the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610. The locking mechanism 622 is designed so that the claw portion 623 is firmly inserted into the claw hole portion 624, and therefore cannot be easily removed by players or cheaters during business hours.

The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed in accordance with the replacement work of the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610. This makes it easy to perform replacement work to suitably change the light-emitting area.

Next, the first control and the second control performed by the control mechanism 608 will be explained in detail.

The light irradiation device 607 includes a light emitting board 611 on which an LED 612 is arranged, and a board support part 613 that supports the light emitting board 611. The board support part 613 is rotatably supported by a main body side fixing part 620 that is fixed to the front frame set 14.

The light irradiation device 607 is configured to be able to tilt the light emitting substrate 611 by means of the substrate support part 613 and the main body side fixing part 620. The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by tilting the light emitting substrate 611. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle.

The control mechanism 608 includes an input unit 614 that inputs the force generated in the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609 in order to configure the light-emitting substrate 611 to be tiltable, and an output unit 615 that changes the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force.

The input unit 614 is a mechanism that pushes the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third illumination cover 610 during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. Specifically, the input unit 614 includes a push-in portion 616 provided on the separate third illumination cover 610 and a push-in receiving portion 617 provided on the light irradiation device 607.

The push-in portion 616 is a protruding portion disposed on the inner surface of the left end portion of the separate third illumination cover 610 when viewed from the front. The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is formed so that during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14, before the cover is attached to the attachment location, it comes into contact with a push-in receiving portion 617 provided at the upper left end portion of the board support portion 613 when viewed from the front, thereby tilting the board support portion 613 toward the rear.

The push-in portion 616 is made difficult for the player to see by the uneven portion formed on the inside of the third separate illuminated cover 610, but to make the push-in portion 616 even more difficult to see, it may be formed on the side of the third separate illuminated cover 610. In this case, the push-in receiving portion 617 is also formed on the side of the light irradiation device 607.

Depending on the difference in the structure for attaching the separate third illumination cover 610, the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be disposed in different locations on the separate third illumination cover 610 and the light irradiation device 607. If the above-mentioned slide groove 603 is configured to attach the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 by inserting them obliquely downward relative to the front frame set 14, the push-in receiving portion 617 may be protruded to the back side of the light irradiation device 607, and the push-in portion 616 may be formed at a location (the inner surface of the separate third illumination cover 610) where the push-in receiving portion 617 protruding to the back side of the light irradiation device 607 can be pushed in. As a result, when the third illuminated cover 609 is attached, the push-in receiving portion 617 is hidden behind the light irradiation device 607, and when the separate third illuminated cover 310 is attached, both the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are hidden behind the light irradiation device 607, so not only are they not visible to the player, but the light emitting area of the light irradiation device 607 can be made larger.

The output unit 615 is a mechanism that tilts the light emitting substrate 611 by tilting the light emitting device 607 based on the force input from the input unit 614, thereby changing the light emitting device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. Specifically, the output unit 615 is composed of a substrate support unit 613, a main body side fixing unit 620, an axis 618, a coil spring 619 attached to the axis 618, and an attitude regulation unit 621 that regulates the attitude of the substrate support unit 613.

The shaft 618 connects the board support part 613 and the body side fixed part 620 so that the board support part 613 can tilt relative to the body side fixed part 620. The coil spring 619 generates a biasing force between the board support part 613 and the body side fixed part 620 when attached to the shaft 618. The coil spring 619 increases its biasing force as the push-in part 616 comes into contact with the push-in receiving part 617 and tilts the board support part 613 toward the rear during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610, and the biasing force is greatest at the position where the pushing of the push-in part 616 ends.

The position restriction portion 621 is a stopper provided on the board support portion 613. When the third illumination cover 609 is attached, the biasing force of the coil spring 619 is restricted by the position restriction portion 621 so that the board support portion 613 is in a vertical position.

This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated during the process of attaching the separate third illuminated cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609. The light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the separate third illuminated cover 610 presses the light irradiation device 607 during the process of attaching the separate third illuminated cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input during the process of attaching the separate third illuminated cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 23 is provided with the third illumination unit 303 (third illumination cover 609) disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and the light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light toward the back side of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting a predetermined surface (e.g., the front surface) of the third illumination unit 303 that receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 by the shifting mechanism 602 to a different position, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. When the predetermined surface is located at a first position, the control mechanism 608 executes a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area 605 with light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607, and when the predetermined surface is located at a second position, the control mechanism 608 executes a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area 606 with light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607. Therefore, the light irradiating direction can be optimized according to the change in the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) above.

The third illumination unit 303 is a replaceable third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, the first light-emitting area 605 is provided on a predetermined surface of the third illumination cover 609, and the second light-emitting area 606 is provided on a predetermined surface of a separate third illumination cover 610 that is replaced with the third illumination cover 609. Therefore, even if the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body is replaced with the separate third illumination cover 610, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H2) above.

The light irradiation device 607 is also a light emitting board 611 mounted on the front frame set 14. This allows the light emitting area to be suitably changed even when the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine body is replaced with a different third illumination cover 610 and the light emitting board 611 is provided on the front frame set 14 side rather than the third illumination cover 609 side. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H3) above.

The first control is to set the irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light-emitting area 605 at a right angle (first irradiation angle) and to set the irradiation area of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light-emitting area 605 to the first irradiation area (front of the third illumination cover 609), and the second control is to set the second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle (more inclined than the first irradiation angle) and the second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area (wider than the first irradiation area). In this way, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by changing the irradiation angle and irradiation area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H4) above.

The second light-emitting area 606 of the separate third illuminated cover 610 changes depending on its shape. This allows the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately even if the shape of the separate third illuminated cover 610 changes from the shape of the third illuminated cover 609 before the change. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H5) above.

The third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 can be replaced without using tools. This allows easy replacement work to suitably change the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H6) above.

The light irradiation device 607 can also be tilted. This allows the irradiation angle to be easily adjusted whether the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 causes the first light-emitting area 605 to emit light or the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 causes the second light-emitting area 606 to emit light. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H7) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the different third illumination cover 610, so that the light emission area can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the different third illumination cover 610. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H9) above.

The control mechanism 608 also includes an input unit 614 that inputs the force generated in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with the different third illuminated cover 610, and an output unit 615 that changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force, so that the light emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with the different third illuminated cover 610. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H10) above.

The input unit 614 is a push-in unit 616 and a push-in receiving unit 617 that push the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third illumination cover 610 during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the separate third illumination cover 610, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the separate third illumination cover 610 pushes the light irradiation device 607 during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the separate third illumination cover 610. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H11) above.

In addition, the output unit 615 tilts the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force, thereby changing the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle by utilizing the force input in the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (H12).

The pachinko machine 10 main body includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 main body, an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side of the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis, and a front frame set 14 that is attached so as to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side of the inner frame 12 as an opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 includes a resin base 12a that forms its outer shape, and a game board 30 that is attached to the resin base 12a and has a game area 30a through which game balls flow down. The game board 30 includes a third pattern. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pattern display device 42 having a display screen 42a on which a display effect during a jackpot game state that occurs when the variable display of the first pattern and the variable display of the third pattern result in a jackpot is displayed, and an opening that makes the display screen 42a visible, and the front frame set 14 includes a glass frame portion 23 that surrounds a glass plate 137 that makes the game area 30a and the display screen 42a visible, and the third illumination portion 303 is visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 body. This makes it easy to shift the light-emitting point on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 body, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift of the light-emitting point, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) above.

In addition, since the third illumination unit 303 is attached to the glass frame 23 of the front frame of the pachinko machine body, it facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting point in the glass frame 23 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine body 10, and by optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting point in the glass frame 23, it is possible to suitably change the light-emitting area in the glass frame 23. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I3) above.

The third illumination unit 303 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to make the control mechanism 608 difficult to see, making it possible to make the control mechanism 608 less noticeable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 608 is arranged so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, so that the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In the above-mentioned Example 23, the control mechanism 608 changes the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 by tilting the light irradiating device 607. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 is changed while the light irradiating device 607 remains fixed. A specific configuration will be described below.

Figures 92(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the adjustment of the light-emitting area in Example 24.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame set 14 and includes a light-transmitting section 630 that transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light-emitting region 605 or the second light-emitting region 606. The light-transmitting section 630 includes a light-transmitting plate 631 that transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 and outputs it to the front side, a light-transmitting plate support section 632 that supports the light-transmitting plate 631, and a control mechanism 608 similar to that of the embodiment 23. The light-transmitting plate 631 may be colorless or colored and transparent, or may have the property of diffusing light.

The configuration of the light-transmitting plate support part 332 is the same as that of the board support part 613 that tilts the light-emitting board 611 of Example 23. In other words, when the third illumination cover 609 is attached by the control mechanism 608, the light-transmitting plate support part 632 remains in a vertical position and transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 and outputs it to the front side where the first light-emitting area 605 is located, but when the third illumination cover 610 is replaced, the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 is refracted diagonally upward where the second light-emitting area 606 is located and transmits it in a tilted position.

As a result, not only when the light irradiation device 607 is tiltable, but also when the light-transmitting section 630 is tiltable, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted to suitably change the light-emitting area.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 24, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame and includes a light-transmitting section 630 that transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light-emitting area 605 or the second light-emitting area 606, and the light-transmitting section 630 is tiltable. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle not only when the light irradiation device 607 is tiltable, but also when the light-transmitting section 630 is tiltable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) above.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 and 24, the input unit 614 and output unit 615 of the control mechanism 608 tilt the light-emitting substrate 313 by the force of the pushing unit 616 pushing the light-emitting substrate 313, but the input unit 614 and output unit 615 of the control mechanism 608 may have a different configuration. The following describes in detail the configurations that differ from Examples 23 and 24.

Figure 93 is a front view of a pachinko machine of Example 25. Figure 94 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 93, showing the state in which an illumination cover is attached in an EE section. Figure 95 is a front view of the pachinko machine in a state in which an illumination cover of a different size is attached. Figure 96 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 95, showing the state in which an illumination cover of a different size is attached in an FF section. Figures 97(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the adjustment of the light-emitting area when an illumination cover of a different size is attached. Figure 98 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device.

The control mechanism 608 includes a separate cover detection sensor 641 that detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609, and a tilting motor 642 that changes the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. This allows the light emitting area to be suitably changed by detecting that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 is attached at a location facing the inner surface of the third illuminated cover 609, for example, at the upper left of the main body side fixed part 620 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection sensor 641 is, for example, a limit switch. When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached, the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is not attached because the hinge does not press the contact. When the separate third illuminated cover 610 is replaced, the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached by pressing the hinge into a part of the separate third illuminated cover 610 (for example, the separate cover detection protrusion 643 described later) and pressing the switch.

The third illuminated cover 610 has a separate cover detection protrusion 643 at a position corresponding to the separate cover detection sensor 641 on the inner surface on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection protrusion 643 reliably contacts the separate cover detection sensor 641 when the third illuminated cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14. Note that the configuration of the separate cover detection sensor 641 is not limited to the above configuration and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached in place of the separate third illuminated cover 610, the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been removed because the hinge separates from the switch when the separate third illuminated cover 610 is removed. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by detecting that the third illuminated cover 609 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the separate third illuminated cover 610.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 and the tilting motor 642 are electrically connected to the sub-controller 262. When the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illumination cover 610 has been attached, the sub-controller 262 rotates the tilting motor 642 to a predetermined angle, tilting the board support part 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 changes from a vertical position to a tilted position. When the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illumination cover 610 has been removed, the sub-controller 262 reversely rotates the tilting motor 642 to a predetermined angle, and raises the board support part 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 changes from a tilted position to a vertical position. The tilting motor 642 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle with a potentiometer or an encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage for a predetermined rotation angle using a stepping motor.

Next, the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 will be described with respect to differences from the above-mentioned embodiment. In step S2103A, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs the power-on notification in step S2103, and then performs the light-emitting area adjustment. Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives an ON signal (a detection signal indicating that the separate third illumination cover 610 has been attached) from the separate cover detection sensor 641, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 rotates the tilt motor 642 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and performs the light-emitting area adjustment by tilting the board support part 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 is in a tilted position from a vertical position. After performing this light-emitting area adjustment, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs the customer waiting performance in step S2104. Note that the steps of power-on notification, light-emitting area adjustment, and customer waiting performance may be performed in a different order or simultaneously. This allows you to check the change in the light-emitting area before playing begins when the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached, reducing problems during play and allowing you to change the light-emitting area appropriately.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of editing a lamp lighting pattern that corresponds (synchronizes) with the variable pattern presentation of the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 of the relevant model. This lamp lighting pattern may be different when the third illumination cover 609 is attached and when the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached. The trigger for adopting a different lighting pattern is not limited to replacement of the separate third illumination cover 610, but may also be replacement of the main control device 261 and sub-control device 262 accompanying the installation of the separate third illumination cover 610. In this way, when the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached, a lamp lighting pattern different from that when the third illumination cover 609 is attached can be shown.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 25 is provided with the third illumination unit 303 (third illumination cover 609) arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, and the light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light onto the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 can shift a predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, between a first position and a second position by the shift mechanism 602, so that the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a separate cover detection sensor 614 that can detect the shift of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, so that the shift of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 can be recognized. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 608 that executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light-emitting area 605 when it is detected that the predetermined surface has been moved to the first position, and executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light-emitting area when it is detected that the predetermined surface has been moved to the second position. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by recognizing the shift of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 and optimizing the direction of light irradiation according to the shift of the predetermined surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) above.

The control mechanism 608 also includes an input unit 614 that receives the force generated during the transition of the specified surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position, a contact-type separate cover detection sensor 641 that can detect the transition of the specified surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position based on the input force, and an output unit 615 that changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed when it is detected that the specified surface has transitioned from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated during the transition of the specified surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) above.

In addition, the input unit 614 is a separate cover detection protrusion 643 that accepts the force generated in the process of the specific surface of the third illumination unit 303 transitioning from the first position to the second position and pushes in the contact-type separate cover detection sensor 641, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by accepting the force generated in the process of the specific surface of the third illumination unit 303 transitioning from the first position to the second position and using the force to push in the contact-type separate cover detection sensor 614. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (J3).

The third illumination unit 303 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to make the control mechanism 608 difficult to see, making it possible to make the control mechanism 608 less noticeable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 608 is arranged so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, so that the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) above.

In addition, since the control mechanism 608 is provided on the rear side of the light irradiation device 607, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately without blocking the light-emitting area being changed, while ensuring a sufficient light-emitting area on the front side of the control mechanism 608. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J8) above.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 25, when the illumination cover is replaced with an illumination cover of a different size, the angle of the light-emitting substrate 613 or the light-transmitting plate 631 is adjusted, but it is also possible to adjust elements other than these. The following describes in detail the configurations that differ from the above-mentioned examples.

Figure 99 is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 26. Figure 100 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 99, showing the state in which the illuminated cover is attached in the GG cross section. Figure 101 is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state in which the illuminated cover with a different light-emitting area is attached. Figure 102 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 101, showing the state in which the illuminated cover of a different size is attached in the HH cross section. Figure 103 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device.

The third separate illumination cover 650 of Examples 23 to 25 has a second illumination area 606A that is the same width as the first illumination area 605 of the third illumination cover 609 but is taller than the first illumination area 605. The second illumination area 606A of the third separate illumination cover 650 of this embodiment has a partial illumination area 651 that emits light in a region corresponding to the first illumination area 605, and a non-illuminating area 652 that does not emit light in the remaining portion. For example, the partial illumination area 651 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, but the non-illuminating area 652 is formed of a light-shielding resin. This allows the third separate illumination cover 650 to realize decorations such as a partial illumination area 651 that is made to look like a treasure in the middle of the non-illuminating area 652 that is made to look like the ocean, or a partial illumination area 651 that is made to look like the moon in the middle of the non-illuminating area 652 that is made to look like the night sky.

The control mechanism 608 includes a separate cover detection sensor 641 and a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached, the light irradiation device 607 illuminates the entire area of the light emitting substrate 611 corresponding to the first light emitting area 605. When the separate third illuminated cover 650 is attached, the control mechanism 608 illuminates the area of the light emitting substrate 611 that corresponds only to the partial light emitting area 651 as the second light emitting area 606A.

This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed even when the illumination area is changed by detecting whether the separate third illumination cover 650 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. Note that the object to be changed is not limited to the illumination area, but may be the illumination intensity or the color of the light. By using the difference in the illumination effect between the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 650, it is also possible to express differences in the types of gaming machines, such as the probability of a jackpot or the presence or absence of settings.

Next, in the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, as in FIG. 98 described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 adjusts the light-emitting area and non-light-emitting area in response to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 650 (step S2103B). For example, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, and sets all the LEDs 612 of the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the first light-emitting area 605 as the light-emitting target. Also, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines that the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, and sets the LEDs 612 in the center of the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the second light-emitting area 606A as the light-emitting target. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the LED 612 that has been set to emit light in a predetermined pattern when the power is turned on. This allows the player to check the lighting status of the luminous and non-luminous areas corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 650 before playing begins when the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, and allows the luminous areas to be changed appropriately.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of editing the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 610 in response to (synchronization with) the variable pattern presentation. For example, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, and edits the lamp lighting pattern when all the LEDs 612 of the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the first light-emitting area 605 are set as the light-emitting target. In addition, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, and edits the lamp lighting pattern when the LEDs 612 in the center part of the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the second light-emitting area 606A are set as the light-emitting target. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the LED 612 that has been set to emit light in the edited lamp lighting pattern in response to the variable pattern presentation. This makes it possible to reduce wasteful power consumption caused by continuing to emit light in unnecessary parts even after the separate third illumination cover 650 has been attached.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 26, the control mechanism 608 is equipped with a separate cover detection sensor 641 that detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609, and a means for changing the irradiation area, light emission intensity, and light emission color of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. This makes it possible to suitably change the light emission area even when the irradiation area, light emission intensity, and light emission color are changed by detecting whether the separate third illuminated cover 650 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the illumination unit (third illumination unit 303) that controls the light mode was provided in the glass frame unit 23, but in this embodiment, the illumination unit that controls the light mode is disposed on the game board 30, which is a difference from the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 27 is equipped with, for example, a movable illumination unit 703 as the illumination unit disposed on the game board 30. The movable illumination unit 703 is configured so that when the movable illumination unit 703 operates, the decorative effect can be optimized at the positions before and after the operation. The specific configuration will be described below.

Figure 104 is a front view of the game board of Example 27. Figure 105 is a cross-sectional view II of the game board shown in Figure 104, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. Figure 106 is a front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view JJ of the game board shown in Figure 106, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part.

The movable illumination section 703 consists of a component that moves passively within the center frame 47A and a component that moves actively within the center frame 47A.

Specifically, the movable illumination unit 703 includes, as a passively moving component, a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light and a control mechanism 708 that controls the manner of light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, and, as an actively moving component, a movable illumination unit cover 709 that covers the front side of the movable illumination unit 703 and a drive mechanism 710 that operates the movable illumination unit cover 709.

The movable illumination cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting resin. In the illustration, the movable illumination cover 709 is flat, but it may be a three-dimensional model that resembles a specific person, animal, or tool. The movable illumination cover 709 receives light from the back side and emits light on the front side to highlight the person, animal, or tool.

The movable illumination unit cover 709 is formed from a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The movable illumination unit cover 709 may be colorless or colored, and may be treated with a frosted glass-like surface treatment. The movable illumination unit cover 709 may be provided with a diffusion member (diffusion plate) having irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiation device 707 located behind it, or the inner surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 may have irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiation device 707. This allows the movable illumination unit cover 709 to make the light irradiation device 707 difficult for the player to see.

The driving mechanism 710 is a displacement mechanism that displaces a predetermined surface (e.g., the front surface) of the movable illumination unit cover 709 that is illuminated by the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707. Specifically, the driving mechanism 710 may be a solenoid, a mechanism that converts the rotational motion of a motor into linear motion using a ball screw, or any other mechanism, so long as it is a mechanism that moves the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 in a linear direction.

When viewed from the front of the game machine, the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 is located behind, for example, the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (i.e., the first position) when the drive mechanism 710 is not in operation, and is moved to a position exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (i.e., the second position) when the drive mechanism 710 is in operation. The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A is also made of a transparent resin, like the movable illumination unit 703. The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A and the movable illumination unit cover 709 may be unified in shape to form a single illumination device. Such an illumination device may be operated so that, for example, it is hidden behind the right edge of the center frame 47A when not in operation, but appears from behind the right edge of the center frame 47A while being strongly illuminated when in operation. This allows the movable illumination unit 703 to be displayed as an illumination decoration with different impressions depending on the intensity of the light emitted when not in operation and when in operation.

In the above-described configuration, the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 (or the movable illumination unit cover 709 and the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A) located behind the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (first position) is the first light-emitting area 705, and the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 located at the exposed area from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (second position) is the second light-emitting area 706.

The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A may be formed from a resin that does not have optical transparency. In this case, the movable illumination unit cover 709 may be operated so that it is positioned in a location that is invisible or difficult to see for the player when not in operation, and is positioned in a location that is easily visible for the player when in operation. This also allows the movable illumination unit 703 to show illumination decorations that have different emission and non-emission depending on whether the unit is in operation or not.

When the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is moved to a first position by the driving mechanism 710, the control mechanism 708 executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 to illuminate the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 705, and when the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is moved to a second position by the driving mechanism 710, the control mechanism 708 executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 to illuminate the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 706.

As a result, whether the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 causes the first light-emitting region 705 to emit light or the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 causes the second light-emitting region 706 to emit light, the light-emitting location can be easily shifted, and the light irradiation direction can be optimized in accordance with the shift in the light-emitting location, thereby allowing the light-emitting region to be suitably changed.

Next, we will explain in detail how the control mechanism 708 controls the light behavior.

The light irradiation device 707 includes a light emitting substrate 711 on which LEDs 712 are arranged, and a substrate support section 713 that supports the light emitting substrate 711. The substrate support section 713 supports the light emitting substrate 711 so that it can rotate, with one end of the substrate support section 713 fixed to the center frame 47A.

The light irradiation device 707 is configured so that the light emitting substrate 711 can be rotated by the substrate support part 713. The control mechanism 708 controls the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 from a first state to a second state by rotating the light emitting substrate 711. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle.

The control mechanism 708 changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 from a position (first position) on the rear side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A to a position (second position) in which the movable illumination unit 703 is exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The control mechanism 708 includes an input unit 714 that inputs the force generated by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position, and an output unit 715 that changes the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 based on the input force. This makes it possible to suitably change the light-emitting area by utilizing the force generated by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position.

The input unit 714 is a mechanism that causes the movable illumination unit cover 709 to push (i.e. rotate) the light irradiation device 707 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position. Specifically, the input unit 714 includes a push-in portion 716 provided on the movable illumination unit cover 709 and a push-in receiving portion 717 provided on the light irradiation device 707.

The push-in portion 716 is disposed on the upper surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 and is a portion that protrudes toward the rear side of the movable illumination unit cover 709. The push-in portion 716 is formed so that, in the process of moving the movable illumination unit cover 709 to the second position, it comes into contact with the push-in receiving portion 717 disposed on the upper surface of the board support portion 713, and rotates the board support portion 713 to face the second rotation position. For example, the push-in receiving portion 717 has a rotating body (roller), and the push-in portion 716 has an inclined surface that rolls the rotating body in accordance with the rotation of the board support portion 713. As a result, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force of the movable illumination unit cover 709 pushing the light irradiation device 707 (i.e., rotating it to the second rotation position) by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position.

The output unit 715 is a mechanism that rotates the light emitting substrate 711 by rotating the light emitting device 707 based on the force input from the input unit 714, thereby changing the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707. Specifically, the output unit 715 is composed of a substrate support unit 713, an axis 718, a coil spring 719 attached to the axis 718, and a posture regulating unit 721 that regulates the posture of the substrate support unit 713. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle by utilizing the force generated by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position.

The input section 714 (push-in section 716 and push-in receiving section 717) are disposed on the upper surface of the movable illumination section cover 709 and the board support section 713, respectively, and the output section 715 is disposed around the axis 718 of the board support section 713. Neither of them overlaps with the front surface of the light-emitting section mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed without blocking the light-emitting section mounting surface.

The shaft 718 connects the board support part 713 to the center frame 47A so that the board support part 713 can rotate. The coil spring 719 generates a biasing force on the board support part 713 when attached to the shaft 718. In the process of moving the movable illumination part cover 709 to the second position, the coil spring 719 increases the biasing force as the pushing part 716 contacts the pushing receiving part 717 and the board support part 713 rotates to face the second rotation position, and the biasing force is strongest at the position where the pushing of the pushing part 716 ends. When the movable illumination part cover 709 returns from the second position to the first position, the biasing force causes the board support part 713 to return from the second rotation position to its original first rotation position.

The position restriction portion 721 is a stopper provided on the board support portion 713. When the movable illumination portion 703 is positioned on the back surface of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A, the biasing force of the coil spring 719 restricts the position of the board support portion 713 to face the movable illumination portion 703 head-on by the position restriction portion 721.

This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position. The light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the movable illumination unit cover 709 presses the light irradiation device 707 by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force generated by the action of the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position.

Next, the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 will be described. The movable illumination unit 703 can be operated by pressing the frame button 80 (e.g., the decision button 81) in response to an operation request image that requests the operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The operation request image is displayed, for example, during the customer waiting performance (waiting display) on the third pattern display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is, for example, an image such as "Make character A stand out? (If you want to make it stand out, press the frame button.)". Here, character A is a decoration that indicates a character applied to the movable illumination unit 703. When the frame button 80 is pressed for the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 703 that imitates character A is shifted from a less noticeable position (first position) on the back side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A to a more noticeable position (second position) exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A.

This allows the illuminated area to be appropriately changed in response to the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the player's operation, making it easier to create decorations on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body according to the player's preferences.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this Example 27 is equipped with a movable illumination unit 703 disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light toward the back side of the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting the front side of the movable illumination unit 703, which receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, to different positions, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the front side of the movable illumination unit 703. When the front of the movable illumination unit 703 is in a first position, the control mechanism 708 executes a first control to cause the front of the movable illumination unit 703 in the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area 705 using light emitted from the light irradiation device 707, and when the front of the movable illumination unit 703 is in a second position, the control mechanism 708 executes a second control to cause the front of the movable illumination unit 703 in the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area 706 using light emitted from the light irradiation device 707. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the change in the front of the movable illumination unit 703. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) above.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this Example 27 is provided with a movable illumination unit 703 disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light onto the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a drive mechanism 710 that can move a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, between a first position and a second position, so that the light-emitting location of the movable illumination unit 703 is not uniform, and the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be easily moved. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 708 that executes a first control to make the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 illuminate the predetermined surface located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 705 when the predetermined surface is moved to a first position by the drive mechanism 710, and executes a second control to make the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 illuminate the predetermined surface located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 706 when the predetermined surface is moved to a second position by the drive mechanism 710, thereby facilitating the shifting of the light-emitting location and optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the shifting of the light-emitting location, thereby suitably changing the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) above.

The pachinko machine 10 main body includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 main body, an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side of the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis, and a front frame set 14 that is attached so as to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side of the inner frame 12 as an opening/closing axis, the inner frame 12 includes a resin base 12a that forms its outer shape, and a game board 30 that is attached to the resin base 12a and has a game area 30a through which game balls flow down, and the game board 30 is provided with a play area 30a through which game balls flow down, and during the variable display of the third pattern and The device is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 having a display screen 42a on which a display performance during a jackpot game state that occurs when the variable display of the third symbol results in a jackpot result is displayed, and an opening that makes the display screen 42a visible, and the front frame set 14 is equipped with a glass frame section 23 on the back side of which a glass plate 137 that makes the game area 30a and the display screen 42a visible when viewed from the front of the game machine is attached, and the movable illumination section 703 is made visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. This makes it easy to shift the light-emitting point on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift of the light-emitting point, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the game machine described in (I2) above.

In addition, the movable illumination unit 703 is attached behind the glass plate 137 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 body and is visible through the glass plate 137, which makes it easy to shift the light-emitting point behind the glass plate 137 of the pachinko machine 10 body, and by optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shift of the light-emitting point behind the glass plate 137, the light-emitting area behind the glass plate 137 can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I4) above.

In addition, since the movable illumination unit 703 is disposed on the right side of the play area 30a of the game board 30, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed even on the right side of the play area 30a of the game board 30. This is also an example of the game machine described in (I5) above.

In addition, since the movable illumination unit 703 is disposed on the right side of the opening of the game board 30, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed even on the right side of the opening of the game board 30. This is also an example of the game machine described in (I6) above.

The light irradiation device 707 also includes a light emitting substrate 711 and a drive mechanism 710 that changes the position of the light emitting substrate 711 relative to a specific surface of the movable illumination unit 703, so that the light emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I7) above.

The first control sets the irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 to the first light-emitting area 705 to a first irradiation angle, and the second control sets the irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 to the second light-emitting area 706 to a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by changing the irradiation angle in a configuration in which the movable illumination unit 703 operates. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I8) above.

The machine also includes a frame button 80 (e.g., a decision button 81) that is operated by the player, and the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80. Therefore, even when the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I9) above.

In addition, the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80 while the display performance is being displayed on the third pattern display device 42, so even if the movable illumination unit 703 operates while the display performance is being displayed on the third pattern display device 42, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position according to the operation. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I11) above.

In addition, the light irradiation device 707 rotates in response to the operation of the movable illumination unit 703, so that the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotating the light irradiation device 707 in either case that the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 illuminates the first light-emitting area 705 or that the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 illuminates the second light-emitting area in response to the operation of the movable illumination unit 703. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I12) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 708 changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed during the process in which the specified surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed during the process in which the specified surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I13) above.

The control mechanism 708 also includes an input unit 714 that inputs the force generated in the process of the specific surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitioning from a first position to a second position, and an output unit 715 that changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of the specific surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitioning from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I14) above.

In addition, the input unit 714 is a push-in unit 716 and a push-in receiving unit 717 that apply a force to rotate the light irradiation device 707 during the process in which a specific surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force applied to the light irradiation device 707 during the process in which a specific surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I15) above.

In addition, the output unit 715 rotates the light irradiation device 707 based on the input force, thereby changing the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. Therefore, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input in the process in which the specified surface of the movable illumination unit 703 moves from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I16) above.

The movable illumination unit 703 is made of a resin material having transparency and is configured so that the control mechanism 708 is difficult to see. The movable illumination unit 703 is made of a resin material having transparency, but is configured so that the control mechanism 708 is difficult to see, so the control mechanism 708 does not stand out. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

The control mechanism 708 is also arranged so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, so that the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) above.

In addition, when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is shifted to the left or right when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input unit 714 is provided on the upper surface (top) of the light irradiation device 707, so that the light-emitting area shifting to the left and right is not easily blocked, and the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J7) above.

In the above-mentioned Example 27, the control mechanism 708 changes the mode of light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 by tilting the light irradiation device 707. However, as in Example 24, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 is changed while the light irradiation device 707 remains fixed.

Figure 108 shows the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part in Example 28.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the front side of the variable display unit 35 attached to the back side of the game board 30 on the back side of the center frame 47A, and includes a light-transmitting section 730 that transmits light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 to the first light-emitting area 705 or the second light-emitting area 706. The light-transmitting section 730 includes a light-transmitting plate 731 that transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 and outputs it to the front side, a light-transmitting plate support section 732 that supports the light-transmitting plate 731, and a control mechanism 708 similar to that of embodiment 27.

The configuration of the light-transmitting plate support part 432 is the same as the configuration of the board support part 713 that tilts the light-emitting board 711 of Example 23. In other words, when the movable illumination part cover 709 is located in the first position, the light-transmitting plate support part 732 transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 and outputs it to the front side where the first light-emitting area 705 is located, while remaining in a position corresponding to the back surface of the right side of the opening of the center frame 47A by the control mechanism 708, but when the movable illumination part cover 709 is moved to the second position, the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 is refracted toward the diagonal direction where the second light-emitting area 706 is located and transmits it in a position facing the part exposed from the right side of the opening of the center frame 47A.

As a result, not only in a configuration in which the light irradiation device 707 is rotatable, but also in a configuration in which the light-transmitting portion 730 is rotatable, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted and the light-emitting area can be suitably changed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 28, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the variable display unit 35 and includes a light transmitting section 730 that transmits the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 to the first light emitting area 705 or the second light emitting area 706, and the light transmitting section 730 is rotatable. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle not only when the light irradiation device 707 is rotatable, but also when the light transmitting section 730 is rotatable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) above.

In the above-mentioned Examples 27 and 28, the input unit 714 and the output unit 715 of the control mechanism 708 rotate the light irradiation device 707 by the force of the pushing unit 716 pushing the light irradiation device 707, but the input unit 714 and the output unit 715 of the control mechanism 708 may have a different configuration. Specific configurations are described below.

Figure 109 is a front view of the game board of Example 29. Figure 110 is a K-K cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 109, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. Figure 111 is a K-K cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 109, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area when the movable illumination part is protruding.

The control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 that detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from a location (first position) on the rear side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A to a location (second position) where the movable illumination unit 703 is exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A, and a rotation motor 742 that changes the state of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. This allows the light emitting area to be appropriately changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The displacement detection sensor 741 is, for example, a limit switch. When the movable illumination unit 703 (movable illumination unit cover 709) is located at the first position, the hinge is not pushed in (the switch is not pressed), so the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has not moved to the second position. When the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position, the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the hinge is pushed into the movable illumination unit 703 during the process, pushing the switch, and the movable illumination unit 703 has moved to the second position. The configuration of the displacement detection sensor 741 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the movable illumination unit 703 moves from the second position to the first position, the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved to the first position because the hinge separates from the switch as the movable illumination unit 703 returns to the first position. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 and the rotation motor 742 are electrically connected to the sub-controller 262. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position, the sub-controller 262 rotates the rotation motor 742 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and rotates the substrate support unit 713 so that the light irradiation device 707 faces the second position from the front position of the first position. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position, the sub-controller 262 reversely rotates the rotation motor 742 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and reversely rotates the substrate support unit 713 so that the light irradiation device 707 faces the second position from the front position of the first position. The control of the rotation motor 742 may be performed by detecting the rotation angle using a potentiometer or an encoder, or may be performed by applying a pulse voltage for a predetermined rotation angle using a stepping motor.

The movable illumination cover 709 and the hinge of the displacement detection sensor 741 that contacts it correspond to the input unit 714 in the above-mentioned embodiment. The rotation motor 742 corresponds to the output unit 715 in the above-mentioned embodiment.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 29 includes a movable illumination unit 703 (e.g., the movable illumination unit 703) disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light onto the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 can shift a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, between a first position and a second position, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 that can detect the displacement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, so that the displacement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be recognized. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 708 that executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 705 when it is detected that the predetermined surface has been moved to a first position, and executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 706 when the predetermined surface is moved to a second position, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 707 can recognize the shift of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 and optimize the light irradiation direction according to the shift of the predetermined surface, thereby suitably changing the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) above.

The control mechanism 708 also includes an input unit 714 that receives the force generated in the process of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 moving from the first position to the second position, a contact-type displacement detection sensor 741 that can detect the movement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position based on the input force, and an output unit 715 that changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed when it is detected that the predetermined surface has moved from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 moving from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) above.

In addition, the input unit 714 is a hinge for the movable illumination unit cover 709 and the displacement detection sensor 741, which accepts the force generated in the process of the specified surface of the movable illumination unit 703 moving from the first position to the second position and pushes in the contact-type displacement detection sensor 741, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by accepting the force generated in the process of the specified surface of the movable illumination unit 703 moving from the first position to the second position and using the force that pushes in the contact-type displacement detection sensor 741. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J3) above.

In the above-mentioned Examples 27 to 29, the output 715 of the control mechanism 708 adjusts the irradiation angle of the light irradiation device 707, but it may also adjust a different element related to the irradiation of the light irradiation device 707. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 112 is a front view of the game board of Example 30. Figure 113 is an LL cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 112, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. Figure 114 is a front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. Figure 115 is an MM cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 114, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part.

The movable illumination unit 750 in this embodiment is a light guide plate processed to illuminate a specific pattern or character on a transparent resin acrylic panel, and a light guide plate light emitting unit 753 is provided on the side of the light guide plate. The light emitting area of the movable illumination unit 750 has a partial light emitting area 751 where a part of it emits light, and a non-light emitting area 752 where the remaining part does not emit light. The light emitting area of the movable illumination unit 750 is divided into, for example, six parts, each of which is configured to emit characters ("ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", "i", "!"). The light guide plate light emitting unit 753 is also divided into six parts accordingly, and is controlled so that some of it is illuminated as partial light emitting unit 754 and the remaining part is not illuminated as non-light emitting unit 755.

The control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 and a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. Specifically, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the first position, the control mechanism 708 sets the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 to a non-light emitting unit 755 that does not emit light to any of the six characters.

In addition, when the control mechanism 708 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position by the displacement detection sensor 741, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 illuminates the areas corresponding to four letters ("a", "tsu", "i", "!") and five letters ("ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", "!") as partial light emitting units 754 in accordance with the player's operation, and the characters other than the illuminated areas become non-light emitting units 755.

This allows the light-emitting region to be appropriately changed even when the illuminated area is changed by detecting whether the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position. Note that the object to be changed is not limited to the illuminated area, but may also be the light-emitting intensity or the light-emitting color. The difference in the illumination effect between the first position and the second position can also express the difference in the expectation of the outcome of the jackpot lottery.

Next, the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 will be described. The movable illumination unit 703 can be operated by pressing the frame button 80 (e.g., the decision button 81, the left selection button 82, or the right selection button 83) in response to an operation request image requesting the operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The timing of displaying the operation request image is, for example, during a display performance related to the variable display of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is an image having options that prompt a prediction of the result of the variable display, such as "Is this reach hot or very hot?" during a specified reach performance. In addition to this, options that ask the player's preference, such as "Which is your favorite character, A or B?" may also be used. When the player selects "gekiatsu" by pressing the right selection button 83 for the operation request image and presses the decision button 81 to confirm, the movable illumination unit 750 shifts from the first position to the second position, and when it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 causes the parts corresponding to the five characters ("ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", and "!") to emit light as the partial light emitting unit 754, and the characters other than the light emitting parts to become the non-light emitting unit 755. When the player selects "atsui" for the operation request image by pressing the left selection button 82 and presses the decision button 81 to confirm, the movable illumination unit 750 shifts from the first position to the second position, and when it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 causes the parts corresponding to the four characters ("a", "tsu", "i", and "!") to emit light as the partial light emitting unit 754, and the characters other than the light emitting parts to become the non-light emitting unit 755.

This allows the illuminated area to be appropriately changed in response to the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the player's operation, making it easier to create decorations on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body according to the player's preferences.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 30, the control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 that detects that the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position, and a mechanism that changes the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. This makes it possible to suitably change the light emitting area even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the third illumination unit 303 and the separate third illumination unit 604 are configured to be attached and detached in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, but they may also be configured to be attached and detached in an oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10. The following description will be given with reference to FIG. 116.

Figures 116(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the installation direction of the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Example 31.

When viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the illuminated cover 609 and the separate illuminated cover 610 of this embodiment have roughly the same shape as the illuminated cover 609 and the separate illuminated cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. However, the illuminated cover 609 and the separate illuminated cover 610 of this embodiment have a different attachment and removal structure from the illuminated cover 609 and the separate illuminated cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26.

The third illumination part 603 and the separate third illumination part 604 are attached by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 diagonally. The slide mechanism 602 is composed of a slide groove 603 formed on the main body of the pachinko machine 10 that slopes upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a portion formed on the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 that fits into this slide groove 603. Note that the shapes of the various parts that make up the slide mechanism 602 have been omitted in the illustration.

The illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment also differ in the structure of the control mechanism 608 from the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of embodiments 23 to 26. That is, the input section 614 is the same as the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of embodiments 23 to 26, but the mounting location and shape of the push-in section 616 and the push-in receiver 617 are different.

The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is disposed on the inner surface of the top surface that is inclined diagonally toward the tip end of the insertion direction of the separate illumination cover 610. The shape of the protrusion of the push-in portion 616 may be a small piece, or a flat plate extending laterally of the pachinko machine 10. The push-in receiving portion 617 is significantly different from Examples 23 to 26 in that it extends from the back surface of the light irradiation device 607 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The shape of the push-in receiving portion 617 only needs to correspond to the shape of the push-in portion 616, and may be rod-shaped or flat.

When the third illumination unit 303 is attached to the glass frame 23, the peripheral wall of the opening of the third illumination cover 609 is guided by the diagonally formed slide mechanism 602 and is attached between the sound output units 24. Since the third illumination cover 609 does not have a push-in portion 616, the first light-emitting area 605 is formed with the light irradiation device 607 in a vertical position. When the separate third illumination unit 604 is attached to the glass frame 23, the base of the periphery of the opening side of the separate third illumination cover 610 is guided by the diagonally formed slide mechanism 602 and is attached between the sound output units 24. Since the separate third illumination cover 610 has a push-in portion 616, it comes into contact with the push-in receiving portion 617 on the back of the light irradiation device 607, tilting the light irradiation device 607 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and forming the second light-emitting area 606 above the first light-emitting area 605.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this Example 31 is equipped with the third illumination unit 303 disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and the light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light toward the back side of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting the front side of the third illumination unit 303, which receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, to different positions, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the front side of the third illumination unit 303. When the front of the third illumination unit 303 is located at the first position, the control mechanism 608 executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to illuminate the front of the third illumination unit 303 located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 605, and when the front of the third illumination unit 303 is located at the second position, the control mechanism 608 executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to illuminate the front of the third illumination unit 303 located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 606. Therefore, by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the change in the front of the third illumination unit 303, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) above.

In addition, since the input unit 614 is provided on either the left or right side of the light irradiation device 607 when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is shifted vertically when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the input unit 614 is unlikely to block the light-emitting area that shifts vertically, and the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J6) above.

In addition, when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is shifted in an upwardly sloping diagonal direction as it approaches the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the input unit 614 is located on the rear side of the light irradiation device 607 in a position that can input the force generated in the process of the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 shifting in an oblique direction, so that the input unit 614 does not interfere with the shift of the third illumination unit 303 and can change the light-emitting area appropriately without blocking the shifted light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J9) above.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the light-emitting area is changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of replacing the third illumination unit 303 with another third illumination unit 604, but it is also possible to change the light-emitting area of the third illumination unit 303 while keeping it as it is. The following will be explained with reference to FIG. 117.

Figures 117(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the state before and after the change in the light-emitting area of the illumination cover 609 in Example 32. The front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this example is similar to Figure 1, so please refer to Figure 1. Note that in this example, the third illumination part 303 in Figure 1 corresponds to the third illumination cover 609 before the movable illumination part 305 changes as shown in Figure 117(a), and the separate third illumination part 604 in Figure 1 corresponds to the third illumination cover 609 after the movable illumination part 305 changes as shown in Figure 117(b).

The third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment has roughly the same shape as the third illumination unit 303 of Examples 23 to 26 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, the third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment is different from the third illumination unit 303 of Examples 23 to 26 in that it is configured as a movable illumination unit 305 that can operate part of the illumination without the need to replace it with a separate third illumination unit 604.

The third illumination unit 303 (movable illumination unit 305) has a third illumination cover 609 divided into a tip end 658 and a base end 659, and is equipped with a sliding drive mechanism 660 that causes the tip end 658 to protrude and retract diagonally from the base end 659. As with Example 31, the sliding mechanism has a slide groove 603 formed in the base end 659 of the third illumination cover 609, and the slide groove 603 slopes upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A portion that fits into this slide groove 603 is formed in the tip end 658 of the third illumination cover 609, and the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303 is attached to the base end 659 of the third illumination unit 303.

The drive mechanism 660 includes a rack 661 formed at the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609, and a pinion (circular gear) 662 formed at the base end 659 of the third illuminated cover 609. A motor 663 fixed to a predetermined location of the base end 659 is connected to the pinion 662. The tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 is configured to protrude and retract by driving the motor 663. The position when the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 protrudes to the uppermost side is the second position, and the position when the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 retracts to the lowermost side is the first position.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the illumination cover 609 of this embodiment is also different from the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of embodiments 23 to 26. That is, the input section 614 is the same as the illumination cover 609 and the push-in receiving section 617, but the structures of the push-in section 616 and the push-in receiving section 617 are different.

The push-in portion 616 is composed of a protrusion (axis) 664 protruding from the inner surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 (the inner surface of the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10), and a slide member (slider) 665 with one end side to which the axis 664 is rotatably fitted. A long hole 666 is formed on the other end side of the slider 665, and a protrusion (axis) 667 protruding from the left side of the light irradiation device 607 is connected to this long hole 666 so as to be able to slide freely. The push-in receiving portion 617 corresponds to the axis 667 protruding from the left side of the light irradiation device 607.

To protrude the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 to the second position, the motor 663 is rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise on the page if the motor 663 is connected coaxially with the pinion 662), and as the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 rises to the second position, the slider 665 pushes the light irradiation device 607, tilting the light irradiation device 607 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and a second light-emitting area 606 is formed in front of the tip 658 and base end 659. When the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 is to be retracted to the first position, the motor 663 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, clockwise on the page), and as the tip 659 of the third illuminated cover 609 descends to the first position, the slider 665 lifts the light irradiation device 607, causing the light irradiation device 607 to stand up at the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the first light-emitting area 605 is formed in front of the tip 658 (which is also the front of the base end 659 overlapping the front).

The control mechanism 608 is equipped with a displacement detection sensor 668 that detects when the tip 658 of the third illumination cover 609 moves from the first position to the second position. The displacement detection sensor 668 may be a limit switch that detects when the tip 658 is in the first position or the second position, or a potentiometer or encoder that detects the rotation angle of the motor 663 when the tip 658 is in the first position or the second position. This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed by detecting when the tip 658 of the third illumination cover 609 moves from the first position to the second position and when it moves from the second position to the first position.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 32 is provided with the third illumination unit 303 (a movable illumination unit 305 of a split drive type consisting of a tip end 658 and a base end 659) arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light to the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a drive mechanism 660 that can move the front surface of the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, between a first position and a second position, so that the light emitting point of the third illumination unit 303 is not uniform, and the light emitting point of the third illumination unit 303 can be easily moved. The gaming machine includes a control mechanism 608 that executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to emit light from the front of the tip 658 located at the first position as the first light-emitting region 605 when the front of the tip 658 is moved to a first position by the drive mechanism 660, and executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to emit light from the front of the tip 658 and the base end 659 located at the second position as the second light-emitting region 606 when the front of the tip 658 is moved to a second position by the drive mechanism 660. This facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting location, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the shifting of the light-emitting location, the light-emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) above.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 32 includes the third illumination unit 303 (a movable illumination unit 305 of a split drive type consisting of a tip portion 658 and a base portion 659) arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light to the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303, which is illuminated by the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, between a first position and a second position, so that the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 includes a displacement detection sensor 668 that can detect the shift of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303, so that the shift of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 can be recognized. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 608 that executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to emit light from the front of the tip 658 located at the first position as the first light-emitting region 605 when it is detected that the front of the tip 658 has shifted to the first position, and executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiating device 607 to emit light from the front of the tip 658 and the base end 659 located at the second position as the second light-emitting region 606 when the front of the tip 658 has shifted to the second position. Therefore, the light-emitting region can be suitably changed by recognizing the shift of the front of the tip 658 of the third illumination unit 303 and optimizing the direction of light irradiation according to the shift of the front of the tip 658. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) above.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the light-emitting area is changed in the process of replacing the third illumination unit 303 with the separate third illumination unit 604, but the light-emitting area may be changed without replacing the third illumination unit 303 or the separate third illumination unit 604. The following description will be given with reference to FIG. 118. The following description will be given using the separate third illumination unit 604 as an example.

Figures 118(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the state before and after the change in the light-emitting area of the third illumination cover 610 of Example 33.

The separate third illuminated cover 610 has the same shape as the separate illuminated cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26, but differs from the separate illuminated cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in that the light-emitting area on the front side of the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be changed by changing a predetermined area (light-receiving area) on the front side of the separate third illuminated cover 610 that receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the third separate illumination cover 610 is different from that of the third separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. Specifically, the structures of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are different, and in particular, the push-in portion 616 is designed to be able to adjust the amount of pushing.

The protrusion 616a of the pushing part 616 is divided into a tip part 671 and a base part 672, and the base part 672 is attached so as to be movable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the inner surface of the separate third electric cover 610. The tip part 671 is configured to be able to slide vertically from the base part 672. Specifically, the base part 672 of the pushing part 616 is attached to a front-rear slide rail 673 formed on the inner surface of the separate third electric cover 610, and is configured to be able to slide in the front-rear direction. In addition, the tip part 671 of the pushing part 616 is attached to a vertical slide rail 674 formed on the outer surface of the base part 672, and is configured to be able to slide in the up-down direction. As a result, the protrusion amount (height) and the front-rear position of the protrusion 616a of the pushing part 616 can be changed (adjusted) by a worker at the hall or the like before attaching the separate third electric cover 610.

The push-in receiving portion 617 is also formed so as to be able to receive the push-in of the push-in portion 616 over a wider range than in Example 23, depending on the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 616a of this changeable push-in portion 616 and its position in the front-to-rear direction. As a result, the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 increases and the position of the second light-emitting region 606 becomes higher as the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is increased and the position in the front-to-rear direction is adjusted further rearward.

As a result, when using the separate third illumination cover 610, if it is desired in a certain hall to have light emitted from a higher point on the front side of the separate third illumination cover 610, the protrusion amount of the push-in portion 616 of the separate third illumination cover 610 can be increased or the position in the fore-and-aft direction can be adjusted further rearward to increase the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 and raise the position of the second light-emitting area 606, thereby meeting the specific needs of each hall.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this Example 33 is equipped with a separate third illumination unit 604 disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light toward the back side of the separate third illumination unit 604. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting a predetermined area (light receiving area) of the separate third illumination unit 604 that receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 to a different position, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined area of the separate third illumination unit 604. When the predetermined area is located at the first position, the control mechanism 608 executes a first control to cause the predetermined area located at the first position to emit light as the first light-emitting area 605 with the light emitted from the light-emitting device 607, and when the predetermined area is located at the second position, the control mechanism 608 executes a second control to cause the predetermined area located at the second position to emit light as the second light-emitting area 606 with the light emitted from the light-emitting device 607. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the predetermined area (light-receiving area) of the third illumination unit 604. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H00) above.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the opening time, interval time, and ending time (hereinafter collectively referred to as the jackpot time) that can be determined in advance and that constitute a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) were determined by the type of win, but they may also be determined taking into account the number of fluctuations when a jackpot is won. Also, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the ending time was different for the special chart 1 jackpot and the special chart 2 jackpot even if the win type was the same, but in this embodiment, the ending time is the same if the win type is the same.

The basic features of this embodiment will be explained below with reference to Figures 119 to 122. Note that the structure of the game board 30 and the control of the game are the same as in the previous embodiments, so please refer to those as well.

Figure 119 is a table for drawing the special jackpot for the first drawing in Example 34. Figure 120 is a table for drawing the special jackpot for the second drawing. Figure 121 is a table for the special jackpot ending performance for the first drawing. Figure 122 is a table for the special jackpot ending performance for the second drawing.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a function (opening/ending time setting processing function described later) that changes the jackpot time, which can be determined in advance in the jackpot round game state, depending on the number of times the pattern changes at the time the jackpot result is reached when the lottery result is a jackpot result, in response to the opening/ending time setting processing function described later. The jackpot time is at least one of the opening time that notifies the start of the jackpot round game state, the interval time between each jackpot round game, and the ending time that notifies the end of the jackpot round game state. This allows the game situation, such as the number of times the pattern changes at the time the jackpot result is reached, to be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state. Also, the game situation can be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state by changing the jackpot time.

Also, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time according to the number of variations from the time of the previous jackpot result to the time of the jackpot result. Also, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time in a jackpot round game state transitioned from a high probability game state with a cut-off time in which a state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot result than in the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 times) or a time-saving game state with a cut-off time in which a state in which the lottery result is shorter than in the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 times). In other words, the previous jackpot result is a jackpot with 100 times of probability variation continuation and support state, and the number of variations from the time of the previous jackpot result to the time of the jackpot result is 1 to 100. This allows the situation of how many games have been played from the time of the previous jackpot result to the time of the jackpot result to be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state. In addition, the jackpot round game state can be appropriately reflected depending on whether the jackpot round game state is a jackpot round game state transitioned from a normal game state, a high probability game state with a limited number of turns, or a time-saving game state with a limited number of turns.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the jackpot time by referring to the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table or the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table stored in the ROM 502. As in the above-mentioned embodiment, the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table is used for the lottery based on the ball detection by the special chart 1 start winning device 33a, and the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table is used for the lottery based on the ball detection by the special chart 2 start winning device 33b.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, for a 16R special jackpot, the opening time is set to 10 seconds, the interval time to 3 seconds, and the ending time to 35 seconds. For an 8R special jackpot and an 8R regular jackpot, the opening time is set to 10 seconds, the interval time to 3 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds. In the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, the jackpot time is determined according to the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the special chart 1 jackpot ending presentation table, in the case of a 16R sure-variant jackpot, the ending time is 35 seconds, and next game state suggestion information 44w (10 seconds), manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds), card removal forget prevention information 44y (10 seconds), and addiction prevention information 44z (10 seconds) are displayed. In the case of an 8R sure-variant jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot, the ending time is 25 seconds, and next game state suggestion information 44w (10 seconds), manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds), and card removal forget prevention information 44y (10 seconds) are displayed.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a function (opening/ending time setting processing function) that can change the jackpot time to a first time that is shorter than the standard jackpot time in a first state (e.g., 1 to 50 times) in which the number of variations that have been consumed out of a predetermined number of variations (e.g., 100 times) in the number-limit high probability game state or the number-limit time-reduction state is less than or equal to the remaining number of variations. The standard jackpot time is, for example, an opening time of 10 seconds, an interval time of 3 seconds, and an ending time of 25 seconds for the 8R variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot in special chart 1. In this embodiment, the first time is set to a length that is sufficiently shorter than the standard jackpot time that the player recognizes. This can further increase the role of the zone in which jackpot round game states occur continuously, and the game situation can be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120, the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table is configured so that the jackpot time is easily set to a very short time (the first time described above) in the first 1 to 50 times (the period of the first state described above) out of the 100 fluctuation times from the time of the previous jackpot result to the time of the current jackpot result. That is, if a 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot is won in the first 1 to 30 times and 36 to 50 times of the first 100 fluctuation times, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 5 seconds. As a result, the first round starts in a very short time from the time the jackpot result is confirmed, the interval time between each round is also very short, and normal play in a high probability play state starts in a very short time after the end of the final round, so that the next jackpot result can be obtained in a short time. In other words, the first 1 to 50 times out of the 100 fluctuation times in which the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table is used can function as a so-called immediate consecutive zone.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a function (first symbol change processing function) that can set the changing display time in the first state (e.g., 1 to 50 times) to a first changing display time (e.g., 5 seconds) that is shorter than the reference changing display time. The reference changing display is, for example, based on the 20-second changing time of the jackpot super reach A and B. In this embodiment, the first changing display time is set to a length that is sufficiently shorter than the reference changing display time so that the player can recognize it. This shortens the time required for the changing display, and further enhances the role of the instant consecutive zone where jackpot game states occur consecutively.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the first variable display time by referring to a special chart 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 502. Specifically, when a 16R special chart 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern is won, if the number of variations is either 1 to 30 or 36 to 50, the special chart 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table selects a short variation pattern corresponding to the first variable display time (for example, 5 seconds) regardless of the values of the variation type counters C1 and C2. In this way, by providing an immediate succession zone with a short variation time and a short jackpot time, it is possible to increase the expectation of consecutive jackpot wins occurring in a short period of time.

The first variable display time is not limited to a specific time such as 5 seconds, but may be a time selected from relatively short times such as 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or 15 seconds according to the values of the variable type counters C1 and C2. In a short-variation variable pattern, the main decorative pattern Sz may be stopped and displayed at a jackpot combination via a reach combination, or may be stopped and displayed at a jackpot combination without going through this reach combination.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a function in the opening/ending time setting process function described below that can change the jackpot time in the first state (e.g., 1 to 50 times) to a second time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds and an ending time of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds) that is longer than at least the first time (e.g., an opening time of 3 seconds and an ending time of 5 seconds). This makes it possible to achieve a balance by introducing a longer jackpot time in the first state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120, in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, if a 16R variable jackpot is won in, for example, 31-35 times out of the first 1-50 times of 100 variable times in the limited-time high probability play state or limited-time time shortening state, the opening time is set to 10 seconds, the interval time to 3 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds, if an 8R variable jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot is won. This makes it possible to prevent too many jackpot wins and achieve a good balance, even when the first 1-50 times out of the 100 variable times function as an immediate consecutive zone.

In addition, when a 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot is won and the number of variations is between 31 and 35, the special 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table selects a variation pattern that corresponds to a time longer than the first variation display time, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B (20 seconds), jackpot super reach A, B (30 seconds), jackpot super reach C, D (60 seconds), or jackpot super reach E, F (120 seconds), depending on the value of the variation type counters C1, C2. This allows for a balance to be achieved by providing a zone with a long variation time and a long jackpot time within the immediate consecutive zone.

In addition, in the opening/ending time setting processing function described below, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time to a second time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds and an ending time of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds) that is longer than the first time (e.g., an opening time of 3 seconds and an ending time of 5 seconds) in a second state (e.g., 51 to 100 times) in which the number of variations that have been consumed out of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100 times) is longer than the number of variations remaining. This makes it possible to achieve a balance by introducing a longer jackpot time in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120, the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table has the jackpot time set longer in the latter 51-100 of the 100 variable times in the limited number of times high probability game state or limited number of times time reduction state than in the first 1-50. Specifically, if a 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot is won in the latter 51-80 and 86-100 of the 100 times, the opening time is set to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 or 30 seconds (20 seconds for 8R special jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, 30 seconds for 16R special jackpot). This allows for a balance with the immediate consecutive zone in the first half.

In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is equipped with a function that, in the first pattern change processing function, makes it easier to set the change display time to a second change display time (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds) that is at least longer than the first change display time (e.g., 10 seconds) in a second state (e.g., 51 to 100 times) in which the number of changes that has been consumed out of a predetermined number of changes (e.g., 100 times) in a number-limit high probability game state or number-limit time-saving state is greater than the number of changes remaining. Specifically, in the case where a 16R probability jackpot, an 8R probability jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot is won, and the number of variations is either 51 to 80 or 86 to 100, the special chart 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table selects a variation pattern corresponding to either the jackpot normal reach A, B (20 seconds), the jackpot super reach A, B (30 seconds), the jackpot super reach C, D (60 seconds), or the jackpot super reach E, F (120 seconds) according to the value of the variation type counter C2, in the same manner as the special chart 1 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 12 above. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of easily escaping the high probability game state in the second state (for example, the so-called stuck state).

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also changes the jackpot time in the second state (e.g., times 51 to 100) to a time (e.g., an opening time of 3 seconds, an ending time of 5 seconds) that is at least shorter than the second time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds, and an ending time of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds) in the opening/ending time setting processing function described below. This makes it possible to reduce the sense of dragging on in the jackpot round game state in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120, in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, if a 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot is won in the latter 81-85 times of the 100 fluctuation times, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 5 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent the jackpot round game state from becoming monotonous in the start (opening) period, interval period, and end (ending) period in the latter half of the 100 fluctuation times.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a function that allows the first symbol fluctuation processing function to set the fluctuation display time in the second state (for example, 51 to 100 times) to a fluctuation display time (for example, 5 seconds) that is shorter than the second fluctuation display time (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds). Specifically, the special symbol 2 main decorative symbol fluctuation pattern selection table selects a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation display time (for example, 5 seconds) shorter than the second fluctuation display time regardless of the values of the fluctuation type counters C1 and C2 when either a 16R certainty jackpot, an 8R certainty jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot occurs and the number of fluctuations is 81 to 85 times. This allows a high-speed consumption zone with a short fluctuation time to be set in the second state (for example, a so-called stuck state), making it possible to create a game that quickly shows the flow from the fluctuation there to the opening and closing game.

As shown in FIG. 122, when a 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot is won in the first 1-30, 36-50, or 81-85 times of the 100 fluctuation times, the special chart 2 jackpot ending presentation table sets one of the following ending presentation patterns for a short time: next game state suggestion information 44w (5 seconds), manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds), card removal prevention information 44y (5 seconds), and addiction prevention information 44z (5 seconds). In this embodiment, next game state suggestion information 44w is set. The time for which the information is displayed is set to 5 seconds, which corresponds to the ending time. If a 16R sure-fire jackpot is won when the number of fluctuations is between 31 and 35, 51 and 80, or 86 and 100, the ending presentation pattern is set to next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z. If an 8R sure-fire jackpot or 8R normal jackpot is won when the number of fluctuations is between 31 and 35, 51 and 80, or 86 and 100, the ending presentation pattern is set to next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forget prevention information 44y.

Next, referring to Figs. 123 to 125, the points in which the control processing of this embodiment differs from the above-mentioned embodiments will be described. Fig. 123 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control unit 261. Fig. 124 is a flowchart showing the opening and ending time determination processing by the main control unit 261. Fig. 125 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening opening and closing processing by the main control unit 261.

As shown in FIG. 123, this embodiment differs from the above-described embodiment in that an opening/ending time setting process (step S205A) is added to the normal processing by the main control device 261, and in the large prize opening/closing process (step S206A).

The opening and ending time setting process will be explained with reference to the diagram.

In step S4001, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not there is a 16R guaranteed jackpot on special chart 1. If there is a 16R guaranteed jackpot on special chart 1, the process proceeds to step S4002; if not, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4002, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds.

In step S4003, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not there is an 8R special chance or an 8R regular big win on special chart 1. If there is an 8R special chance or an 8R regular big win on special chart 1, the process proceeds to step S4004, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4005. In step S4004, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds.

In step S4007, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not the 16R probability jackpot of the special chart 2 has been reached. If it has been reached, the process proceeds to step S4008, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4013. In step S4008, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores the count value of the number of plays at the time of winning the jackpot (the number of plays at the time of winning the jackpot in the number-of-plays high probability play state or the number-of-plays time-saving state) in the memory area n of the RAM 503, and proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not the count value of the number of plays in the memory area n is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, or 81 to 85 times. If it is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, or 81 to 85 times, the process proceeds to step S4010, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4011. In step S4010, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 5 seconds. This allows for a shorter jackpot time and a faster, more rapid-fire zone in the number-limit high probability game state or number-limit time-saving state from 1 to 50 times, and reduces the dragging out of the jackpot round game state from 51 to 100 times.

In step S4011, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the count value of the number of plays in the memory area n is 31-35, 51-80, or 86-100. If it is 31-35, 51-80, or 86-100, the process proceeds to step S4012, otherwise the process ends. In step S4012, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds. In this way, in the 1-50 play limit high probability play state or the play limit time reduction state, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of too many consecutive jackpot wins in a short period of time, and in the 51-100 play limit state, it is possible to give a breather to a player who has just finished the jackpot round play state after being stuck.

In step S4013, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether the 8R probability jackpot of the special chart 2 or the 8R normal jackpot is present. If the 8R probability jackpot of the special chart 2 is present, proceed to step S4014, otherwise proceed to step S4019. In step S4014, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores the count value of the number of plays of the jackpot winning player itself (the number of plays of the jackpot winning player itself in the number-of-plays high probability play state or the number-of-plays time-saving state) in the memory area n of the RAM 503, and proceeds to step S4015. In step S4015, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether the count value of the number of plays of the memory area n is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, or 81 to 85 times. If it is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, or 81 to 85 times, proceed to step S4016, otherwise proceed to step S4017. In step S4016, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 5 seconds. This allows for a shorter jackpot time and a faster, more rapid-fire zone in the number-limit high probability game state or number-limit time-saving game state from 1 to 50 times, and reduces the dragging out of the jackpot round game state from 51 to 100 times.

In step S4017, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the count value of the number of plays at the time of reading is 31 to 35, 51 to 80, or 86 to 100. If it is 31 to 35, 51 to 80, or 86 to 100, the process proceeds to step S4018, otherwise the process ends. In step S4018, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds. In this way, in the 1 to 50 times in the limited-time high-probability play state or limited-time-saving state, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of too many consecutive jackpot wins in a short period of time, and in the 51 to 100 times, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a sudden exit from the high-probability play state or the time-saving state.

The process of opening and closing the big prize opening in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 125.

In step S4101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the round start flag is on. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4102; if not, the process ends. The round start flag rises from 0 to 1, for example, when the result of the lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot win and the game moves to a jackpot round (for example, when the first symbol variation time has elapsed in the above-mentioned step S407 in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the stopped symbol of the first symbol is set as the display symbol in step S409, and a full stop command is set in step S410 to instruct the stopping of the decorative symbol variation pattern). This indicates the start of the jackpot round game state.

In step S4102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the opening time determined using the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table or the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, and proceeds to step S4103. In step S4103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the opening time determined using the timer function, and proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the timing to end the measurement of the opening time, that is, the start timing of the nth round (the first round if it is the first). If it is the start timing of the nth round, proceed to step S4105, and if not, end this process.

In step S4104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the large prize opening 32a and proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is time to end the nth round. The end of each round is determined by the passage of the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 32a (e.g., 30 seconds) or the reaching of the maximum number of winning balls (e.g., 10 balls) detected by the winning detection switch in the large prize opening 32a.

If it is the end of the nth round in step S4106, proceed to step S4107; if not, terminate this process. In step S4107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the large prize opening 32a and proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the final round. If it is the final round, proceed to step S4111; if not, proceed to step S4109.

In step S4109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the interval time determined using the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table or the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, and proceeds to step S4110. In step S4110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the opening time determined using the timer function, and returns to step S4104. In step S4104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the timing to end the measurement of the interval time, that is, the start timing of the nth round (n is an integer other than 1). Steps S4105 (opening the large prize opening) to S4108 (closing the large prize opening) are as described above.

In step S4111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the ending time determined using the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table or the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, and proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the ending time determined using the timer function, and proceeds to step S4113. In step S4113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4114, and if not, the process ends. In step S4114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the round start flag and ends the opening and closing of the jackpot opening.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 34, there is a game board 30 having a game area 30a through which game balls flow down, a special winning device 33a for special pattern 1 and a special winning device 33b for special pattern 2 into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter, a variable winning device 32 into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter, and an operating port switch for the special pattern 1 starting winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 starting winning device 33b that detect game balls that have entered the special pattern 1 starting winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 starting winning device 33b. a lottery function of the CPU501 of the main control device 261 which performs a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game state advantageous to the player will occur based on the detection of the game ball at the actuation port switch for the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a and the actuation port switch for the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b; and a third function of the CPU501 of the main control device 261 which displays the result of the lottery by the CPU501 of the main control device 261 on the third symbol display device 42 as a result of a varying display of a symbol that can be recognized by the player's vision. The device is equipped with: one pattern variation processing, a variable display mode setting processing by the CPU 262 of the sub-control device 262; a pattern row variable display processing function (variable display control function) of the CPU 551 of the display control device 42; a large prize opening/closing processing function (state transition function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 for transitioning to a large prize round game state in which a large prize round game is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being one in which the variable prize device 32 transitions from an open state in which the game ball can be entered to a closed state in which the variable prize device 32 has difficulty in entering the game ball, when the variable prize display is stopped and displayed in a large prize combination based on the result of the lottery by the main control device 261 being a large prize result; and an opening/ending time setting processing function (specific period control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 for changing the large prize time such as an opening time and an ending time that can be determined in advance in the large prize round game state, depending on the number of pattern variations at the time when the large prize result was achieved, when the lottery result is a large prize result. This allows the game situation, such as the number of times the symbols changed at the time of the jackpot result, to be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K1), for example.

The jackpot time is at least one of the opening time that notifies the start of the jackpot round game state, the interval time between each jackpot round game, and the ending time that notifies the end of the jackpot round game state. This allows the game situation to be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state by changing the jackpot time. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K2), for example.

The opening and ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time according to the number of variations from the time of the previous jackpot result to the time of the current jackpot result. This allows the number of games played from the time of the previous jackpot result to the time of the current jackpot result to be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K3), for example.

The opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time in the jackpot round game state transitioned from the high probability game state with a limit of the number of times, in which the state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot result than in the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 times) are reached. This allows the situation of whether the jackpot round game state transitioned from the normal game state or the jackpot round game state transitioned from the high probability game state with a limit of the number of times to be reached to be suitably reflected in the jackpot round game state. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K4). Note that, although the high probability game state with a limit of the number of times has been described as an example of a state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot result than in the normal game state, it may also be a high probability game state in which the state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot result than in the normal game state continues until the next jackpot result, a time-saving state that makes it easier to hold a lottery to see whether the jackpot game state will occur, or a combination of these.

The opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time to a first time (e.g., an opening time of 3 seconds and an ending time of 5 seconds) that is shorter than the standard jackpot time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds and an ending time of 20 seconds or 30 seconds) in a first state (e.g., 1 to 50 times) in which the number of fluctuations consumed out of a predetermined number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 times) is less than or equal to the number of fluctuations remaining. This further increases the role of the zone in which jackpot round game states occur consecutively, and allows the game situation to be appropriately reflected in the jackpot round game state. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K5).

The first symbol variation processing function (variable display control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the variable display time in the first state (e.g., 1 to 50 times) to a first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds) that is shorter than the standard variable display time (e.g., any one of 20, 30, 60, 100, or 120 seconds). This shortens the time required for the variable display, and further enhances the role of the zone where jackpot gaming states occur consecutively. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K6).

The opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time in the first state (e.g., 1 to 50 times) to a second time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds and an ending time of 40, 45, 50, or 55 seconds) that is longer than at least the first time (e.g., an opening time of 3 seconds and an ending time of 5 seconds). This makes it possible to achieve a balance by providing a longer jackpot time in the first state. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K7).

The opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time to a second time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds and an ending time of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds) that is longer than the first time (e.g., an opening time of 3 seconds and an ending time of 5 seconds) in a second state (e.g., 51 to 100 times) in which the number of variations that have been consumed out of a predetermined number of times of play (e.g., 100 times) is longer than the number of variations remaining. This makes it possible to achieve a balance by inserting a longer jackpot time in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state). This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K8).

The first symbol variation processing function (variable display control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the variable display time in the second state (e.g., times 51 to 100) to a second variable display time (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds) that is longer than the first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds). This reduces the likelihood of the high probability game state being easily lost in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state). This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K9).

The opening and ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time in the second state (e.g., 51 to 100 times) to a time (e.g., an opening time of 5 seconds, an ending time of 10 seconds) that is at least shorter than the second time (e.g., an opening time of 10 seconds, and an ending time of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds). This makes it possible to reduce the sense of drag in the jackpot round game state in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state). This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K10).

The first symbol fluctuation processing function (fluctuation display control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the fluctuation display time in the second state (e.g., 51 to 100 times) to a fluctuation display time (e.g., 20 seconds) that is at least shorter than the second fluctuation display time (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds). This provides a high-speed consumption zone with a short fluctuation time even in the second state (e.g., a so-called stuck state), enabling gameplay that quickly shows the flow from the fluctuation there to the opening and closing game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (K11).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the ending presentation merely displayed predetermined information within a predetermined ending time, but the ending presentation may also have a game-like quality. The following description will be given with reference to Figures 126 to 131. Please also refer to these figures for configurations that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments.

Figure 126 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 of Example 35. Figure 127 is a table for the special chart 1 jackpot lottery. Figure 128 is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. Figure 129 is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance. Figure 130 is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance following Figure 129. Figure 131 is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance following Figure 130.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, as in embodiment 34, has an opening/ending time setting processing function that, when the result of the lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot result, changes the jackpot time according to at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time the jackpot result is reached.

Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an opening/ending time setting processing function that changes the jackpot time depending on the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result (such as whether the jackpot symbol is a 7, an odd number other than 7, or an even number) and the number of changes (such as whether it is the first half (1-50 times) or the second half (51-100 times)). This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result and the number of changes.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has an opening/ending time setting processing function that can change the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a first time (e.g., 20 seconds for the latter 51-60 number of changes) when the type of symbol is a first type (e.g., odd number or even number excluding 7 in special symbol 2), and can change the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a second time (e.g., 30 seconds for the latter 51-60 number of changes) that is longer than the first time when the type of symbol is a second type (e.g., "7" in special symbol 2). This can improve the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on the length of the jackpot time, which varies depending on the type of symbol and the number of changes at the time of the jackpot result.

In addition, as an opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function), the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a time longer than the first time (e.g., 20 seconds for 51 to 60 times) (e.g., 25 seconds for 61 to 70 times, 30 seconds for 71 to 80 times, and 35 seconds for 81 to 100 times) when the number of variations consumed out of the predetermined number of variations is greater than the number of variations remaining (e.g., 61 to 70 times, 71 to 80 times, and 81 to 100 times), even if the type of pattern is the first type (e.g., odd patterns excluding 7 or even patterns in special pattern 2). As a result, when the number of variations consumed out of the predetermined number of variations is greater than the number of variations remaining, the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved according to the number of variations remaining.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has an opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) that changes the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a time longer than the second time (e.g., 30 seconds for the latter 71 to 80 times) (e.g., 35 seconds for 81 to 100 times) when the number of variations consumed out of the specified number of variations is greater than the number of variations remaining (e.g., 81 to 100 times) even if the type of the pattern is not the second type (it is the first type), and when the number of variations consumed out of the specified number of variations is greater than the number of variations remaining, the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved according to the number of variations remaining.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in this embodiment also has a function (jackpot ending display processing function) for controlling the display of the jackpot time corresponding image (ending time corresponding image, setting hit effect image, described later) that is associated with this jackpot time. The jackpot ending display processing function of the CPU 521 of this display control device 45 displays advantageous information that is advantageous to the player while the jackpot time corresponding image is being displayed, depending on the display time of the ending time corresponding image. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state, depending on the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. These configurations are described below.

The jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a setting suggestion effect image with a longer display time the longer the ending time is, and displays more advantageous information the longer the display time of the setting suggestion effect image is. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image.

In this embodiment, as an example of a jackpot time corresponding image corresponding to a jackpot time, an ending time corresponding image corresponding to the jackpot time, that is, an ending time among the opening time, interval time, and ending time that can be determined in advance, will be explained. In addition, as advantageous information that is advantageous to the player and is displayed while the jackpot time corresponding image is displayed, setting information will be explained as an example.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a pachinko machine with a setting function. As shown in FIG. 126, the main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a setting ON/OFF switch 264 for switching setting changes ON/OFF, a setting change switch 265 which receives a setting change operation by the operator when the setting ON/OFF switch is ON, and a setting reset switch 266 which resets the current setting when the setting ON/OFF switch is ON. The setting ON/OFF switch 264 is a switch which is switched ON/OFF by inserting a key and turning it. The setting change switch 265 is a push button switch. Each time the operator presses the setting change switch 265, the setting increases by one step.

In this embodiment, the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table and the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table are provided with six settings, setting 1 to setting 6. As shown in FIG. 127, in the normal (low probability) game state, the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table has a jackpot probability of 1/320 for setting 1, a jackpot probability of 1/310 for setting 2, a jackpot probability of 1/300 for setting 3, a jackpot probability of 1/290 for setting 4, a jackpot probability of 1/280 for setting 5, and a jackpot probability of 1/270 for setting 6. In the high probability game state, setting 1 sets the jackpot probability to 1/45, setting 2 sets the jackpot probability to 1/40, setting 3 sets the jackpot probability to 1/35, setting 4 sets the jackpot probability to 1/30, setting 5 sets the jackpot probability to 1/25, and setting 6 sets the jackpot probability to 1/20.

The jackpot time of the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table is the same as that of the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table in the above-mentioned Example 34. That is, in the case of a 16R special jackpot, the opening time is 10 seconds, the interval time is 3 seconds, and the ending time is 35 seconds, and in the case of an 8R special jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot, the opening time is 10 seconds, the interval time is 3 seconds, and the ending time is 25 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 128, the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table of this embodiment has the jackpot time set to a very short time (opening time 3 seconds, interval time 1 second, ending time 5 seconds) for the first 1 to 50 of the 100 fluctuation times from the previous jackpot result to the current jackpot result, regardless of the jackpot type, as in Example 34. The latter 51 to 100 of the 100 fluctuation times are set so that the jackpot time becomes longer as the fluctuation times increase.

When you win the 16R jackpot on Special Chart 2, the latter 51-60 times out of the 100 fluctuation times are set to an opening time of 10 seconds, an interval time of 2 seconds, and an ending time of 30 seconds, 61-70 times are set to an opening time of 15 seconds, an interval time of 3 seconds, and an ending time of 35 seconds, 71-80 times are set to an opening time of 20 seconds, an interval time of 4 seconds, and an ending time of 40 seconds, and 81-100 times are set to an opening time of 25 seconds, an interval time of 5 seconds, and an ending time of 45 seconds. In this way, when you win the 16R jackpot on Special Chart 2, the jackpot time is gradually increased according to the increase in the number of fluctuation times, such as 61-70 times, 71-80 times, and 81-100 times, based on the jackpot time of 51-60 times.

When you win the 8R jackpot or 8R normal jackpot on Special Chart 2, the latter 51-60 times out of the 100 fluctuation times are set to an opening time of 10 seconds, an interval time of 2 seconds, and an ending time of 20 seconds, 61-70 times are set to an opening time of 15 seconds, an interval time of 3 seconds, and an ending time of 25 seconds, 71-80 times are set to an opening time of 20 seconds, an interval time of 4 seconds, and an ending time of 30 seconds, and 81-100 times are set to an opening time of 25 seconds, an interval time of 5 seconds, and an ending time of 35 seconds. In this way, when you win the 8R jackpot on Special Chart 2, the jackpot time is gradually increased according to the increase in the fluctuation times, such as 61-70 times, 71-80 times, and 81-100 times, based on the jackpot time of 51-60 times.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has a function of displaying a jackpot time corresponding image for a longer display time the longer the jackpot time is, and displaying more advantageous information the longer the jackpot time corresponding image is. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. Specifically, an ending time corresponding image will be used as an example of a jackpot time corresponding image to explain this.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 refers to the special chart 2 jackpot ending presentation table stored in the ROM 522 to determine an ending time corresponding image corresponding to the ending presentation pattern. The special chart 2 jackpot ending presentation table is set so that the longer the ending time, the longer the ending presentation pattern corresponding to the ending time corresponding image with a longer display time is determined. Furthermore, the ending time corresponding image with a long display time includes a setting suggestion presentation image with a long display time. The setting suggestion presentation image is more likely to display advantageous information the longer the display time of the setting suggestion presentation image. As described above, the ending time is set to be longer the more the number of changes. In other words, the ending time corresponding image is set so that the more the number of changes, the more advantageous information is more likely to be displayed.

Advantageous information is information that, for a player, seeing it leads to gaming benefits. For example, advantageous information is setting information that indicates what the setting is in a setting-enabled pachinko machine 10, or probability bonus information that indicates whether the bonus is a probability bonus or a normal bonus when it is not clearly stated whether the bonus is a probability bonus or not when a jackpot is won. Setting information is advantageous in that, if the setting value is high, it may provide a gaming benefit in that there is a possibility of obtaining more gaming value. Also, if the setting value is low, it is advantageous in that there is a possibility of reducing the loss of gaming value. In other words, setting information is valuable as advantageous information in that it allows players to know what the setting value is.

As described below, the ending time corresponding image is a series of images in which setting suggestion presentation images and bonus video 44n are displayed after next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forget prevention information 44y are displayed. As described below, the setting suggestion presentation images are a series of images in which setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 suggesting the start of a setting presentation, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 suggesting setting 6, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 suggesting setting 5, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 suggesting setting 4, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 suggesting setting 3, and setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 suggesting setting 2 are displayed in order. The setting suggestion presentation images start with setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, and the setting suggestion information displayed varies depending on the ending presentation pattern. Bonus video 44n is a series of images in which first bonus video 44n1, second bonus video 44n2, third bonus video 44n3, and fourth bonus video 44n4 are displayed in order, starting with first bonus video 44n1, and the bonus videos displayed vary depending on the ending performance pattern. Manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, each suggestion information, and each bonus video are each configured as a 5-second moving image.

Referring to Figures 129 and 130, we will explain that in relation to Table A for the special chart 2 jackpot ending performance (16R guaranteed jackpot on special chart 2), the more times the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot increases, the more likely it is that advantageous information will be displayed.

If the number of fluctuations when the 16R special jackpot is won is between 1 and 50, the ending time is 5 seconds, and regardless of whether the setting value is between 1 and 6, an ending presentation pattern is set that is composed of any one of the following: next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and sinking prevention information 44z. Here, next game state suggestion information 44w is set. In this way, if the number of fluctuations is between 1 and 50 and the 16R special jackpot is won, the player is in the immediate consecutive zone and does not need to worry about the setting value, so no setting information is suggested.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R special jackpot is 51 to 60 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern A1 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, first bonus video 44n1, and second bonus video 44n2. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending presentation pattern A2 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and first bonus video 44n1. Furthermore, if the setting value is 1 to 4, an ending presentation pattern A3 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and setting 4 suggestion information 44r4. Ending presentation pattern A1 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 6. Ending presentation pattern A2 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5. Ending presentation pattern A3 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 4.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R special jackpot is 61 to 70 times, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern A4 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, first bonus video 44n1, second bonus video 44n2, and third bonus video 44n3. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending presentation pattern A5 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, first bonus video 44n1, and second bonus video 44n2. Also, if the setting value is 4, an ending presentation pattern A6 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the first bonus video 44n1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 3, an ending presentation pattern A7 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 is set. The ending presentation pattern A4 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 6. The ending presentation pattern A5 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5. The ending presentation pattern A6 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 4. Ending performance pattern A7 actually provides advantageous information when set to 3.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R special jackpot is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 40 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern A8 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, first bonus video 44n1, second bonus video 44n2, third bonus video 44n3, and bonus video 4. If the setting value is 5, ending presentation pattern A9 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, first bonus video 44n1, second bonus video 44n2, and third bonus video 44n3. Also, if the setting value is 4, an ending presentation pattern A10 is set that is composed of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, the first bonus video 44n1, and the second bonus video 44n2. Also, if the setting value is 3, an ending presentation pattern A11 is set that is composed of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, and the first bonus video 44n1. Also, if the setting value is 1 or 2, an ending presentation pattern A12 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, and setting 2 suggestion information 44r6. Ending presentation pattern A8 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 6. Ending presentation pattern A9 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5. Ending presentation pattern A10 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 4. Ending presentation pattern A11 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 3. Ending presentation pattern A12 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 2.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R special jackpot is 81 to 100 times, the ending time is 45 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, the ending performance pattern A13 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting performance suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the first bonus video 44n1, the second bonus video 44n2, the third bonus video 44n3, the fourth bonus video 44n4, and the fifth bonus video 44n5 is set. Also, if the setting value is 5, the ending performance pattern A14 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting performance suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the first bonus video 44n1, the second bonus video 44n2, the third bonus video 44n3, and the fourth bonus video 44n4 is set. Also, if the set value is 4, an ending presentation pattern A15 consisting of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, first bonus video 44n1, second bonus video 44n2, and third bonus video 44n3 is set. Also, if the set value is 3, an ending presentation pattern A16 consisting of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, first bonus video 44n1, and second bonus video 44n2 is set. Also, if the setting value is 2, an ending performance pattern A17 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting performance suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, the setting 2 suggestion information 44r6, and the first bonus video 44n1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 1, an ending performance pattern A18 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting performance suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, the setting 2 suggestion information 44r6, and the setting 1 suggestion information 44r7 is set. The ending performance pattern A13 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 6. Ending performance pattern A14 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5. Ending performance pattern A15 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 4. Ending performance pattern A16 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 3. Ending performance pattern A17 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 2. Ending performance pattern A18 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 1.

In this way, in the ending performance patterns A1 to A18, the more the number of changes at the time of winning the jackpot, the more advantageous information is set to be displayed. The advantageous information may be not only the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 to the setting 1 suggestion information 44r7, but also the first bonus video 44n1 to the sixth bonus video 44n6. For example, in the ending performance pattern A1, by displaying auxiliary information such as "Did you understand the setting now?" (see FIG. 132(j)) in the first first bonus video 44n1, it is possible to suggest that the immediately preceding setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 is correct information. Also, for example, in the ending performance pattern A15, by displaying auxiliary information such as "Did you understand the setting now?" in the last third bonus video 44n3, it is possible to suggest that the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 displayed at the end of the setting suggestion image is correct information.

Below, we will explain the display mode of the ending performance when the 16R special jackpot of Special Chart 2 is won, with reference to Figures 132 and 133. Figure 132 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the ending performance. Figure 133 is a diagram explaining another display mode of the ending performance.

When the number of changes at the time of winning the 16R special jackpot is 51 to 60 times, and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is the ending performance pattern A1, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 (e.g. text information such as "I wonder what the setting is..." Same below) → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 (e.g. text information such as "Setting 6!?" Same below) → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2. After that, the screen returns to the normal screen showing the jackpot combination at the time of winning the jackpot shown in (o), and the display of the changing symbols is resumed. Note that (o) is the same for the display modes of other ending performance patterns. In the case of the ending performance pattern A2, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 (for example, text information such as "Not setting 5!?" The same applies below) → (j) first bonus video 44n1. In the case of the ending performance pattern A3, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 (for example, text information such as "Not setting 4!?" The same applies below).

As a result, if the number of fluctuations when the 16R special jackpot is won is between 61 and 70 times, then if the ending presentation pattern is A1, the player will be given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 6; if the ending presentation pattern is A2, the player will be given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 5; and if the ending presentation pattern is A3, the player will be given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 4, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 4.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R special jackpot is between 61 and 70 times, and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is ending performance pattern A4, the third pattern display device 42 will display the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (j) first bonus video 44n1, (k) second bonus video 44n2 → (l) third bonus video 44n3. In the case of the ending performance pattern A5, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2. In the case of the ending performance pattern A6, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (j) first bonus video 44n1. Furthermore, in the case of ending performance pattern A7, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following information in the order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is 61 to 70 times, if the ending performance pattern is A4, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with the setting 6, if the ending performance pattern is A5, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with the setting 5, if the ending performance pattern is A6, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 4, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with the setting 4, and if the ending performance pattern is A7, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 3, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with the setting 3. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain advantageous information that is beneficial than when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is 51 to 60 times.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is between 71 and 80 times, and the ending time corresponding image (40 seconds) is ending presentation pattern A8, the third pattern display device 42 will display the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2 → (l) third bonus video 44n3 → (m) fourth bonus video 44n4. In the case of the ending performance pattern A9, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2 → (l) third bonus video 44n3. In the case of the ending performance pattern A10, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2. In addition, in the case of ending presentation pattern A11, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 (for example, text information saying ``Not setting 3!?''; same below.) → (j) first bonus video 44n1. Furthermore, in the case of ending presentation pattern A12, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following information in the order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 → (h) setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 (for example, text information saying "Not setting 2!?"; the same applies below).

As a result, if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is between 71 and 80 times, then with ending presentation pattern A8, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 6; with ending presentation pattern A9, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 5; with ending presentation pattern A10, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 4, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 4; with ending presentation pattern A11, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 3, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 3; and with ending presentation pattern A12, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 2, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 2. As a result, players will be more likely to obtain useful information than if the number of changes during the Special Chart 2 jackpot was 61 to 70.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is between 81 and 100 times, and the ending time corresponding image (45 seconds) is ending presentation pattern A13, the third pattern display device 42 will display the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2 → (l) third bonus video 44n3 → (m) fourth bonus video 44n4 → (m) fifth bonus video 44n5. In addition, in the case of ending presentation pattern A14, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2 → (l) third bonus video 44n3 → (m) fourth bonus video 44n4. In addition, in the case of ending presentation pattern A15, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2 → (l) third bonus video 44n3. In addition, in the case of ending presentation pattern A16, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 → (j) first bonus video 44n1 → (k) second bonus video 44n2. In addition, in the case of ending presentation pattern A17, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following in order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 → (h) setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 → (j) first bonus video 44n1. Furthermore, in the case of ending presentation pattern A18, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following information in the order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 → (h) setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 → (i) setting 1 suggestion information 44r7 (for example, text information saying "Not setting 1!?"; the same applies below).

As a result, if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is between 81 and 100, then if the ending presentation pattern is A13, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 6, if the ending presentation pattern is A14, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 5, and if the ending presentation pattern is A15, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 4, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with setting 4. This is advantageous information that is also beneficial to players who play with the pachinko machine 10 set to 3, and with the ending performance pattern A16, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 3, which is advantageous information that is also beneficial to players who actually play with the pachinko machine 10 set to 3, and with the ending performance pattern A17, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 2, which is advantageous information that is also beneficial to players who actually play with the pachinko machine 10 set to 2, and with the ending performance pattern A18, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 1, which is advantageous information that is also beneficial to players who actually play with the pachinko machine 10 set to 1. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain advantageous information that is beneficial than when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is 71 to 80 times.

In this way, in ending performance patterns A1 to A18, the display mode makes it easier for advantageous information to be displayed as the number of fluctuations increases when the 16R special jackpot is won on special chart 2.

Referring to Figure 131, we will explain that for Special Chart 2 Big Win Ending Presentation Table B (Special Chart 2 8R Special Big Win), the more times the number of fluctuations occurs when the big win is won, the more likely it is that advantageous information will be displayed.

If the number of changes when a jackpot is won is between 1 and 50, it is an immediate consecutive zone, just like a 16R sure-win jackpot, so for example, next game state suggestion information 44w is set.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is between 51 and 60, the ending time is 20 seconds, and regardless of the setting value being between 1 and 6, an ending presentation pattern B1 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, and setting 6 suggestion information 44r2. Ending presentation pattern B1 is actually advantageous information when the setting is 6.

If the number of changes at the time of winning the jackpot is 61 to 70, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern B2 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and first bonus video 44n1. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 5, ending presentation pattern B3 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and setting 5 suggestion information 44r3. Ending presentation pattern B2 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 6. Ending presentation pattern B3 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern B4 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, first bonus video 44n1, and second bonus video 44n2. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending presentation pattern B5 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and first bonus video 44n1. Furthermore, if the setting value is 1 to 5, an ending presentation pattern B6 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and setting 4 suggestion information 44r4. Ending presentation pattern B4 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 6 and a sure-win jackpot occurs. Ending presentation pattern B5 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 5. Ending presentation pattern B6 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 4.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100 times, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern B7 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, first bonus video 44n1, second bonus video 44n2, and third bonus video 44n3. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending presentation pattern B8 is set, which is composed of next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, first bonus video 44n1, and second bonus video 44n2. Also, if the setting value is 4, an ending presentation pattern B9 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the first bonus video 44n1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 3, an ending presentation pattern B10 consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 is set. The ending presentation pattern B7 is advantageous information when the odds are actually 6 and the jackpot is a hit. The ending presentation pattern B8 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 5. The ending presentation pattern B9 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 4. Ending performance pattern B10 actually provides advantageous information when the setting is 3.

The ending presentation pattern when an 8R normal jackpot is won is the same as the ending presentation pattern when an 8R special jackpot is won, except that the next game state indication information 44w is not the text information "one more time" indicating that the next game state is a high probability state, but the text information "chance" indicating that the next game state is a low probability state (a low probability game state with 100 support times).

In this way, ending presentation pattern B1 to ending presentation pattern B10 are set so that advantageous information becomes more likely to be displayed as the number of fluctuations increases when an 8R special jackpot is won. Also, when comparing the number of fluctuations for each type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, ending presentation pattern A1 to ending presentation pattern A18 (ending presentation when a 16R special jackpot is won) are set so that advantageous information becomes more likely to be displayed than ending presentation pattern B1 to ending presentation pattern B10 (ending presentation when an 8R special jackpot is won).

Below, with reference to Figure 133, we will explain the display modes of the ending effects corresponding to ending effect patterns B1 to B10 when an 8R special jackpot is won on Special Chart 2.

When the number of times of change at the time of winning the jackpot is between 51 and 60 times, and the ending time corresponding image (20 seconds) is ending presentation pattern B1, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 in that order. As a result, when the number of times of change at the time of winning the special symbol 2 jackpot is between 51 and 60 times, if the ending presentation pattern is B1, the player is given a hint that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 6, which is advantageous information that is useful to a player who actually plays with setting 6.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 61 to 70 times, and the ending time corresponding image (25 seconds) is ending performance pattern B2, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) first bonus video 44n1 in this order. Also, in the case of ending performance pattern B3, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 in this order.

As a result, if the number of fluctuations when the special chart 2 jackpot is won is between 61 and 70, then if the ending presentation pattern is B2, the player will be given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which will be advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play at setting 6, and if the ending presentation pattern is B3, the player will be given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which will be advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play at setting 5. As a result, players are more likely to obtain advantageous information that is beneficial than when the number of fluctuations when the special chart 2 jackpot is won is between 51 and 60.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 71 to 80 times, and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is ending performance pattern B4, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) first bonus video 44n1 → (i) second bonus video 44n2 in that order. Also, in the case of ending performance pattern B5, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (h) first bonus video 44n1 in that order. Furthermore, in the case of ending performance pattern B6, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following information in this order: (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4.

As a result, if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is between 71 and 80, then if the ending presentation pattern is B4, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 6, if the ending presentation pattern is B5, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 5, and if the ending presentation pattern is B6, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 4, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 4. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain advantageous information that is beneficial than if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is between 61 and 70.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100 times, and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is ending performance pattern B7, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) first bonus video 44n1 → (i) second bonus video 44n2 → (j) third bonus video 44n3 in that order. Also, in the case of ending performance pattern B8, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (h) first bonus video 44n1 → (i) second bonus video 44n2 in that order. In the case of the ending performance pattern B9, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following information in the order of (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (h) first bonus video 44n1. In the case of the ending performance pattern B10, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following information in the order of (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is 81 to 100, if the ending performance pattern is B7, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 6, if the ending performance pattern is B8, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 5, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 5, if the ending performance pattern is B9, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 4, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 4, and if the ending performance pattern is B10, the player is given a hint that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 3, which is advantageous information that is beneficial to players who actually play with a setting of 3. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain advantageous information that is beneficial than when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special chart 2 jackpot is 71 to 80.

In this way, in ending presentation pattern B1 to ending presentation pattern B10, the display mode makes it easier for advantageous information to be displayed as the number of fluctuations increases when a special 2 jackpot is won, but when comparing the number of fluctuations for each type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, ending presentation pattern A1 to ending presentation pattern A18 (ending presentation when a 16R special jackpot is won) makes it easier for advantageous information to be displayed than ending presentation pattern B1 to ending presentation pattern B10 (ending presentation when an 8R special jackpot is won).

Note that the advantageous information may be not only the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 to the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, but also the first bonus video 44n1 to the third bonus video 44n3. For example, in the case of ending performance pattern B1, by displaying auxiliary information such as "Did you understand the setting now?" (see FIG. 133(h)) in the first first bonus video 44n1, it is possible to suggest that the immediately preceding setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 is correct. Also, for example, in the case of ending performance pattern B8, by displaying auxiliary information such as "Did you understand the setting now?" in the last second bonus video 44n2, it is possible to suggest that the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 displayed at the end of the setting suggestion images is correct.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment 35,
A counting function in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which counts the number of changes during the support game (number information related to the game);
A third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the number of variations during a support game;
An ending performance execution function that measures the ending time in the opening and closing process of the big prize winning port of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that executes the big prize ending performance (predetermined performance) based on the occurrence of a big prize winning (occurrence of a specific event) during the support game;
An ending time selection function in an opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which selects an ending period during which a big win ending performance is performed based on the occurrence of a big win during a support game,
The length of the ending period changes depending on the number of changes during the support game.
The longer the ending period of the big win ending performance, the more advantageous information the player will include. As a result, the length of the big win ending performance selected based on the occurrence of a big win during the support game changes according to the number information related to the game, so that the interest of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the number of fluctuations during the support game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L00), for example.

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to the variable game being displayed and executed on the third pattern display device 42. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game depending on the counting status of the numerical information related to the variable game being displayed and executed on the third pattern display device 42. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L01), for example.

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number information that increases or decreases with the execution of the variable game displayed on the third pattern display device 42. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game depending on the counting status of the number information that increases or decreases with the execution of the game displayed on the third pattern display device 42. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L02).

The game board 30 has a game area 30a where game balls flow down, a special pattern 2 start winning device 33b into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a during the support state can enter, a variable winning device 32 into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter, a detection switch that detects game balls that have entered the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, and a lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs a lottery on whether a jackpot game state advantageous to the player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the detection switch, and the third pattern display device 42 can display number information together with a predetermined display performance based on the lottery on whether a jackpot game state will occur. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game according to the predetermined display performance based on the lottery on whether a jackpot game state will occur, which is displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and the counting status of the number information. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (L03).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of times information related to the variable game in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will be generated, and the third pattern display device 42 can display the number of times information together with a predetermined display effect based on the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will be generated. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game depending on the predetermined display effect based on the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will be generated, which is displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and the counting status of the number of times information related to the variable game in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will be generated. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L04).

The ending performance execution function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes an ending performance when a jackpot is won during a support game based on a lottery drawn by the lottery function. This can increase the entertainment value of the game when a jackpot is won during a support game based on a lottery drawn by the lottery function. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L05), for example.

The ending time selection function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 selects an ending period in which an ending performance is performed based on the occurrence of a jackpot win during a support game, based on a lottery by the lottery function. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game depending on which period is selected as the ending period in which an ending performance is performed, based on the occurrence of a jackpot win during a support game, based on a lottery by the lottery function. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L06).

In addition, when the result of the lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot result, the opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time (opening time, interval time, ending time) according to at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time of the jackpot result, and the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the ending time corresponding image corresponding to the jackpot time (e.g., ending time), and the jackpot ending display processing function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays advantageous information (e.g., setting information in a pachinko machine with settings) that is advantageous to the player during the display of the ending time corresponding image according to the display time of the ending time corresponding image. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state according to the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L07).

The jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a setting suggestion effect image with a longer display time the longer the ending time is, and displays more advantageous setting information the longer the display time of the setting suggestion effect image is. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on the length of the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. This is an example of the gaming machine described in, for example, (L06) (L10).

The opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time depending on the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result (such as whether the jackpot symbol on special chart 2 is a 7, an odd number other than 7, or an even number) and the number of changes (such as whether it is the first half (1-50 times) or the second half (51-100 times)). This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result and the number of changes. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L14), for example.

The opening and ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 can change the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a first time (e.g., 20 seconds for the latter 51-60 number of changes) when the type of the symbol is a first type (e.g., odd number or even number excluding 7 in special symbol 2), and can change the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a second time (e.g., 30 seconds for the latter 51-60 number of changes) that is longer than the first time when the type of the symbol is a second type (e.g., "7" in special symbol 2). This can improve the interest of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the jackpot time, which changes depending on the type of symbol and the number of changes at the time of the jackpot result. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L15), for example.

The opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) in the jackpot round game state transitioned from a limited-time high-probability game state in which the state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot than in the normal game state continues until a predetermined number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 times) have been reached. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state when a jackpot result is won in the limited-time high-probability game state. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L16).

In addition, even if the type of the symbol is the first type (for example, odd or even symbols excluding 7 in special symbol 2), if the number of variations consumed out of the predetermined number of variations is greater than the number of variations remaining (for example, 61 to 70, 71 to 80, 81 to 100), the opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) changes the jackpot time (for example, ending time) to a time longer than the first time (for example, 20 seconds for 51 to 60 variations) (for example, 25 seconds for 61 to 70, 30 seconds for 71 to 80, 35 seconds for 81 to 100). As a result, if the number of variations consumed out of the predetermined number of variations is greater than the number of variations remaining, the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved according to the number of variations remaining. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L17).

In addition, the opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time (e.g., ending time) to a time longer than the second time (e.g., 30 seconds for the latter 51-60 fluctuations) (e.g., 35 seconds for 81-100 fluctuations) when the number of fluctuations consumed out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations (e.g., 81-100 fluctuations) even when the type of the pattern is the first type (e.g., odd number patterns excluding 7 or even number patterns in special pattern 2). As a result, even when the type of the pattern is the first type rather than the second type, when the number of fluctuations consumed out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations, the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved according to the number of remaining fluctuations. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L18).

The device is also equipped with a setting change switch that can set the likelihood that the lottery result will be a jackpot result in stages using multiple setting values, and the advantageous information is setting information that indicates the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on whether or not the setting information is displayed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L19), for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 35, the ending performance (ending time corresponding image) only included a setting suggestion image suggesting setting information, but in this example, when a jackpot is won and it is not specified whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot, a special jackpot suggestion image is included that suggests whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot. This point will be explained below with reference to Figs. 134 and 135. Fig. 134 is a table for the special jackpot 2 ending performance of Example 36. Fig. 135 is a table for the special jackpot 2 ending performance following Fig. 134.

In the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, when the winning type is an 8R special jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the third symbol is selected from among the odd symbols (excluding 7, namely "1", "3", "5", "9") and even symbols (excluding "2", "4", "6", "8"). This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot when the jackpot is won, when the jackpot symbol is an odd symbol or an even symbol (excluding 7). When the third symbol is "7", it is only a 16R special jackpot, so it is clearly indicated that it is a special jackpot. In the following, the 8R special jackpot that does not clearly indicate whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot in this embodiment is called an "unspecified 8R special jackpot", and the 8R normal jackpot that does not clearly indicate whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot is called an "unspecified 8R normal jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 134, when the number of variations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R special jackpot is 1 to 50, unlike the above-mentioned Example 35, manufacturer information 44x is set instead of next game state suggestion information 44w. This is also the case for the following ending presentation patterns C1 to C10.

If the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R special jackpot is won is between 51 and 60, the ending time is 20 seconds, and if the setting value is between 1 and 6, ending pattern C1 is set, which includes a setting suggestion image like ending pattern B1 but does not include a special jackpot suggestion image.

If the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R special jackpot is won is 61 to 70 times, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern C2 is set, which is composed of manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and special jackpot presentation suggestion information 44s1 that suggests or notifies the player that the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot. In ending presentation pattern C2, the player cannot tell whether the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot. Ending presentation pattern C2 does not include advantageous information regarding whether the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot. If the setting value is 1 to 5, ending presentation pattern C3 is set, which includes a setting suggestion presentation image like ending presentation pattern B3 but does not include a special jackpot presentation suggestion image.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the non-disclosed 8R special jackpot is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, an ending performance pattern C4 consisting of manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1, and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2 that suggests or notifies that the jackpot is a special jackpot is set. Also, if the setting value is 5, an ending performance pattern C5 consisting of game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 4, an ending performance pattern C6 that includes a setting suggestion performance image like ending performance pattern B6 but does not include a special jackpot performance suggestion image is set. Ending performance pattern C4 provides advantageous information if the jackpot is actually a guaranteed jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100 times, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending performance pattern C7 is set, which is composed of manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, special chance performance suggestion information 44s1, special chance performance suggestion information 44s2, and first bonus video 44n1. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending performance pattern C8 is set, which is composed of manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, special chance performance suggestion information 44s1, and special chance performance suggestion information 44s2. Furthermore, if the setting value is 4, an ending performance pattern C9 is set, which is composed of manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and probability variable performance suggestion information 44s1. Furthermore, if the setting value is 1 to 3, an ending performance pattern C10 is set, which includes a setting suggestion performance image like ending performance pattern B10 but does not include a probability variable performance suggestion image. Ending performance patterns C7 and C8 are advantageous information when the jackpot in question is actually a probability variable jackpot.

In this way, in ending performance patterns C1 to C10, advantageous information includes not only setting suggestion information but also probability variation suggestion information, and is set so that advantageous information (probability variation suggestion information 44s2) becomes more likely to be selected as the number of fluctuations increases when an unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 135, if the number of variations when an unspecified 8R normal jackpot is won is between 1 and 50, manufacturer information 44x is set, the same as the ending presentation pattern when an unspecified 8R special jackpot is won.

If the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R normal jackpot is won is between 51 and 60, the ending time is 20 seconds, and if the setting value is between 1 and 6, ending pattern D1, which is the same ending pattern as ending pattern C1, is set.

If the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R normal jackpot is won is between 61 and 70, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending pattern D2, which is the same as ending pattern C2, is set. If the setting value is between 1 and 5, ending pattern D3, which is the same as ending pattern C3, is set.

If the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R special jackpot is won is between 71 and 80, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern D4, which is the same as ending presentation pattern C4, is set. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending presentation pattern D5, which is the same as ending presentation pattern C5, is set. If the setting value is 1 to 4, ending presentation pattern D6, which is the same as ending presentation pattern C6, is set. In ending presentation pattern C4, advantageous information is provided if the jackpot is actually a special jackpot, but in ending presentation pattern D4, advantageous information is not provided because the jackpot is actually a normal jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending performance pattern D7 is set, which is composed of manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, probability variable performance suggestion information 44s1, probability variable suggestion information 44s2, and normal suggestion information 44s3 that suggests or notifies that the jackpot is a normal jackpot. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending performance pattern D8 that is the same as ending performance pattern C8 is set. Also, if the setting value is 4, ending performance pattern D9 that is the same as ending performance pattern C9 is set. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 3, ending performance pattern D10 that is the same as ending performance pattern C10 is set. Ending performance pattern D7 is advantageous information when the jackpot is actually a probability variable jackpot.

In this way, in ending performance patterns D1 to D10, the advantageous information includes not only setting suggestion information but also probability variation suggestion information and normal suggestion information, and is set so that advantageous information (normal suggestion information 44s3) becomes more likely to be selected as the number of fluctuations increases when an unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is won.

The display mode of the ending performance will be described below with reference to Figures 136 and 137. Figure 136 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the ending performance. Figure 137 is a diagram explaining another display mode of the ending performance.

First, referring to FIG. 136, we will explain the display mode of the ending effects corresponding to the ending effect patterns C1 to C10 when an 8R special jackpot on the non-disclosed special chart 2 is won.

When the number of times of change when an unspecified special jackpot is won is between 51 and 60 times, and the ending time corresponding image (20 seconds) is ending presentation pattern C1, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the following order: (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2. In this way, when the number of times of change when an unspecified special jackpot is won is between 51 and 60 times, with ending presentation pattern C1, even if it is actually a special jackpot, there is no advantageous information useful to the player as to whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the non-disclosed special jackpot is 61 to 70 times, and the ending time corresponding image (25 seconds) is the ending performance pattern C2, the third pattern display device 42 displays (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1 (for example, text information such as "special jackpot, normal jackpot..." that suggests that a performance that suggests or notifies whether the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot will be performed). Also, in the case of the ending performance pattern C3, the third pattern display device 42 displays (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 in that order. In this way, even if the number of variations when an undisclosed special jackpot is won is between 61 and 70, the ending presentation patterns C2 and C3 do not provide the player with any useful information regarding whether the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot, even if the jackpot is actually a special jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the non-disclosed special jackpot is 71 to 80 times, and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is the ending performance pattern C4, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the order of (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) special performance suggestion information 44s1 → (i) special performance suggestion information 44s2 (for example, "special jackpot!?" which suggests or notifies that the jackpot is a special jackpot). Also, in the case of the ending performance pattern C5, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the order of (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (h) special performance suggestion information 44s1. Furthermore, in the case of ending performance pattern C6, the third pattern display device 42 displays the following information in this order: (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4.

As a result, if the number of fluctuations when the non-disclosed special chart 2 jackpot is won is between 71 and 80 times, in ending presentation pattern C4, the probability variation suggestion information 44s2 suggests that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, which provides advantageous information useful to the player regarding the probability variation jackpot. In ending presentation patterns C5 and C6, even if the jackpot is actually a probability variation jackpot, there is no advantageous information useful to the player regarding whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the non-disclosed special chance jackpot is 81 to 100 times, and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is the ending performance pattern C7, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the order of (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) special chance performance suggestion information 44s1 → (i) special chance suggestion information 44s2 → (j) first bonus video 44n1. Also, in the case of the ending performance pattern C8, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the order of (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (h) special chance performance suggestion information 44s1 → (i) special chance suggestion information 44s2. In the case of the ending performance pattern C9, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following information in the order of (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (h) probability change performance suggestion information 44s1. In the case of the ending performance pattern C10, the third symbol display device 42 displays the following information in the order of (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 → (f) setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 → (g) setting 3 suggestion information 44r5.

As a result, if the number of fluctuations when a special jackpot is won on the non-disclosed special chart 2 is between 81 and 100 times, then if the ending presentation patterns are C7 and C8, the special jackpot suggestion information 44s2 will suggest that the jackpot is a special jackpot, providing useful information to the player regarding the special jackpot. With ending presentation patterns C9 and C10, even if the jackpot is actually a special jackpot, there is no useful information to the player regarding whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 137, we will explain the display mode of the ending effects corresponding to the ending effect patterns D1 to D10 when an 8R normal jackpot on the non-displayed special chart 2 is won.

When the number of fluctuations when an unspecified normal jackpot is won is between 51 and 60, and the ending time corresponding image (20 seconds) is ending presentation pattern D1, it is displayed in the same display order as ending presentation pattern C1, and even if it is actually a normal jackpot, there is no advantageous information that is useful to the player regarding the normal jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning an unspecified normal jackpot is between 61 and 70, and the ending time corresponding image (25 seconds) is ending presentation pattern D2, it is displayed in the same display order as ending presentation pattern C2. When it is ending presentation pattern D3, it is displayed in the same display order as ending presentation pattern C3. Even if ending presentation patterns D2 and D3 are actually normal jackpots, there is no advantageous information that is useful to the player regarding normal jackpots.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning an unspecified normal jackpot is between 71 and 80 times, and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is ending presentation pattern D4, it is displayed in the same display order as ending presentation pattern C4 on the third pattern display device 42. In the case of ending presentation pattern D5, it is displayed in the same display order as ending presentation pattern C5 on the third pattern display device 42. In the case of ending presentation pattern D6, it is displayed in the same display order as ending presentation pattern C6 on the third pattern display device 42. Even if ending presentation patterns D4 to D5 are actually normal jackpots, there is no advantageous information that is useful to the player regarding normal jackpots.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning an unspecified normal jackpot is 81 to 100 times, and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is ending performance pattern D7, the third pattern display device 42 displays (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forget prevention information 44y → (c) setting performance suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) probability variable performance suggestion information 44s1 → (i) probability variable suggestion information 44s2 → (j) normal suggestion information 44s3 (for example, text information such as "Not, but normal!?") suggesting or notifying that the jackpot is a probability variable. In addition, in the case of ending performance pattern D8, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the same display order as ending performance pattern C8. In the case of ending performance pattern D9, the third pattern display device 42 displays in the same display order as ending performance pattern C9. In the case of ending performance pattern D10, the third symbol display device 42 displays them in the same display order as ending performance pattern C10.

As a result, if the number of fluctuations when a normal jackpot is won on the non-disclosed special chart 2 is between 81 and 100, then if the ending presentation pattern is D7, the normal suggestion information 44s3 will suggest that the jackpot is a normal jackpot, which will be advantageous information that is beneficial to the player regarding a normal jackpot. With ending presentation patterns D8 to D10, even if the jackpot is actually a normal jackpot, there is no advantageous information that is beneficial to the player regarding a normal jackpot.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 36, the first symbol variation processing function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the variation display mode setting processing function of the CPU 262 of the sub-control device 262 do not notify the player of whether or not the next game state that occurs after the jackpot round game state will be a high probability game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot result than the normal game state, from the time of the variation display until the time of the jackpot result display, when the lottery result is a jackpot result, and the advantageous information may be information indicating whether or not the next game state will be a high probability game state (probability variation suggestion information 44s2, normal suggestion information 44s3). This can improve the interest of the jackpot round game state in terms of whether or not the next game state will be a high probability game state. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (L20).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the display images constituting the ending presentation pattern corresponding to one winning type were displayed in one display mode, except for the display images constituting the setting suggestion presentation image and the probability variation suggestion presentation image, whose display mode changes according to the number of fluctuations, but there may be multiple display modes. The following explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a table for the special chart 2 big win ending presentation of embodiment 37.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45, as the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) described above, can display information different from the setting suggestion information and the probability change suggestion information in the ending time corresponding image (for example, next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, etc., contained in the ending information 44j), and when certain ending information (for example, manufacturer information 44x) is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting suggestion information and the probability change suggestion information to be displayed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on whether certain ending information (for example, manufacturer information 44x) is displayed.

Specifically, as the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) described above, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 makes it more difficult to display setting suggestion information and probability variation suggestion information the longer the time that the ending information 44j is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state according to the length of time that the ending information 44j is displayed.

To explain in more detail, for example, the ending presentation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned unspecified 8R special jackpot and unspecified 8R normal jackpot is a pattern in which manufacturer information 44x and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed, followed by a setting suggestion presentation image, but in this embodiment, manufacturer information 44x is omitted, and only card removal prevention information 44y is displayed, followed by a setting suggestion presentation image. In other words, even in an ending presentation pattern corresponding to a hit type of one, there are patterns in which one information (e.g., manufacturer information 44x) is displayed and patterns in which one information (e.g., manufacturer information 44x) is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the 8R guaranteed jackpot on the unspecified special chart 2 is divided into those with a jackpot pattern counter C2 value of 20 to 34 and those with a jackpot pattern counter C2 value of 35 to 49, among the values of the jackpot pattern counter C2 (20 to 49). The ending presentation patterns of the former (C2 value of 20 to 34) correspond to the special chart 2 jackpot ending presentation tables C1 to C10 of embodiment 36 shown in FIG. 134. Details of the ending presentation patterns E1 to E14 of the latter (C2 value of 35 to 49) are explained below.

If the number of changes when an unspecified 8R certain jackpot (the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49) is won is 1 to 50 times, unlike the ending performance pattern C1 described above, card removal forget prevention information 44y is set instead of manufacturer information 44x. This is the same for the ending performance patterns E1 to E14 below.

When the number of changes at the time of winning an unspecified 8R sure-change jackpot (the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 35 to 49) is 51 to 60 times, the ending time is 20 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending presentation pattern E1 is set, which is composed of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and sure-change presentation suggestion information 44s1. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 5, ending presentation pattern E2 is set, which is composed of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting presentation suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and setting 5 suggestion information 44r3. Ending presentation pattern E1 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 6. Ending presentation pattern E2 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5.

In this way, even in the case of an unspecified 8R special jackpot, if the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between 20 and 34 (ending presentation pattern C1 described above), manufacturer information 44x and card removal prevention information 44y are set, so only setting presentation suggestion information 44r1 and setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 are set for the remaining time, but if the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between 35 and 49 (ending presentation patterns E1 and E2), manufacturer information 44x is omitted and only card removal prevention information 44y is set, so a setting suggestion presentation image and special jackpot suggestion presentation image that are longer than those of ending presentation pattern C1 can be displayed for the remaining time. In other words, even if the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R certain jackpot is won is between 51 and 60, if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between 20 and 34 (ending presentation pattern C1), only the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 is obtained as advantageous information, but if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between 35 and 49 (ending presentation patterns E1 and E2), the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 or setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 is obtained as advantageous information, making it easier to obtain advantageous information.

When the number of changes at the time of winning the non-disclosed 8R special jackpot (the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 35 to 49) is 61 to 70 times, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending performance pattern E3 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1, and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2 is set. If the setting value is 5, ending performance pattern E4 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1 is set. If the setting value is 1 to 4, ending performance pattern E5 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 is set. Ending presentation pattern E3 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 6 and there is a guaranteed jackpot. Ending presentation pattern E4 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 5. Ending presentation pattern E5 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 4.

In other words, even if the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R special jackpot is won is between 61 and 70, if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between 20 and 34 (ending presentation patterns C2 and C3), only setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 or setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 is obtained as advantageous information. However, if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between 35 and 49 (ending presentation patterns E3 to E5), setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, or setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 is obtained as advantageous information, making it easier to obtain advantageous information.

When the number of changes at the time of winning an unspecified 8R special jackpot (the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 35 to 49) is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, ending performance pattern E6 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1, special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, and first bonus video 44n1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 5, ending performance pattern E7 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, special jackpot performance suggestion information 44s1, and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2 is set. Also, if the setting value is 4, an ending performance pattern E8 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and special effect suggestion information 44s1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 1 to 3, an ending performance pattern E9 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 is set. The ending performance pattern E6 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 6 and the special effect jackpot is reached. The ending performance pattern E7 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 5 and the special effect jackpot is reached. The ending performance pattern E8 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 4. The ending performance pattern E9 is advantageous information when the setting is actually 3.

In other words, even if the number of fluctuations when an unspecified 8R special jackpot is won is between 71 and 80, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between 20 and 34 (ending performance patterns C4 and C5), the only advantageous information available is setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, or setting 4 suggestion information 44r4. However, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between 35 and 49 (ending performance patterns E6 and E9), the advantageous information available is setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, or setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, making it easier to obtain advantageous information.

When the number of changes at the time of winning the unspecified 8R high probability jackpot (the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 35 to 49) is 81 to 100 times, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the setting value is 6, an ending performance pattern E10 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, high probability performance suggestion information 44s1, high probability performance suggestion information 44s2, first bonus video 44n1, and second bonus video 44n2 is set. Also, if the setting value is 5, an ending performance pattern E11 consisting of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, high probability performance suggestion information 44s1, high probability performance suggestion information 44s2, and first bonus video 44n1 is set. Also, if the setting value is 4, an ending performance pattern E12 is set that is composed of the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting performance suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, the probability variable performance suggestion information 44s1, and the probability variable suggestion information 44s2. Also, if the setting value is 3, an ending performance pattern E13 is set that is composed of the card removal forget prevention information 44y, the setting performance suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, and the probability variable performance suggestion information 44s1. Furthermore, if the setting value is 1 to 2, an ending performance pattern E14 is set, which is composed of card removal forget prevention information 44y, setting performance suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, and setting 2 suggestion information 44r6. Ending performance pattern E10 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 6 and the jackpot is a sure-win. Ending performance pattern E11 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 5 and the jackpot is a sure-win. Ending performance pattern E12 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 4 and the jackpot is a sure-win. Ending performance pattern E13 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 3. Ending performance pattern E14 is advantageous information when the actual setting is 3.

In other words, even if the number of fluctuations when winning an unspecified 8R special jackpot is between 81 and 100, when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between 20 and 34 (ending performance patterns C7 to C10), the advantageous information is limited to setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, or setting 3 suggestion information 44r5. However, when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between 35 and 49 (ending performance patterns E10 to E14), the advantageous information is set to setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 and special jackpot suggestion information 44s2, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, or setting 2 suggestion information 44r6, making it easier to obtain advantageous information.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R certain probability jackpot is 81 to 100 times and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 35 to 49 (ending presentation patterns E1 to E14), by omitting some of the ending information (omitting manufacturer information 44x and displaying only the card removal prevention information 44y) and lengthening the display time of the setting suggestion presentation image and the certain probability jackpot suggestion presentation image, it becomes easier to obtain advantageous information than when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 20 to 34 (ending presentation patterns C1 to C10). In other words, since the ease of obtaining advantageous information differs depending on whether the ending time corresponding image starts with manufacturer information 44x or card removal prevention information 44y, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the ending time corresponding image starts with manufacturer information 44x or card removal prevention information 44y.

Similarly, in the case of an unspecified 8R normal jackpot, the ease of obtaining advantageous information (setting suggestion information, normal suggestion information) can be made to differ between when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 20 to 34 and when the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is 35 to 49.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 37, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 can display information other than the setting suggestion information in the setting suggestion performance image (for example, next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, etc., contained in the ending information 44j) as a jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function), and when, for example, the manufacturer information 44x is displayed, the setting suggestion information is unlikely to be displayed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on whether the manufacturer information 44x is displayed. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L12).

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also has a jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) that makes it more difficult for setting suggestion information to be displayed the longer the time that the ending information 44j is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state depending on the length of time that the ending information 44j is displayed. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (L13).

In the above embodiment, the display content of the jackpot time corresponding image (ease of obtaining advantageous information) was changed by changing the jackpot time such as the opening time, interval time, and ending time according to the number of changes when the jackpot was won, but the rate of balls entering the V area 32b may be changed by changing the jackpot time according to the number of changes when the jackpot was won. This point will be explained below with reference to Figs. 139 to 141. Fig. 139 is a table for drawing the special jackpot 1 in Example 38. Fig. 140 is a table for drawing the special jackpot 2. Fig. 141 is a time chart of the opening timing of the large prize opening opening member and the V area opening and closing member.

In the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 in this embodiment, there is an area in which the game balls can roll, an outlet that discharges the game balls rolling in the area to the outside, and a V area 32b through which game balls that enter the large prize opening 32a at a specific timing can pass. A large prize opening count switch is provided at the outlet, and a V prize detection switch is provided in the V area 32b. Note that the V area 32b is not limited to the above configuration, and may be one that has the function of the second variable prize winning device out of the two first and second variable prize winning devices provided on the game board 30. In this case, the first variable prize winning device functions as an opening and closing member that opens and closes for each round in the large prize round game state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed type gaming machine, in which if the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a or the special chart 2 start winning device 33b is a jackpot result, the machine transitions to a jackpot round gaming state, and if the gaming ball that entered the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot round gaming state enters the V area 32b, the machine transitions to a high probability gaming state with a support state of 100 variable times, or a low probability gaming state with a support state of 100 times, after the jackpot round gaming state ends.

Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a next game state setting processing function and a big prize opening/closing processing function (state transition function) for transitioning to a big prize round game state in which a big prize round game is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being from an open state in which the variable prize winning device 32 can receive a game ball to a closed state in which the variable prize winning device 32 has difficulty receiving a game ball, when the result of the lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a big prize result, and transitioning to a high probability game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a big prize result than in the normal game state for a predetermined period after the end of the big prize round game state, when the variable prize winning device 32 during the big prize round game state enters the V area 32b.

As shown in FIG. 139, the winning types in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table stored in the ROM 502 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 are 16R (V certain), 8R (V certain), and 8R normal, unlike the 16R certain, 8R certain, and 8R normal in the above-mentioned embodiments. Specifically, when the jackpot pattern is "7", it is easy to win in the V area 32b (it is easy to win in the V because the opening time is short as described later. The same applies below), so the winning type is 16R (V certain). When the jackpot pattern is an odd number pattern other than "7", it is also easy to win in the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R (V certain). When the jackpot pattern is an even number pattern, it is difficult to win in the V area 32b (it is difficult to win in the V because the opening time is long as described later. The same applies below), so the winning type is 8R normal. Additionally, in 16R (guaranteed victory), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 35 seconds. In 8R (guaranteed victory), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds. In 8R normal, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 140, the winning types in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table stored in the ROM 502 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 are 16R (V certain), 8R (V certain), and 8R normal, but they differ depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot. In other words, the winning type in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table is 16R (V certain) when the jackpot pattern is "7" and the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50, since it is easy to win in the V area 32b. If the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 51 to 100, it is difficult to win in the V area 32b, so it is 16R normal. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7", if the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50, it is easy to enter the V region 32b, so it is set to 8R (V certainty), but if the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 51 to 100, it is difficult to enter the V region 32b, so it is set to 8R normal. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, it is difficult to enter the V region 32b regardless of whether the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 100, so it is set to 8R normal. In addition, in 16R (V certainty), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds, and in 16R (normal), the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 30 seconds to 45 seconds depending on the number of fluctuations. In 8R (guaranteed victory), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds; in 8R (normal), the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds, or 20 to 35 seconds depending on the number of times it changes.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a large prize opening opening/closing processing function (large prize opening opening/closing control function) that operates the large prize opening opening opening member 32a1, which opens and closes the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 in the above-mentioned large prize round play state, between open and closed states in a predetermined large prize opening opening/closing pattern, as well as a V area opening/closing processing function (specific area opening/closing control function) that can operate the V area opening/closing member 32b1, which opens and closes the V area 32b in the large prize round play state, between open and closed states in a predetermined V area opening/closing pattern.

In addition, the large prize opening/closing pattern and the V area opening/closing pattern have the following relationship depending on the number of changes at the time of the jackpot result. That is, when the number of changes of the pattern at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special jackpot result 2) is the first number of changes (for example, 1 to 50 spins out of 100 spins), the opening timing of the large prize opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening/closing pattern are likely to match, and the game ball that entered while the large prize opening/closing member 32a1 was open is likely to enter the V area 32b, and when the number of changes of the pattern at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special jackpot result 2) is the second number of changes (for example, 51 to 100 spins out of 100 spins), the opening timing of the large prize opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening/closing pattern are unlikely to match, and the game ball that entered while the large prize opening/closing member 32a1 was open is unlikely to enter the V area 32b. This allows the rate of balls entering the V area 32b to change depending on the number of times the pattern changes at the time of the jackpot result, improving the interest of the jackpot round game state.

Referring to Figure 141, the big prize opening and closing pattern and the V area opening and closing pattern will be explained.

The horizontal axis of FIG. 141 indicates the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot round game state. The start of the jackpot round game state is the start of the opening time. (a) shows the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in a V-guaranteed jackpot. That is, the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in a case where the jackpot pattern is an odd pattern excluding "7" and "7" of the special pattern 1, or an odd pattern excluding "7" and "7" of the special pattern 2, and the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot result is 1 to 50 spins. (b) shows the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in a normal jackpot. That is, the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in a case where the jackpot pattern is an odd pattern excluding "7" and "7" of the special pattern 2, and the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot result is 51 to 100 spins, or an even pattern of the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2. (c) shows the opening and closing timing of the V-area opening and closing member 32b1 in a special jackpot and a normal jackpot. The V-area opening and closing member 32b1 operates at the opening and closing timing shown in (c) regardless of whether the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening and closing member 32a is (a) or (b).

In the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening opening/closing member 32a1 in the V-guaranteed jackpot shown in (a), the large prize opening opening/closing member 32a1 opens for 1 second after an opening time of 3 seconds has elapsed since the start of the jackpot round game state, and then closes for 2 seconds. This is the first round. Since the opening time of this first round is a very short time of 1 second, it is actually a period during which it is difficult to get a game ball into the large prize opening 32a.

The large prize opening opening/closing member 32a1 opens 6 seconds after the start, and then remains open for a maximum of 30 seconds (in this embodiment, it is assumed that game balls are being released normally, and so it remains open for 10 seconds (until 16 seconds after the start)), and closes for 2 seconds 16 seconds after the start. This is the second round. This second round ends if 10 game balls can be placed in the large prize opening 32a within the maximum opening time. The time it takes for the player to place 10 game balls in the large prize opening 32a depends on the player's operating style and the performance of the game ball launching device, but it takes at least about 10 seconds from the start of the second round.

In the opening and closing timing of the V-area opening and closing member 32b1 shown in (c), the V-area opening and closing member 32b1 remains closed until 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot, opens for 2 seconds 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot, and remains closed thereafter. In other words, the opening timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in the V-guaranteed jackpot shown in (a) coincides with the opening timing of the V-area opening and closing member 32b1 shown in (c) during the 2 seconds from 7 seconds after the start of the second loud opening time to 9 seconds after the start. As a result, if game balls continue to be launched from the start of the jackpot round game state, it is possible to have game balls enter the V-area 32b at the timing of the first half of the second round.

In the opening and closing timing of the large prize opening opening member 32a1 in the normal jackpot shown in (b), the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 opens for 1 second after an opening time of 6 seconds has elapsed from the start of the jackpot round game state, and then closes for 2 seconds. This is the first round. Next, the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 opens 9 seconds after the start, continues to open for a maximum of 10 seconds (until 19 seconds after the start), and closes for 2 seconds at a maximum of 19 seconds after the start. This is the second round. In the opening and closing timing of the V area opening and closing member 32b1 shown in (c), the opening and closing timing is the same as that described above. In other words, the opening timing of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in the V-certain jackpot shown in (a) does not match the opening timing of the V area opening and closing member 32b1 shown in (c). As a result, even if game balls continue to be shot from the start of the big win round game state, they cannot enter the V area 32b.

As a result, if the jackpot symbols are odd numbers excluding "7" and "7" on special chart 1, or odd numbers excluding "7" and "7" on special chart 2 and the number of times of change at the time of the jackpot result is 1 to 50 spins, it becomes easy to get the game ball to enter the V area 32b while the jackpot opening/closing member 32a1 is open (for example, from 1 second to 3 seconds after the start of the second round, i.e., from 7 seconds to 9 seconds after the start of the jackpot round game state). Also, if the jackpot symbols are odd numbers excluding "7" and "7" on special chart 2 and the number of times of change at the time of the jackpot result is 51 to 100 spins, or even numbers on special charts 1 and 2, it becomes difficult to get the game ball to enter the V area 32b while the jackpot opening/closing member 32a1 is open.

Next, the control process of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 142 and 143. Fig. 142 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device 261. Fig. 143 is a flowchart showing V winning area opening and closing processing by the main control device 261.

As shown in FIG. 142, in the normal processing of this embodiment, in addition to the opening/ending time setting processing of step S205A described above, V area opening/closing processing is performed in step S206A.

In the V area opening and closing process shown in FIG. 143, in step S4201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the round start flag is on. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if not, the process ends.

In step S4202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the opening start time of the V area opening/closing member 42b1 and proceeds to step S4203. As described above, the opening start time of the V area opening/closing member 42b1 is 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot round game state. In step S4203, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the opening start time of the V area opening/closing member 42b1 using a timer and proceeds to step S4204.

In step S4204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is time to open the V area opening/closing member 42b1. If it is time to open the V area opening/closing member 42b1, the process proceeds to step S4205; if not, the process ends. In step S4205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 supplies power to the drive mechanism that drives the V area opening/closing member 42b1 (e.g., excites a solenoid) to open the V area 42b. The opening time of the V area 42b is measured by the timer described above.

In step S4206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is time to close the V region opening/closing member 42b1. If it is time to close the V region opening/closing member 42b1, the process proceeds to step S4207; if not, the process ends. In step S4207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the supply of power to the drive mechanism described above and closes the V region 42b. This ends the process.

In this embodiment, the winning period of the V region 42b is set during the first round (e.g., the second round described above) in which it is practically possible to place a game ball in the big prize opening 42a, but it may also be set during a round after the first round in which it is practically possible to place a game ball in the big prize opening 42a. In this case, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 may determine whether a flag indicating the start of each round (e.g., a predetermined round after the second round) is on, instead of determining whether a round start flag (a flag indicating the start of a big prize round game state) is on in step S4201.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning period in V area 42b is set during the open time of large prize opening 32a, but if V area 42b is provided in a variable prize device separate from variable prize opening 32, at least a portion of the winning period in V area 42b may be set during the closed time of large prize opening 32a (i.e., during the interval time).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 38 has a counting function in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the number of fluctuations during the support state (numerical information related to the game), a third pattern display device 42 capable of displaying the number of fluctuations during the support state, an opening time measurement function (performance execution function) in the large prize opening opening and closing process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that executes an opening performance (predetermined performance) based on a jackpot win (occurrence of a specific event) during the support state, and a selection function in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that selects the opening period during which a jackpot opening performance is performed based on a jackpot win during the support state, and the opening period has a different length depending on the number of fluctuations during the support state, and the likelihood of a V winning probability change (a favorable game state advantageous to the player) occurring varies depending on the length of the opening period. This changes the likelihood of a V winning probability occurring depending on the length of the jackpot opening presentation, which is selected based on the jackpot win during the support state, so the entertainment value of the game can be improved depending on the counting status of the number of fluctuations during the support state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M00), for example.

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of variations related to the variable play during the support state displayed and executed on the third pattern display device 42. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game depending on the counting status of the number of variations related to the variable play during the support state displayed and executed on the third pattern display device 42. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (M01).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of fluctuations that increases or decreases with the execution of a variable game during the support state displayed on the third pattern display device 42. This makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game depending on the counting status of the number of fluctuations that increases or decreases with the execution of a variable game during the support state displayed on the third pattern display device 42. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (M02).

The game board 30 has a game area 30a where game balls flow down, a special game start winning device 33b for special game 2 into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter during the support state, a variable winning device 32 into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter, a detection switch that detects game balls that have entered the special game start winning device 33b, and a lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs a lottery to determine whether a jackpot game state will occur based on the detection of the game ball by the detection switch, and the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of times information related to the variable game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether a jackpot game state will occur during the support game. This can improve the interest of the game depending on the counting status of the variable number of times information related to the variable game during the support state in which a lottery is performed to determine whether a jackpot game state will occur. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (M03).

The opening time measurement function (effect execution function) in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes an opening effect based on the occurrence of a jackpot win during the support state based on a lottery by the lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. This can increase the interest of the game when a jackpot win during the support state based on a lottery by the lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 occurs. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (M04).

The selection function in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 selects an opening period in which an opening performance is performed based on a jackpot being won during a support state based on a lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game depending on which period is selected as the opening period in which an opening performance is performed based on a jackpot being won during a support state based on a lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (M05).

In addition to the configuration of the embodiment described above, when the variable display of the patterns is stopped and displayed with a combination of jackpot patterns based on the V area 32b into which the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 32 can enter and the result of the lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 being a jackpot result indicating the occurrence of the specific event described above, the game device 261 transitions to a jackpot round game state in which a jackpot round game is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being from an open state in which the variable winning device 32 can enter a game ball to a closed state in which it is difficult for the variable winning device 32 to enter the game ball, or when the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot round game state enters the V area 32b, the game device 261 transitions to a jackpot round game state in which a jackpot round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The main control device 261 includes a next game state setting processing function and a big prize opening/closing processing function (state transition function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which transitions to a high probability game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a big win result than in the normal game state for a predetermined period after the end of the winning round game state, an opening/ending time setting processing function (specific period control function) which changes a big win specific period (for example, opening time/ending time) that can be determined in advance in the big win round game state according to at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time the big win result is obtained when the lottery result is a big win result, and The main control device 261 is provided with a next game state setting processing function and a large prize opening opening/closing processing function (large prize opening opening/closing control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that can operate the large prize opening opening opening member 32a1 that opens and closes the large prize opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in a predetermined large prize opening opening opening pattern to an open state and a closed state, and a V area opening/closing processing function (specific area opening/closing control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that can operate the V area opening/closing member 32b1 that opens and closes the V area 32b in a jackpot round game state to an open state and a closed state in a predetermined V area opening/closing pattern, and at the time when a jackpot result (for example, a special chart 2 jackpot result) is obtained, When the number of times the pattern changes is the first number of times (for example, 1 to 50 times out of 100 spins), the opening timing of the large prize opening opening and closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening and closing pattern tend to match, and the game ball that entered while the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 was open tends to enter the V area 32b. When the number of times the pattern changes at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special jackpot result of the 2nd chart) is the second number of times (for example, 51 to 100 times out of 100 spins), the opening timing of the large prize opening opening and closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening and closing pattern are unlikely to match, and the game ball that entered while the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 was open tends to enter the V area 32b. As a result, the ball entry rate into the V area 32b changes depending on the number of times the pattern changes at the time of the jackpot result, so the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (M06).

In addition, when the number of times the pattern changes at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special jackpot result 2) is the first number of times (for example, 1 to 50 spins out of 100 spins), the jackpot specific period is different from the jackpot specific period (for example, the opening time) for the second number of times (for example, 51 to 100 spins out of 100 spins), so that the opening timing of the jackpot opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the V-area opening/closing pattern tend to match, and the game ball that entered while the jackpot opening/closing member 32a1 was open tends to enter the V-area 32b. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state by simply controlling the jackpot specific period, which can be determined in advance, to be different. This is an example of the game machine described in (M07), for example.

In addition, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot result (for example, a special jackpot result for special chart 2), the opening/ending time setting processing function (specific period control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot specific period including the opening time that notifies the start of the jackpot round game state and the interval time between each jackpot round game depending on at least the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result (for example, whether it is an odd symbol including 7 or an even symbol) and the number of symbol changes (for example, whether it is the first 1 to 50 spins or the second 51 to 100 spins out of 100 spins) and the first jackpot round game state. In the number of variations, the jackpot specific period (e.g., opening time) when the type of the pattern is a specific pattern (e.g., an odd number pattern including 7) and the first number of variations (e.g., 1 to 50 spins in the first half of 100 spins) is different from the jackpot specific period (e.g., opening time) when the type of the pattern is a specific pattern and the second number of variations (e.g., 51 to 100 spins in the second half of 100 spins). This makes it easier for the opening timing of the large prize opening opening and closing pattern to match the opening timing of the V area opening and closing pattern, and makes it easier for a game ball that enters while the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 is open to enter the V area 32b. As a result, even if the type of pattern at the time of the jackpot result is the same specific pattern, the ball entry rate into the V area 32b changes depending on the number of variations, so the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved. This is an example of a gaming machine described in (M08), for example.

In addition, when the number of symbol changes at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special jackpot result 2) is the first number of changes (for example, the first 1 to 50 spins out of 100 spins), the jackpot specific period (for example, the opening time) is shorter than the jackpot specific period for the second number of changes (for example, the second 51 to 100 spins out of 100 spins), so that the opening timing of the jackpot opening/closing pattern and the opening timing of the V-area opening/closing pattern are more likely to match, and the game ball that entered while the jackpot opening/closing member 32a1 was open is more likely to enter the V-area 32b. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state by simply controlling the shortening of the jackpot specific period that can be determined in advance in the jackpot round game state. This is an example of the game machine described in (M09), for example.

The specific jackpot period is also an opening time that notifies the start of the jackpot round game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the jackpot round game state through simple control of shortening the opening time. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M10), for example.

The first number of variations is the number of variations that have been consumed out of the predetermined number of variations (e.g., 1 to 50 spins in the first half of 100 spins) when the jackpot round game state transitions from a limit-of-number-times high-probability game state in which the state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a specific result than in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number of variations (e.g., 100 spins), and the second number of variations is the number of variations that have been consumed out of the predetermined number of variations (e.g., 51 to 100 spins in the second half of 100 spins) when the jackpot round game state transitions from the limit-of-number-times high-probability game state. This can improve the interest of the jackpot round game state in that the fewer the number of variations that have been consumed in the limit-of-number-times high-probability game state, the higher the rate of balls entering the V area 32b. This is an example of a gaming machine described in (M13), for example.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a type 1/type 2 mixed type pachinko machine 10, like the above-mentioned embodiment 38, but in the above-mentioned embodiment 38, the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot, which are considered for changing the jackpot time, was counted separately for the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, whereas in this embodiment, the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is counted as the sum of the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b. This point will be explained below with reference to Figures 144 to 145.

Figure 144 is a table for drawing the special chart 1 big win in Example 39, where (a) shows the table referenced in the normal game state and (b) shows the table referenced in the low probability support game state. Figure 145 is a table for drawing the special chart 2 big win that is referenced in the low probability support game state. Figure 146 is a table for drawing the special chart 2 big win that is referenced in the high probability game state. Figure 147 is a time chart of the opening timing of the big prize opening opening member and the V area opening and closing member. Figure 148 is a flowchart showing the opening and ending time determination process by the main control device 261. Figure 149 is a flowchart showing the opening and ending time determination process subsequent to Figure 148. Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the opening and ending time determination process subsequent to Figure 149.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the above-mentioned opening/ending time setting processing function (opening/closing game time control function) which, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot result, changes the jackpot time, which can be determined in advance in the jackpot round game state, according to at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time the jackpot result is reached.

In this opening/ending time setting processing function, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a function (a fluctuation counting function (counting function)) of counting the total of the number of times the pattern changes based on the detection of a game ball at the actuation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a and the number of times the pattern changes based on the detection of a game ball at the actuation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b as a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Using this fluctuation counting function (counting function), the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) has been reached when, in a high probability game state, the pattern change display based on the detection of a game ball at the actuation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a has been performed a first number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times) and the pattern change display based on the detection of a game ball at the actuation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b has been performed a second number of fluctuations (for example, 90 times).

The big prize opening opening and closing pattern and the V area opening and closing pattern have the following relationship depending on the number of variable display based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the big win and the number of variable display based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b.

That is, when the variation display of the pattern based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special winning device 33a for the special winning device 1 at the time of the jackpot result is within the first variation number (for example, 10 times), the opening timing of the large winning port opening and closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening and closing pattern are unlikely to match, and the game ball that entered while the large winning port opening and closing member 42a1 is open is unlikely to enter the V area 32b. Also, when the variation display of the pattern based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special winning device 33b for the special winning device 2 at the time of the jackpot result is within the second variation number (for example, 1 to 90 times if counting only the special winning port 2, or 11 to 100 times if counting the total with the special winning port 1), the opening timing of the large winning port opening and closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening and closing pattern are likely to match, making it easier for the game ball that entered while the large winning port opening and closing member 42a1 is open to enter the V area 32b. This allows the rate of balls entering the V area 32b to change depending on the number of times the pattern changes based on balls entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a and the special chart 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot result, improving the interest of the high probability game state or the support state.

In addition, in the variation counting function (counting function) in the opening/ending time setting process, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts counting until the variation display of the pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches the second variation number (e.g. 90 times) if the variation display based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b does not result in a jackpot within the first variation number (e.g. 10 times). As a result, even if the variation display based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches the first variation number, the ball entry rate into the V area 32b changes depending on the variation number based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, so the interest of the high probability game state or support state can be improved.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also sets the game value to be awarded when the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a results in a jackpot, and the game value to be awarded when the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b results in a jackpot, so that they are different. Specifically, the game value awarded in response to the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not include a guaranteed jackpot (V-guaranteed jackpot), but the game value awarded in response to the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b includes a guaranteed jackpot (V-guaranteed jackpot). As a result, the game value that can be awarded as a result of the subsequent lottery is superior or inferior when switching from aiming for the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a to aiming for the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, so that the interest of the high probability game state or the support state can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 144(a), the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table (low probability normal game state) is a normal jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is "7", it is difficult to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 16R normal. When the jackpot pattern is an odd number pattern other than "7", it is difficult to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R normal. When the jackpot pattern is an even number pattern, it is difficult to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R normal. However, in any jackpot type, when the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times during the 100 support states, the right to a probability change is acquired, which is different from the above-mentioned embodiment. In the 16R normal, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 35 seconds. For 8R, the opening time is usually set to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), the special jackpot 1 lottery table (low probability support game state) also results in a normal jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot pattern. If the jackpot pattern is a "7", it is difficult to enter the V region 32b, so it is set to 16R normal. If the jackpot pattern is an odd number pattern other than "7", it is also difficult to enter the V region 32b, so it is set to 8R normal. If the jackpot pattern is an even number pattern, it is also difficult to enter the V region 32b, so it is set to 8R normal. In addition, for any type of jackpot, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times during the 100 support states, the right to a probability change is acquired. For both 16R normal and 8R normal, the opening time is 6 seconds, but the interval time and ending time differ depending on the number of fluctuations when the jackpot is won. That is, in 16 normal, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 10 times, it is during the immediate consecutive zone, so the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 5 seconds, but if the number of fluctuations is 11 times or more, it is during the period aiming for the ball to enter the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, so the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 35 seconds. In 8R normal, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 10 times, it is during the immediate consecutive zone, so the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 5 seconds, but if the number of fluctuations is 11 times or more, it is during the period aiming for the ball to enter the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, so the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 25 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 145, the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table (low probability support game state) has different winning types depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot. When the jackpot pattern is "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the jackpot has reached 10 times, it is easy to win in the V area 32b, so the winning type is 16R (V certainty), but if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a has not reached 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is difficult to win in the V area 32b, so the winning type is 16R normal. Even if the jackpot pattern is an odd number pattern other than "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is easy to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R (V certainty). However, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not reach 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is difficult to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R normal. Even if the jackpot pattern is an even number pattern, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is easy to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R (V certainty). However, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not reach 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is difficult to enter the V area 32b, so the winning type is 8R normal.

In addition, the opening time for the special 2 jackpot lottery table (low probability support game state) is set to 3 seconds for 16R (V certain) and 8R (V certain), and 6 seconds for 16R normal and 8R normal, but the interval time and ending time differ depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, when the jackpot pattern is "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the jackpot reaches 10 times, and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 40 times, it is within the immediate consecutive zone, so the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 5 seconds, but if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 41 to 90 times, it is outside the immediate consecutive zone, so the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 30 seconds. Also. Even if the number of variations based on balls entering the special 1 start winning device 33a does not reach 10 times at the time of the jackpot, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 30 seconds. In the case of odd and even jackpot patterns other than "7", if the number of variations based on balls entering the special 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times at the time of the jackpot and the number of variations based on balls entering the special 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 40 times, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 5 seconds because it is within the immediate consecutive zone, but if the number of variations based on balls entering the special 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 41 to 90 times, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 20 seconds because it is outside the immediate consecutive zone. Also, even if the number of variations based on balls entering the special 1 start winning device 33a does not reach 10 times at the time of the jackpot, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 20 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 146, the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table (high probability game state) has different jackpot types depending on the type of jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is a "7", it is easy to win in the V area 32b, so the jackpot type is 16R (V certain). When the jackpot pattern is an odd number pattern other than a "7", it is easy to win in the V area 32b, so the jackpot type is 8R (V certain). When the jackpot pattern is an even number pattern, it is difficult to win in the V area 32b, so the jackpot type is 8R normal.

In addition, the opening time for the special 2 jackpot lottery table (high probability game state) is set to 3 seconds for 16R (V certain) and 8R (V certain), and 6 seconds for 8R normal, but the ending time differs depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. In other words, when the jackpot symbol is "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50 times, it is within the immediate consecutive zone, so the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 5 seconds, but if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 51 to 100 times, it is outside the immediate consecutive zone, so the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 30 seconds. In the case of odd and even numbers other than "7" for the jackpot pattern, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is between 1 and 50, the instant consecutive zone period is in effect, so the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. However, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is between 51 and 100, the instant consecutive zone period is not in effect, so the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 20 seconds.

The large prize opening/closing pattern and the V-area opening/closing pattern will be described with reference to Figure 147. The large prize opening/closing pattern and the V-area opening/closing pattern in this embodiment are basically the same as the large prize opening/closing pattern and the V-area opening/closing pattern shown in Figure 141. The difference is the conditions under which the large prize opening/closing pattern for a V-guaranteed jackpot is obtained and the conditions under which the large prize opening/closing pattern for a normal jackpot is obtained. This point will be described below.

The opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in the V-certain jackpot shown in (a) is set when the jackpot pattern is the pattern of special chart 2 during the low probability support state and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times at the time of the jackpot result, or when the jackpot pattern is the "7" and odd number patterns except "7" of special chart 2 during the high probability play state. The opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening opening and closing member 32a1 in the normal jackpot shown in (b) is set when the jackpot pattern is the pattern of special chart 1, or when the pattern of special chart 2 during the low probability support state and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the jackpot result is 1 to 9 rotations, or when the jackpot pattern is the even number pattern of special chart 2 during the high probability play state. (c) is the opening and closing pattern of the V area opening and closing member 32b1 in the V-certain jackpot and normal jackpot.

As in FIG. 141 above, in the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening opening member 32a1 in a V-guaranteed jackpot shown in (a), the 2 seconds from 7 seconds after the start of the jackpot round game state (i.e., the start of the opening time) (which corresponds to 1 second after the start of the second round) to 9 seconds after the start (which corresponds to 3 seconds after the start of the second round) is the V-winning possible period that coincides with the opening timing of the V-area opening and closing member 32b1 shown in (c). In the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening opening member 32a1 in a normal jackpot shown in (b), there is no period that coincides with the opening timing of the V-area opening and closing member 32b1 shown in (c).

In this way, during the low probability support game state, even if the special chart 2 jackpot is reached, it is possible to easily allow the game ball to enter the V area 32b only if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a has reached 10 times at the time the jackpot result is reached, and even if the special chart 2 jackpot is reached, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 32b if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a has not reached 10 times at the time the jackpot result is reached.

The opening and ending time setting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 148 to 150.

As shown in FIG. 148, in step S4300, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the jackpot result is due to special chart 1. If it is a special chart 1 jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4301, and if not (i.e., if it is a special chart 2 jackpot), the process proceeds to step S4401 shown in FIG. 149.

In step S4301, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether the time when the special chart 1 jackpot result occurred is the low probability support game state. Whether the time when the jackpot result occurred is the low probability support game state can be judged by the presence or absence of the flag, for example, by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 setting the low probability support state transition command and setting the low probability support game state flag in step S567 of the next game state setting process shown in FIG. 20. If the game is not in the low probability support game state (i.e., if the game is in the low probability normal game state), the process proceeds to step S4302 to refer to the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table (low probability normal game state) shown in FIG. 144 (a). If the game is in the low probability support game state, the process proceeds to step S4310 to refer to the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table (low probability support game state) shown in FIG. 144 (b).

In step S4302, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the first symbol is the third jackpot (16R). If it is the third jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4303, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4303, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 35 seconds to set the jackpot opening and closing pattern for a 16R regular jackpot during regular gameplay.

In step S4305, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the first symbol is the second jackpot (8R). If it is the second jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4306, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4306, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds to set the jackpot opening and closing pattern for an 8R regular jackpot during regular gameplay.

In step S4307, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the first symbol is the first jackpot (8R). If it is the first jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4308; if not, the process ends. In step S4308, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds to set the jackpot opening and closing pattern for an 8R regular jackpot during regular gameplay.

If it is determined in step S4301 above that the time when the special chart 1 jackpot result occurred was in the low probability support game state, in step S4310, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time when the jackpot result occurred during the low probability support game state into the memory area n1 provided in the RAM 503, and proceeds to step S4311. In step S4311, if n1 is 10 times or less, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step S4312, and if n1 is not 10 or less (i.e., 11 or more), proceeds to step S4313. In step S4312, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds, because the time when the jackpot result occurred was within the immediate consecutive zone period but during a period in which the right to the probability bonus described below had not been acquired, regardless of whether it was the third jackpot (16R), second jackpot (8R), or first jackpot (8R).

In step S4313, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not it is the third jackpot (16R). If it is the third jackpot, proceed to step S4314, otherwise proceed to step S4315. In step S4314, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has acquired the right to the probability change described later, but since it is not the result of the variable display based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b that should be aimed for, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 35 seconds. In step S4315, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not it is the second jackpot (8R) or the first jackpot (8R). If it is the second jackpot or the first jackpot, proceed to step S4316, otherwise end this process. In step S4316, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has acquired the right to the special chance bonus described below, but because this is not the result of a variable display based on a ball entering the special chance bonus bonus device 33b for special chart 2, which is what should be aimed for, it sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds.

If it is determined in step S4300 that the jackpot result is not due to special pattern 1 (i.e., due to special pattern 2), then in step S4401, as shown in FIG. 149, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the time when the special pattern 2 jackpot result occurred was in a low probability support game state. If it is in a low probability support game state, the process proceeds to step S4402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4420 shown in FIG. 150.

In step S4402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads into memory area n1 provided in the RAM 503 the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 1 start winning device 33a from the start of the low probability support game state to the current time (the time when the special chart 2 jackpot result was reached), reads into memory area n2 the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b at the time when the jackpot result was reached, and proceeds to step S4403.

In step S4403, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not the first symbol is the third jackpot (16R). If it is the third jackpot (16R), proceed to step S4404; if not, proceed to step S4409. In step S4404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not n1 is 10 spins or more. If n1 is 10 spins or more, the right to the special jackpot described below has been acquired, so proceed to step S4405; if not (i.e., if n1 is less than 10 spins), the right to the special jackpot described below has not been acquired, so proceed to step S4408.

In step S4405, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether n2 is 1 to 40 times. If n2 is 1 to 40 times, proceed to step S4406, otherwise (i.e., if n2 is 41 to 90 times), proceed to step S4407. In step S4406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in the immediate consecutive zone and has acquired the right to a certain probability change described later, so sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds. In step S4407, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has left the immediate consecutive zone but has acquired the right to a certain probability change described later, so sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds. In step S4408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has not acquired the right to a certain probability change described later, so sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds.

In step S4409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the first symbol is the second jackpot (8R) or the first jackpot (8R). If it is the second jackpot or the first jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4410; if not, the process ends. In step S4410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether n1 is 10 rotations or more. If n1 is 10 rotations or more, the process proceeds to step S4411; if not (i.e., if it is less than 10 rotations), the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4411, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether n2 is 1 to 40 spins. If n2 is 1 to 40 spins, proceed to step S4412, otherwise (i.e., if n2 is 41 to 90 spins), proceed to step S4413. In step S4412, since it is in the immediate consecutive zone and the right to a special chance, which will be described later, has been acquired, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds. In step S4413, since it has left the immediate consecutive zone but the right to a special chance, which will be described later, has been acquired, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds. In step S4414, since the right to a special chance, which will be described later, has not been acquired, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds.

If it is determined in step S4401 above that the time when the special chart 2 jackpot result occurred was not in a low probability support game state, as shown in FIG. 150, in step S4420, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the time when the special chart 2 jackpot result occurred was in a high probability game state. If it was in a high probability game state, the process proceeds to step S4421, and if not, the process ends. In step S4421, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special chart 2 start winning device 33b at the time when the jackpot result occurred into memory area n2 provided in RAM 503, and proceeds to step S4422.

In step S422, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the third jackpot (16R). If it is the third jackpot, proceed to step S4423; if not, proceed to step S4426. In step S4423, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 50 rotations. If n2 is 1 to 50 rotations, proceed to step S4424; if not, proceed to step S4425.

In step S4424, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds, since a 16R V-guaranteed big win has been confirmed within the immediate consecutive zone. In step S4425, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds, since the immediate consecutive zone has been left but a 16R V-guaranteed big win has been confirmed.

In step S4426, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the second jackpot (8R). If it is the second jackpot, proceed to step S4427; if not, proceed to step S4430. In step S4427, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 50 times. If n2 is 1 to 50 rotations, proceed to step S4428; if not (i.e., n2 is 51 rotations or more), proceed to step S4429.

In step S4428, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in the immediate consecutive zone and a V-guaranteed big win in 8R has been confirmed, so it sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds. In step S4429, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has left the immediate consecutive zone, but a V-guaranteed big win in 8R has been confirmed, so it sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds.

In step S4430, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the first jackpot (8R). If it is the first jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4432; if not, the process ends. In step S4432, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 50 spins. If n2 is 1 to 50 spins, the process proceeds to step S4433; if not (if 51 spins or more), the process proceeds to step S4434.

In step S4433, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in the immediate consecutive zone, but since an 8R normal jackpot has been confirmed, it sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds. In step S4434, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has left the immediate consecutive zone and since an 8R normal jackpot has been confirmed, it sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds. This ends the process.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 including the game to acquire the right to a probability change in the high probability game state or the low probability support game state after the big win round game state of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 151 to 155. Fig. 151 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the big win round game to the value-added game. Fig. 152 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the big win round game to the value-added game following Fig. 151. Fig. 153 is a diagram for explaining another display mode of the effect performed during the big win round game to the value-added game. Fig. 154 is a diagram for explaining a display mode different from Fig. 153 of the effect performed during the big win round game to the value-added game. Fig. 155 is a diagram for explaining a display mode different from Figs. 153 and 154 of the effect performed during the big win round game to the value-added game.

The CPU 551 of the display control device 45 has a second fluctuation count start notification function that notifies the user that counting will begin until the fluctuation display of the pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches the second fluctuation number (for example, the 11th to 100th fluctuations, which are 90 times in special chart 2 out of 100 fluctuations) when the fluctuation display of the pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b does not result in a jackpot result within the first fluctuation number (for example, the 1st to 10th fluctuations, which are 10 times in special chart 1 out of 100 fluctuations). Specifically, it corresponds to the function of displaying the fluctuation number information 44m2 during the support state, the left hit information 44m1 during the support state displayed up to the 10th rotation, and the right hit information 44m during the support state displayed from the 11th rotation, which will be described later. Specifically, this corresponds to a function that displays the information 44m3 about the game in progress to acquire the right to play a special chance, the information 44m4 about the acquisition of the right to play a special chance, and the information 44m5 about the explanation of hitting the right during the support state. This allows the player to know the switch from aiming to score in the special chart 1 start winning device 33a to aiming to score in the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, thereby improving the interest of the high probability game state or the support state.

The CPU 551 of the display control device 45 also has a function of notifying the player that the probability of the game ball entering the large prize opening opening member 32a1 while it is open is high, when the display of the pattern change based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a big win within the first change number, for example, the first to tenth changes, which are 10 times in the special chart 1 out of 100 changes, as described later. Specifically, this function displays the probability of the game ball entering the large prize opening opening opening member 32a1 being executed information 44m3 and the probability of the game ball being acquired information 44m4, which will be described later. This makes it possible to know that the probability of the ball entering the V area 32b is high, thereby improving the interest of the high probability game state or the support state.

The CPU 551 of the display control device 45 also has a right-hit notification function that notifies the player to launch a game ball toward the special chart 2 start winning device 33b when the pattern change display based on the detection of a game ball by the operating port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a jackpot within the first number of changes (e.g., 10 times). Specifically, this function displays right-hit explanation information 44m5 during the support state, which will be described later. This allows the player to know the switch from left hit to right hit, thereby improving the interest of the high probability game state or support state.

In the all-pattern stop screen 43e shown in FIG. 151(a), "2" is displayed as a jackpot combination on special chart 1 in the normal game state. "2" is a pattern whose winning type corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot on special chart 1. In the opening screen 43h shown in (b), opening information 44f (e.g., text information such as "Congratulations") is displayed. Then, in the opening screen 43h shown in (c), right-hit explanation information 44g during the opening (e.g., text information "Aim to the right" and a right arrow) is displayed. Then, in the round screen 43i shown in (d), right-hit information during the round 44h (e.g., text information "Hit right!" and a right arrow) and round number information 44i indicating the start of the first round (e.g., text information "1st round") are displayed. Then, in the round screen 43i shown in (e), right-hit information during the round 44h and round number information indicating the start of the second round (e.g., text information "2nd round") are displayed. In the case of a jackpot result on special chart 1 during normal gameplay, the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, so no prize will be awarded in V area 32b. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (f), right-hit information during round 44h and round number information indicating the start of the third round (e.g., text information "3rd round") are displayed. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (g), right-hit information during round 44h and round number information indicating the start of the final eighth round (e.g., text information "8th round") are displayed.

Then, on the ending screen 43j shown in (h), right-hit information during the ending 44k and next game state suggestion information 44w (for example, text information of "Chance!" for an 8R normal jackpot) are displayed. Then, on the ending screen 43j shown in (i), probability-change right acquisition game information 44w1 (for example, text information of "Turn the special chart 1 10 times to get the probability-change right") that suggests or notifies the player that a game to acquire the probability-change right will start during the 100-time low-probability support state after the ending performance ends, and left-hit explanation information 44w2 (for example, text information of "Aim for the special 1 starting hole with a left hit" and a left-pointing arrow) that suggests or notifies the player to hit left during the game to acquire the probability-change right after the ending performance ends are displayed. This allows the player to know in advance while the ending performance is being played that the game to acquire the right to a special chance will begin after the ending performance ends, and allows the player to switch to left-handed play when the ending performance ends.

After that, in the next game state, the low probability support game state, the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c (low probability support state screen 43k) shown in (j) displays left hit information during support state 44m1 (e.g., text information of "left hit" and a left-pointing arrow) that suggests or notifies the player to hit left during the support state, number of changes during support state information 44m2 (e.g., text information of "1st spin" (or "1/100th spin"; the same applies below)) that notifies the player of the number of changes during the support state (1 to 100 spins), and information during game execution for acquiring the right to a probability change 44m3 (e.g., "challenge for the right to a probability change") that suggests or notifies the player that a game is being played to acquire the right to a probability change during the support state. This allows the player to know that he or she needs to hit left even though he or she is in the support game state, and to recognize that the period during which he or she is hitting left during the support game state is the period during which he or she is playing to acquire the right to a probability change.

Then, the all-symbol stop screen 43e shown in (k) displays that the first rotation of the display during the support state was a miss, and the high-speed display during the support state 43c shown in (l) displays that the third rotation of the display during the support state is being executed. The screens shown in (k) and (l) also display information on left-hand hit during the support state 44m1, information on the number of times the display has changed during the support state 44m2, and information on the execution of a game to obtain the right to a special bonus 44m3.

After that, on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c for the 10th spin during the support state shown in FIG. 152 (m), in addition to the left-hand hit information during support state 44m1 and the number of fluctuations during support state information 44m2, there are displayed probability fluctuation right acquisition information 44m4 (for example, text information saying "Congratulations! Get the right to probability fluctuation!") indicating that the number of fluctuations during the low-probability support state has reached 10 spins and therefore the right to probability fluctuation has been acquired, and right-hand hit explanation information during support state 44m5 (for example, text information saying "Aim for the special 2 starting port with a right-hand hit.") suggesting or informing the player to perform a right-hand hit operation from this point onwards to aim for the special chart 2 starting winning device 33b. By displaying text information such as "Aim for the special 2 starting hole with a right hit," it is possible to suggest to the game ball that if it hits the jackpot on special chart 2, it will be possible to obtain a special chance. However, the right-hit explanation information 44m5 during the support state may further include text information such as "If you hit the jackpot on special chart 2, you can get a special chance," which directly notifies the player of the flow of the game from this point onwards. This allows the player to know that if he or she obtains the right to a special chance, the game will allow him or her to obtain a special chance with the next jackpot on special chart 2.

After that, in the all-symbol stop screen 43e of the 10th spin in the support state shown in (n), in addition to the left-hand hit information 44m1 in the support state and the number of fluctuations information 44m2 in the support state, the probability-change right acquisition information 44m6 (for example, text information "Probability-change right GET!") is displayed, which indicates that the right to the probability-change has been acquired. After that, in the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c (low-probability support state screen 43k) of the 11th spin in the support state shown in (o), the number of fluctuations information 44m2 in the support state and the probability-change right acquisition information 44m6 are displayed, and the left-hand hit information 44m1 in the support state that was displayed until the 10th spin is changed to the right-hand hit information 44m in the support state. This allows the player to easily know that the launch operation of the game ball will change from the fluctuation after the right to the probability-change has been acquired. Also, since it is shown that the "probability-change right" has been acquired, the player can know that if a jackpot is won in the support state being executed, the probability-change can be acquired.

After that, in the all symbol stop screen 43e of the 21st spin in the low probability support state shown in (p), the jackpot combination of special symbol 2 "7" is displayed as stopped. The jackpot combination of special symbol 2 "7" in the low probability support state has different winning types depending on the number of times special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 change at the time of the jackpot. That is, if the number of times special symbol 1 changes at the time of the jackpot is at least 10, i.e., if the right to a special symbol is acquired, it will be a 16R V-guaranteed jackpot, but if the number of times special symbol 1 changes at the time of the jackpot is less than 10, i.e., if the right to a special symbol is not acquired, it will be a 16R regular jackpot. In this embodiment, since the right to a special symbol is acquired, it is a 16R V-guaranteed jackpot.

After that, the opening screen 43h shown in (q) displays opening information 44f (e.g., text information such as "Congratulations"). After that, the opening screen 43h shown in (r) displays right-hitting information during opening 44g (e.g., text information such as "Aim to the right" and a right arrow), as well as V-winning explanation information 44g1 (e.g., "Get a chance to win a chance with a V win"), which suggests or notifies that a chance to win ...

When the right to a probability change is acquired during the low probability support state and the jackpot result of "7" on the special chart 2 is a V-certain jackpot, the winning type is a V-certain jackpot, so a prize is awarded in the V area 32b during the opening period of the second round. That is, in the round screen 43i shown in (t), right-hit information during the round 44h and round number information (e.g., text information such as "2nd round") are displayed, along with V-winning probability change acquisition information 44i1 (e.g., text information such as "V-winning! Probability change GET!") that suggests or notifies that a prize has been awarded in the V area 32b and that the next game state will be a probability change (high probability game state). After that, in the round screen 43i shown in (u), right-hit information during the round 44h and round number information indicating that it is the final round (e.g., text information such as "16th round") are displayed.

Then, on the ending screen 43j shown in (v), next game state suggestion information 44w (e.g., text information such as "One more time!", which suggests that a high probability game state will occur after the end of the jackpot round game) is displayed. Then, after the end of the jackpot round game (i.e., the end of the ending performance), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (w), and right-hit information 44m during high probability/support state and a high-speed fluctuation screen 43c according to special chart 2 are displayed.

In this way, if a special chart 1 jackpot result occurs during the normal game state, a V win will not occur during the special chart 1 jackpot round game state, but if you can spin special chart 1 10 times during the 100 low probability support state after the jackpot round game state ends and obtain the right to a special jackpot, if a special chart 2 jackpot result occurs during the subsequent special chart 2 variable round, you will earn a V win during the special chart 2 jackpot round game state, and the next game state will be a high probability game state.

Referring to Figure 153, we will explain the display mode when a V-guaranteed jackpot occurs during the high probability game state from Figure 152 (w) onwards.

The high probability state screen 43k shown in (a) displays a "3" jackpot combination screen (all symbols stopped screen 43e) as a V-guaranteed jackpot during the high probability game state. After that, the opening screen 43h shown in (b) displays opening information 44f (text information such as "Congratulations") After that, the opening screen 43h shown in (c) displays V-winning explanation information 44g1 along with right-hit explanation information during opening 44g.

Then, on the round screen 43i shown in (d), right-hit information during round 44h and round number information 44i indicating the start of the first round (e.g., text information "1st round") are displayed. In the high probability game state, when the special chart 2 jackpot result is a "7" and odd numbers other than "7", the jackpot type is a V-guaranteed jackpot, and a prize is awarded in the V area 32b. That is, on the round screen 43i shown in (e), right-hit information during round 44h and round number information 44i indicating the start of the second round (e.g., text information "2nd round") are displayed, along with V-winning jackpot winning information 44i1.

Then, on the round screen 43i shown in (f), right-hit information during round 44h and round number information indicating the start of the final 8th round (e.g., text information "8th round") are displayed. Then, on the ending screen 43j shown in (g), next game state suggestion information 44w (e.g., text information "One more time!" indicating that a high probability game state will occur after the end of the jackpot round game) is displayed. Then, after the end of the jackpot round game (i.e., the end of the ending performance), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (h), and right-hit information during high probability/support state 44m and high-speed fluctuation screen 43c according to special chart 2 are displayed.

Referring to Figure 154, we will explain the display mode when a normal jackpot occurs during the high probability game state from Figure 152 (w) onwards.

The high probability state screen 43k shown in (a) displays the "2" jackpot combination (all symbols stopped screen 43e) as a normal jackpot during the high probability game state. After that, the opening screen 43h shown in (b) displays opening information 44f (e.g. text information such as "Congratulations"). After that, the opening screen 43h shown in (c) displays right-hit explanation information during opening 44g, but unlike FIG. 153(c), V winning explanation information 44g1 is not displayed.

Then, on the round screen 43i shown in (d), right-hit information during the round 44h and round number information 44i indicating the start of the first round (for example, text information saying "1st round") are displayed. When a special chart 2 jackpot result occurs with an even number pattern in a high probability game state, the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, so no prize is awarded in the V area 32b. Then, on the round screen 43i shown in (e), right-hit information during the round 44h and round number information indicating the start of the final eighth round (for example, text information saying "8th round") are displayed.

Then, on the ending screen 43j shown in (f), right-hand hit information during the ending 44k and next game state suggestion information 44w (for example, text information "Chance!" for an 8R normal jackpot) are displayed. Then, on the ending screen 43j shown in (g), game information for winning the special chance 44w1 (for example, text information "Spin the special chart 1 ten times to get the special chance") and left-hand hit instruction information 44w2 (for example, text information "Aim for the special 1 starting hole with a left-hand hit" and an arrow pointing left are displayed).

After that, in the next game state, the low probability support game state, the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c (low probability support state screen 43k) shown in (h) displays left-hit information during support state 44m1 (e.g., the text information "left hit" and a left-pointing arrow), number of fluctuations during support state information 44m2 (e.g., the text information "first spin"), and information on the execution of a game to obtain the right to a special chance 44m3 (e.g., "challenging the right to a special chance").

Then, on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c for the 10th spin in the support state shown in (i), information on acquisition of the right to the special variable 44m4 (e.g., text information such as "Congratulations! Get the right to the special variable!") and information on right-hitting during the support state 44m5 (e.g., text information such as "Aim for the special 2 starting point with a right hit.") are displayed. Then, on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c for the 11th spin in the support state shown in (j), information on acquisition of the right to the special variable 44m6 (e.g., text information such as "GET the right to the special variable!"), information on the number of fluctuations during the support state 44m2 (e.g., text information such as "11th spin"), and information on right-hitting during the support state 44m (e.g., text information such as "right hit" and an illustration of an arrow pointing to the right) are displayed. If the special chart 2 jackpot result occurs again after the right to a special jackpot is acquired in this low probability support game state, the next game state becomes a high probability game state based on winning in V area 32b during the jackpot round game state, as shown in Figures 152(p) to 152(w).

In this way, if a special chart 2 jackpot result occurs with a "7" or an odd number pattern other than "7" in a high probability game state, a V win occurs during the special chart 2 jackpot round game state, and the high probability game state continues. If a special chart 2 jackpot result occurs with an even number pattern in a high probability game state, a V win does not occur during the special chart 2 jackpot round game state, and the player is returned from the high probability game state to the low probability support game state. If the player again obtains the right to a special chance in the low probability support game state and then obtains a special chart 2 jackpot result, the player can again obtain the high probability game state.

Referring to Figure 155, we will explain the display mode when the acquired right to a special chance expires.

In the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c on the 10th spin during the low probability support state shown in (a), information on the acquisition of the right to a special probability change 44m4 (e.g., text information such as "Congratulations! Get the right to a special probability change!") and information on right-hitting during the support state 44m5 (e.g., text information such as "Aim for the special 2 starting point with a right hit.") are displayed.

Then, on the all-pattern stop screen 43e of the 10th spin in the support state shown in (b), information on the acquisition of the right to the special probability change 44m6 (e.g., text information of "GET the right to the special probability change!"), information on the number of times of fluctuation in the support state 44m2 (e.g., text information of "10th spin"), and information on the right hit in the support state 44m (e.g., text information of "right hit" and an illustration of an arrow pointing right) are displayed. Then, on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c (screen 43k in the low-probability support state) shown in (c), information on the acquisition of the right to the special probability change 44m6, information on the number of times of fluctuation in the support state 44m2 (e.g., text information of "11th spin"), and information on the right hit in the support state 44m are displayed. After that, in the all-symbols stopped screen 43e for the 11th spin during the low-probability support state shown in (d), the information on the acquisition of the right to a certain probability change 44m6, the number of times the symbol has changed during the support state 44m2, the right-hit information during the support state 44m, and the losing symbol are displayed as stopped symbols.

Then, on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c (low-probability support state screen 43k) shown in (e), the probability variable right acquisition information 44m6, the number of fluctuations during the support state information 44m2 (for example, text information of "100th spin"), and the right-hit information during the support state 44m are displayed. Then, on the all-pattern stop screen 43e for the 100th spin in the low-probability support state shown in (f), the probability variable right acquisition information 44m6, the number of fluctuations during the support state information 44m2, the right-hit information during the support state 44m, and the missing pattern are displayed in a stopped state. The probability variable right is extinguished when the fluctuation display for the 100th spin ends, so the low-probability support state screen 43k switches to the normal screen 43a. In conjunction with this change, probability change right acquisition game end information 44m7 (for example, text information such as "Probability change right has disappeared!") is displayed, which indicates or notifies the player that the game to acquire the probability change right shown in (g) has ended, and left hit after support state end information 44m8 (for example, text information such as "Aim for the special 1 starting hole with left hit") is displayed, which notifies the player to hit with the left after the support state ends. This allows the player to easily proceed with the game, even in a game in which the hitting method changes depending on the number of fluctuations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 39 is equipped with a game ball launching handle 18 that receives player operations related to the game, a counting function in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the number of times (first number information) that the special chart 1 changes based on the left-hand hit operation (operation in the first mode) of the game ball launching handle 18, and a judgment function in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that judges whether or not a special chart 2 jackpot win (predetermined condition) based on a right-hand hit operation has been achieved when the number of times that the special chart 1 changes has been counted, for example, 10 times (first predetermined number), and when it is determined that a special chart 2 jackpot win has been achieved, a V winning probability (a specific event advantageous to the player) occurs. As a result, after the number of times (first number information) that the special chart 1 changes based on the left-hand hit operation (operation in the first mode) reaches, for example, 10 times (first predetermined number), the operation is changed to the right-hand hit operation (operation in the second mode), and the special chart 2 jackpot is won (predetermined condition) based on the right-hand hit operation. This causes a special event (for example, a V-winning probability change) that is advantageous to the player to occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N00).

The specific event described above is a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of a favorable gaming state (for example, a V-winning probability change) that is advantageous to the player. As a result, if a special chart 2 jackpot win (predetermined condition) is achieved based on a right-hit operation (operation in the second mode), a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of a favorable gaming state is obtained, which can increase the interest of the game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N01).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of times (second number information) that the special chart 2 changes based on the right-hit operation (operation in the second mode) of the game ball launching handle 18, and the judgment function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether or not the special chart 2 big win based on the right-hit operation (predetermined condition) is achieved before the number of times (second number information) that the special chart 2 changes based on the right-hit operation has been counted, for example, 100 times (second predetermined number). This can improve the interest of the game in terms of whether or not the special chart 2 big win based on the right-hit operation (predetermined condition) can be achieved before the number of times (second number information) that the special chart 2 changes based on the right-hit operation (operation in the second mode) has been counted, for example, 100 times (second predetermined number). This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N02).

The number of times that special symbol 1 changes (first number information) is number information that is counted based on a left-hand hit operation (operation in the first mode) that can be performed during the changing display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and the number of times that special symbol 2 changes (second number information) is number information that is counted based on a right-hand hit operation (operation in the second mode) that can be performed during the changing display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42. This can increase the interest of playing during the changing display of the identification information. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N03).

In addition, the number of times special symbol 1 changes (first number information) is number information displayed on the third pattern display device 42 together with the changing display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and the number of times special symbol 2 changes (second number information) is number information displayed on the third pattern display device 42 together with the changing display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 42. This can increase the interest of playing while the changing display of the identification information is being displayed. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N04).

It also has a notification function that notifies the player when the number of times special chart 1 changes (first number information) has reached, for example, 10 times (first predetermined number) by using, for example, probability bonus right acquisition game information 44w1 (for example, text information such as "Spin special chart 1 10 times to get probability bonus right"). By being aware of the intermediate progress that the first number information has reached the first predetermined number, it is possible to increase the interest of the game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N05).

In addition, the game board 30 has a game area 30a into which game balls launched based on left-hand and right-hand hit operations (operations in the first and second modes) flow, a special-draw 1 start-winning device 33a (first ball-entry means) into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a based on left-hand hit operations can enter, a special-draw 2 start-winning device 33b (second ball-entry means) into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a based on right-hand hit operations can enter, and a special-draw 2 start-winning device 33b (second ball-entry means) that detects game balls by an operating port switch for the special-draw 1 start-winning device 33a and determines the number of times the pattern changes based on the detection of game balls by the operating port switch for the special-draw 1 start-winning device 33a and the number of times the special-draw 2 start-winning device 33b enters the game area 30a based on right-hand hit operations. The main control device 261 includes a change counting function (counting function) in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501, which counts the total of the number of changes in the pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the prize device 33b as a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 times). The change counting function (counting function) in the opening/ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special prize device 33a in a high probability game state. When the pattern change display is performed a first change number (for example, 10 times) and the pattern change display based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b is performed a second change number (for example, 90 times), it is determined that the predetermined change number (for example, 100 times) has been reached, and when the pattern change display based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the big win result is within the first change number (for example, 10 times), the opening timing of the big win opening opening pattern and the V area opening timing are determined. When the timing of the opening of the large prize opening pattern does not match the timing of the closing pattern, and the game ball that entered while the large prize opening opening/closing member 42a1 is open is difficult to enter the V area 32b, and the pattern change display based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special prize opening device 33b at the time of the jackpot result is within the second change number (for example, 1 to 90 times), the opening timing of the large prize opening pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening/closing pattern tend to match, making it easier for the game ball that entered while the large prize opening opening/closing member 42a1 is open to enter the V area 32b. As a result, the ball entry rate into the V area 32b changes depending on the number of changes in the pattern based on the ball entering the special prize opening opening device 33a and the special prize opening opening device 33b at the time of the jackpot result, so the interest of the high probability game state or the support state can be improved. This is an example of the game machine described in (N06), for example.

The counting function (counting function) in the opening and ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts counting until the display of the pattern change based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches the second number of changes (e.g. 90 times) if the display of the pattern change based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b does not result in a jackpot within the first number of changes (e.g. 10 times). As a result, even if the display of the pattern change based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a reaches the first number of changes, the ball entry rate into the V area 32b changes depending on the number of changes based on the ball entry into the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, so that the interest of the high probability game state or the support state can be improved. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (N07).

In addition, if the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a jackpot within the first number of changes (e.g. 10 times), the CPU 551 of the display control device 45 is provided with a second change count start notification function (notification function) for notifying that counting will begin until the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of the game ball at the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b reaches the second number of changes (e.g. 90 times). This allows the player to know the switch from aiming for a ball to enter the special chart 1 start winning device 33a to aiming for a ball to enter the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, thereby improving the interest of the high probability game state or support state. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (N08).

In addition, if the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of the game ball by the operating port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a big win within the first number of changes (for example, 10 times), the display control device 45 has a "right to a special win" acquisition notification function (notification function) of the high probability/support state transition processing of the CPU 551, which notifies the player that the game ball that entered while the big win port opening/closing member 32a1 was open is more likely to enter the V area 32b. This makes it clear that the ball is more likely to enter the V area 32b, which increases the interest of the high probability game state or the support state. This is an example of the game machine described in (N09), for example.

In addition, if the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of the game ball by the operating port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a jackpot within the first number of changes (e.g. 10 times), the display control device 45 has a right-hit notification function (notification function) of the high probability/support state transition process that notifies the user to launch the game ball toward the special chart 2 start winning device 33b. This makes it possible to know the switch from left hit to right hit, thereby improving the interest of the high probability game state or support state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in, for example, (N10).

The special chart 1 start winning device 33a is provided in an area of the game area 30a where game balls shot with a left hit can enter, and the special chart 2 start winning device 33b is provided in an area of the game area 30a where game balls shot with a right hit can enter. This allows the game area 30a to be used widely during the high probability game state or support state, thereby increasing the interest of the high probability game state or support state. This is an example of the game machine described in (N11), for example.

The game value awarded when the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of a game ball by the operation port switch for the special chart 1 start winning device 33a results in a jackpot is different from the game value awarded when the display of the changing pattern based on the detection of a game ball by the operation port switch for the special chart 2 start winning device 33b results in a jackpot. As a result, by switching from aiming for a ball to score in the special chart 1 start winning device 33a to aiming for a ball to score in the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, the game value that can be awarded as a result of the subsequent lottery becomes superior or inferior, so the interest of the high probability game state or support state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N12), for example.

In this embodiment, the difference is that the small win game state is switched from a small win game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the hole to a small win game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the hole. This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 156 to 162.

Figure 156 is a front view of the game board 30 of Example 40. Figure 157 is a table for drawing lots for winning special chart 1. Figure 158 is a table for drawing lots for winning special chart 2. Figure 159 is a table for selecting the main decorative pattern variation pattern for special chart 2. Figure 160 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process by the main control device 261. Figure 161 is a flowchart showing the small prize opening and interval time setting process by the main control device 261. Figure 162 is a time chart showing the opening timing of the large prize opening and closing member and the second special chart 1 starting winning device.

As shown in FIG. 156, in the game board 30 of this embodiment, the right-side game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display unit 35 is divided into a first right-side game area 30ar1 close to the variable display unit 35 and a second right-side game area 30ar2 far from the variable display unit 35 by a flow path forming member such as a nail. The second right-side game area 30ar2 is an area where game balls launched by a predetermined operation of the game ball launching handle 18 (for example, an operation of rotating the game ball launching handle 18 to the maximum rotation position on the right side) can flow down. The first right-side game area 30ar1 is an area where game balls launched by an operation weaker than the above-mentioned predetermined operation (for example, an operation of rotating the game ball to a position just before reaching the above-mentioned maximum rotation position) can flow down.

The game board 30 of this embodiment has two large prize openings, namely, a first large prize opening 32x of a first variable prize opening device 32X described later and a second large prize opening 32y of a second variable prize opening device 32Y. The first large prize opening 32x is provided downstream of the second right game area 30ar2. The first large prize opening 32x has a first large prize opening opening member 32x1, which is opened and closed during a large prize round game state. When the first large prize opening 32x is in a closed state, game balls that do not enter the first large prize opening 32x may enter another winning opening downstream or may be discharged to the outlet 36.

The second large prize opening 32y is provided further downstream than the first large prize opening 32x. The second large prize opening 32y is provided with a second large prize opening opening member 32y1, which is opened and closed during a small win game state. Inside the second large prize opening 32y, there is provided an area in which the game ball can roll, and an outlet that discharges the game ball rolling in the area to the outside. The outlet is provided with a large prize opening count switch.

The small win game state is a game state in which the second large winning opening 32y is open for a maximum opening time of 10 seconds or until 10 game balls enter the second large winning opening 32y. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 32y, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball detected. That is, in this embodiment, a maximum of 150 prize balls are expected in one opening of the small win game state. As will be described later, the small win game state is likely to occur at least 50 times in succession unless a big win occurs in the middle, so theoretically, 150 balls x 50 prize balls are expected. The maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 32y can be shorter than that of this embodiment. In that case, it is also possible to keep the number of prize balls to a minimum.

The game board 30 of this embodiment is equipped with two special symbol 1 start winning devices 33a, one special symbol 2 start winning device 33b, and one normal symbol start opening 34. The first special symbol 1 start winning device 33a1 and the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b are so-called navel type start openings that do not have an opening and closing member. The first special symbol 1 start winning device 33a1 is the same as the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a of the above-mentioned embodiment. The second special symbol 1 start winning device 33a2 is a so-called electric chute type start opening that has an opening and closing member. In this embodiment, the door member 32a2-1, which is inserted and removed vertically relative to the surface of the game board 30, opens and closes the ball entrance. In the closed state, the game ball rolls on the door member 32a2-1 and flows downstream, and in the open state, the game ball that flows below the door member 32a2-1 is guided to a passage section where a start entrance sensor is provided. Note that there may be only one special chart 1 start winning device 33a. In this case, a similar electric chute type special chart 2 start winning device 33b may be provided instead of the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 described above.

The game ball that flows down the first right game area 30ar1 has its flow path branched to the left and right near its exit by flow path forming members such as nails and windmills. The game ball that flows down to the right enters the start winning device 33a2 for special figure 2. The game ball that flows down to the left can enter the second start winning device 33b for special figure 1. In other words, the game ball that flows down to the left enters the start opening of the second start winning device 33b for special figure 1 if it is open, and flows further downstream without entering the start opening if it is closed. The game ball that flows down downstream from the closed second start winning device 33a2 for special figure 1 can enter the second large winning opening 32y. That is, the game ball that flows downstream from the closed special chart 2 start winning device 33a2 enters the second large winning opening 32y if it is open (small winning game state), and does not enter the second large winning opening 32y if it is closed, and is discharged to the outlet 36. The flow path is configured so that the game ball that flows downstream from the second large winning opening 32y does not enter the first special chart 1 start winning device 33a.

A normal symbol starting hole 34 is provided in the middle of the first right-side game area 30ar1. The normal symbol starting hole 34 is configured so that the game ball flowing down the first right-side game area 30ar1 always passes through it. In the high probability game state with support state, the lottery result based on the ball entering the normal symbol starting hole 34 is a win with high frequency, and the second special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a2 is often in an open state for a long time (for example, 10 seconds). The lottery result based on the ball entering the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is a small win, and the second large winning hole 32y may be in an open state, but when the second special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a2 is in an open state, the game ball enters the starting hole, so the ball does not enter the second large winning hole 32y. In other words, in the support game state, it is set so that the number of winning balls is unlikely to be more than the number of shot balls.

In the high probability game state (high probability game state in non-support state), the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 frequently wins the lottery result based on the ball entering the normal pattern start port 34, and the second special pattern 1 start winning device 33a2 is often in the open state, but since the time during the open state is shorter than during the support state, the game ball that did not enter the second special pattern 1 start winning device 33a2 will enter the second large winning port 32y that is open due to a small win. In other words, based on the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b being a small win result, when the variable display of the pattern is stopped and displayed with a small win combination, the second variable winning device 32Y is provided with a large winning port opening and closing processing function (second state transition function) that transitions to a small win game state in which the small win game is executed a second number of times (for example, once) that is less than the first number of times.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a small win opening/interval time setting processing function (specific time control function) that changes the small win specific period (e.g., opening time, interval time) that can be determined in advance in the small win game state, depending on at least the number of times the pattern changes at the time the small win result is reached, when the lottery result is a small win result in a high probability game state.

Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a counting function that counts numerical information related to the game (e.g., the number of fluctuations since the end of a jackpot round game accompanied by a high probability game state in a non-supported state) in the small jackpot opening interval time setting process described later, and a state change function that changes the state from one in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y to one in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y based on the numerical information reaching a predetermined number (e.g., the number of fluctuations is 51 times) in this small jackpot opening interval time setting process and the second large winning opening opening process of the small jackpot described later. This makes it possible to change the ease of the ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y depending on the counting status of the numerical information related to the game. Here, the state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y refers to a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y by lengthening the period in which the second variable winning device 32Y is in a closed state (the above-mentioned small win specific period), which can be determined in advance in a small win game state. The state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y refers to a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y by shortening the period in which the second variable winning device 32Y is in a closed state (the above-mentioned small win specific period).

The above-mentioned state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y until the numerical information reaches a predetermined number (for example, from 1 to 50 times). This allows the ease of a ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y to be changed according to the counting situation when the numerical information regarding the game reaches a predetermined number. Note that the 51st change is one example of the predetermined number for the numerical information regarding the game, and the number of changes after the end of the big win round game may be many times, such as the 100th or 200th.

The state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period of time (for example, the period from when the number of fluctuations is from 51 to 100) after the number information becomes a predetermined number. This makes it easier for balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period of time, triggered by the number information relating to the game becoming a predetermined number. Note that the period from when the number of fluctuations is from 51 to 100 is just one example of the predetermined period after the number information becomes a predetermined number, and it may be an unspecified period of time, such as until the next big win occurs.

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information (e.g., the number of variations) regarding the game after the end of an advantageous game state (e.g., a jackpot round game accompanied by a high probability game state of a non-support state) that is advantageous to the player. The game after the end of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is also a game in which a game ball is fired into the first right game area 30ar1, aiming at the second special symbol 1 start winning device 33a2, the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b, and the normal symbol start hole 34, after the end of a game in which a game ball is fired into the second right game area 30ar2 aiming at the first variable winning device 32X. This can improve the interest of the game after the end of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information relating to play in a specific period after the end of an advantageous game state (for example, a period during which the number of changes is 1 to 100). The specific period after the end of an advantageous game state is a period during which the number of changes is 1 to 100, but it may also be a period with specific conditions but with a range of the number of changes, such as the period until the next big win occurs. This can increase the interest of the player in play in the specific period after the end of a specific game state that is advantageous to the player.

The state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for the above-mentioned predetermined period, and then returns the state to one in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game during the predetermined period until the state returns to one in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also has a big win/small win lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws a lottery to see whether a specific game state (e.g., a big win game state, a small win game state) advantageous to the player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch of the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 and the special chart 2 start winning device 33b, and the above-mentioned counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of times information (e.g., the number of fluctuations) related to the game in which the lottery to see whether a specific game state will occur is performed. The game in which the lottery to see whether a specific game state will occur is a game in which the identification information is changed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game depending on the counting status of the number of times information related to the game in which the lottery to see whether a specific game state will occur is performed.

In addition, when the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch is a first specific result (for example, a jackpot), the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a first opening/closing game state (for example, a jackpot round) in which an opening/closing game is performed a first number of times (for example, 8R, 16R) from an open state in which the first variable winning device 32X can receive the game ball to a closed state in which the first variable winning device 32X has difficulty receiving the game ball, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in a first specific combination (for example, a jackpot round) based on the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch being a first specific result (for example, a jackpot round). The next game state setting process is provided with a first state transition function for transitioning the game state to a high probability game state in which, after the end of the first open/close game state, the lottery result is more likely to be the first specific result than in the normal game state, the second special chart 1 start-up winning device 33a2 is more likely to be in the open state more frequently than in the normal game state, and the second special chart 1 start-up winning device 33a2 is in at least one of a support state in which the second special chart 1 start-up winning device 33a2 is in the open state for a longer period of time than in the normal game state, or a non-support state in which the second special chart 1 start-up winning device 33a2 is not in the support state. In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a second state transition function in the next game state setting process that transitions to a second open/close game state (e.g., a small win game) in which an open/close game is performed a second number of times (2R) less than the first number of times, where one time is from an open state in which the second variable winning device 32Y can receive a game ball to a closed state in which it is difficult for the second variable winning device 32Y to receive a game ball, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in a second specific combination (e.g., a small win) based on the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch being a second specific result (e.g., a small win).

The state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y while it is in the open state if the number of times the identification information changes at the time the second specific result is reached as counted by the counting function is within the period of the first number of changes (e.g., 1 to 50 times), and makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y while it is in the open state if the number of times the identification information changes at the time the second specific result is reached as counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the second number of changes (e.g., 51 to 100 times). As a result, the ease of a ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time the lottery result is the second specific result, so that the interest of the second open/close game state can be improved.

In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 has a specific period control function that changes a specific period (e.g., opening time, interval time, ending time) that can be predetermined in the second opening/closing game state in accordance with at least the number of times the identification information changes at the time the second specific result is reached when the result of the lottery in the small win opening/interval time setting process is the second specific result. The specific period control function in the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets the specific period to a first specific period (e.g., opening time 6 seconds, interval time 4 seconds, ending time 2 seconds) when the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the second specific result counted by the counting function is reached is within the period of the first number of changes, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y while it is in the open state, and sets the specific period to a second specific period shorter than the first specific period (e.g., opening time 1 second, interval time 1 second, ending time 1 second) when the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the second specific result is reached is within the period of the second number of changes. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time the lottery result becomes the second specific result, thereby improving the interest of the second open/close game state.

The configuration of this embodiment is explained in detail below.

The special chart 1 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 157 is used when a ball enters the first special chart 1 start winning device 33a1 described above, and when a ball enters the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2. In other words, the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table is used in the normal (low probability) game state and the support game state (low probability and high probability).

Specifically, the winning types of the special chart 1 big win lottery table in this embodiment are 16R probability, 8R probability, and 8R normal. If the 16R probability is won, the first big winning port 32x is set to an opening time of 5 seconds, an interval time of 1 second, and an ending time of 35 seconds. If the 8R probability and 8R normal are won, the first big winning port 32x is set to an opening time of 5 seconds, an interval time of 1 second, and an ending time of 25 seconds. Also, if the 8R probability and 8R normal are won, the high probability game state with 100 support states is entered. In the case of a high probability game state with a support state, the lottery time for the normal pattern based on the detection of the ball entering (passing) the normal pattern start port 34 becomes shorter than usual and it becomes easier to win than usual, and the opening time of the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 based on the winning of the normal pattern becomes longer than usual (for example, 10 seconds). If you win the 16R chance, you will enter a high probability game state without a support state, and you will enter a small win rush game state in which it is easy to win the second large winning slot 32y, which will be described later, until the next big win is won.

The special chart 2 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 158 is used when a ball enters the special chart 2 start winning device 33b described above. The special chart 2 start winning device 33b is capable of a ball entering in a high probability game state, whether or not a support state is present. In other words, the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table is used in a high probability game state without a support state and in a high probability game state with a support state.

Specifically, the winning types of the special chart 2 big win lottery table in this embodiment are 16R probability, 8R probability, 8R normal, and small win. When the 16R probability is won and the number of fluctuations at the time of the big win is 1 to 50 times, it is within the above-mentioned immediate consecutive zone, so the first big winning port 32x is set to an opening time of 5 seconds, an interval time of 1 second, and an ending time of 5 seconds. When the number of fluctuations at the time of the big win is 51 to 100 times, it is outside the above-mentioned immediate consecutive zone, so the first big winning port 32x is set to an opening time of 10 seconds, an interval time of 2 seconds, and an ending time of 30 seconds. Similarly, when the 8R probability or 8R normal is won and the number of fluctuations at the time of the big win is 1 to 50 times, it is within the above-mentioned immediate consecutive zone, so the first big winning port 32x is set to an opening time of 5 seconds, an interval time of 1 second, and an ending time of 5 seconds. If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is between 51 and 100, the player has left the immediate consecutive win zone described above, and therefore the first jackpot slot 32x is set to an opening time of 10 seconds, an interval time of 2 seconds, and an ending time of 20 seconds.

The small win corresponds to, for example, 0-139, 160-439, or 460-579 of the big win symbol counter C1 (0-599). That is, the small win occurs at a rate of about 9/10. When a small win is won, the setting method of the big win time is different from that described above. That is, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning a small win is 1-50, in order to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second big winning opening 32y, the period during which the second big winning opening 32y is closed during the small win game state is long, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, and the interval time is set to 4 seconds. The small win game state is set, for example, as described later, by a game in which the second big winning opening 32y is opened twice (2 rounds). The number of rounds may be 1 round, 3 rounds or more, etc. The ending time is set to 2 seconds. In addition, when the number of fluctuations when a small win is won is between 51 and 100, in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y, the period during which the second large winning opening 32y is closed during the small win game state is shortened, the opening time is set to 1 second, and the interval time is set to 1 second. In addition, the ending time is set to 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 159, the table for selecting the special 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern is set to a very long variation time (for example, an ultra-long variation pattern such as 600 seconds) for the variation display based on the ball entering the special 2 start winning device 33b in the normal game state. In other words, the special 2 start winning device 33b is a so-called navel type starting hole, and the variation display of special 1 based on the ball entering the first special 1 start winning device 33a1 and the variation display of special 2 based on the ball entering the special 2 start winning device 33b can be simultaneously varied, so that the variation display of special 2 is set to be difficult to be frequently performed in the normal game state. In the high probability game state, when the number of variations is 1 to 50 times, the variation time is set to an extremely short time (for example, a short variation pattern such as 5 seconds) in order to form the above-mentioned immediate consecutive zone. If the number of fluctuations is between 51 and 100 (51 or later if there is no support state), the player has left the immediate consecutive zone, so a long fluctuation time is used, just like in the case of Special Chart 1 (for example, a long fluctuation pattern of 30, 60, or 120 seconds for a jackpot, or 30, 60, or 100 seconds for a miss).

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 employs a control process for realizing a small win game. That is, in the large prize opening and closing process shown in FIG. 160, in step S4115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 judges whether the small win game start flag is on or not when it is judged in S4101 that the round start flag is not on. If the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for the special chart 2 mentioned above is a small win, the small win game start flag is on, so the process proceeds to step S4116 and subsequent steps. In steps S4116 and S4117, the opening time of the small win game is read and measured. In steps S4118 to S4124, the second large prize opening 32y in the small win game is opened and closed. In this embodiment, the small win game has two rounds, with the first round having an opening time of 1 second, and the second round having an opening time of 10 seconds or until 10 balls are detected in the second large winning hole 32y. In steps S4125 and S4126, the ending time of the small win game is read and measured. When the ending time has elapsed, the small win game start flag is lowered and the small win game ends (steps S4127 and S4128).

In addition, the small win opening interval time setting process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is similar to the big win opening interval time setting process described above (see FIG. 124), as shown in FIG. 161.

That is, in step S4201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not a small win has been won. If a small win has been won, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if not, the process ends. In step S4202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the number of changes when the small win was won (the number of changes since the end of the previous big win round play). In step S4203, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the number of changes is 1 to 50. If the number of changes is 1 to 50, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if not (i.e., the number of changes is 51 to 100), the process proceeds to step S4205.

In step S4204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 4 seconds, and the ending time to 2 seconds in order to lengthen the period during which the second large prize opening 32y is closed during the small prize game state, and ends this process. In step S4205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 1 second, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 1 second in order to shorten the period during which the second large prize opening 32y is closed during the small prize game state, and ends this process. The small prize opening time, interval time, and ending time set in this way are read and set in the large prize opening opening and closing process in the small prize game state described above.

Referring to Figure 162, the opening and closing pattern of the second large prize opening 32y and the opening and closing timing of the electric chute type second special chart 1 start prize opening device 33a2 will be explained.

(a) shows the timing of opening and closing the second large prize opening opening member 32y1 in the second large prize opening 32y. That is, this is the timing of opening and closing the second large prize opening 32y when the result of the variable display of the special chart 2 is a small prize win and the number of variable displays at the time of the small prize win is 51 to 100. (b) shows the timing of opening and closing the second large prize opening 32y when the result of the variable display of the special chart 2 is a small prize win and the number of variable displays at the time of the small prize win is 1 to 50. (c) shows the timing of opening and closing the opening and closing member 33a2-1 of the starting winning device 33a2 for the second special chart 1 at the time of the small prize win.

When the number of variable displays at the time of winning the small prize shown in (a) is between 51 and 100, the opening and closing timing of the second large prize opening 32y is the opening period (closed state) from the start of the small prize game state to 1 second, 1R (open state) from 1 second to 2 seconds, the interval period (closed state) from 2 seconds to 3 seconds, 2R (open state) from 3 seconds to 13 seconds, and the ending time (closed state) from 13 seconds to 14 seconds. In other words, of the period of the small prize game state (14 seconds), the open state period is 11 seconds and the closed state period is 3 seconds.

When the number of variable displays at the time of winning the small prize shown in (b) is 1 to 50, the opening and closing timing of the second large prize opening 32y is as follows: from the start of the small prize game state until 6 seconds (open state), from 6 seconds until 7 seconds until the start is 1R (open state), from 7 seconds until 11 seconds until the start is the interval period (closed state), from 11 seconds until 21 seconds until the start is 2R (open state), and from 21 seconds until 23 seconds until the start is the ending time (closed state). In other words, during the period of the small prize game state (23 seconds), the period of the open state is the same 11 seconds as in (a), but the period of the closed state is 12 seconds, which is longer than in (a).

The timing of opening and closing the opening/closing member 33a2-1 of the second special symbol 1 start winning device 33a2 shown in (c) is to repeat the action of opening for 2 seconds and closing for 2 seconds when the game ball is shot so as to pass through the normal symbol start port 34 continuously in a high probability game state in a non-supported state. The above-mentioned action is to be repeated from 2 seconds into the small winning game state. Then, the timing of opening and closing of the opening and closing member 33a2-1 of the starting winning device 33a2 for the second special chart 1 during the period of the small win game state is as follows: open state from 2 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of the small win game state, closed state from 4 seconds to 6 seconds after the start, open state from 6 seconds to 8 seconds after the start, closed state from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start, open state from 10 seconds to 12 seconds after the start, closed state from 12 seconds to 14 seconds after the start, open state from 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start, closed state from 16 seconds to 18 seconds after the start, open state from 18 seconds to 20 seconds after the start, and closed state from 20 seconds to 22 seconds after the start.

In the opening timing of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 32y1 when the number of fluctuations during the small prize winning is 50th to 100th as shown in (a), the opening time of the second large prize opening 32y includes 1 second from 1 second to 2 seconds after the start of the small prize game state, 2 seconds from 4 seconds to 6 seconds after the start, 2 seconds from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start, and 1 second from 13 seconds to 14 seconds after the start, which is a total of 6 seconds during which the opening/closing member 33a2-1 of the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 is in the closed state, and the game ball flows down to the second large prize opening 32y and can enter the second large prize opening 32y. In other words, when the number of fluctuations shown in (a) is 50th to 100th, 6 seconds (about 40% of the period) of the small prize game state period (14 seconds) is the period during which the ball can enter the second large prize opening 32y.

In the opening timing of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 32y1 when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small prize shown in (b) is 1st to 50th, the opening time of the second large prize opening 32y is 2 seconds from 12 seconds after the start of the small prize game state to 14 seconds after the start, 2 seconds from 16 seconds after the start to 18 seconds after the start, and 1 second from 20 seconds after the start to 21 seconds, for a total of 5 seconds, during which the opening/closing member 33a2-1 of the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 is in the closed state, and the game ball flows down to the second large prize opening 32y and can enter the second large prize opening 32y. In other words, when the number of fluctuations shown in (b) is 1st to 50th, the period during which the ball can enter the second large prize opening 32y is only 5 seconds (about 20% of the period) out of the period (23 seconds) of the small prize game state.

In this way, in a high probability gaming state without a support state, the period when the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50 is a period in which it is more difficult to get a gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y than the period when the number of fluctuations is 51 to 100, but the period when the number of fluctuations is 51 to 100 can be a period in which it is easier to get a gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y than the period when the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50. As a result, when a jackpot is won in a high probability gaming state without a support state, until the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot round, even if a small jackpot is won, the player is given the impression that the gaming state has changed to a small jackpot gaming state in which it is more difficult to get a gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y, but after the predetermined number of fluctuations, if a small jackpot is won, the player is given the impression that the gaming state has changed to a small jackpot gaming state in which it is easier to get a gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y for a predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of playing in the non-supported high probability game state after the big win round ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 40 includes a game board 30 having a game area 30a through which game balls flow, a second variable winning device 32Y having a second large winning opening opening/closing member 32y1 and variable between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area 30a cannot enter, and a main control device that counts numerical information related to the game (for example, the number of changes since the end of a large winning round game accompanied by a high probability game state in a non-support state). The main control device 261 includes a counting function in the small prize opening interval time setting process of the CPU 501, and a state change function in the small prize opening interval time setting process and the small prize second large prize opening opening and closing process of the CPU 501, which changes the state from one in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable prize device 32Y to one in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second variable prize device 32Y based on the number information reaching a predetermined number (for example, the above-mentioned number of changes has reached 51). As a result, the ease of the ball entering the second variable prize device 32Y changes depending on the counting status of the number information related to the game, which can improve the interest of the game. This is an example of a gaming machine described in (O00), for example.

The above-mentioned state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y until the numerical information reaches a predetermined number. This allows the ease of a ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y to change depending on the counting situation when the numerical information relating to the game reaches the predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O01), for example.

The above-mentioned state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period of time (for example, the period from when the above-mentioned number of changes is 51 to 100) after the numerical information becomes a predetermined number. This makes it easier for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period of time when the numerical information related to the game becomes a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (O02).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information (e.g., the number of fluctuations) regarding the game after the end of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a jackpot round game accompanied by a high probability game state in a non-supported state). This can increase the interest of the game after the end of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (O03).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to play during a specific period after the end of an advantageous play state (for example, a period during which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100). This can increase the interest of the player in play during a specific period after the end of a specific play state that is advantageous to the player. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O04), for example.

The state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for the above-mentioned predetermined period, and then returns the state to one in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. This can increase the interest of the game during the predetermined period until the state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y is restored. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (O05).

The game machine is also equipped with a second special game starting winning device 33a2 for special game 1 and a second special game starting winning device 33b for special game 2, into which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter, detection switches for detecting game balls that have entered the second special game starting winning device 33a2 for special game 1 and the second special game starting winning device 33b for special game 2, and a big win/small win lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws a lottery for whether a specific game state (e.g., a big win game state, a small win game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch, and the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of times information (e.g., the number of fluctuations) related to the game in which the lottery for whether or not the specific game state will occur is performed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game depending on the counting status of the number of times information related to the game in which the lottery for whether or not the specific game state will occur is performed. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (O06).

In addition, a special drawing 2 start winning device 33b as the ball entry section into which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter;
A starting winning device 33a2 for the second special chart 1 as the ball entry section that opens and closes between an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
A first variable winning device 32X into which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter;
A second variable winning device 32Y into which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter;
A detection switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the special drawing 2 start winning device 33b;
A detection switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the start winning device 33a2 for the second special chart 1;
A big win/small win lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a specific game state advantageous to the player will occur based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch;
A display control device 45 that displays the results of the big win/small win lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 on the third symbol display device 42 as a result of a variable display of identification information that can be visually recognized by a player;
When the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch is a first specific result (e.g., a jackpot), and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in a first specific combination (e.g., a jackpot line-up), the game state is transitioned to a first opening and closing game state (e.g., a jackpot round game state) in which an opening and closing game is performed a first number of times (e.g., 8R, 16R), with one time being from an open state in which the first variable winning device 32X can receive the game ball to a closed state in which it is difficult for the first variable winning device 32X to receive the game ball, and the first opening and closing game state (e.g., a jackpot round game state) is performed. a first state transition function in the next game state setting process in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that transitions to a high probability game state in which, after the end of the game state, the lottery result is more likely to be the first specific result than in the normal game state, the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 is more likely to be in the open state more frequently than in the normal game state, and the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 is in at least one of a support state in which the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 is in the open state for a longer period of time than in the normal game state, or a non-support state in which the second special chart 1 start winning device 33a2 is not in the support state;
a second state transition function in a next game state setting process in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 for transitioning to a second open/close game state (e.g., a small win game) in which an open/close game is performed a second number of times (2R) less than the first number of times, the open/close game being performed once from an open state in which the second variable winning device 32Y can receive a game ball to a closed state in which it is difficult for the second variable winning device 32Y to receive a game ball, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in a second specific combination (e.g., a small win combination) based on the result of a lottery based on the detection of a game ball by each detection switch being a second specific result (e.g., a small win),
The above state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is as follows:
If the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the first number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 50 times), the game ball is made difficult to enter while the second variable winning device 32Y is in the open state,
If the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the second specific result is reached as counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 is within the period of the second number of changes (e.g., 51 to 100 times), the second variable winning device 32Y is placed in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the game ball.
As a result, the ease of a ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the lottery result becomes the second specific result, so that the interest of the second opening and closing game state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O07), for example.

In addition, when the result of the lottery is the second specific result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a specific period control function in the small winning opening/interval time setting process, which changes a specific period (e.g., opening time, interval time, ending time) that can be determined in advance in the second opening/closing game state according to at least the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the second specific result is reached,
The specific period control function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is as follows:
If the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the first number of times of change, the specific period is set to the first specific period (for example, an opening time of 6 seconds, an interval time of 4 seconds, and an ending time of 2 seconds), thereby making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y while it is in the open state,
If the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the second specific result is counted by the above-mentioned counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 is within the period of the second number of times of change (for example, opening time 3 seconds, interval time 2 seconds, ending time 2 seconds), the specific period is set to a second specific period that is shorter than the first specific period, thereby making it easier for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y while it is in the open state.
As a result, the ease of a ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes depending on the number of times the identification information changes at the time when the lottery result becomes the second specific result, so that the interest of the second opening and closing game state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O08), for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 40, a game in which a small win game state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter is switched to a small win game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter, has been described. However, in this Example, in addition to the above-mentioned game, there is also a game in which the small win game state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter continues without switching from the small win game state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter to a small win game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter. In addition, the configuration of the game board 30 and the opening and closing time of the small win game state are also different. Below, this Example will be described with reference to Figures 163 to 168. Note that the same symbols are used to denote configurations common to the above-mentioned Example 40.

Figure 163 is a front view of the game board 30 of Example 41. Figure 164 is a lottery table for winning special chart 1. Figure 165 is a lottery table for winning special chart 2. Figure 166 is a table for setting a specific period for a small win that occurs during value-added play after winning special chart 2. Figure 167 is a flowchart showing the small win opening interval time setting process by the main control device 261. Figure 168 is a time chart of the opening timing of the large prize opening opening member.

As shown in FIG. 163, the game board 30 of this embodiment has one right game area 30ar on the right side of the variable display unit 35. The right game area 30ar is an area where game balls launched by a predetermined operation of the game ball launching handle 18 (for example, an operation of rotating the game ball launching handle 18 to the maximum rotation position on the right side or a position just before that) can flow down.

The game board 30 of this embodiment has two large prize openings, namely, the first large prize opening 32x of the first variable prize opening 32X described later and the second large prize opening 32y of the second variable prize opening 32Y. The first large prize opening 32x is disposed downstream of the second large prize opening 32y disposed downstream of the right game area 30ar. Specifically, a game ball that flows down toward the second large prize opening 32y in the closed state does not enter the second large prize opening 32y, but is changed in direction by a game member such as a nail disposed directly below the second large prize opening 32y, and is configured to flow toward the first large prize opening 32x.

The game board 30 of this embodiment is equipped with one each of a special symbol 1 start winning device 33a, a special symbol 2 start winning device 33b, and a normal symbol start opening 34. The special symbol 1 start winning device 33a is a so-called navel type start opening. The special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is a so-called electric chute type start opening, in which a door member 32y1 that is inserted and removed vertically to the surface of the game board 30 opens and closes the ball entrance. In the closed state, the game ball rolls on the door member 32y1 and flows downstream, and in the open state, the game ball that flows under the door member 32y1 is guided to a passage section where a start opening sensor is installed.

The game ball that flows down the right game area 30ar enters the start opening of the special winning device 33b for the special drawing 2 if it is open, and flows further downstream without entering the start opening if it is closed. The game ball that flows downstream from the closed special winning device 33b for the special drawing 2 enters the second large winning opening 32y if it is open (small winning game state), and flows further downstream without entering the second large winning opening 32y if it is closed. The game ball that flows downstream from the closed second large winning opening 32y enters the first large winning opening 32x if it is open (large winning game state), and flows further downstream without entering the first large winning opening 32x if it is closed. The flow path is configured so that game balls flowing downstream from the first large winning port 32x do not enter the special chart 1 starting winning device 33a.

A normal symbol starting port 34 is provided in the middle of the right-side game area 30ar. The normal symbol starting port 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the right-side game area 30ar always pass through it. In a high probability game state, the result of the lottery based on the entry of a ball into the normal symbol starting port 34 is a win with a high frequency, and the frequency with which the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is in an open state increases. Game balls that flow down toward the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b during the period when the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is in an open state do not enter the second large winning port 32y, but game balls that flow down toward the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b during the period when the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is in a closed state are set to be able to enter the second large winning port 32y depending on the opening and closing status of the second large winning port 32y. In other words, in a high probability game state, a game ball that flows down toward the special chart 2 start winning device 33b while the special chart 2 start winning device 33b is in a closed state can enter the second large winning hole 32y that is open due to a small win.

The CPU501 of the main control device 261 has a large prize opening/closing processing function (second state transition function) that transitions to a small prize game state in which the second variable prize winning device 32Y executes a small prize game when the result of the lottery based on the detection of a game ball by the operation port switch for the special prize winning device 33b is a small prize result and the variable display of the patterns is stopped and displayed in a small prize combination. In addition, the CPU501 of the main control device 261 has a small prize opening/ending time setting processing function (specific time control function) that changes the small prize specific period (opening time, ending time) that can be determined in advance in the small prize game state according to the number of times the special prize 2 changes from the time when the special large prize result occurs to the time when the small prize result occurs, when the lottery result is a small prize result in a high probability game state.

The configuration of this embodiment is explained in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 164, the winning types of the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table are 16R sure chance, 8R sure chance, and 8R normal, the same as in Example 40 described above. The opening time, interval time, and ending time are the same as in Example 40 described above. However, unlike Example 40 described above, if an 8R sure chance or 16R sure chance is won, the support state is not applied and the game remains in a high probability game state until the next jackpot occurs, and if an 8R normal chance is won, the support state is not applied.

As shown in FIG. 165, the winning types in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table are 16R probability (third jackpot) with a small win rush state (described later), 8R probability (fourth jackpot) with a small win rush state (described later), 8R probability (second jackpot) without a small win rush state (described later), and 8R normal (first jackpot). Small wins can also occur in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. The opening and ending times for small wins will be described later. If you win an 8R probability or 16R probability, the support state will not be applied and you will be in a high probability play state until the next jackpot occurs, and if you win an 8R normal, the support state will not be applied.

Referring to FIG. 166, we will explain the opening time and ending time, which are the specific periods when a small win is won during the high probability game state after a special chart 2 jackpot (second, third, or fourth jackpot). The small win game state is a game state in which the second large winning hole 32y opens once, and if one game ball enters during the open time, it is closed at that point. Also, the period of the small win game state from the opening to the ending is set to be 2.0 seconds.

As shown in (a), in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot (third jackpot) on Special Chart 2 or an 8R probability variable jackpot (fourth jackpot) on Special Chart 2, if a small jackpot is won during the high probability game state after the jackpot round, when the number of fluctuations when the small jackpot is won is 1 to 100, the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds, so the opening time is 0.2 seconds, which is a non-small jackpot rush state in which it is difficult to get the game ball into the second large winning hole 32y. When the number of fluctuations when the small jackpot is won is 101 or more, the opening time is set to 0.2 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.2 seconds, so the opening time is 1.6 seconds, which is a small jackpot rush state in which it is easy to get the game ball into the second large winning hole 32y.

As shown in (b), in the case of an 8R guaranteed jackpot (second jackpot) on special chart 2, if a small jackpot is won during the high probability game state after the jackpot round, if the number of fluctuations when the small jackpot is won is 1 to 100, the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds, making the opening time 0.2 seconds and resulting in a non-small jackpot rush state. Also, if the number of fluctuations when the small jackpot is won is 101 or later, the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds, just like when the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100, making the opening time 0.2 seconds and resulting in a non-small jackpot rush state.

The small win opening interval time setting process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. The differences from the process described with reference to FIG. 161 in the above-mentioned embodiment 40 will be described.

In other words, after the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in step S4201 that a small win has been won, it determines in step S4201A whether the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a third or fourth jackpot. If the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a third or fourth jackpot, it proceeds to step S4202, otherwise it proceeds to step S4201B. In step S4201B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a second jackpot. If the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a second jackpot, it proceeds to step S4206, otherwise (i.e. if the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a first jackpot), it falls back to the normal game state, and since a small win does not occur in the normal game state, this process is terminated.

In step S4202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the number of changes when a small win is won (the number of changes from the end of the previous big win round of play). In step S4203A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the number of changes is between 1 and 100. If the number of changes is between 1 and 100, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if not (i.e., the number of changes is 101 or more), the process proceeds to step S4205.

In step S4204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 0.9 seconds and the ending time to 0.9 seconds in order to lengthen the period during which the second large winning opening 32y is closed during the period of the small winning game state that occurs from the 1st to 100th play when the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is the 3rd or 4th jackpot (to make it difficult to increase prize balls in the small winning state), and ends this process. In step S4205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 0.2 seconds and the ending time to 0.2 seconds in order to shorten the period during which the second large winning opening 32y is closed during the period of the small winning game state that occurs from the 101st play onwards when the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is the 3rd or 4th jackpot (to make it easier to increase prize balls in the small winning state), and ends this process.

In step S4206, if the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is the second jackpot (either from the 1st to 100th times or from the 101st time onwards), the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 0.9 seconds and the ending time to 0.9 seconds in order to lengthen the period during which the second large winning opening 32y is closed during the small jackpot game state (making it difficult to increase the number of winning balls during the small jackpot state), and then ends this process.

As a result, if the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a third or fourth jackpot, when a small jackpot is won during the high probability game state after the third or fourth jackpot, the prize balls are unlikely to increase due to the small jackpot until the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small jackpot is 1 to 100, but it is possible to make it easier for the prize balls to increase due to the small jackpot after the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small jackpot is 101 or later. Also, if the type of the special chart 2 jackpot is a second jackpot, when a small jackpot is won during the high probability game state after the second jackpot, the prize balls are unlikely to increase due to the small jackpot until the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small jackpot is 1 to 100, and even after the number of fluctuations is 101 or later.

Referring to Figure 168, the opening and closing pattern of the second large prize opening 32y will be explained.

As shown in (a), the opening and closing pattern of the second large prize opening 32y during the small prize rush state is an opening period (closed state) from the start of the small prize game state to 0.2 seconds, an open state from 0.2 seconds to 1.8 seconds, and an ending time (closed state) from 1.8 seconds to 2.0 seconds. In other words, the opening and closing pattern of the second large prize opening 32y during the small prize rush state is that the open state period is 1.6 seconds and the closed state period is 0.4 seconds during the small prize game state period (2.0 seconds), making it easier for the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 32y.

As shown in (b), the opening and closing pattern of the second large prize opening 32y during a non-small prize rush state is an opening period (closed state) from the start of the small prize game state to 0.9 seconds, an open state from 0.9 seconds to 1.1 seconds, and an ending time (closed state) from 1.1 seconds to 2.0 seconds. In other words, the opening and closing pattern of the second large prize opening 32y during a non-small prize rush state is such that, during the small prize game state period (2.0 seconds), the open state period is 0.2 seconds and the closed state period is 1.8 seconds, making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second large prize opening 32y.

The opening and closing pattern of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment 40, and when the game ball is continuously shot through the normal symbol start opening 34 during the small win game state, the opening and closing operation (for example, opening for 2 seconds and closing for 2 seconds) is repeated. However, as described above, during the small win rush state, the opening time of the second large winning opening 32y is long, so one game ball can be entered, but during the non-small win rush state, the opening time of the second large winning opening 32y is very short, so in many cases the game ball cannot be entered into the second large winning opening 32y.

In this way, in the high probability game state, in the small win game state that occurs from 1 to 100 times after the end of the special chart 2 jackpot round, whether the special chart 2 jackpot type is the second jackpot, the third or fourth jackpot, the player will be in a stuck state where it is difficult to get the game ball into the second large prize hole 32y, and in the small win game state that occurs from 101 times after the end of the special chart 2 jackpot round, if the special chart 2 jackpot type is the second jackpot, the player will continue to be in a stuck state, but if the special chart 2 jackpot type is the third or fourth jackpot, the more stuck the player is, the more prize balls can be obtained.

In addition, if the result display (confirmed pattern) of the special chart 2 jackpot does not allow the player to determine whether the special chart 2 jackpot type is the second, third, or fourth jackpot, even if the player knows that the high probability game state occurs after the end of the special chart 2 jackpot round, the player can have a sense of anticipation as to whether the game state will be a small jackpot game state in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second large winning hole 32y until the 101st turn or later after the end of the special chart 2 jackpot round, and the interest in the small jackpot game state (small jackpot rush state) in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter from the 101st turn or later after the end of the special chart 2 jackpot round can be improved.

The display mode of the small win rush state and the state leading up to the small win rush state will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of the effects that are performed during the big win round play and during the value-added play.

As shown in (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays an all symbol stop screen 43e on which the jackpot combination is confirmed and displayed. This jackpot combination, for example, a "3" jackpot combination, corresponds to an 8R guaranteed jackpot with a small jackpot rush. In other words, it is not made clear to the player whether the jackpot combination displayed on the third symbol display device 42 corresponds to an 8R, 16R guaranteed jackpot with a small jackpot rush, an 8R guaranteed jackpot without a small jackpot rush, or an 8R normal jackpot.

After this, the third symbol display device 42 displays an opening screen 43h (not shown), and then displays a round screen 43i shown in (b). The round screen 43i displays right-hit information during rounds 44h, round number information 44i, and probability zone transition suggestion information 44i1, which indicates whether or not a transition to a high probability game state (probability zone) will occur after the end of the big win round game. The round number information 44i displays, for example, "1R" indicating the first round. The probability zone transition suggestion information 44i1 is information displayed in a performance in which the player PY, an image representing the player's character, and the enemy character TK, an image representing the enemy character, face off against each other, and is displayed as text information saying, "If you win the battle, you will definitely enter the final zone!" The probability zone transition suggestion information 44i1 suggests that an 8R probability zone or a 16R probability zone will occur.

As shown in (c), when the round number information 44i indicates "8R", if the player PY wins the battle against the enemy character TK, the probability change zone transition suggestion information 44i is displayed as text information saying "Final zone entry confirmed!" along with an image indicating that the player PY has won. This suggests that the jackpot that triggered this jackpot round game is an 8R probability change jackpot.

As shown in (d), after the jackpot round play ends, the third symbol display device 42 displays a high probability play state screen 43k. The high probability play state screen 43k displays right-hit information during high probability play state 44m, number of changes during high probability play state information 44m2, and probability change zone transition suggestion information 44i1. When the high probability play state is entered, the probability change zone transition suggestion information 44i1 is displayed as text information such as "Entering the final zone!". Furthermore, the high probability play state screen 43k displays text information such as "First spin" as the high probability play state change number information 44m. Furthermore, the third symbol display device 42 displays a high-speed change screen 43c, which indicates that a change is in progress.

As shown in (d), the third pattern display device 42 displays an all-pattern stop screen 43e, indicating that the first variable display during this high-probability game state resulted in a miss. After this, misses continue from the second spin to the 99th spin. As shown in (e), the third pattern display device 42 displays a high-speed variable display screen 43c, indicating that the variable display for the 100th spin is being performed. As shown in (f), the third pattern display device 42 displays a development reach display screen 43g, indicating that the variable display for the 100th spin has entered a reach development performance.

As shown in (g), the advanced reach display screen 43g displays a final showdown presentation in which the player PY and the enemy character TK face off, along with small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10, which suggests whether or not to transition to a small win rush state. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed, for example, as text information saying, "Final showdown! Enter the power-up zone even if it's a draw!" In other words, if the result of the 100th variable display is a miss, the presentation indicates that the final showdown will result in a draw, and a transition to a small win rush state will occur.

As shown in (h), if the result of the reach development effect of the variable display on the 100th spin is a miss, the third pattern display device 42 displays a reach miss result display of the reach development effect and small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed, for example, as text information saying "Draw!". Also, as shown in (i), if the result of the variable display for the 100th spin is confirmed as a reach miss, the third pattern display device 42 displays a reach miss confirmation display and small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed, for example, as text information saying "The game is moving on to the next stage!".

As shown in (j), after the variable display for the 100th spin ends, the third pattern display device 42 displays a high probability state screen 43k (small win rush zone screen 43k1) on which small win rush transition information 44m10 is displayed. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information such as "Entering power up zone". The small win rush zone screen 43k1 is a screen displayed in a different display mode from the high probability state screens 43k from (d) to (i). This suggests that from the 101st spin onwards, the high probability game state is transitioning to a small win rush state.

As shown in (k), in the small win rush state, the third pattern display device 42 displays a high-speed fluctuation screen 43c showing the 101st fluctuation display. As shown in (l), the third pattern display device 42 displays a small win stop screen 43e1 showing that the result of the 101st fluctuation display has become a small win result, and small win winning suggestion information 44m11 suggesting that there will be a win in the second large winning port 32y in the small win game state.

For example, the small win stop screen 43e1 displays decorative symbols SZ (e.g., "7" and "3") in the left and right columns, and a small win symbol KZ (e.g., a symbol saying "small win") indicating a small win in the center column. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a small win has been won. The small win winning suggestion information 44m11 is displayed as text information saying, for example, "Power Up!" This makes it easy for the player to understand that a prize ball will be generated during the small win game state.

After this, the small win rush state continues until the next big win occurs. If the next big win is the third or fourth big win, the small win rush state will occur again after the 101st spin after the end of that big win round.

Next, referring to FIG. 170, a different display mode from FIG. 169 will be described for the small win rush state and the period leading up to the small win rush state. FIG. 170 is a diagram that explains a different display mode for the effects that are performed during the big win round play and during the value-added play.

As shown in (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays an all symbol stop screen 43e on which the jackpot combination is confirmed. This jackpot combination, for example, the jackpot combination of "3", is displayed, but unlike the explanation of FIG. 169 above, this corresponds to an 8R guaranteed jackpot without a small jackpot rush.

As a result, as shown in (b) and (c), the player PY wins in the battle presentation during the big win round, and as shown in (d) to (g), the final battle presentation takes place in the reach development presentation of the 100th variable display in the final zone, which is the same as the explanation in FIG. 169 above, but differs in that the enemy character TK wins in the final presentation.

That is, as shown in (h), when the result of the reach development effect of the variable display on the 100th spin is a miss, the third pattern display device 42 displays the reach miss result display of the reach development effect and small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information saying "Too bad!" together with an image showing that the player PY has lost to the enemy character TK, suggesting that there will be no transition to the small win rush zone.

As shown in (i), on the third symbol display device 42, when the result of the 100th variable display is determined to be a reach miss, a reach miss confirmation display and small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 are displayed. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information such as "Too bad! Get ready for next time!" This suggests that there will be no transition to a small win rush state, but that the high probability game state will continue.

As shown in (j), after the variable display for the 100th spin is completed, the third pattern display device 42 displays a high probability state screen 43k on which small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed. The small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information such as "Entering re-challenge zone". This suggests that from the 101st spin onwards, the high probability game state continues, although there has been no transition to the small win rush state. As shown in (k), the third pattern display device 42 displays a variable display on the high probability state screen 43k, although there has been no transition to the small win rush state.

In this way, when the lottery results for the special chart 2 jackpot are displayed, the player is not informed of the difference between an 8R, 16R special chance with a small jackpot rush and an 8R special chance without a small jackpot rush. Instead, a common display is performed until the number of changes during the high probability emergency state after the end of the jackpot round reaches 100 times. In particular, between an 8R special chance with a small jackpot rush and an 8R special chance without a small jackpot rush, where there is no difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the player can be given a sense of anticipation as to whether the state will change to one in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (small jackpot rush state) until the 100th time has passed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 41 includes a game board 30 having a game area 30a through which game balls flow, a second variable winning device 32Y having a second large winning opening opening/closing member 32y1 and variable between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area 30a cannot enter, and a main control device that counts numerical information related to the game (for example, the number of changes since the end of a large winning round game accompanied by a high probability game state in a non-support state). The main control device 261 includes a counting function in the small prize opening interval time setting process of the CPU 501, and a state change function in the small prize opening interval time setting process and the small prize second large prize opening opening and closing process of the CPU 501, which changes the state from one in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable prize device 32Y to one in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second variable prize device 32Y based on the number information reaching a predetermined number (for example, the above-mentioned number of changes is 101 times). As a result, the ease of the ball entering the second variable prize device 32Y changes depending on the counting status of the number information related to the game, which can improve the interest of the game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (O00) above.

In addition, the above-mentioned state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y until the number information reaches a predetermined number when the first specific result (for example, an 8R or 16R jackpot with a small win rush) occurs, and maintains a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y even after the number information reaches a predetermined number when the second specific result (for example, an 8R jackpot without a small win rush) occurs. This changes the ease of ball entry into the second variable winning device 32Y depending on the type of specific result and the counting situation when the number information related to the game reaches a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game. For example, by performing a common display performance until the number information reaches a predetermined number without clearly indicating to the player the distinction between the first specific result and the second specific result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the state will change to one in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. This is an example of the gaming machine described above in (O09).

The above-mentioned state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period of time (e.g., the period until the next big win occurs) after the numerical information becomes a predetermined number. This makes it easier for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period of time, triggered by the numerical information relating to the game becoming a predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (O02).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information (e.g., the number of fluctuations) regarding the game after the end of an advantageous game state (e.g., a jackpot round game accompanied by a high probability game state) that is advantageous to the player. This can increase the interest of the game after the end of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (O03).

The counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to play during a specific period after the end of an advantageous play state (for example, a period during which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100). This can increase the interest of the player in play during a specific period after the end of a specific play state that is advantageous to the player. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O04) above.

The above-mentioned state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for the above-mentioned specified period, and then, if a third specific result occurs as a specific result (for example, if a normal jackpot is next won), returns the second variable winning device 32Y to a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game during the specified period until the second variable winning device 32Y returns to a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (O10) above.

In the above-mentioned embodiment 41, even in a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y, a certain number of game balls will enter the device, but the state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable winning device 32Y may be a state in which almost no game balls enter the device.

In addition, while the opening time and interval time have been used as examples of specific periods that can be determined in advance in the small win game state, the opening time in the small win game state may also be used. In this case, the state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter when the opening time of the second variable winning device 32Y is short (for example, about 0.2 seconds), and the state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y may be a state in which the opening time of the second variable winning device 32Y is long (for example, about 2.0 seconds).

In the above-mentioned Example 41, after the end of the jackpot round play of 16R probability change (third jackpot) and 8R probability change (fourth jackpot) of special chart 2, the 1st to 100th times are in a non-small jackpot rush state, and the 101st time onwards are in a small jackpot rush state, but the small jackpot rush state and the non-small jackpot rush state may be alternately generated according to the number of fluctuations. The following explanation will be given with reference to Figures 171 and 172. Figure 171 is a specific period setting table for small jackpots that occur during value-added play after winning special chart 2 in Example 42. Figure 172 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the effects performed during value-added play from the jackpot round play.

Using Figure 171, we will explain how to set the specific periods (opening time, ending time) for small wins that occur during value-added play after winning Special Chart 2.

As shown in (a), when the jackpot type on the special chart 2 is 16R probability (third jackpot) or 8R probability (fourth jackpot), the non-small jackpot rush state occurs 1-100 times or 201-300 times (hereafter, every 100 times) after the end of the jackpot round play, and the small jackpot rush state occurs 101-200 times or 301-400 times (hereafter, every 100 times) after the end of the jackpot round play. As shown in (b), when the jackpot type on the special chart 2 is 8R probability (second jackpot), the non-small jackpot rush state continues from the first time onwards, as in Example 41.

Next, using Figure 172, we will explain the display mode of the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play.

(a) to (d) correspond to (i) to (l) in FIG. 169 of the above-mentioned Example 41, and indicate that after the end of the big win round game of the special chart 2, if the 100th fluctuation in the high probability game state does not result in a big win, the small win rush zone 43k1 will be shifted to. As shown in (e), if the 200th fluctuation in the small win rush zone 43k1 also results in a small win, as shown in (f), the screen returns to the high probability state screen 43k (probability zone). In the high probability state screen 43k, text information "Re-entering the final zone!" is displayed as the probability zone shift suggestion information 44i1, suggesting that the screen has shifted to the probability zone again. As shown in (g) to (j), if the 300th fluctuation in the probability zone results in a miss (for example, a miss in the development reach), the screen shifts again to the small win rush zone 43k1 as shown in (k). In the small win rush zone 43k1, the text information "Re-entering the power-up zone!" is displayed as small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10, suggesting that you have transitioned to the small win rush zone again, and as shown in (l), you will enter the small win rush state from 301 to 400 times.

In this way, after the end of the jackpot round play with the third and fourth jackpots on Special Chart 2, the small jackpot rush state and non-small jackpot rush state switch every 100 times during the high probability play state, so that the prize balls in the stuck state can be paid out in a balanced manner. As a result, the interest of playing in the high probability play state can be improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 42, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 switches between a state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (e.g., a small win rush state) and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (e.g., a non-small win rush state) according to the numerical information on the game (e.g., the number of variations) counted in the value-added game state (e.g., a high probability game state). This allows the game value based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y to be awarded in a balanced manner according to the numerical information on the game counted in the value-added game state, thereby improving the interest of the game in the value-added game state. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (O11) above.

Note that the number of fluctuations and opening/closing times during the small win rush state are just examples, and it is acceptable for the number of fluctuations and opening/closing times to be greater or less than these.

In the above-mentioned Examples 41 and 42, the small win rush state had only one type, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, an ending time of 0.2 seconds, and an opening time of 1.6 seconds, but there may be multiple types. The following description will be given with reference to Figures 173 and 174. Figure 173 is a table for setting a specific period for a small win that occurs during value-added play after winning special chart 2 in Example 43. Figure 174 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the presentation that is performed from the big win round play to the value-added play.

Using Figure 173, we will explain how to set the specific periods (opening time, ending time) for small wins that occur during value-added play after winning Special Chart 2.

As shown in (a), the first small win rush state, in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y than the non-small win rush state, has an opening time of 0.3 seconds, an ending time of 0.3 seconds, and an opening time of 1.4 seconds. The second small win rush state, in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y than the first small win rush state, has an opening time of 0.2 seconds, an ending time of 0.2 seconds, and an opening time of 1.6 seconds. The third small win rush state, in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y than the second small win rush state, has an opening time of 0.1 seconds, an ending time of 0.1 seconds, and an opening time of 1.8 seconds.

When the jackpot type on the special chart 2 is 16R probability (third jackpot) or 8R probability (fourth jackpot), the non-small jackpot rush state occurs from the 1st to 100th play after the end of the jackpot round, the first small jackpot rush state occurs from the 101st to 200th play after the end of the jackpot round, the second small jackpot rush state occurs from the 201st to 300th play after the end of the jackpot round, and the third small jackpot rush state occurs from the 301st to 400th play after the end of the jackpot round. As shown in (b), when the jackpot type on the special chart 2 is 8R probability (second jackpot), the non-small jackpot rush state continues from the first play onwards, as in Example 41.

Next, using Figure 174, we will explain the display mode of the effects that are performed during the jackpot round play and during value-added play.

(a) to (e) correspond to (a) to (e) of FIG. 172 of the above-mentioned embodiment 42, and indicate that after the end of the big win round play of special chart 2, if the 100th fluctuation during the high probability play state does not result in a big win, the first small win rush zone 43k1 will be shifted to. As shown in (e), if the 200th fluctuation in the first small win rush zone 43k1 also results in a small win, as shown in (f), the second small win rush zone 43k2 will be shifted to. In the second small win rush zone 43k2, text information "Entering the second power-up zone!" is displayed as the small win rush shift suggestion information 44m10, suggesting that the transition to the next level small win rush zone has been made. As shown in (g) to (i), if a small win result is obtained in the second small win rush state from 201 to 300 times, the third small win rush zone 43k3 will be shifted to as shown in (j). In the third small win rush zone 43k3, the text information "Entering the third power-up zone!" is displayed as the small win rush transition suggestion information 44m10, indicating that a transition has been made to the next level of the small win rush zone, and as shown in (k) to (l), the third small win rush state will be reached from 301 to 400 times.

In this way, after the end of the jackpot round play with the third and fourth jackpots on Special Chart 2, the ease of a ball entering the second large winning hole 32y in the small win rush state increases every time a player gets stuck 100 times during the high probability play state, so the number of winning balls can be increased in stages according to the stuck state. As a result, the interest of playing in the high probability play state can be improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 43, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 gradually switches the state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (e.g., small win rush state) according to the numerical information (e.g., number of fluctuations) regarding the game counted in the value-added game state (e.g., high probability game state). This allows the game value awarded based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y to be gradually increased or decreased according to the numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added game state, thereby improving the interest of the game in the value-added game state. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (O12) above.

In this embodiment, the opening time is increased in stages by gradually decreasing the opening time and ending time in the small win rush state according to the number of times the player has been stuck, but in the non-small win rush state, the opening time may be decreased in stages by gradually increasing the opening time and ending time according to the number of times the player has been stuck.

The pachinko machine 10 of Example 44 executes an effect corresponding to a long press of, for example, the decision button 81 of the frame buttons 80. The control system of this pachinko machine 10 of Example 44 will be described first.

The operation means by which the long press operation is performed is not limited to an operation means for pressing a button such as the decision button 81, but may be an operation means for tilting a lever such as an operating lever, or an operation means for operating by waving a hand such as a touch panel. Note that instead of the long press operation, a repeated tap operation may be performed by repeatedly tapping the decision button 81. Also, the long press operation may be an operation for executing an auto repeated tap in which display information indicating repeated taps is displayed on a display means such as the third pattern display device 42.

Fig. 175 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and performance processing by the sub-control device of Example 44. Fig. 176 is a flowchart showing the variable display mode setting processing by the sub-control device. Fig. 177 is a flowchart showing the long button press performance setting processing by the sub-control device 262. Fig. 178 is a flowchart showing the long button press performance display processing by the display control device 45.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs the main control regarding the game. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an effect execution function (variable display mode setting function shown in FIG. 176) that causes the third pattern display device 42 to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of the big win determination by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a long press corresponding effect during the predetermined display effect by this effect execution function when the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a specific mode (e.g., a long press mode) for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds from the start of the long press) within the valid period in which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid.

The long press response effect is, for example, a long press charge effect in which the charge counter value increases according to the time (maximum 3 seconds) that the player presses the decision button 81, and a charge attack effect in which the player's character attacks an enemy character based on the power acquired as a result of the long press charge effect.

As the effect execution function, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 continues to execute the long press charge effect even if it is determined that the decision button 81 has not been operated in a long press mode within the period in which it is determined whether or not it has been operated in a long press mode. Specifically, for example, it is provided with the following operation detection functions (decision button detection function in step S2312 shown in FIG. 175, button long press effect flag determination function in step S4501, and valid period determination function in step S4502) and operation continuation determination function (checkpoint passage determination function in step S4509 shown in FIG. 175).

That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 can detect the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at a predetermined time interval (e.g., 0.01 second intervals) during the valid period using this operation detection function. Furthermore, when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press manner, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses this operation continuation determination function to determine whether or not the operation in a long press manner is continuing, based on the presence or absence of detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at a determination timing set at specific time intervals longer than 0.01 second intervals (e.g., every 0.30 seconds).

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is equipped with a performance execution function consisting of the above-mentioned functions, and controls the execution of the long press-responsive performance based on the determination result of whether or not the long press operation is continuing at the determination timing.

As a result, even if the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press mode is interrupted after the long press charge effect has started, if the operation in a long press mode is resumed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode is determined, the execution of the long press charge effect will continue, so it is not necessary to operate the decision button 81 again from scratch and wait for the time until the long press charge effect returns to the state before it was interrupted. For example, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted before a predetermined period (specific time interval) has elapsed after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is resumed by the next determination timing, it will be determined that the operation in the long press mode is continuing, so it is not necessary to wait for the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press mode for the predetermined period from scratch. As a result, the interest of the long press-responsive effect can be favorably improved.

This section explains the function that controls the execution of the long press effect described above.

As shown in FIG. 175, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 detects operation of the decision button in step S2312 but it is not the timing of the normal screen display, demo screen display, high-speed fluctuation, opening effect, ending effect, or button suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S4501. If operation of the decision button is not detected in step S2312, the process proceeds to step S4512.

In step S4501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long button press effect flag is 1. If the long button press effect is 1, the process proceeds to step S4502; otherwise, the process ends. In step S4502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long button press operation of the decision button 81 for executing the long button press effect is within the valid period during which it is valid. Note that this valid period is the valid period for starting the long press effect (for example, the period from the start of the long press charge effect to 4.00 seconds) that is determined taking into account the effect time during the period during which the presence or absence of an operation in a long press mode of the decision button 81 described later is determined (for example, the period from the start of the long press charge effect to the maximum execution time of the long press charge effect (6.00 seconds)). If it is within the valid period described later, the process proceeds to step S4503; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S4503, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press flag is 0. If the long press flag is 0, i.e., if it is the start point of the long press operation, the process proceeds to step S4504, and if not, i.e., if the long press operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S4507.

In step S4504, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts a long press timer for a long press effect, and proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the detection of pressing of the decision button 81 has continued for 0.10 seconds. If it has continued for 0.10 seconds, it is determined that a long press operation has been established, and proceeds to step S4506; if not, the long press operation has not yet been established, and this process is terminated.

In step S4506, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the long press flag to 1 and proceeds to step S4507. In step S4507, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press timer has counted 0.03 n seconds (n is an integer from 1 to 100). If the long press timer has counted 0.03 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4508; if not, the process ends.

In step S4508, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the long press charge counter by +1 each time the long press timer counts to 0.03 nsec, and proceeds to step S4509. The long press charge performance lasts for 3.00 seconds, so the charge counter value increases from 1 to 100.

In step S4509, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the count time of the long press timer is 0.3 n seconds (n = an integer from 1 to 10). If the long press timer has counted 0.3 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4510; if not, the process ends.

In step S4510, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the checkpoint passing counter by +1 each time the long press timer counts to 0.3 nsec, and ends this process. 0.3 nsec is the checkpoint for the long press charge effect. The long press charge effect lasts for 3.00 seconds, so there are 10 checkpoints, from 1 to 10.

If the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines in step S4503 described above that the long press flag is not 0, that is, if it determines that the decision button 81 has already been operated in a long press mode, it skips steps S4504 to S4506 and executes steps S4507 to S4510 described above. In this way, by repeating the above-mentioned process each time a press of the decision button 81 is detected during an operation in a long press mode, it is determined that the operation in a long press mode is continuing.

In step S4512, if it is determined in step S2312 described above that pressing of the decision button 81 has not been detected, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the long button press performance flag is 1. If the long button press performance flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4513, otherwise the process ends. In step S4513, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4514, otherwise the process ends. In other words, in steps S4512 and S4513, it is detected whether or not an interruption to the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press state has occurred while the button long press performance is being executed.

In step S4514, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads the value of the checkpoint passing counter in step S4510 described above, and proceeds to step S4515. In step S4515, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 judges whether or not the absence of detection continues until the time when the next checkpoint has elapsed. In other words, in this step S4515, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 judges whether or not the restart condition that the operation is restarted by the next checkpoint has been met. The time when the next checkpoint has elapsed is judged by whether or not the long press timer has counted 0.3n+0.3 [seconds] (where n is the value of the checkpoint passing counter read in step S4510 described above). If the absence of detection continues until the time when the next checkpoint has elapsed, proceed to step S4516; otherwise, end this process, and repeat the judgment of whether or not the operation of the decision button 81 has been detected. That is, in steps S4514 and S4515, if an interruption in the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press occurs while a long press response performance is being executed, it is detected whether or not the interruption in the operation of the decision button 81 during the long press response performance exceeds the next checkpoint. If the interruption in the operation of the decision button 81 during the long press response performance does not exceed the next checkpoint, this process is repeated, so that if the operation of the decision button 81 is detected again before the next checkpoint is exceeded, the long press response performance continues.

If no detection continues until the next checkpoint has elapsed, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 changes the long press flag to 0 in step S4516, resets the long press timer to 0 in step S4517, resets the long press charge counter to 0 in step S4518, and resets the checkpoint passing counter to 0 in step S4519, ending the long press charge performance. This ends the process. In other words, in steps S4516 to S4519, if an interruption in the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press occurs during the execution of a long press response performance, and if the interruption in the operation of the decision button 81 during that long press response performance exceeds the next checkpoint, the long press response performance ends at that point.

In this way, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response performance has started, if the player resumes operating the decision button 81 by the judgment timing, the execution of the long press response performance (the long press charge performance and the long press charge attack performance that is the result of the long press charge performance) will continue, eliminating the need to wait for the operation of the decision button 81 to become a long press mode from scratch. Also, particularly with regard to the long press charge performance, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response performance has started, if the player resumes operating the decision button 81 by the judgment timing, regardless of the length of the interruption, the execution of the long press charge performance will continue after this judgment timing, eliminating the need to wait for the operation of the decision button 81 to become a long press mode from scratch. In addition, after the long press response effect has begun, if the detection of the player's operation ceases and the player does not resume operating the decision button 81 by the judgment timing, the long press response effect ends at this judgment timing (the long press charge effect ends, and the long press charge attack effect that is performed as a result of the long press charge effect is not performed), making it easier to reduce neglect of operations.

Next, the variable display mode setting process of the present embodiment described above will be explained using FIG. 176. Note that the explanation of the same process as the variable display mode setting process shown in FIG. 40 will be omitted.

In step S2474A, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern designation command in step S2471 described above, it determines whether or not a command with a long button press effect has been received. If a command with a long button press effect has been received, it proceeds to step S2474B, and if not, it ends this process.

In step S2474B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the long button press effect flag to 1, and proceeds to step S2474C. In step S2474C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the long button press effect setting process described below.

Next, we will use Figure 177 to explain the long button press effect setting process.

In step S4601, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is the notification start timing to notify the start of the long press corresponding performance. If it is the notification start timing, proceed to step S4602, otherwise, end this processing. In step S4602, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a long press notification display command and proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it determines whether it is the end of the notification time. If it is the end of the notification time, proceed to step S4604, otherwise, end this processing. In step S4604, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a long press performance start command and end this processing.

In step S4605, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines in step S4601 described above that it is not the preview start timing, it determines whether or not it is within the valid time for detecting the decision button 81. If it is within the valid time, it proceeds to step S4606, otherwise it terminates this processing. In step S4606, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads the value of the long press flag and proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, it proceeds to step S4608, otherwise it proceeds to step S4622.

In step S4608, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the previous long press flag is 0. If the previous long press flag is 0, it determines that this is the start time of a long press operation, and proceeds to step S4609. In step S4609, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a long press charge start command, and proceeds to step S4610.

In step S4610, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press charge counter has been incremented by +1. If the long press charge counter has been incremented by +1, the process proceeds to step S4611; if not, the process proceeds to step S4612. In step S4611, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a long press charge +1 command and proceeds to step S4612.

In step S4612, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press charge time has ended. If the long press charge time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4613; if not, the process proceeds to step S4615. In step S4613, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the charge is between 91 and 100 percent. If it is between 91 and 100 percent, the process proceeds to step S4614; if not, the process proceeds to step S4615. In step S4614, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets charge command A and proceeds to step S4618. This charge command A is a command for displaying a charge attack image 45d-A, referred to as a "secret technique A attack" (described later).

In step S4615, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the charge is between 50 and 90 percent. If it is between 50 and 90 percent, the process proceeds to step S4616, otherwise (i.e., if it is between 1 and 49 percent charged), the process proceeds to step S4617. In step S4616, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets charge command B and proceeds to step S4618. Charge command B is a command for displaying a charge attack image 45d-B called a "true B attack" (described later). In step S4617, since the charge is less than 50, charge command C is set and the process proceeds to step S4618. Charge command C is a command for displaying a charge attack image 45d-C called a "quick C attack" (described later).

In step S4618, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press charge effect time has ended. If the long press charge effect time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4619A, otherwise, the process ends. In step S4619, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a long press effect end command and proceeds to step S4620.

In step S4620, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the long button press effect flag to 0 and proceeds to step S4621. In step S4621, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the long button press flag, long button press timer, long button press charge counter, and checkpoint passing counter to 0, and ends this process.

In step S4622, if it is determined in step S4607 that the long press flag is not 1, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the previous long press flag was 1. If the previous long press flag was 1, i.e., if the long press operation was interrupted, the process proceeds to step S4623; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S4623, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether there is remaining time in which the long press charge effect can be redone. If there is no remaining time in which the effect can be redone, the process proceeds to step S4612. If there is remaining time in which the effect can be redone, the process proceeds to step S4624. In step S4624, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a redo command to redo the long press charge effect, and proceeds to step S4621. In step S4621, in response to the interruption of the long press operation, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets each of the above-mentioned flags to 0, and ends this process.

Next, using FIG. 178, we will explain the button long press effect display processing performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45.

In step S4701, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press preview display command of step S4602 described above has been received. If the long press preview display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4702; if not, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4702, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs display control to display a long press preview image on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S4703.

In step S4703, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the long press warning time has ended. If the long press warning time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4704; if not, the process ends. In step S4704, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the long press warning image from the third pattern display device 42 and proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display a long press performance image on the third pattern display device 42, and the process ends.

In step S4706, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a long press charge start command has been received. If a long press charge start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4707; if not, the process proceeds to step S4725. In step S4707, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display a long press charge image on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S4708. For example, information such as "0 percent charge" is displayed until a long press operation is started.

In step S4708, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a long press charge +1 command has been received. If a long press charge +1 command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4709; if not, the process ends. In step S4709, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a long press charge +1 command image, updates the displayed long press charge value, and proceeds to step S4710. At this time, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 adds 1 to the display value stored in memory as the current value of long press charge, and updates the stored display value. For example, the display value is updated to "charge 1 percent," "charge 2 percent," ... "charge 10 percent."

In step S4710, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the long press charge time has ended. If the long press charge time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4711; if not, the process ends. In step S4711, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display a long press charge end image on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S4712.

In step S4712, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not charge command A has been received. If charge command A has been received, the process proceeds to step S4714; if not, the process proceeds to step S4716. In step S4714, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display a charge attack image 45d-A (charge attack image A in the figure) called "Ultimate Technique A Attack" on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S4723.

In step S4716, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not charge command B has been received. If charge command B has been received, the process proceeds to step S4718; if not, the process proceeds to step S4720. In step S4718, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display a charge attack image 45d-B (charge attack image B in the figure) called a "True B Attack" on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S4723.

In step S4720, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a charge command C has been received. If a charge command C has been received, the process proceeds to step S4721; if not, the process ends. In step S4721, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display a charge attack image 45d-C (charge attack image C in the figure) called a "Quick C Attack" on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to step S4723.

In step S4723, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the long press presentation time has ended. If the long press presentation time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4724; if not, the process ends. In step S4724, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the long press charge compatible image and ends the process.

Next, we will explain the timing of the long press effect mentioned above.

Figure 179 is a time chart showing the long press response effects when a long press operation is performed. Figure 180 is a time chart showing the long press response effects when a long press operation is performed in a manner different from that of Figure 179. Figure 181 is a time chart showing the long press response effects when a long press operation is performed in a manner different from that of Figures 179 and 180.

As the effect execution function described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 continues to execute the long press charge effect based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at the determination timing after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode.

Using Figure 179, we will explain the long press response effects that occur when a long press operation is performed.

The detection timing shown in (a) is the detection timing of the decision button 81. For example, the timing is set to detect pressing of the decision button 81 every 0.01 seconds. Note that the detection timing may be any time that is shorter than the checkpoint interval (every 0.3 seconds), so it may be every 0.1 seconds or an equivalent number of interrupts.

The valid timing shown in (b) is set as the valid period during which pressing of the decision button 81 can be detected when the long press charge effect is executed for a maximum of 6.00 seconds. Here, the valid timing is shown to be from the start of the long press charge effect to 4.00 seconds after the start. The period from the start of this long press charge effect to the maximum execution time of the long press charge effect (6.00 seconds as mentioned above) is the period during which it is determined whether or not the decision button 81 has been operated in a long press mode. Note that if the decision button 81 is pressed for the first time 4.00 seconds have elapsed since the start of the long press charge effect, in order to ensure the effect time, the operation is determined to be invalid, and the long press charge is not executed.

The operation timing shown in (c) indicates the timing when the player operates the decision button 81 in a long press. In FIG. 179, the player starts operating the decision button 81 in a long press 0.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and after the judgment time for the long press (0.10 seconds) has elapsed, the player continues operating in a long press for 3.00 seconds, starting 1.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. In other words, operations in a long press are continuously performed during the long press charge effect.

The long press timer shown in (d) measures the time that the detection of the decision button 81 is on, based on the player pressing the decision button 81. In this figure, the decision button 81 is pressed 0.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and continues to measure until the end of the long press charge effect (4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), as shown in (c).

The long press checkpoint shown in (e) indicates the time when it is determined whether the player is operating the decision button 81 in a long press mode. Specifically, after the judgment time for the long press mode (0.10 seconds) has elapsed, a checkpoint is provided every 0.30 seconds. In the pressing timing shown in this figure, the first checkpoint arrives 1.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The second checkpoint arrives 1.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The third checkpoint arrives 1.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The fourth checkpoint arrives 2.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The fifth checkpoint arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The sixth checkpoint arrives 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The seventh checkpoint arrives 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The eighth checkpoint arrives 3.40 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. The ninth checkpoint occurs 3.70 seconds after the long press charge effect begins. The tenth checkpoint occurs 4.00 seconds after the long press charge effect begins. The long press charge effect ends when the tenth checkpoint occurs.

The long press flag shown in (f) is a signal indicating that the player is pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time. Specifically, it remains high ("1") from the time it is determined that the operation is a long press until the operation ends (in this figure, until the time the long press charge effect ends).

The long press charge image shown in (g) is a display effect image that is displayed while the player is operating the decision button 81 in a long press mode. Specifically, during the period from the start of the long press charge effect to the time the long press mode is determined, an image indicating 0% charge is displayed. After the long press mode is determined, the long press charge image is displayed so that the long press charge increases by 1% for every 0.03 seconds of operation in the long press mode. In other words, the long press charge image is displayed so that the long press charge increases by 10% for every 0.30 seconds of operation in the long press mode.

In the timing of pressing shown in this figure, if a press is detected 1.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (first checkpoint), an image showing 10 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 1.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (second checkpoint), an image showing 20 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 1.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (third checkpoint), an image showing 30 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 2.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (fourth checkpoint), an image showing 40 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (fifth checkpoint), an image showing 50 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, at the sixth checkpoint, an image showing 60 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (seventh checkpoint), an image showing 70 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 3.40 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (the 8th checkpoint), an image showing 80 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 3.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (the 9th checkpoint), an image showing 90 percent is displayed. If a press is detected 4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (the 10th checkpoint), an image showing 100 percent is displayed.

Based on the result of this long press charge effect, a long press charge attack effect is executed. The long press charge attack effect is an effect in which one of the charge attack images 45d-A, 45d-B, or 45d-C is displayed in a display effect that is executed in conjunction with the end of the long press charge effect, based on the player pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a predetermined period of time during which the long press charge effect is executed (e.g., 3.00 seconds).

For example, charge attack image 45d-A is launched when the power is charged to 91-100%, so it is called a "secret A attack" and an image that resembles a punch is displayed. Charge attack image 45d-B is launched when the power is charged to 50-90%, i.e., in a shorter time than charge attack image 45d-A, so it is called a "true B attack" and an image that resembles a punch is displayed. Charge attack image 45d-C is launched when the power is charged to 1-49%, i.e., in a shorter time than charge attack image 45d-B, so it is called a "quick C attack" and an image that resembles a punch is displayed.

Using FIG. 180, we will explain the long press charge effect when a long press operation different from that shown in FIG. 179 is performed. Note that the start timing of the operation when the decision button 81 is long pressed is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 180. Below, we will explain the points that are different from the long press charge effect shown in FIG. 179.

The operation timing shown in (c) describes an example in which the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted after the start of the long press charge performance. When the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted, as an operation different from the long press mode, the decision button 81 may be released shorter than the detection timing or longer than the detection timing. Here, the long press charge performance is interrupted once 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, and then resumed 2.45 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. That is, the no-operation period for 1.15 seconds from 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance to 2.45 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance is longer than the detection timing at which the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted, but it may be shorter than the detection timing described above. This no-operation period is located in the period from the fourth checkpoint arriving at 2.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance to the fifth checkpoint arriving 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. In other words, the interruption of this long press operation begins after the fourth checkpoint and ends before the fifth checkpoint. In other words, this period of no operation is located between each checkpoint, i.e., within the period in which the effect can be continued by restarting operation.

The long press timer shown in (d) measures time even during periods when the long press operation is interrupted.

The long press checkpoint shown in (e) is a period of no operation described above that begins after the fourth checkpoint and ends before the fifth checkpoint. As with the checkpoint shown in FIG. 179(e), this period of no operation is also determined to be a period of continuous long press operation. Similarly, the long press flag shown in (f) also indicates "1" for this period of no operation.

The long press charge image shown in (g) is from a period of no operation described above that begins after the fourth checkpoint and ends before the fifth checkpoint arrives, so similar to the long press charge image shown in FIG. 179(g), an image of the long press charge rising is also displayed during this period of no operation.

In this way, after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, if no operation is detected except at the checkpoint (judgment timing), the execution of the long press responsive effect continues until the judgment timing arrives, and based on the detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 at the checkpoint, the execution of the long press responsive effect continues further. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation stops after the long press responsive effect has started, the long press responsive effect can be enjoyed until the next checkpoint arrives, and if the operation is resumed, the long press responsive effect can be enjoyed further.

Using Figure 181, we will explain the long press charge effect when a long press operation different from those shown in Figures 179 and 180 is performed. Below, we will explain the differences from the long press charge effect shown in Figures 179 and 180.

In this description, as the effect execution function described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 ends the execution of the long press charge effect when, after the decision button 81 is pressed and held down by the player at a specified judgment timing, the decision button 81 is detected as being pressed down by the player, but the decision button 81 is no longer detected as being pressed down by the player by the next judgment timing.

The operation timing shown in (c) is temporarily suspended 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, and then resumed 2.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. In other words, the operation of the long press of the decision button 81 is suspended for 0.30 seconds from 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance to 2.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance.

The long press timer shown in (d) measures time even during periods when the long press operation is interrupted.

The long press checkpoint shown in (e) arrives 2.50 seconds (the fifth checkpoint) after the start of the long press charge effect, during the no-operation period shown in (c). Therefore, at the fifth checkpoint, it is determined that there has been no operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81. This ends the long press charge effect. Note that, as shown in (c), if operation is resumed thereafter, the long press charge effect may be restarted from the beginning if the remaining time allows for the long press charge effect to be executed.

For example, if it is determined that a long press operation is performed for 0.10 seconds from 2.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and the long press operation is continued from 2.70 seconds to 5.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, a long press operation for 3.00 seconds can be achieved.

The long press flag shown in (f) falls (becomes "0") 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (the fifth checkpoint) based on the determination that the decision button 81 has not been operated in a long press mode. Note that if the long press charge effect is resumed, the flag rises again (becomes "1") 2.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect when the long press mode operation is resumed. The long press flag remains in the raised state until 5.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect.

The long press charge image shown in (g) returns to 0 percent 0.03 seconds after the long press charge image indicating 49 percent charge is displayed 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, i.e., 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance (the fifth checkpoint). If the long press operation is then resumed, the long press charge image will resume rising from 2.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance.

In this way, after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, if no operation is detected except at the checkpoint (judgment timing), the execution of the long press response effect continues until the judgment timing arrives, and at the checkpoint, based on the fact that no operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected, the execution of the long press response effect ends. As a result, even if detection of the player's operation stops after the long press response effect has started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives, but if the operation is neglected, it is possible to prevent the long press response effect from being enjoyed any further.

Next, the display mode of the long press response effect will be described using FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the display mode of the long press response effect when a long press operation is performed.

The long press response performance is executed during the execution of the variable display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 42, for example, during the display of the reach display performance shown in (a) and the reach development performance shown in (b). The reach development performance is, for example, a confrontation performance between the player's character and an enemy character, suggesting a super reach. The long press response performance is a long press charge performance in which power for an attack is stored according to the time that the decision button 81 is pressed and held when the player's character attacks an enemy character in this confrontation performance, and a long press charge attack performance in which an attack is performed based on the power stored as a result of the long press charge performance.

Before executing the long press response performance, a preview performance is executed on the third pattern display device 42 to notify the start of the long press response performance as shown in (c). For example, a long press preview image 45a is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 to notify the operation of the long press of the decision button 81, such as "Press and hold the button to charge up and defeat the enemy!" The display time of the long press preview image 45a is, for example, about 2 seconds.

When the display of the long press warning image 45a ends, the third symbol display device 42 displays a long press request image 45b requesting a long press of the decision button 81 as shown in (d), and a long press charge image 45c indicating that the charge is 0%. The long press request image 45b is, for example, an image including picture information of the decision button 81 and text information of "Long press!". The long press charge image 45c is text information of "0% charge" indicating that the decision button 81 has not been operated in a long press mode, or that the decision button 81 has been pressed but not yet in a long press mode. The start timing of the long press response performance is the start timing of the long press charge performance, which is the display timing of the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c.

If the decision button 81 is not pressed and held, the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c are displayed for three seconds after the start of display (i.e., the start of the long press charge effect). If the decision button 81 is not pressed and held within this period, the long press charge effect ends.

When the operation of the decision button 81 is determined to be a long press operation, images are displayed in which the charge of the attack power increases according to the time the operation in the long press mode continues, as shown in (e) to (g). (e) is an image 0.03 seconds after the timing when it is determined to be a long press operation (1.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), and a long press charge image 45c with 1% charge is displayed. (f) is an image 1.50 seconds after the timing when it is determined to be a long press operation (2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), and a long press charge image 45c with 50% charge is displayed. (g) is an image 3.00 seconds after the timing when it is determined to be a long press operation (4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), and a long press charge image 45c with 100% charge is displayed. Note that the long press request image 45b is also displayed during the period when the long press charge image 45c is displayed.

When the long press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge, as shown in (h), a charge attack image 45d-A called "Ultimate A Attack" is displayed based on the fact that the long press operation has been performed for 91-100% of the specified time. The "Ultimate A Attack" may or may not result in a big win as the variable display. If the variable display results in a big win, then in the reach development performance that follows, a state in which the player's character is likely to win as shown in (i) is displayed, and as shown in (j), the player's character's victory in the reach development performance, that is, the big win combination of the development patterns, is displayed, and as shown in (k), the screen returns to the normal screen and the big win combination of the decorative patterns is displayed.

Next, a display mode of a long press response effect different from that of FIG. 182 will be described using FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the display mode of a long press response effect when a long press operation different from that of FIG. 182 is performed.

In the explanation using FIG. 182 above, we have explained the long press response effects when the player continues to press and hold the decision button 81. Here, however, we will explain the long press response effects when the player interrupts and then resumes pressing and holding the decision button 81. Note that we will start from the start of the long press charge effect.

At the start of the long press charge effect, the third pattern display device 42 displays a long press request image 45b and a long press charge image 45c, as shown in (a). When it is determined that the player's operation of the decision button 81 has resulted in a long press operation, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases, as shown in (b). 2.26 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the long press charge image 45c becomes 42 percent charged, as shown in (c). 0.03 seconds later (i.e. 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), it becomes 43 percent charged, as shown in (d).

At this point, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode when the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays 43% charge (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), interrupting the operation in the long press mode. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to 44% charge 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, rises to 45% charge 2.35 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, rises to 46% charge 2.38 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, rises to 47% charge as shown in (e) 2.41 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and rises to 48% charge as shown in (f) 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect.

When the long press charge image 45c shown in (f) displays 48% charge (2.45 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance), the decision button 81 is pressed again to resume operation in the long press mode. After resumption, the long press charge image 45c rises to 49% charge 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, and rises to 50% charge shown in (g) 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. As the long press mode operation continues thereafter, the long press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge shown in (h) 4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. When the long press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge, a charge attack image 45d-A called "Ultimate A Attack" shown in (i) is displayed. If the result of the variable display is a jackpot, then in the reach development performance that follows, as shown in (j), it is displayed that the player's character is likely to win, and as shown in (k), the player's character's victory in the reach development performance, that is, the jackpot combination of development symbols, is displayed, and then as shown in (l), the screen returns to the normal screen and the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed.

In this way, if the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected while a long press charge effect is being executed, the long press charge effect is not terminated and a predetermined effect (e.g., a long press charge effect) is executed for a predetermined period of time (the period from when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected until the next checkpoint arrives, or the period from when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected until operation is resumed before the next checkpoint arrives), so the interest of the long press response effect can be improved more effectively than if the effect were to end when operation detection was discontinued.

In addition, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press corresponding effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, the long press charge effect continues for a predetermined period of time, so that it is possible to maintain the unity of the effect before and after the detection of the operation is interrupted.In addition, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press corresponding effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, the change in the display mode of the long press charge effect that was being executed at the time when it was determined that the operation of the decision button 81 was not detected for a predetermined period of time continues, so that it is possible to appropriately inform the player that it is necessary to continue the operation in a long press mode in order to continue the change in the display mode.

Next, a display mode of a long press response effect different from those in FIGS. 182 and 183 will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing the display mode of a long press response effect when a long press operation different from those in FIGS. 182 and 183 is performed.

Here, we will explain the display mode when the player interrupts the long press operation of the decision button 81, the long press charge effect ends, and the long press charge effect is newly executed from the point of resumption. Note that here, too, we will explain from the start point of the long press charge effect.

At the start of the third pattern display device 42, a long press request image 45b and a long press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed. When it is determined that the player's operation of the decision button 81 has resulted in a long press operation, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases, as shown in (b). 2.26 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, the long press charge image 45c becomes 42 percent charged, as shown in (c). 0.03 seconds later (i.e. 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance), it becomes 43 percent charged, as shown in (d).

When the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays 43% charge (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press mode, interrupting the operation in the long press mode. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to 44% charge 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, rises to 45% charge 2.35 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, rises to 46% charge 2.38 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, rises to 47% charge as shown in (e) 2.41 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and rises to 48% charge 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect shown in (f).

Here, the player does not press the decision button 81 again during the period when the long press charge image 45c displays 48% charge (the period from 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect). Without the player pressing the decision button 81 again, 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 49% as shown in (g). Then, without the player pressing the decision button 81 again, 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the next fifth checkpoint arrives. At the fifth checkpoint, it is determined that the player has not performed a long press operation, so as shown in (h), the long press charge image 45c is displayed as an image showing 0% charge. The long press charge effect ends at this point, but since it can be redone within the remaining time, the long press request image 45b continues to be displayed.

When the player resumes pressing and holding the decision button 81 2.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the long press charge effect will start over 2.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c rises to 1% charge as shown in (i) 2.73 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, continues to rise thereafter, rises to 40% charge as shown in (j) 3.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and reaches 100% charge as shown in (k) 5.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. When the long press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge, a charge attack image 45d-A called "Ultimate A Attack" as shown in (l) is displayed.

If the result of the changing display is a jackpot, then, in the same way as described above, the game will display an indication that the player's character is likely to win in the reach development performance that follows, and the game will display the player's character's victory in the reach development performance, i.e., the jackpot combination of the development symbols, and then the game will return to the normal screen and the jackpot combination of the decorative symbols will be displayed.

The long press response effect may end when the long press charge effect ends, or if it is possible to redo the long press charge effect with the remaining time, the long press charge effect may be redoed by resuming the long press operation.

In this way, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press charge effect has started, the player can enjoy the long press charge effect until the next checkpoint arrives, and if the operation is resumed, the player can enjoy further long press-responsive effects. Also, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press charge effect has started, the player can enjoy the long press charge effect until the next checkpoint arrives, but if the operation is neglected, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the long press charge effect any further. As a result, the interest of the long press charge effect can be suitably improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 44 is equipped with a frame button 80 (e.g., the decision button 81) that is operated by the player, a CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs the main control related to the game, and a performance execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 that causes the third pattern display device 42 to execute a predetermined display performance (e.g., a variable display performance) based on the result of the jackpot determination by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, and the above-mentioned performance execution function executes a long press-responsive performance (e.g., a long press charge performance and a long press charge attack performance that is executed as a result thereof) during the predetermined display performance when the decision button 81 is operated in a specific manner (e.g., a long press mode) within the effective period in which the operation of the decision button 81 is effective, and continues to execute the long press-responsive performance even if it is determined that the decision button 81 has not been operated in a long press mode within the period in which it is determined whether or not the decision button 81 has been operated in a long press mode (e.g., the period from the start of the long press charge performance to the maximum execution time of the long press charge performance of 6.00 seconds). The predetermined display effect is not limited to a variable display effect, but may be other display effects such as a big win round effect. The operation in a specific mode is not limited to a long press of a button, but may be a long pull of a lever, a continuous tap of a button, etc.

As a result, even if the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press mode is interrupted after the long press response effect has started, if the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press mode is resumed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in a long press mode is determined, the execution of the long press response effect will continue, so there is no need to start over with the operation of the decision button 81 and wait for the time until the long press response effect returns to the state before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-0).

The above-mentioned effect execution function is an operation detection function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 that can detect the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.01 seconds) during the valid period, and when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected at a judgment timing set at a specific interval longer than 0.01 seconds (for example, every 0.30 seconds) and determines whether or not to continue the execution of the long press response effect. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect has started, if the player resumes operating the decision button 81 by the judgment timing, the execution of the long press response effect will continue, so there is no need to re-operate the decision button 81 from scratch and wait for the time until the long press response effect returns to the state before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above.

The above-mentioned effect execution function continues to execute the long press response effect after the determination timing based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at the determination timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect has started, if the player resumes operating the decision button 81 by the determination timing, the execution of the long press response effect will continue after this determination timing, so there is no need to start over by operating the decision button 81 from scratch and wait for the time until the long press response effect becomes a long press mode. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-2).

The above-mentioned effect execution function ends the long press response effect at a judgment timing based on the fact that the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is not detected at the judgment timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode. As a result, if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is not resumed by the judgment timing after the detection of the player's operation has ceased after the long press response effect has started, the long press response effect ends at this judgment timing, making it easier to reduce neglect of operation. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-3).

The effect execution function described above continues to execute the long press response effect until the judgment timing arrives when the operation of the decision button 81 is long pressed and no operation is detected except at the judgment timing. This allows the player to enjoy the long press response effect until the judgment timing arrives, even if the detection of the player's operation stops after the long press response effect has started. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be appropriately improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-4) above, for example.

The effect execution function described above continues execution of the long press response effect until the judgment timing arrives when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press and no operation is detected except at the judgment timing, and further continues execution of the long press response effect based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at the judgment timing. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation stops after the long press response effect has started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives, and if the operation is resumed, the long press response effect can be enjoyed even further. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-5).

The above-mentioned effect execution function continues execution of the long press response effect until the judgment timing arrives when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and no operation is detected except at the judgment timing, and ends execution of the long press response effect at the judgment timing based on the fact that no operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected. As a result, even if detection of the player's operation stops after the long press response effect has started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives, but if the operation is neglected, the long press response effect cannot be enjoyed any further. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-6).

The above-mentioned effect execution function also continues the execution of the long press color change effect even if the decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press operation during the period in which the decision button 81 is pressed and held for a certain period of time during which it is determined whether the decision button 81 has been pressed and held for a certain period of time. As a result, even if the decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press operation after the long press response effect has started, the execution of the long press response effect continues, so there is no need to start over from scratch with the operation of the operating means just because an operation other than the long press operation has been performed. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-0).

The effect execution function described above executes a predetermined effect (e.g., a long press response effect) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., the period until the next checkpoint arrives) without terminating the long press response effect when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected during the execution of the long press response effect. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period of time without terminating the long press response effect, which makes it possible to preferably improve the interest of the long press response effect compared to ending the effect when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P3-1).

The above-mentioned predetermined effect is an effect that continues a specific operation response effect (for example, a long press response effect) for a predetermined period of time. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, the long press response effect continues for the predetermined period of time, and since there is a unity of the effect before and after the detection of the operation is interrupted, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation response effect compared to a case where the effect ends when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P3-2).

The effect execution function described above executes a predetermined effect for a predetermined period of time until the judgment timing arrives. As a result, even if the determination button 81 is pressed and the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press corresponding effect after the operation, the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period of time until the judgment timing arrives, so that the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be improved more appropriately than if the effect was ended when the detection of the operation was interrupted. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P4-3).

The above-mentioned effect execution function may be such that, after a predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives, the player is informed or notified at the judgment timing that the decision button 81 has been stopped being operated. With this configuration, even if the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press corresponding effect, the player can be informed at the judgment timing that the operation needs to be resumed after the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives, so that the interest of the long press corresponding effect can be improved more suitably than if the effect was ended when the detection of the operation was interrupted. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P4-4).

The above-mentioned continuation effect is an effect that continues the change in the display mode of the long press response effect that was being executed at the time when it was determined that no operation of the decision button 81 was detected for the above-mentioned predetermined period. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, the change in the display mode of the long press response effect that was being executed at the time when it was determined that no operation of the decision button 81 was detected for the predetermined period continues, so it is possible to conveniently inform the player that it is necessary to continue the operation in the long press mode in order to continue the change in the display mode. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P3-3).

The above-mentioned effect execution function may continue to execute the long press corresponding effect until the judgment timing arrives when the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected except at the judgment timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and a lottery is held at the judgment timing based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player, and if the lottery results in a win, the execution of the long press corresponding effect may be further continued. With this configuration, even if the detection of the player's operation stops after the specific operation corresponding effect has started, the long press corresponding effect can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives, and if the operation is resumed and the lottery is won, the specific operation corresponding effect can be further enjoyed. As a result, the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-7).

The above-mentioned effect execution function may continue to execute the long press response effect until the judgment timing arrives when the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected except at the judgment timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and a lottery is held at the judgment timing based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player, and if the lottery result is a loss, the execution of the long press response effect may be terminated. With this configuration, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect has started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the judgment timing arrives, and if the operation is resumed and the lottery is won, the long press response effect can be enjoyed further, but if the lottery is lost, the long press response effect cannot be enjoyed any more. As a result, the interest of the long press response effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-8).

In Example 44, when the decision button 81 that was being pressed and held was released as an operation different from the long press mode during the long press charge performance, the long press charge performance continued, but a performance different from the long press charge performance may be executed. The display mode of the long press charge performance in this example will be described.

In this embodiment, if operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected while a long press charge effect is being executed, a predetermined effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined effect is different from the long press charge effect that is executed during a predetermined period of no operation. This predetermined effect is also an effect that indicates that the long press charge effect has not ended. Specifically, this predetermined effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the player that there has been no operation of the decision button 81 for the above-mentioned predetermined period of time, and that operation needs to be resumed.

Using FIG. 185, we will explain a specific presentation that is displayed when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the display mode of the long press response presentation when the long press operation of Example 45 is performed. Here, we refer to the long press response presentation described in Example 44 above and explain from the start of the long press charge presentation, but we will explain the case where the player stops operating the decision button 81 and then resumes the operation later than in Example 44.

At the start of the third pattern display device 42, a long press request image 45b and a long press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed. When it is determined that the player's operation of the decision button 81 has resulted in a long press operation, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases, as shown in (b). 2.26 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, the long press charge image 45c becomes 42 percent charged, as shown in (c). 0.03 seconds later (i.e. 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance), it becomes 43 percent charged, as shown in (d).

Here, when the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays 43% charge (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance), the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press mode, interrupting the operation in the long press mode. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to 44% charge 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. At this time, a predetermined image other than the images constituting the long press charge performance, such as the long press notice image 45a and the long press request image 45b, is displayed on the third pattern display device 42. Specifically, this predetermined image is, for example, a long press release notification image 45e composed of text information such as "You didn't press long!" In other words, the display of the long press release notification image 45e notifies the player that the operation of the decision button 81 has ceased, and as a result, it is possible to indicate that the long press charge performance has not ended.

After this, the long press release notification image 45e continues to be displayed as long as the decision button 81 is not operated, and the charge increases to 45 percent 2.35 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, increases to 46 percent 2.38 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, increases to 47 percent as shown in (e) 2.41 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, and increases to 48 percent 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance shown in (f).

Here, the player does not press the decision button 81 again during the period when the long press charge image 45c displays 48 percent charge (the period from 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect). Without the player resuming pressing the decision button 81, 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 49 percent as shown in (g). Then, without the player resuming pressing the decision button 81, 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the next fifth checkpoint arrives. At the fifth checkpoint, it is determined that the player has not performed a long press operation, so as shown in (h), the long press charge image 45c is displayed as an image indicating 0 percent charge.

Here, since the long press release notification image 45e alone was not enough to make the player resume operation of the Decision button 81, when the long press charge image 45c reaches 0% charge, the long press charge image 45c and the long press release notification image 45e are replaced with an effect (restart prompt image 45e1) in which the player's character PY, as shown in (i), speaks a line consisting of a text image saying, "You can't attack unless you have enough power! Please hold down the button!" The display of the restart prompt image 45e1 is not an effect that simply explains the operation like the long press release notification image 45e that has been displayed up until now, but an effect that informs the player that it is necessary to resume operation of the Decision button 81 in connection with the upcoming story development of the reach development effect, and therefore increases the player's interest in resuming operation of the Decision button 81.

The re-operation prompt image 45e1 may not only display the line "You can't attack without enough power! Hold down the button!" as a single line, but may also display another line following this line, such as "Lend me your strength!". This makes it possible to increase interest in resuming operation of the decision button 81 by displaying various lines during the period until the operation of the decision button 81 is resumed.

The player finally resumes the operation of the long press charge effect 4.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect due to this re-operation prompt image 45e1, and the long press charge effect is restarted 4.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c rises to 1% charge as shown in (j) 4.73 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. At this time, the long press release notification image 45e has been erased. It continues to rise thereafter, and rises to 40% charge as shown in (k) 5.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, but ends at 40% charge at 6.00 seconds after the start of the effect. Since the long press charge image 45c is within the range of 1 to 49% charge, a charge attack image 45d-C called a "quick C attack" as shown in (l) is displayed.

If the result of the variable display is a jackpot, then in the reach development performance that follows, a win for the player's character in the reach development performance, i.e. a jackpot combination of development symbols, is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal screen and a jackpot combination of decorative symbols is displayed. If the result of the variable display is a miss, then in the reach development performance that follows, a win for the enemy character in the reach development performance, i.e. a miss combination of development symbols, is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal screen and a miss combination of decorative symbols is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 45, when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected during the execution of a long press corresponding effect (for example, a long press charge effect), the above-mentioned effect execution function executes a predetermined effect (for example, a long press release notification image 45e or a re-operation prompt image 45e1) for a predetermined period without terminating the long press charge effect. This predetermined effect is a different effect from the long press charge effect (the effect that displays the long press charge image 45c and the long press release notification image 45e) that is executed for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press charge effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, an effect different from the long press charge effect is executed for a predetermined period, so that the interest of the long press charge effect can be improved by a different effect from the long press charge effect, compared to the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-1) above.

The separate effect described above is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of time and suggests or informs the player that the operation of the decision button 81 has ceased (for example, the long press release notification image 45e or the image 45e1 urging the player to operate it again). As a result, if the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press charge effect, the separate effect can inform the player that the operation needs to be resumed for a predetermined period of time, which can preferably improve the interest of the long press charge effect compared to when the effect ends when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P4-2).

The effect that is executed when the decision button 81 is released during the long press charge effect as an operation other than the long press mode may be an effect different from that in Example 45.

In this embodiment, when the decision button 81 is released during the long press charge performance as an operation different from the long press mode, the performance that is executed is a blackout performance in which the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 on which the long press charge performance was displayed goes dark. By executing such a blackout performance for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to suggest or notify the end of the long press charge performance. In this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned embodiments 44 and 45, once the long press charge performance has ended, the long press charge performance will not resume.

The display mode of the long press response effect in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 186. Figure 186 is a diagram showing the display mode of the long press response effect when the long press operation of Example 46 is performed. Here, the long press response effect described in Example 45 above will be referenced and the explanation will begin from the start of the long press charge effect, but in this embodiment, it will be explained as a configuration in which the player cannot resume operation after interrupting the operation of the decision button 81.

At the start of the third pattern display device 42, a long press request image 45b and a long press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed. When it is determined that the player's operation of the decision button 81 has resulted in a long press operation, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases, as shown in (b). 2.26 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, the long press charge image 45c becomes 42 percent charged, as shown in (c). 0.03 seconds later (i.e. 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance), it becomes 43 percent charged, as shown in (d).

At this point, when the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays a charge of 43 percent (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance), the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press mode, interrupting the operation in the long press mode. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to a charge of 44 percent 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance. At this time, the third pattern display device 42 displays a predetermined image (for example, a long press release notification image 45e saying "You didn't press long enough!") that is other than the images that make up the long press charge performance, such as the long press warning image 45a and the long press request image 45b.

After this, the long press release notification image 45e continues to be displayed as long as the decision button 81 is not operated, and the charge increases to 45 percent 2.35 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, increases to 46 percent 2.38 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, increases to 47 percent as shown in (e) 2.41 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, and increases to 48 percent 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance shown in (f).

Here, the player does not press the decision button 81 again during the period when the long press charge image 45c displays 48 percent charge (the period from 2.44 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect). Without the player resuming pressing the decision button 81, 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 49 percent as shown in (g). Then, without the player resuming pressing the decision button 81, 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the next fifth checkpoint arrives. At the fifth checkpoint, when it is determined that the player has not performed a long press operation, the long press charge effect ends at 49 percent charge.

Here, in the third symbol display device 42, when the long press charge effect is ended, the long press request image 46b, the long press charge image 45c, and the long press release notification image 45e are erased, and the screen goes dark to display the blackout image 45e2. The display of this blackout image 45e2 allows the player to clearly understand that the long press charge effect that had been executed up until now has ended. After the display of this blackout image 45e2, a text image (long press end notification image 45e3) such as "Charge effect ended! You can no longer hold the button down!" is displayed, indicating that the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode shown in (l) is no longer necessary. The display of this long press end notification image 45e3 allows the player, who does not notice the end of the long press charge effect from the blackout image 45e2, to clearly understand that the long press charge effect that had been executed up until now has ended, and that the long press operation is no longer valid.

The long press charge effect ended when the charge reached 49 percent, and since the long press charge image 45c is within the range of 1 to 49 percent charge, the charge attack image 45d-C shown in (l) called a "quick C attack" is displayed. Note that the long press charge effect may end completely by displaying the blackout image 45e2 or the long press end notification image 45e3, without displaying the charge attack image 45d-C.

If the result of the variable display is a miss, then in the subsequent reach development performance, as shown in (j), the player's character's attack is displayed as not being very strong, and then, after receiving a counterattack from the enemy character, as shown in (k), the enemy character's victory in the reach development performance is displayed, i.e., a reach-miss combination of the development pattern is displayed, and then, as shown in (l), the screen returns to the normal screen and a reach-miss combination of the decorative pattern is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 46, the above-mentioned effect execution function executes a predetermined effect (for example, display of the long press release notification image 45e) for a predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives, and then executes an effect that suggests or notifies the end of the long press charge effect (for example, display of the blackout image 45e2 or the long press end notification image 45e3) at the judgment timing. As a result, even if the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode and the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press charge effect, the end of the effect can be notified to the player at the judgment timing after the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period until the judgment timing arrives, so that the interest of the long press charge effect can be improved more suitably than if the effect was ended when the detection of the operation was interrupted. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P4-5).

In this embodiment, the effect suggesting or notifying the end of the long press charge effect is an effect that displays a blackout image 45e2 and a long press end notification image 45e3, but it may also be an effect that displays only either the blackout image 45e2 or the long press end notification image 45e3.

In the above-mentioned Examples 45 and 46, the long press release notification image 45e was only displayed within one variable display period, but it may be possible for the image to be displayed over multiple variable display periods during the period when the hand is released from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press mode.

In this case, the long press release notification image 45e may display the time that the hand is released from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode, in addition to the text information "You didn't press long!". In other words, the sub-control device 262 may be provided with a counter that counts the time that the hand is released from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode.

Furthermore, in this case, if the total time that the hand is released from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode exceeds a specific time, this may be reflected in a change in the state of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 42. If the time that the hand is released from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode exceeds a certain time during one long press response presentation, the count may be reset to 0. In this way, by having the player repeat the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode for an appropriate amount of time in each long press response presentation of the multiple variable display presentations, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will tire of the long press response presentation.

The change in the state of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 42 is, for example, when the total time the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds a specific time, the change in the presentation that changes according to the likelihood of winning is made larger. For example, if the presentation that changes according to the likelihood of winning is a hold display, when the total time the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds a specific time, a popular character is displayed nearby the hold display with a high likelihood of winning, and a less popular character is displayed nearby the hold display with a low likelihood of winning. If the total time the hand is released from the decision button 81 does not exceed a specific time, such a character is not displayed in the hold display, and the hold change is displayed only in the color of the hold display. As a result, when the total time the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds a specific time, the likelihood of winning indicated by the hold change can be more easily understood than before the total time the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds the specific time.

The change in the state of the presentation is not limited to a presentation (visual information) displayed on the third pattern display device 42, but may also be a sound (auditory information) output from the sound output unit 24. For example, when the total time that the hand is off the decision button 81 exceeds a specific time, the volume of the notification sound to indicate a high likelihood of a jackpot is made louder than before the total time that the hand is off the decision button 81 exceeds the specific time. Conversely, before the total time that the hand is off the decision button 81 exceeds the specific time, the volume is made low and difficult to hear. In this way, when the total time that the hand is off the decision button 81 exceeds the specific time, the likelihood of a jackpot can be easily determined by the volume of the notification sound.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 47, the above-mentioned effect execution function displays the result of the operation of releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode (for example, displaying the long press release notification image 45e) during the execution of one specified display effect (for example, a variable display effect), and displays the result of the different operation displayed during the execution of one specified display effect during the execution of the next specified display effect or during the execution of a subsequent specified display effect. In other words, the result of the different operation performed during the execution of one specified display effect is displayed during the execution of the specified display effect and during the execution of the subsequent specified display effect. This makes it possible to suitably improve the interest of the long press corresponding effect through the operation of releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0A) above.

The above-mentioned effect execution function also changes the state of the effect being executed during the execution of a specific display effect, depending on the results of different operations indicated during the execution of the specific display effect. This makes it possible to further increase the interest of the long press-responsive effect through the operation of releasing the decision button 81, which is an operation different from the long press mode.

In the above-described embodiment, the long press response performance was described as a long press charge performance in which charge is accumulated based on a long press operation for a predetermined time (3 seconds), but the long press response performance may be a performance different from the long press charge performance. The long press response performance in this embodiment is a long press color change performance in which the color of the color change image 45h (Fig. 196) displayed on the third pattern display device 42, which will be described later, changes in accordance with the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press mode. Each component for executing this long press color change performance will be described below.

The long press color change effect is an effect in which the color change image 45h changes multiple times in accordance with the operation of the long press of the decision button 81, and the expectation of a big win increases according to the number of times the color change image 45h changes. For example, the color change image 45h changes from white to blue to yellow to rainbow colors. The color change image 45h is set so that the expectation of white is the lowest and the expectation of rainbow is the highest.

As one of its effect execution functions, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an effect continuation lottery function that draws a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the long press color change effect during the valid period during which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid and during the period during which the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode. The effect continuation lottery function is executed in steps S4801C to S4805, steps S4808 to S4811, steps S4815 to S4818, and steps S4822 to S4825 of the color change lottery process (FIG. 189) described below. When it is determined that the player is operating the decision button 81 at a checkpoint (judgment timing) and the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery (color change lottery) is to continue the execution of the long press color change effect (color change), the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 continues the execution of the long press color change effect (color change) at the next specific interval (for example, the period until the next checkpoint).

The control for executing the long press color change effect will be explained using Figs. 187 to 190. Fig. 187 is a flowchart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device of Example 48. Fig. 188 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and effect process by the sub-control device. Fig. 189 is a flowchart showing the color change lottery process by the sub-control device. Fig. 190 is a flowchart showing the color change lottery process following Fig. 189.

The variable display mode setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 187. Note that for the same process as the variable display mode setting process described with reference to FIG. 40, please refer to the above explanation, and the process related to the long press color change effect unique to this embodiment will be described.

In step S2474D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the received variation pattern designation command is a command with a long press color change effect. Specifically, the variation pattern designation command determines whether or not a long press color change effect is to be provided using the long press color change pattern selection table (FIG. 193) described below. If a long press color change effect is to be provided, the process proceeds to step S2474E; if not, the process ends.

In step S2474E, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the long press color change pattern. Specifically, using a long press color change pattern selection table described below, the CPU 551 selects a long press color change pattern from among the four long press color change patterns A, B, C, and D, and proceeds to step S2474F.

In step S2747F, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the long press color change effect flag to 1 and proceeds to step S2747G. In step S2747G, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the long press color change effect setting process described below, and ends this process.

Next, the decision button input monitoring and rendering process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 188. Note that for the same processing as the decision button input monitoring and rendering process described with reference to FIG. 175, please refer to the above explanation, and the processing related to the long press color change rendering unique to this embodiment will be described.

When pressing of the decision button 81 is detected in step S2312, in step S4501A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press color change effect flag described above is 1. If the long press color change effect flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4502, otherwise the process ends. If the long press color change effect operation is within the valid period (step S4502) and the long press flag is 0 (step S4503), the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts a long press timer (step S4504), performs a long press determination (steps S4504, S4505, S4506), and proceeds to step S4506A. If the long press flag is 1, a long press operation is in progress, so the process proceeds to step S4507A.

In step S4506A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the white display flag to 1 to display the start of the long press color change effect in white, and proceeds to step S4507A. In step S4507A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the color change lottery process described below. The color change lottery process is a process that is executed continuously while the decision button 81 is being operated in a long press mode.

If the determination button 81 is not pressed in step S2312, in steps S4512A and S4513, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the long press operation has ceased during the long press color change presentation. In steps S4514 to S4515, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the long press operation will be resumed by the time the next checkpoint arrives. If the long press operation has not been resumed by the time the next checkpoint arrives, in steps S4516 to S4519, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 ends the long press color change presentation. If the long press operation has been resumed by the time the next checkpoint arrives, the long press color change presentation continues.

In this way, even in the case of the long press color change effect, even if detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press color change effect has begun, if the player resumes operating the decision button 81 by the next checkpoint (judgment timing), the execution of the long press color change effect will continue, eliminating the need to wait from the beginning for the decision button 81 to be operated in a long press state.

Next, the color change lottery process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be explained using Figures 189 and 190.

In step S4801A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the checkpoint passing counter is 0. If the checkpoint passing counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4801B, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4801C. In other words, if it is the start point of the long press color change performance, the following process is performed from step S4801B, and if the checkpoint has been passed at least once, the following process is performed from step S4801C.

In step S4801B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads the long press color change pattern by referring to the color change pattern selection table described below, and proceeds to step S4801C. The color change pattern selection table stores the relationship between the change pattern and the highest color that can be changed by the color change. This allows the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 to determine whether there is a possibility of a first, second, or third color change in the steps described below.

In step S4801C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is time for a color change lottery. The color change lottery is held periodically during the period in which the long press operation is being performed. The color change lottery timing occurs multiple times between checkpoints, for example, when the long press color change performance flag becomes 1 and the long press flag becomes 1, and occurs at a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) or a predetermined number of interrupts equivalent thereto. The color change lottery timing may be a shorter time (e.g., every 0.01 seconds, which is the timing of operation detection) or a predetermined number of interrupts equivalent thereto. If it is time for a color change lottery, proceed to step S4802; if not, end this process.

In step S4802, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the value of a color change lottery counter for determining whether the color change lottery is a win or a loss, and proceeds to step S4803. In step S4803, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to a color change lottery table described below to determine whether the value of the color change lottery counter is a win or a loss. The likelihood of winning the value of the color change lottery counter varies depending on the type of long press color change pattern and the number of times the checkpoint is passed, as described below. If the value of the color change lottery counter is a win, proceed to step S4804, and if the value of the color change lottery counter is a loss, proceed to step S4805.

In step S4804, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the color change flag to 1 and proceeds to step S4806A. In step S4805, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the color change flag to 0 and proceeds to step S4806A. Whether the color change flag is set to 1 or 0 is determined, for example, by whether the value of the color change lottery counter is a win in the color change lottery held immediately before the checkpoint. In this way, the timing of the color change lottery can be flexibly adapted even if it includes a color change pattern that significantly changes the timing of the checkpoint.

The decision as to whether to set the color change flag to 1 or 0 may be made based on whether the color change lottery counter has a winning value at least once in the color change lottery held between checkpoints, and whether the color change flag will be set to 1 at the next checkpoint. In this way, the longer the period during which the long press operation is performed, the more opportunities there are for the color change lottery.

In step S4806A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not there is a possibility of a first color change (color change from white to blue). With the exception of long press color change pattern D, if it is long press color change pattern A to C, there is a possibility of a first color change. If there is a possibility of a first color change, proceed to step S4806B, and if there is no possibility of a first color change, proceed to step S4806C. In step S4806C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the white color at the start of the performance and ends this process.

In step S4806B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is the first color change timing. The first color change timing is set to coincide with the first checkpoint. If it is the first color change timing, proceed to step S4807A, and if not, proceed to step S4812A.

In step S4807A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4807B. In step S4807B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the checkpoint passage counter by +1 and proceeds to step S4808.

If the long press flag is not 1 in step S4807A, proceed to step S4807C. The long press flag is not 1 when the first checkpoint is reached without detecting a long press operation in step S4515 (FIG. 188) described above. In this case, in step S4807C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the color return flag to 1 in order to return the color of the color-change image 45h to the color at the start of the performance, and ends this process. If the long press operation is repeated with the remaining time, this process will be repeated from the beginning.

In step S4808, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the color change lottery flag described above is 1. If the color change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4809; if not (if the color change flag is 0), the process proceeds to step S4811. In step S4809, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the blue display flag to 1 to execute the first color change, and the process proceeds to step S4810. In step S4810, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the value of the color change flag to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4812. In step S4811, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the initial color (white) from the start of the performance, and the process proceeds to step S4812A.

Here, in the case of long press color change pattern A, a maximum of three color changes (any between 0 and 3) will occur through the color change lottery. In the case of long press color change pattern B, a maximum of two color changes (any between 0 and 2) will occur through the color change lottery. In the case of long press color change pattern C, a maximum of one color change (any between 0 and 1) may occur through the color change lottery. In the case of long press color change pattern D, there will be zero color changes through the color change lottery.

Note that 0 times indicates that there was no color change at the first color change timing (when the color change flag is 0). In this case, the color remains the same as when it was first performed. 1 time indicates that the color changed at the first color change timing, but not at the second color change timing. 2 times indicates that the color changed at the first and second color change timings, but not at the third color change timing. 3 times indicates that the color changed at all color change timings from the first to the third.

In step S4812A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not there is a possibility of a second color change (color change from blue to yellow). Except for long press color change patterns C and D, if it is long press color change pattern A or B, there is a possibility of a second color change. If there is a second color change, proceed to step S4813, otherwise proceed to step S4812B. In step S4812B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the color from the first color change and ends this process.

In step S4813, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is the second color change timing. The second color change timing is aligned with the second checkpoint. If it is the second color change timing, proceed to step S4814A, otherwise proceed to step S4819.

In step S4814A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4814B. In step S4814B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the checkpoint passage counter by +1 and proceeds to step S4815.

If the long press flag is not 1 in step S4814A, proceed to step S4814C. The long press flag is not 1 when the second checkpoint is reached without detecting a long press operation in step S4515 (FIG. 188) described above. In this case, in step S4814C, similar to Example 44, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the color return flag to 1 in order to return the color of the color-change image 45h to the color (white) at the start of the performance, and ends this process. If the long press operation is repeated with the remaining time, this process is repeated from the beginning.

In step S4815, it is determined whether the color change flag is 1. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether to execute a color change based on the result of the color change lottery when the second color change timing is reached. If the color change flag is 1, proceed to step S4816; if not, proceed to step S4818.

In step S4816, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the yellow change flag to 1 to execute the second color change, and proceeds to step S4817. In step S4817, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the color change flag to 0, and proceeds to step S4819. In step S4818, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the color (blue) resulting from the first color change, and ends this process.

In step S4819, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not there is a possibility of a third color change. Except for long press color change patterns B, C, and D, if it is long press color change pattern A, there is a possibility of a third color change. If there is a third color change, proceed to step S4820; if not, end this process.

In step S4820, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is the third color change timing. The third color change timing is set to coincide with the third checkpoint. If it is the third color change timing, the process proceeds to step S4821A, otherwise the process ends.

In step S4821A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4821B. In step S4821B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the checkpoint passage counter by +1 and proceeds to step S4822.

If the long press flag is not 1 in step S4821A, proceed to step S4821C. The long press flag is not 1 when the third checkpoint is reached without detecting a long press operation in step S4515 (FIG. 188) described above. In this case, in step S4807C, similar to Example 44, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the color return flag to 1 in order to return the color of the color-change image 45h to the color (white) at the start of the performance, and ends this process. If the long press operation is repeated with the remaining time, this process is repeated from the beginning.

In step S4822, it is determined whether the color change flag is 1. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether to execute a color change based on the result of the color change lottery when the third color change timing is reached. If the color change flag is 1, proceed to step S4823; if not, proceed to step S4825.

In step S4823, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the rainbow color change flag to 1 to execute the third color change, and resets the second yellow color change flag to 0, and proceeds to step S4824. In step S4824, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the color change flag to 0 and ends this process. In step S4825, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the color (yellow) resulting from the second color change, and ends this process.

In this way, the long press color change effect varies the display mode (e.g., color change patterns A, B, C, D) of the long press corresponding effect depending on the predetermined conditions (long press color change pattern selection table described below) obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. For example, with color change pattern A, a maximum of three color changes will occur, with color change pattern B, a maximum of two color changes will occur, with color change pattern C, a maximum of one color change will occur, and with color change pattern D, no color change will occur. This makes it possible to suitably increase the interest of the long press color change effect by varying the display mode of the long press color change effect depending on the predetermined conditions obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

In addition, the effect continuation lottery function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 continues the execution (color change) of the long press color change effect based on the detection of an operation at the judgment timing (checkpoint) and the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery (win of the color change lottery), so the interest of the long press response effect can be improved more appropriately than if the execution of the long press response effect continued if the operation detection continued.

In addition, because the lottery for continuing the effect (color change lottery) is held at intervals shorter than the specific interval (the interval between checkpoints), there are more opportunities to draw the lottery than if it were drawn at the judgment timing (checkpoint), which can favorably improve the interest of the long press response effect.

Next, the long press color change effect setting process will be explained using FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the long press color change effect setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262. The long press color change effect setting process is a process for setting a command for executing the long press color change effect from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. Note that a description of the same process as the long button press effect setting process in FIG. 177 will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the operation of the decision button 81 is within the valid period, and if it is determined in step S4606 that the value of the long press flag is 1 and the previous long press flag is 0, then in step S4609A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the returned flag, which will be described later, is 1. If the returned flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4609B, and if the returned flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609L.

In step S4609B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a white display command to start the long press color change performance, and proceeds to step S4609C. In step S4609C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the blue change flag is 1. If the blue change flag is 1, proceeds to step S4609D, otherwise proceeds to step S4609E. In step S4609D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a blue change command to change the color of the color change image 45h from white to blue, and proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4609E, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the yellow change flag is 1. If the yellow change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609F, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4609G. In step S4609F, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a yellow change command to change the color of the color-changed image 45h from blue to yellow, and then proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4609G, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the rainbow color change flag is 1. If the rainbow color change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609H, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4609I. In step S4609H, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a rainbow color change command to change the color of the color-changed image 45h from yellow to rainbow colors, and then proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4609I, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the return flag described above in steps S4807C, S4814C, and S4821C is 1. If the return flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609J; if not, the process proceeds to step S4618. In step S4609J, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a return command to return the color of the color-changed image 45h to the initial color (white) at the start of the performance, and then proceeds to step S4609K.

In step S4609K, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the returned flag to 1, indicating that the color of the color-change image 45h has been returned to the color at the beginning of the presentation. This allows the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 to determine whether the change in the long press flag from 0 to 1 in step S4609A described above is an event at the start of the long press color change presentation, or an event caused by the player passing a checkpoint while releasing the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press during the long press color change presentation.

If it is determined in step S4609A that the returned flag is 1, in step S4609L, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the remaining time of the long press color change performance possible time (e.g., 6 seconds) at the time when the determination button 81 is pressed and held again is less than the time until the long press color change pattern reaches its highest color (highest color arrival time). The long press color change pattern A reaches its highest color (rainbow) in 2.1 seconds from the start of the change. The long press color change pattern B reaches its highest color (yellow) in 0.9 seconds from the start of the change. The long press color change pattern C reaches its highest color (blue) in 0.3 seconds from the start of the change. If the remaining time is less than the highest color arrival time, proceed to step S4609M, otherwise proceed to step S4609N.

In step S4609M, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the returned flag to 0 in order to execute the long press color change effect again in the remaining time, and proceeds to step S4609B described above, and executes the processing from step S4609C onwards. In step S4609N, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a color change impossible notification command to inform the player that the long press color change effect cannot be executed in the remaining time, and proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4618, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press color change effect has ended, i.e., whether the long press color change effect available time (6 seconds) described above has ended. If the long press color change effect has reached the end time, the process proceeds to step S4619; if not, the process ends.

In step S4619, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a long press effect end command and proceeds to step S4620. In step S4620, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the button long press effect flag to 0 and proceeds to step S4621. In step S4621, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the long press flag, long press timer, checkpoint passage counter, white/blue/yellow/rainbow color change flag, and returned flag to 0, and ends this process.

Next, the long press color change effect display process will be explained using FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the long press color change effect display process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45. The long press color change effect display process is a process that the display control device 45 uses to cause the third pattern display device 42 to display a long press color change effect. A description of the same process as the long button press effect display process of FIG. 178 will be omitted.

In step S4706A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a white display command has been received. If a white display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706B; if not, the process proceeds to step S4706C. In step S4706B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a white image on the third pattern display device 42 to start the long press color change performance, and ends this process. This white image is the color change image 45h.

In step S4706C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a blue display command has been received. If a blue display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706D, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4706E. In step S4706D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a blue image on the third pattern display device 42 and ends this process. The color-changing image 45h may replace the white image with a blue image, or may display the blue image while keeping the white image displayed.

In step S4706E, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a yellow display command has been received. If a yellow display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706F, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4706G. In step S4706F, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a yellow image on the third pattern display device 42 and ends this process. The color-changing image 45h may replace the blue image with a yellow image, or may display the yellow image while keeping the blue image displayed.

In step S4706G, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a rainbow display command has been received. If a rainbow display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706H, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4706I. In step S4706H, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a rainbow image on the third pattern display device 42 and ends this process. The color-changing image 45h may replace the yellow image with a rainbow image, or may display the rainbow image while keeping the yellow image displayed.

In step S4706I, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a return command has been received. If a return command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706J, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4706K. In step S4706J, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the color-changed image 45h at the start of the performance on the third pattern display device 42, and ends this process. The color-changed image 45h may be returned to white if it was white at the start of the performance, or may be colorless or displayed if it was colorless or not displayed at the start of the performance.

In step S4706K, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a color change impossible notification command has been received. If a color change impossible notification command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706L, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4723 (determining end of performance time). In step S4706L, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a color change impossible notification image on the third pattern display device 42 to inform the player that the long press color change performance cannot be executed, and ends this process. The color change impossible notification image may be an image that clearly indicates that the long press color change performance cannot be executed, or may be an image that suggests that the long press color change performance cannot be executed. In addition, other communication methods such as sound may be used instead of images, as long as they can inform the player that the long press color change performance cannot be executed.

Next, we will use Figure 193 to explain how to select the color change pattern used in the long press color change effect described above. Figure 193 is a table for selecting color change patterns.

The long press color change effect is executed in a specific change pattern. The specific change pattern is a change display effect with a high probability of winning among the change display effects. For example, the specific change pattern is a super reach with a change time of 120 seconds, which has a high probability of winning and is executed in the range of "141 to 198" of the change type counter CS1 (0 to 198) when it results in a jackpot result, and in the range of "171 to 198" of the change type counter CS1 (0 to 198) when it results in a miss result. In detail, among the super reaches (super reaches E and F) with a change time of 120 seconds, if it results in a jackpot result, it is executed in the jackpot super reach E (120 seconds) where the change type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 120", and in the case of a miss result, it is executed in the miss super reach E where the change type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 199".

In the color change pattern in the long press color change performance, when the big win super reach E is reached, if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "0-85", color change pattern A is selected, if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "86-105", color change pattern B is selected, if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "106-115", color change pattern C is selected, and if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "116-120", color change pattern D is selected. Also, when the miss super reach E is reached, if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "0-59", color change pattern B is selected, if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "60-119", color change pattern C is selected, and if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "120-199", color change pattern D is selected. Color change pattern A is set to be selected only in the case of a win and not in the case of a miss, but it may be set to be selected in either case.

In this way, the display mode (color change pattern) of the long press color change effect differs depending on the expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result (for example, a jackpot result), so the differences in the display mode of the long press color change effect (color change patterns A to E) can suggest the expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result.

Note that since the long press response effect is a long press color change effect, the display mode of the color change image 45h is changed depending on the likelihood of winning a jackpot. However, if the long press response effect is a different display effect, the display mode of different targets may be changed. For example, in the case of a long press response effect (long press treasure hunt effect) in which treasure chests are opened one after another in response to a long press operation, the higher the likelihood of winning a jackpot, the more treasure chests that can be found and the more valuable treasures that can be found from the treasure chests.

Next, we will explain the color change lottery used in the long press color change effect described above using Figure 194. Figure 194 is a table for the color change lottery.

When color change pattern A shown in (a) is selected, in a color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter count is 0, "0-44" of the color change lottery counter (0-99) will be a winner (change to blue) and "45-99" will be a loser (remain white). In a color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter count is 1, "0-29" of the color change lottery counter (0-99) will be a winner (change to yellow) and "30-99" will be a loser (remain blue). In a color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter count is 3, "0-19" of the color change lottery counter (0-99) will be a winner (change to rainbow) and "20-99" will be a loser (remain yellow).

When color change pattern B shown in (b) is selected, in a color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter has counted 0, "0-44" on the color change lottery counter (0-99) will be a winner (change to blue) and "45-99" will be a loser (remain white). In a color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter has counted 1, "0-29" on the color change lottery counter (0-99) will be a winner (change to yellow) and "30-99" will be a loser (remain blue).

When color change pattern C shown in (c) is selected, in the color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter count is 0, "0-44" on the color change lottery counter (0-99) will be a winning combination (changing to blue), and "45-99" will be a losing combination (remaining white).

When color change pattern D shown in (d) is selected, in a color change lottery held when the checkpoint passage counter has counted 0, all numbers "0 to 99" on the color change lottery counter (0 to 99) will be lost (remain white).

In this way, the more times the color change lottery is held, the less likely it is that a color change to a color with a higher expectation will be selected, suggesting to the player that the more color changes there are, the higher the expectation of a big win.

Next, the color change display in the long press color change performance will be explained using Figure 195. Figure 195 is a graph showing the color change display for each color change pattern. Figure 196 is a diagram explaining the color change display modes for color change patterns A to D. Here, it will be explained that the player continues to press and hold the OK button 81 during the long press color change performance, or that even if the operation is interrupted, the checkpoint does not overlap.

When a color change lottery is held for color change patterns A to D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the color change according to the color change graphs shown in Figures 195(a) to (d). (a) to (d) show the operation mode (ON state when pressed, or OFF state when not pressed) at each timing. Symbols such as (g1) and (g2) shown together with the operation mode indicate the color change image 45h at each timing shown in Figure 196. Note that the display modes of the color change shown in Figures 196(a) to (l) correspond to color change pattern A1, which will be described later, but are also used to explain other color change patterns at each timing.

(a) shows color change pattern A, which may become rainbow-colored as the final result of the long press color change performance. For ease of explanation, color change pattern A is divided into color change patterns A1 to A4 according to the lottery results for each color change lottery. Color change pattern A4, as shown by the dashed line, is a pattern in which white is maintained because the color change lottery result at the first color change timing (check point CP1 in the figure; the same applies below) is a miss. Specifically, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range shown in Figure 196 (c) and (d) are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained from 0.3 seconds after the start of the change until the end of the change (i.e., 3.0 seconds after the start of the change).

As shown by the dashed line, color change pattern A3 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a win, so the color changes from white to blue, and at the second color change timing (checkpoint CP2 in the figure; the same applies below) the result of the color change lottery is a lose, so the color remains blue. Specifically, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g3) (g4) that change color within the blue range shown in Figure 196 (e) (f) are displayed from 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change to 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change, and blue color change image 45h (g4) is maintained from 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change to the end of the color change.

As shown by the two-dot chain line, the color change pattern A2 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a win, so the color changes from white to blue, the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing is a win, so the color changes from blue to yellow, and the result of the color change lottery at the third color change timing (checkpoint CP3 in the figure; the same below) is a miss, so the yellow color is maintained. Specifically, until 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range shown in the figure are displayed, from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g3) (g4) that change color within the blue range shown in Figure 196 (g) (h) are displayed from 0.9 seconds to 2.1 seconds after the start of the color change, and the yellow color change image 45h (g6) is maintained from 2.1 seconds after the start of the color change until the end of the color change.

As shown by the solid line, the color change pattern A1 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a win, so the color changes from white to blue, the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing is a win, so the color changes from blue to yellow, and the result of the color change lottery at the third color change timing is a win, so the color changes from yellow to rainbow colors. Specifically, until 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color in the white range are displayed, from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g3) (g4) that change color in the blue range are displayed, from 0.9 seconds to 2.1 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g5) (g6) that change color in the yellow range are displayed, and from 2.1 seconds after the start of the color change to the end of the color change, the rainbow color change image 45h (g7) shown in FIG. 196 (i) is displayed.

(b) shows color change pattern B, which may end up yellow as the final result of the long press color change performance. For ease of explanation, color change pattern B is divided into color change patterns B1 to B3 according to the results of each color change lottery. Color change pattern B is characterized in that it takes more time to reach the highest point of yellow than color change pattern A.

As shown by the dashed line, color change pattern B3 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a loss, so white is maintained. Specifically, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained from 0.3 seconds after the start of the change until the end of the change (i.e. 3.0 seconds after the start of the change). Color change pattern B3 has the same color change as color change pattern A4 shown in (a) above.

As shown by the dashed line, color change pattern B2 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a win, so the color changes from white to blue, and the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing is a loss, so the color remains blue. Specifically, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g3) (g4) that change color within the blue range are displayed from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change, and blue color change image 45h (g4) is maintained from 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change until the end of the color change. Color change pattern B2 has the same color change as color change pattern A3 shown in (a) above.

As shown by the two-dot chain line, the color change pattern B1 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a win, so the color changes from white to blue, the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing is a win, so the color changes from blue to yellow, and the result of the color change lottery at the third color change timing is a miss, so the yellow color is maintained. Specifically, until 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color in the white range are displayed, from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g3) (g4) that change color in the blue range are displayed, from 0.9 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g5) (g6) that change color in the yellow range are displayed, and from 1.8 seconds after the start of the color change until the end of the color change, the yellow color change image 45h (g6) is maintained. Thus, color change pattern B1 is characterized in that it takes 0.3 seconds longer to reach the yellow peak than color change pattern A2 shown in (a) above.

(c) shows color change pattern C, which may become blue as the final result of the long press color change performance. For ease of explanation, color change pattern C is divided into color change patterns C1 and C2 according to the lottery results for each color change lottery. Color change pattern C2 is a pattern in which white is maintained because the color change lottery result at the first color change timing is a miss, as shown by the dashed line. Specifically, color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color within the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained from 0.3 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change (i.e., 3.0 seconds after the start of the change). Color change pattern C2 undergoes the same color change as color change pattern A4 shown in (a) above and color change pattern B3 shown in (b) above.

As shown by the dashed line, color change pattern C1 is a pattern in which the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a win, so the color changes from white to blue, and the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing is a loss, so the color remains blue. Specifically, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the color change, color change images 45h (g3) (g4) that change color within the blue range are displayed from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change, and blue color change image 45h (g4) is maintained from 0.9 seconds after the start of the color change until the end of the color change. Color change pattern C1 undergoes the same color change as color change patterns A3 shown in (a) and B2 shown in (b) described above.

(d) shows color change pattern D, which remains white as the final result of the long press color change performance. Color change pattern D is a pattern in which the white color is maintained because the result of the color change lottery at the first color change timing is a miss, as shown by the dashed line. Specifically, color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change color within the white range are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained from 0.3 seconds after the start of the change until the end of the change (i.e., 3.0 seconds after the start of the change). Color change pattern D has the same color change as color change pattern A4 shown in (a), color change pattern B3 shown in (b), and color change pattern C2 shown in (c) described above.

In this way, it is difficult to distinguish between change patterns A4, B3, C2, and D, because the color change image 45h only changes to white in all of them. For change patterns A3, B2, and C1, the color change image 45h only changes color once (to blue), so the player can tell that they have a higher chance of winning a jackpot than change patterns A4, B3, C2, and D. For change patterns A2 and B1, the color change image 45h changes color twice (to yellow), so the player can tell that they have a higher chance of winning a jackpot than change patterns A3, B2, and C1. Change pattern A1 is a guaranteed jackpot, so it can most likely heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

Next, we will explain the color change when an operation other than the long press operation is performed on the OK button 81 during the long press color change performance. Figure 197 is a graph showing the color change for each color change pattern when an operation other than the long press operation is performed.

Here, as an operation other than a long press operation, for example, the player performs an operation of repeatedly pressing and holding the decision button 81 and then releasing the decision button 81 at 0.3 second intervals. Note that the first 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation is spent determining whether or not the operation is a long press operation.

The long press color change effect is set up so that when the Decision button 81 is pressed and held down and then an operation other than the long press (for example, releasing the Decision button 81 or pressing the Decision button 81 again) is performed, the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. In other words, the long press color change effect is set up so that when the Decision button 81 is pressed and held down and then an operation other than the long press is not detected at the judgment timing by the player, but the Decision button 81 is detected as being operated by the player after the judgment timing, the difference in display mode suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. This point will be explained in detail below.

In (a), color change pattern A is selected. 0.1 seconds after the start of the operation, the color change starts based on the determination that the operation is a long press. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (a1) of FIG. 198, which will be described later. 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than a long press. When the first checkpoint is reached, the player's hand is released from the decision button 81 due to an operation other than a long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, 0.4 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point. A color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (a2) of FIG. 198, which will be described later.

0.5 seconds after the change starts, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the change starts, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 0.6 seconds after the change starts to 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.9 seconds after the change starts is shown in (a3) of FIG. 198, which will be described later. 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the player releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 again as an operation other than the long press. When the player reaches the first checkpoint for the second time, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.0 seconds after the change starts. A color change image 45h 1.0 seconds after the change starts is shown in (a4) of FIG. 198, which will be described later.

1.1 seconds after the change begins, the player resumes pressing the OK button 81 (third long press). However, 1.2 seconds after the change begins, the color change does not resume, even though it is determined that the operation was a long press. In other words, if the restart point is a timing that does not allow the change to be made up to the highest level of color change pattern A (rainbow, which is the highest color of color change pattern A1), the color change will not resume. A color change image 45h 1.2 seconds after the change begins is shown in (a5) of Figure 198, which will be described later. A color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the change begins is shown in (a6) of Figure 198, which will be described later.

1.7 seconds after the change begins, the player resumes pressing the OK button 81 (a fourth long press). However, 1.8 seconds after the change begins, the color change does not resume, even though it is determined that the operation was a long press. A color-changed image 45h 1.8 seconds after the change begins is shown in (a7) of FIG. 198, which will be described later. A color-changed image 45h 2.1 seconds after the change begins is shown in (a8) of FIG. 198, which will be described later.

2.3 seconds after the change begins, the player resumes pressing the OK button 81 (a fifth long press). However, 2.4 seconds after the change begins, the color change does not resume, even though it is determined that the operation is a long press. A color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the change begins is shown in (a9) of ZC8, which will be described later. A color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the change begins is shown in (a10) of ZC8, which will be described later.

In this way, when color change pattern A, which has the highest probability of winning, is selected, if an operation other than a long press is performed by repeatedly pressing and holding the decision button 81 and then releasing the decision button 81 at 0.3 second intervals, the color of the color change image 45h changes within the white range in response to the long press of the decision button 81 during the first and second long presses, but the color of the color change image 45h does not change during the third through fifth long presses, even if the decision button 81 is pressed and held.

In (b), color change pattern B is selected. 0.1 seconds after the start of the operation, the color change starts based on the determination that the operation is a long press. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (b1) of FIG. 199, which will be described later. 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than a long press. When the first checkpoint is reached, the player's hand is released from the decision button 81 due to an operation other than a long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, 0.4 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point. A color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (b2) of FIG. 199, which will be described later.

0.5 seconds after the change starts, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the change starts, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 0.6 seconds after the change starts to 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.9 seconds after the change starts is shown in (b3) of FIG. 199, which will be described later. 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the player releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 again as an operation other than the long press. When the player reaches the first checkpoint for the second time, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.0 seconds after the change starts. A color change image 45h 1.0 seconds after the change starts is shown in (b4) of FIG. 199, which will be described later.

1.1 seconds after the start of the change, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (third long press). 1.2 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 1.2 seconds after the start of the change to 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (b5) of FIG. 199, which will be described later. 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press. At the time the third first checkpoint is reached, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.6 seconds after the start of the change. A color change image 45h 1.6 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (b6) of FIG. 199, which will be described later.

1.7 seconds after the change begins, the player resumes pressing the OK button 81 (long press for the fourth time). However, 1.8 seconds after the change begins, the color change does not resume, even though it is determined that the operation was a long press. In other words, if the restart occurs at a time when the change cannot be made to the highest level of color change pattern B (yellow, the highest color of color change pattern B1), the color change will not resume. A color change image 45h 1.8 seconds after the change begins is shown in (b7) of Figure 199, which will be described later. A color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the change begins is shown in (b8) of Figure 199, which will be described later.

2.3 seconds after the change begins, the player resumes pressing the OK button 81 (a fifth long press). However, 2.4 seconds after the change begins, the color change does not resume, even though it is determined that the operation was a long press. A color-changed image 45h 2.4 seconds after the change begins is shown in (b9) of FIG. 199, which will be described later. A color-changed image 45h 2.7 seconds after the change begins is shown in (b10) of FIG. 199, which will be described later.

In this way, when color change pattern B, which has the second highest probability of winning after color change pattern A, is selected, if an operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 is repeated at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from a long press mode, the color change image 45h changes color within the white range in response to the long press of the decision button 81 from the first long press to the third long press, but the color change image 45h does not change color even if the decision button 81 is pressed for a fourth and fifth time. From this, it can be seen that if an operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 is repeated at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from a long press mode, if a color change occurs within the white range twice, then it is not color change pattern A.

In (c), color change pattern C is selected. 0.1 seconds after the start of the operation, the color change starts based on the determination that the operation is a long press. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (c1) of FIG. 200, which will be described later. 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than a long press. When the first checkpoint is reached, the player's hand is released from the decision button 81 due to an operation other than a long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, 0.4 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point. A color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (c2) of FIG. 200, which will be described later.

0.5 seconds after the change starts, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the change starts, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 0.6 seconds after the change starts to 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the change starts is shown in (c3) of FIG. 200, which will be described later. 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press. When the player reaches the first checkpoint for the second time, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.0 seconds after the change starts. A color change image 45h 1.0 seconds after the change starts is shown in (c4) of FIG. 200, which will be described later.

1.1 seconds after the change starts, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (third long press). 1.2 seconds after the change starts, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 1.2 seconds after the change starts to 1.5 seconds after the change starts, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the change starts is shown in (c5) of FIG. 200, which will be described later. 1.5 seconds after the change starts, the player releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 again as an operation other than a long press. At the time the third first checkpoint is reached, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than a long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.6 seconds after the change starts. A color change image 45h 1.6 seconds after the change starts is shown in (c6) of FIG. 200, which will be described later.

1.7 seconds after the start of the change, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (fourth long press). 1.8 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 1.8 seconds after the start of the change to 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (c7) of FIG. 200, which will be described later. 2.0 seconds after the start of the change, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press. At the time the fourth first checkpoint is reached, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 2.2 seconds after the start of the change. A color change image 45h 2.2 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (c8) of FIG. 200, which will be described later.

2.3 seconds after the change begins, the player resumes pressing the OK button 81 (a fifth long press). However, 2.4 seconds after the change begins, the color change does not resume, even though it is determined that the operation was a long press. In other words, if the restart occurs at a time when the change cannot be made up to the highest level of color change pattern C (blue, the highest color of color change pattern C1), the color change will not resume. A color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the change begins is shown in (c9) of Figure 200, which will be described later. A color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the change begins is shown in (c10) of Figure 200, which will be described later.

In this way, when color change pattern C, which has the second highest jackpot expectation after color change pattern B, is selected, if the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and releasing the decision button 81 is repeated at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from the long press mode, the color change image 45h changes color within the white range in response to the long press of the decision button 81 from the first long press to the fourth long press, but the color change image 45h does not change color even if the decision button 81 is pressed and held for the fifth time. From this, it can be seen that if the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and releasing the decision button 81 is repeated at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from the long press mode, if the color changes within the white range four times, it is not color change pattern A or B (the jackpot expectation is lower than when color change patterns A and B appear).

In (d), color change pattern D is selected. 0.1 seconds after the start of the operation, the color change starts based on the determination that the operation is a long press. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d1) of FIG. 201, which will be described later. 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation other than a long press. When the first checkpoint is reached, the player's hand is released from the decision button 81 due to an operation other than a long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, 0.4 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point. A color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d2) of FIG. 201, which will be described later.

0.5 seconds after the change starts, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the change starts, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 0.6 seconds after the change starts to 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the change starts is shown in (d3) of FIG. 201, which will be described later. 0.9 seconds after the change starts, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press. When the player reaches the first checkpoint for the second time, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.0 seconds after the change starts. A color change image 45h 1.0 seconds after the change starts is shown in (d4) of FIG. 201, which will be described later.

1.1 seconds after the start of the change, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (third long press). 1.2 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 1.2 seconds after the start of the change to 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d5) of FIG. 201, which will be described later. 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press. At the time the third first checkpoint is reached, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 1.6 seconds after the start of the change. A color change image 45h 1.6 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d6) of FIG. 201, which will be described later.

1.7 seconds after the start of the change, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (fourth long press). 1.8 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 1.8 seconds after the start of the change to 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d7) of FIG. 201, which will be described later. 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than a long press. At the time the fourth first checkpoint is reached, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than a long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 2.2 seconds after the start of the change. A color change image 45h 2.2 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d8) of FIG. 201, which will be described later.

2.3 seconds after the start of the change, the player resumes pressing the decision button 81 (5th long press). 2.4 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation was a long press. From 2.4 seconds after the start of the change to 2.7 seconds after the start of the change, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d9) of FIG. 201, which will be described later. 2.7 seconds after the start of the change, the player again releases his/her hand from the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press. At the point where the first checkpoint is reached for the fifth time, the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press, so the color change is interrupted. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current point to the white starting point 2.8 seconds after the start of the change. A color change image 45h 2.8 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (d10) of FIG. 201, which will be described later.

In this way, when color change pattern D, which has the lowest jackpot expectation, is selected, if an operation other than a long press mode, such as pressing and holding the decision button 81 and then releasing the decision button 81, is repeated at 0.3 second intervals, the color change image 45h changes color within the white range in response to the first long press to the fifth long press of the decision button 81. From this, if an operation other than a long press mode, such as pressing and holding the decision button 81 and then releasing the decision button 81, is repeated at 0.3 second intervals, and the color changes within the white range all five times, it can be seen that the color change pattern is not A, B, or C (the jackpot expectation is low).

In this way, the long press color change effect can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode during the execution of color change patterns A to D, and then an operation other than the long press mode (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed. Specifically, the long press color change effect can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and there is no detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 at the judgment timing, but there is detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 after the judgment timing. This creates an interesting element in that a suggestion of the likelihood of a jackpot is given by performing a different operation other than the long press mode operation, such as releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again, during the long press color change effect.

Next, the display mode of the long press color change performance for each color change pattern will be described. Figure 198 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the long press color change performance for color change pattern A. Figure 199 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the long press color change performance for color change pattern B. Figure 200 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the long press color change performance for color change pattern C. Figure 201 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the long press color change performance for color change pattern D.

In other words, when the decision button 81 is pressed and held down and then an operation other than the long press (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed, the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect suggests a predetermined condition (likelihood of winning) obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. Specifically, the long press color change effect differs in whether or not a specific notification (display of a specific notification image 45i, described later) is executed when the decision button 81 is pressed and held down and there is no detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 at the determination timing, but there is detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 after the determination timing. This point will be explained in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 198, when color change pattern A is selected, the player repeats the action of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode, and the color changes within the white range from the first to second long press. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image changing color within the white range shown in (a1) is displayed during the first long press period, and an image of returning to the original state shown in (a2) is displayed during the first period when the decision button 81 is released. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image changing color within the white range shown in (a3) is displayed during the second long press period, and an image of returning to the original state shown in (a4) is displayed during the second period when the decision button 81 is released.

In addition, during the third to fifth long press periods, the specific notification image 45i "It won't go up anymore!" is displayed three times, indicating that no color change will occur. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, the specific notification image 45i "It won't go up anymore!" shown in (a5) is displayed during the third long press period, and the original image shown in (a6) is displayed during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the third time. As an operation different from the long press mode, the specific notification image 45i "It won't go up anymore!" shown in (a7) is displayed during the fourth long press period, and the original image shown in (a8) is displayed during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the fourth time. As an operation different from the long press mode, the specific notification image 45i "It won't go up anymore!" shown in (a9) is displayed during the fifth long press period, and the original image shown in (a10) is displayed during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the fifth time.

In this way, if an operation different from the long press mode is performed by repeatedly pressing and holding the decision button 81 and then releasing the decision button 81, a color change occurs within the white range at the beginning of the long press color change performance, but if no color change occurs from the middle to the end and a specific notification image 45i is displayed instead, it can be seen that this is color change pattern A, which has the highest probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 199, when color change pattern B is selected, if the player performs an operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from the long press mode, the color changes in the white range during the first to third long presses, as in the case of color change pattern A being selected. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image in which the color changes in the white range shown in (b1) is displayed during the first long press period, and an image of the return to the original state shown in (b2) is displayed during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the first time. Also, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image in which the color changes in the white range shown in (b3) is displayed during the second long press period, and an image of the return to the original state shown in (b4) is displayed during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the second time. Also, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image in which the color changes in the white range shown in (b5) is displayed during the third long press period, and an image of the return to the original state shown in (b6) is displayed during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the third time.

Furthermore, during the fourth and fifth long press periods, the specific notification image 45i is displayed twice. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, during the fourth long press period, the specific notification image 45i shown in (b7) stating "It won't go up any more!" is displayed, and during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the fourth time, the original image shown in (b8) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, during the fifth long press period, the specific notification image 45i shown in (b9) stating "It won't go up any more!" is displayed, and during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the fifth time, the original image shown in (b10) is displayed. In this way, no color change occurs during the fourth and fifth long press periods, and the text image "It won't go up any more!" is displayed twice.

In this way, if an operation different from the long press mode is performed by repeatedly pressing and holding the decision button 81 and then releasing the decision button 81, the color will change to white until the middle of the long press color change performance, but if there is no color change toward the end and instead a specific notification image 45i is displayed, it can be seen that this is color change pattern B, which has the second highest probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 200, when the color change pattern C is selected, if the player performs an operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and releasing the decision button 81 at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from the long press mode, the color changes in the white range during the first to fourth long presses. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, during the first long press period, an image of color change in the white range shown in (c1) is displayed, and during the first release of the decision button 81, an image of return to the original state shown in (c2) is displayed. During the second long press period, an image of color change in the white range shown in (c3) is displayed, and during the second release of the decision button 81, an image of return to the original state shown in (c4) is displayed. During the third long press period, an image of color change in the white range shown in (c5) is displayed, and during the third release of the decision button 81, an image of return to the original state shown in (c6) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, during the fourth long press, an image that changes color within the white range shown in (c7) is displayed, and during the period when the OK button 81 is released for the fourth time, an image that returns to the original state shown in (c8) is displayed.

In addition, the fifth long press does not cause a color change, and the specific notification image 45i is displayed once. In other words, as an operation different from the long press mode, the specific notification image 45i "It won't go up anymore!" shown in (c9) is displayed during the fifth long press, and the original image shown in (c10) is displayed during the period when the OK button 81 is released for the fifth time.

In this way, when the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 is repeated as an operation different from the long press mode, the color changes in the white range until the end of the long press color change performance, but if the color does not change at the end and instead a specific notification image 45i is displayed, it can be seen that this is color change pattern C, which has the third highest jackpot expectation. Also, in color change pattern C, the specific notification image 45i saying "It won't go up any more!" is displayed less frequently than in color change pattern A and color change pattern B. Therefore, when the player repeats the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode during the long press color change performance, the player realizes that the more times the specific notification image 45i saying "It won't go up any more!" is displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation. This creates an interesting effect in that, during the long press color change presentation, the player is given an indication of the likelihood of winning by repeating the operation of releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press operation.

As shown in FIG. 201, when color change pattern D is selected, if the player performs an operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 at 0.3 second intervals as an operation different from the long press mode, the color changes in the white range for all the first to fifth long presses. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, during the first long press period, an image of color change in the white range shown in (d1) is displayed, and during the first release of the decision button 81, an image of return to original state shown in (d2) is displayed. During the second long press period, an image of color change in the white range shown in (d3) is displayed, and during the second release of the decision button 81, an image of return to original state shown in (d4) is displayed. During the third long press period, an image of color change in the white range shown in (d5) is displayed, and during the third release of the decision button 81, an image of return to original state shown in (d6) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, during the fourth long press period, an image changing color in the white range shown in (d7) is displayed, and during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the fourth time, an image of returning to the original state shown in (d8) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, during the fifth long press period, an image changing color in the white range shown in (d9) is displayed, and during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the fifth time, an image of returning to the original state shown in (d10) is displayed.

In other words, in color change pattern D, unlike color change patterns A to C, the specific notification image 45i saying "It won't go up any more!" is not displayed. Therefore, if the player repeats the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press operation during the long press color change performance, the player will realize that the likelihood of a jackpot is low if the specific notification image 45i saying "It won't go up any more!" is not displayed. This creates an interesting element in that the player is given a hint as to the likelihood of a jackpot by repeating the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 for a long time and then releasing the decision button 81 as an operation other than the long press operation during the long press color change performance.

In this way, the long press color change effect can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect when the decision button 81 is pressed and held during the execution of color change patterns A to D, and then an operation other than the long press mode (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed. Specifically, the long press color change effect can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by the difference in the display mode of the color change image 45h and the specific notification image 45i when the decision button 81 is pressed and held and there is no detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 at the judgment timing, and there is detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 after the judgment timing. This creates an interesting element in that the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested by performing an operation other than the long press mode, such as repeatedly pressing and holding the decision button 81 and releasing the decision button 81, during the long press color change effect.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 48 is equipped with a decision button 81 operated by the player, a CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs the main control of the game, and a performance execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 that causes the third pattern display device 42 to execute a predetermined display performance based on the result of the big win determination by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The above-mentioned performance execution function executes a long press corresponding performance (e.g., a long press color change performance) during the predetermined display performance when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode within the effective period during which the operation of the decision button 81 is effective, and continues to execute the long press color change performance even if it is determined that the decision button 81 is not operated in a long press mode within the period during which the presence or absence of the operation of the decision button 81 in a long press mode is determined (e.g., the period from the start of the long press color change performance to the maximum execution time of the long press color change performance of 6.00 seconds).

As a result, even if the long press operation of the decision button 81 is interrupted after the long press color change effect has begun, if the long press operation is resumed within the period in which the presence or absence of the long press operation is determined, the long press color change effect will continue to be executed, so there is no need to restart the operation of the decision button 81 from scratch and wait for the long press color change effect to return to the state it was in before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P1-0).

The above-mentioned effect execution function includes an operation detection function capable of detecting the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at a predetermined interval (e.g., 0.01 second interval) during the valid period, and when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, a judgment timing (e.g., the first to third color change timings in each color change pattern) set at specific intervals longer than the predetermined interval determines whether or not to continue the execution of the long press color change effect based on the presence or absence of the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press color change effect has started, if the player resumes operating the decision button 81 by the judgment timing, the execution of the long press color change effect will continue, so there is no need to re-operate the decision button 81 from scratch and wait for the time until the long press color change effect returns to the state before it was interrupted. As a result, the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above.

The above-mentioned effect execution function also continues the execution of the long press color change effect even if the decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press operation during the period in which the decision button 81 is pressed and held for a long time and is determined. As a result, even if the decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press operation after the long press color change effect has started, the execution of the long press color change effect continues, so there is no need to start over from scratch with the operation of the operating means just because an operation other than the long press operation has been performed. As a result, the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-0).

In addition, in the above-mentioned long press response performance, when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and then an operation different from the long press mode (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed, the difference in the display mode of the long press response performance (for example, the number of color changes occurring is smaller for color change patterns A to D as the jackpot expectation increases) suggests the predetermined condition (for example, the jackpot expectation) obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. For example, the more color change patterns A to D cause the color change to resume due to different operations, the lower the jackpot expectation. This makes it possible to suitably improve the interest of the long press response performance by the difference in the display mode of the long press response performance according to the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. In addition, during the long press response performance, an operation different from the long press mode operation, such as releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again, is performed to suggest the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the jackpot determination, which is interesting. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0B) above.

The above-mentioned effect execution function changes the display mode of the long press corresponding effect (e.g., color change pattern A, B, C, D) according to the predetermined conditions obtained as a result of the jackpot determination (e.g., whether it is a jackpot or a miss obtained from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the type of change pattern obtained from the values of the change type counters CS1 and CS2). For example, with color change pattern A, a maximum of three color changes are made, with color change pattern B, a maximum of two color changes are made, with color change pattern C, a maximum of one color change is made, and with color change pattern D, no color change is made. This makes it possible to suitably increase the interest of the long press color change effect by changing the display mode of the long press color change effect according to the predetermined conditions obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-1).

In the above-mentioned long press color change presentation, when the decision button 81 is pressed and held for a long time, and then an operation other than the long press (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed, the difference in the display mode of the long press color change presentation suggests a predetermined condition (likelihood of winning) obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. This creates an interesting element in that a suggestion of the jackpot expectation is given by performing an operation other than the long press operation, such as releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again, during the long press color change presentation. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-2).

In addition, the above-mentioned long press color change performance has a different display mode when the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is not detected at the judgment timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode. For example, in the case of color change patterns A and B, when the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is not detected and the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected (redetected) after the judgment timing (for example, 1.2 seconds after the change starts), an image suggesting or notifying that the color change will not resume (for example, a text image saying "It won't go up anymore!") is displayed. In the case of color change pattern C, when the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected again, for example, 2.4 seconds after the change starts, an image suggesting or notifying that the color change will not resume is displayed. In the case of color change pattern D, even if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected again, the color change is not performed in the first place, so an image suggesting or notifying that the color change will not resume is not displayed. As a result, when the operation of the decision button 81 is released after the long press color change effect has started, the interest of the long press color change effect can be improved by the difference in the display state after the release. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-3).

In addition, the above-mentioned long press color change performance differs in whether or not a specific notification (for example, a specific notification image 45i consisting of the text "It won't go up anymore!") is executed when the operation of the Decision button 81 by the player is not detected at the judgment timing after the operation of the Decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and when the operation of the Decision button 81 by the player is detected after the judgment timing. For example, in the case of color change patterns A to C, if the operation of the Decision button 81 by the player is detected again, and the restart time is a timing when the change cannot be executed to the highest level of the color change pattern, the specific notification image 45i is displayed, but in the case of color change pattern D, the color change is not performed in the first place, so the specific notification image 45i is not displayed. As a result, the interest of the long press color change performance can be appropriately improved depending on whether or not a specific notification is executed when the operation of the Decision button 81 is released after the long press color change performance is started, but the operation is resumed after that. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-6) above, for example.

The above-mentioned predetermined condition is the expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result (e.g., a jackpot result). For example, the expectation of a jackpot result is highest for color change pattern A, which is selected only when a jackpot result is obtained, the second highest for color change pattern B, which is more likely to be selected than color change patterns C and D when a jackpot result is obtained, the third highest for color change pattern C, which is more likely to be selected than color change pattern D when a jackpot result is obtained, and the lowest for color change pattern D, which is least likely to be selected when a jackpot result is obtained. As a result, the expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result is suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change presentation, so that the interest of the long press color change presentation can be suitably improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-8).

The above-mentioned predetermined condition is a change pattern in the display mode of the long press color change effect that is determined according to the degree of expectation. As a result, the difference in the change pattern in the display mode of the long press color change effect suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result, so the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-9).

The effect execution function described above also executes a predetermined effect for a predetermined period of time without terminating the long press response effect if no operation of the operating means is detected during execution of the long press response effect. This predetermined effect is an effect that continues to change the display mode of the specific operation response effect for a predetermined period of time. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, the change in the display mode continues for a predetermined period of time. Since there is continuity in the change in the display mode before and after the detection of the operation is interrupted, the interest of the specific operation response effect can be improved more appropriately than if the effect was terminated when the detection of the operation was interrupted. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P3-3).

In addition, when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and then an operation other than the long press mode (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed, the result of the jackpot determination can be suggested by the mode of another effect other than the long press mode executed during the long press mode and the mode of the long press mode (for example, a text image saying "It won't go up anymore!" and a white image displayed in the long press color change effect). This creates an interesting element in that the result of the jackpot determination is suggested by the mode of another effect other than the long press mode and the mode of the long press mode, which is shown by an operation other than the long press mode operation during the long press mode, such as releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P4-0).

The above-mentioned effect execution function also includes an effect continuation lottery function (processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 in steps S4801C to S4805, steps S4808 to S4811, steps S4815 to S4818, and steps S4822 to S4825 of the color change lottery processing) that draws a lottery for whether or not to continue the long press responsive effect during the valid period during which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid and during the period during which the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, and the above-mentioned effect execution function continues the execution of the long press responsive effect at the next specific interval when it is determined that the player is operating the decision button 81 at the judgment timing and the lottery result of the lottery is to continue the execution of the long press responsive effect. As a result, the execution of the long press responsive effect is continued based on the detection of the operation at the judgment timing and the lottery result of the lottery for the continuation of the effect, so that the interest of the long press responsive effect can be improved more suitably than when the execution of the long press responsive effect is continued if the operation detection continues. This is an example of the gaming machine described above in (P5-0) and (P5-1).

The effect continuation lottery function described above draws, at intervals shorter than the specific interval (for example, every 0.1 seconds or every few interrupts), a lottery to see whether or not to continue the operation-responsive effect at the next specific interval. As a result, the lottery to continue the effect is held at intervals shorter than the specific interval, and there are more opportunities to draw than if the lottery was drawn at the judgment timing, which makes it possible to suitably improve the interest of the long press-responsive effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above (P5-3).

The effect continuation lottery function described above draws a lottery at intervals shorter than the specific interval to determine whether or not to continue the operation-responsive effect at the next specific interval, but it may also draw a lottery at the judgment timing to determine whether or not to continue the long press responsive effect at the next specific interval. This allows the effect continuation lottery to be held at the judgment timing, which increases the chances of drawing a lottery compared to when the long press responsive effect is determined by lottery at the start of the effect, thereby favorably improving the interest of the long press responsive effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P5-2).

In the long press color change presentation of Example 48 described above, when the player passes through a checkpoint while releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode, the color of the color change image 45h is returned to the color at the start of the change, but it is also possible to maintain the color at that time instead of returning it to the color at the start of the change.

Using FIG. 202, another example of color change when an operation of releasing the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from the long press operation in the long press color change performance will be described. FIG. 202 is a graph showing color changes for each color change pattern when an operation different from the long press operation of Example 49 is performed. Note that the operation different from the color change pattern and long press operation is an operation different from the same color change pattern and long press operation as Example 48 described above.

In other words, the display mode of the long press color change presentation differs when, after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, there is no detection of the player operating the decision button 81 in an operation other than the long press mode at the judgment timing. Specifically, the way in which the display mode changes of the long press color change presentation differs when, after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, there is no detection of the player operating the decision button 81 in an operation other than the long press mode at the checkpoint (judgment timing). More specifically, the way in which the display mode changes of the long press color change presentation differs when, after the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, there is no detection of the player operating the decision button 81 in an operation other than the long press mode at the checkpoint, and there is detection of the player operating the decision button 81 after the checkpoint has passed. This point will be explained in detail below.

In (a), color change pattern A is selected. 0.1 seconds after the start of the operation, the color change begins based on the determination that the operation is a long press. Until 0.3 seconds after the change starts, the color change occurs within the white range. A color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the change starts is shown in (a1) of Figure 203, which will be described later. Here, the player releases the decision button 81 from 0.3 seconds after the change starts until 0.5 seconds after, as an operation other than a long press, and then presses and holds the decision button 81 again from 0.5 seconds after the change starts until 0.9 seconds after the change starts.

The color change continues until the first checkpoint (0.3 seconds after the change starts), and if the result of the color lottery is a hit when the first checkpoint is passed, the color change continues, and if the result of the color change is a miss or if the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected due to an operation other than the long press mode as described later, the color at the time of the first checkpoint is reached is maintained. For example, a color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of the change when the result of the first color lottery is a miss or when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected due to an operation other than the long press mode as described later is shown in (a2) of FIG. 203 described later. The color maintenance ends when the operation of the decision button 81 is determined to be in the long press mode again and the result of the color lottery is a hit (for example, 0.6 seconds after the change starts). This color change image 45h 0.6 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a3) of FIG. 203 described later. If the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected due to an operation other than a long press, or if the color lottery result is a loss, the color will continue to be maintained.

0.6 seconds after the change begins, the color change resumes. The resumed color change occurs according to color change pattern A. That is, at the first color change timing, the result of the color change lottery is a win, so the color changes from white to blue; at the second color change timing, the result of the color change lottery is a win, so the color changes from blue to yellow; and at the third color change timing, the result of the color change lottery is a win, so the color changes from yellow to rainbow colors. Specifically, blue is displayed from 0.6 seconds to 1.2 seconds after the change begins, yellow is displayed from 1.2 seconds to 2.4 seconds after the change begins, and rainbow colors are displayed from 2.4 seconds after the change begins until the change ends.

In this case, the color change image 45h 0.9 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a4) of FIG. 203 described below, the color change image 45h 1.2 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a5), the color change image 45h 1.8 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a6), the color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a7), and the color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a8).

In (b), color change pattern B is selected. When color change pattern B is selected, the color change of color change image 45h is the same as when color change pattern A is selected up to the third color change timing, but since the maximum color change is up to yellow, color change image 45h shown in (a7) is maintained from 2.4 seconds after the start of the change.

In (c), color change pattern C is selected. When color change pattern C is selected, the color change of color change image 45h is the same as when color change pattern A is selected up to the second color change timing, but since the maximum color change is up to blue, color change image 45h shown in (c5) is maintained from 1.2 seconds after the start of the change.

In (d), color change pattern D is selected. When color change pattern D is selected, the color change of color change image 45h is limited to the white range, so color change image 45h shown in (a3') is maintained from 0.3 seconds after the change begins.

Next, the display mode of the color change for each color change pattern will be described. FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the color change for each color change pattern. Note that operations that are different from the operations of the color change pattern and long press mode are operations that are different from the operations of the same color change pattern and long press mode as in Example 48 described above.

As shown in (c), when color change pattern A is selected, the color changes in the white range during the period from the first long press to the first decision button 81 being released as an operation different from the long press mode until the first checkpoint is passed. That is, during that period, a color change image 45h (a1) that changes color in the white range is displayed. During the period from the first checkpoint being passed to the first decision button 81 being released as an operation different from the long press mode and until the second long press, the color-changed white image (a1) is maintained. That is, as shown in (d), during this period, a color change image 45h (a2) that maintains its white color is displayed. In this way, during the period from the first checkpoint being passed to the first decision button 81 being released as an operation different from the long press mode, the display of the color change image 45h (a2) that has changed color is maintained, making it more difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed than when the color change returns to the original state.

If the result of the color change lottery is a win at the time of the second long press, the color change of the color change image 45h will resume according to color change pattern A from the time the operation is resumed. At the time of this second long press, an image is displayed indicating that the operation in the long press mode has resumed, at the timing when the color change will resume and the remaining color changes can be completed. Specifically, as shown in (e), a text image (specific notification image 45i) saying "START!" is displayed, indicating that the color change will resume. Then, as shown in (f), a color change begins in the blue range of the color change image 45h. In this way, by the text image saying "START!" being displayed at the time when the operation in the long press mode is resumed, the player can get a hint that a variable display performance with a high expectation of continued color changes is being executed.

The display of the text image "START!" and the output of the sound are executed not only when the result of the color change lottery at the time of the second long press is a win, but also when the result of the color change lottery is a loss. At this time, the color change image 45h (a2) which maintains the white color shown in (d) looks like color change pattern D with low expectations at first glance, but the display of the text image "START!" shown in (e) gives the impression that it is something different from color change pattern D. As a result, by performing an operation other than a long press operation on the decision button 81, it is possible to obtain a hint that a variable display performance with high expectations may actually be being executed, even if a color change that looks like color change pattern D with low expectations is executed.

If the result of the color change lottery is a win, after the text image "START!" is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h (a4) continues in the blue range as shown in (f) even during the period when the decision button 81 is released for the second time as an operation different from the long press mode, as long as the checkpoint is not exceeded. During the third long press period, the color change image 45h changes from blue to yellow, and during the fourth long press period, the color change of the color change image 45h (a6) (a7) continues in the yellow range as shown in (h) and (i). During the fifth long press period, the color change image 45h changes from yellow to rainbow colors. During the fifth long press period when the decision button 81 is released for the fifth time as an operation different from the long press mode, the color change of the color change image 45h (a8) is maintained in the rainbow range as shown in (j). In this way, the color change of color-changing image 45h continues after the "START!" text image is displayed, allowing the player to realize that the "START!" text image being displayed when the long press operation is resumed indicates high expectations.

The above explanation applies not only to cases where the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected at the first determination timing due to an operation other than a long press, but also to cases where the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected across the second and third determination timings.

When color change pattern B is selected, the color change of the color change image 45h is displayed in the same way as when color change pattern A is selected. In other words, since the display of the color change image 45h (a1) that has changed color is maintained during the period in which the first decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press mode after the first checkpoint has been passed, it is difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed. Also, at the time of the second long press, if the result of the color change lottery is a win, an image indicating that the operation in the long press mode has been resumed (a text image of "START!") is displayed at the timing when the color change starts and when the color change can be performed to the end, so the player can get a hint that a variable display performance with high expectations of the color change is being executed from now on. After the text image of "START!" is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h continues to yellow, so the player can notice that the display of the text image of "START!" at the time when the operation in the long press mode is resumed is an indication of high expectations.

As shown in (c), when color change pattern C is selected, the color change of the color change image 45h is displayed in the same way as when color change pattern A is selected. That is, since the display of the color change image 45h that has changed color is maintained during the period when the first decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press mode after the first checkpoint has been passed, it is difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed. Also, at the time of the second long press, if the result of the color change lottery is a win, an image indicating that the operation in the long press mode has been resumed (a text image of "START!") is displayed at the timing when the color change starts and when the color change can be performed to the end, so the player can get a hint that a variable display performance with a high expectation of the color change is being performed from now on. However, since the color change of the color change image 45h is in the blue range after the text image of "START!" is displayed, the player can notice that the expectation of the big win may not increase so much even if the text image of "START!" is displayed at the time when the operation in the long press mode is resumed.

As shown in (d), when color change pattern D is selected, the color change of the color change image 45h is displayed in the same way as when color change pattern A is selected. That is, since the display of the color change image 45h that has changed color is maintained during the period in which the first decision button 81 is released as an operation other than the long press mode after the first checkpoint has been passed, it is difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed. Also, at the time of the second long press, the color change does not occur at the timing of starting the color change, so the above-mentioned text image "START!" is not displayed (indicated as (a3') in the figure). Therefore, the player can get a hint that a variable display performance with a low expectation of not causing a color change is being executed. However, after the text image "START!" is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h is in the white range, and if the text image "START!" is not displayed when the operation in the long press mode is resumed, the player can realize that the expectation of a big win is not increasing that much.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 49, the above-mentioned effect execution function continues the execution of the long press color change effect even if the decision button 81 is released as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode during the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is determined. As a result, even if the decision button 81 is released as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode after the long press color change effect has started, the execution of the long press color change effect continues, so there is no need to start over from scratch with the operation of the operating means just because an operation different from the operation in the long press mode has been performed. As a result, the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-0).

In the above-mentioned long press response performance, when the decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode and then an operation different from the long press mode (for example, releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) is performed, the difference in the display mode of the long press response performance (for example, the color change patterns A to C are maintained and then the color change is resumed by a different operation, but the color change pattern D remains the same) suggests a predetermined condition (for example, the expectation of a big win) obtained as a result of the big win determination. For example, when the color change is resumed after the color is maintained by a different operation, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the color remains the same. This creates an interesting effect in that a suggestion of a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the big win determination is given by performing an operation different from the long press mode operation, such as releasing the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-0B).

In addition, the above-mentioned long press color change effect has a different display mode as described below if, at the judgment timing, the player does not detect an operation of the Decision button 81 that is different from the long press mode after the Decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode. As a result, if the Decision button 81 is released in an operation different from the long press mode after the long press color change effect has started, the difference in the display mode after the release can suitably increase the interest of the long press color change effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-3).

In addition, in the above-mentioned long press color change presentation, if the operation of the Decision button 81 by the player is not detected as being different from the long press at the judgment timing after the Decision button 81 is operated in a long press mode, the way in which the display mode changes will differ as described below. As a result, if the operation of the Decision button 81 is released in an operation other than the long press mode after the long press color change presentation has started, the interest of the long press color change presentation can be suitably improved by the difference in the way the display mode changes after the release. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-4).

In addition, the long press color change effect changes the display mode differently when, after the decision button 81 is pressed and held, there is no detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press mode at the judgment timing, and there is detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 after the judgment timing. For example, in the case of color change patterns A to C, after the decision button 81 is pressed and held, there is no detection of the player's operation of the decision button 81 by an operation other than the long press mode, and there is detection (redetection) of the player's operation of the decision button 81 after the judgment timing, the color at that time is maintained, and then, if there is redetection of the player's operation of the decision button 81, if the player wins the next color change lottery, the color change resumes from the maintained color. In the case of color change pattern D, if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is not detected as being different from the long press mode after the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is performed in a long press mode, even if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is detected again after the judgment timing, the white color is maintained because this is a pattern in which there is no color change to begin with. As a result, if the operation of the decision button 81 is released by an operation different from the long press mode after the long press color change performance has started, but the operation is then resumed, the difference in the way the display mode changes can suitably increase the interest of the long press color change performance. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-5).

In addition, the long press color change effect is different in the presence or absence of a specific notification (for example, the presence or absence of a specific notification image 45i consisting of a text image of "START!") as described below when the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and there is no detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player due to an operation different from the long press mode at the judgment timing, and there is detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player after the judgment timing. For example, in the case of color change patterns A to C, when the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and there is no detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player due to an operation different from the long press mode, and there is re-detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player after the judgment timing, a specific notification displaying the text image of "START!" is executed. In the case of color change pattern D, when the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and there is no detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player due to an operation different from the long press mode, even if there is re-detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player after the judgment timing, since it is a pattern without a color change in the first place, a specific notification displaying the text image of "START!" is not executed. As a result, after the long press color change effect has started, if the operation of the decision button 81 is released by an operation other than the long press pattern, and then the operation is resumed, the entertainment value of the special operation corresponding effect can be appropriately improved depending on whether or not a special notification is executed. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-6).

The specific notification may also be a notification of whether or not the long press color change performance will resume (for example, whether or not the text image "START!" indicating that the color change will resume) is displayed. For example, in color change patterns A to C, when the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long press mode, and there is no detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player in an operation other than the long press mode, and there is a re-detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player after the judgment timing, and the result of the color change lottery is a win, a specific notification may be executed to display the text image "START!". In other words, the text image "START!" may be displayed only when the color change is actually resumed. In this way, when the operation of the decision button 81 is released after the long press color change performance has started, but the operation is resumed after that, the interest of the long press color change performance can be suitably improved by the notification of whether or not the long press color change performance will resume. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-7) above.

The above-mentioned predetermined condition is the likelihood of a jackpot being determined to be a specific result (e.g., a jackpot result). As a result, the difference in the display mode of the long press color change presentation suggests the likelihood of a jackpot being determined to be a specific result, which can favorably increase the interest of the long press color change presentation. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P2-8).

The above-mentioned predetermined conditions are change patterns (e.g., color change patterns A to D) of the display mode of the long press color change effect that are determined according to the expectation of a jackpot. As a result, the expectation of a jackpot that will result in a specific jackpot result is suggested by the difference in the change pattern of the display mode of the long press color change effect, so that the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved.

The effect execution function described above continues the long press color change effect even after the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected based on the result of the effect continuation lottery (for example, the above-mentioned color change lottery) if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is no longer detected within the valid period after the decision button 81 is pressed and held down. As a result, if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press color change effect has started, it is determined whether or not to continue the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect depending on the result of the effect continuation lottery, so that the variety of effects when the detection of the player's operation is interrupted is expanded, and the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be suitably improved. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described above in (P5-4).

In the long press response performance (long press charge performance) of the above-mentioned Example 44, when the operation in the long press mode is interrupted, the value of the charge counter at the time of interruption is displayed. Therefore, if the value of the charge counter at the time of interruption is a specific value (for example, if the ones digit is "7" or the ones digit and the two digits are "7" and "7"), the player may mistakenly believe that the values have reached a value that will lead to a result that is advantageous to the player. In addition, if the long press response performance is a type of performance that accumulates numbers (for example, a performance in which points are acquired, a performance in which the number of defeated enemies is displayed, etc.), since the upper limit number is unknown, such a mistaken belief may easily occur when such a specific value is reached. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed so that the value displayed in the long press response performance (for example, a long press point get performance) at the time of interruption does not become a specific value. The control system for executing the long press point get performance of the gaming machine 10 of Example 44 will be described.

Figure 204 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and performance processing by the sub-control device of Example 50. Figure 205 is a table for selecting a point-getting pattern. Figure 206 is a table for the long press point lottery for each point-getting pattern. Figure 207 is the lottery result of the long press point lottery for each point-getting pattern.

The decision button input monitoring and rendering process by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 204. Note that for the same processing as the decision button input monitoring and rendering process described with reference to FIG. 175, refer to the above explanation, and the processing related to the long press point gain rendering that is unique to this embodiment will be described.

In steps S4501B to S4506, if the long press point get effect flag is 1, it is within the valid period, the long press flag is 0, and a long press operation of the decision button 81 is detected, the long press flag is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step S4509. In step S4509, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the count time of the long press timer is 0.3 n seconds (n = an integer from 1 to 10). If the long press timer has counted 0.3 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4510, and if not, the process ends.

In step S4510, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the checkpoint passing counter by +1 each time the long press timer counts to 0.3 nsec, and proceeds to step S4510A. 0.3 nsec is the checkpoint for the long press point get effect. The long press point get effect lasts for 3 seconds, so there are 10 checkpoints, from 1 to 10.

In step S4510A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the value of the long press point lottery counter. The long press point lottery counter is a loop counter (0 to 100) that adds "1" to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. The counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the long press point addition value by referring to the value of the long press point lottery counter and a long press point addition value table described later.

In step S4510B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds the value of the long press point lottery counter to the current long press point total value, and proceeds to step S4510C. In step S4510C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is time to end the long press point get effect. If the decision button 81 is pressed and held for three seconds, it is determined that it is time to end the long press point get effect. If it is time to end the effect, proceed to step S4510D, and if not, end this process.

In step S4510D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press point total at the end of the long press operation is a specific value. The specific value is, for example, "77." If it is a specific value, the process proceeds to step S4510E, otherwise the process ends. In step S4510E, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs specific value avoidance processing on the long press point total and ends the process. Specifically, the specific value avoidance processing is processing that adds or subtracts a predetermined number to the long press point total that becomes a specific value at the end of the long press point get performance to avoid ending at a specific value.

This makes it possible to make the total long press points be recognized as not being a specific value when the long press operation ends and the total long press points is a specific value. The method of making the total long press points be recognized as not being a specific value is not limited to adding "1", but may also be to add a specific number other than "1", to subtract "1" or a specific number other than "1", or to multiply the total by a specific number.

In steps S4512 to S4515, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that no operation of the decision button 81 has been detected, and if the long press point get performance is in progress and the operation is performed in a long press mode, it determines whether or not the lack of detection continues until the next checkpoint has elapsed. If the lack of detection continues until the next checkpoint has elapsed, it determines that the long press operation has been interrupted and proceeds to step S4515A, and if not, it ends this process.

In step S4515A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the long press point total at the time the long press operation was interrupted is a specific value. The specific value is, for example, "77." If it is a specific value, the process proceeds to step S4515B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a specific value avoidance process on the long press point total, and proceeds to step S4516. Specifically, the specific value avoidance process is a process that adds or subtracts a predetermined number to the long press point total that becomes a specific value at the time the long press point get effect is interrupted, to avoid ending at the specific value. This makes it possible to recognize that the long press point total is not a specific value when it is about to become a specific value at the time the long press operation is interrupted.

In steps S4516, S4517, and S4519, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the long press flag, long press timer, and checkpoint passing counter to 0, and ends the long press point gain effect. This ends the process.

In this way, in the long press point get effect, even if the long press point total value displayed at the time the long press point get effect ends or is interrupted becomes a specific value indicating the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player, the long press point total value actually displayed becomes a value that avoids the specific value by adding or subtracting a specified number to it, so it is possible to reduce in a simple manner the misconception that the player will be in an advantageous state.

Next, referring to Figure 205, we will explain how the point-getting patterns are selected in the long press point-getting performance.

The long press point get effect is executed in a specific variation pattern. Specifically, if a jackpot result is reached, it is executed when the variation type counter CS1 (0-198) is in the range of "141-198" and the variation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "0-120", i.e., a jackpot super reach E (120 seconds). If a miss result is reached, it is executed when the variation type counter CS1 (0-198) is in the range of "171-198" and the variation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "0-199", i.e., a miss super reach E.

In the long press point get performance, when the jackpot super reach E is reached, point get pattern A is selected if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "0-90". Point get pattern A is a pattern in which when the decision button 81 is pressed and held for three seconds, the total long press point value for that three seconds is 90-100 points. If the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "91-110", point get pattern B is selected. Point get pattern B is a pattern in which the total long press point value for three seconds is 80-89 points. If the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "111-120", point get pattern C is selected. Point get pattern C is a pattern in which the total long press point value for three seconds is 70-79 points. Also, in the case of a miss super reach E, if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "0-99", point get pattern B is selected, and if the fluctuation type counter CS2 (0-240) is in the range of "100-199", point get pattern C is selected. Point get pattern A is set to be selected only in the case of a win and not in the case of a miss, but it may be set to be selected in either case.

Next, referring to Figure 206, we will explain the long press point lottery table for each point gain pattern.

In the long press point get performance, when a long press is performed for 3 seconds, 10 long press point lotteries are held each time a checkpoint is passed. A long press point lottery table is used in these 10 long press point lotteries. This long press point lottery table is stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262.

The points selected in each long press point lottery vary depending on the type of point get pattern. In point get pattern A, for example, 10 points are selected in the first through seventh lottery draws, anywhere from 7 to 10 points are selected in the eighth lottery draw, anywhere from 7 to 10 points are selected in the ninth lottery draw, and anywhere from 6 to 10 points are selected in the tenth lottery draw. As a result, in point get pattern A, the total long press point value for a 3-second long press is between 90 and 100 points.

In point get pattern B, for example, 10 points are selected in the first to fourth draws, 9 or 10 points are selected in the fifth draw, 8 or 9 points are selected in the sixth draw, 7 to 9 points are selected in the seventh draw, 6 to 8 points are selected in the eighth draw, 5 to 7 points are selected in the ninth draw, and 5 or 6 points are selected in the tenth draw. As a result, in point get pattern B, the total long press points for a 3-second long press will be 80 to 89 points.

In point get pattern C, for example, 10 points are selected in the first and second draws, 9 or 10 points are selected in the third and fourth draws, 8 or 9 points are selected in the fifth draw, 7 or 8 points are selected in the sixth draw, 6 or 7 points are selected in the seventh draw, 5 or 6 points are selected in the eighth draw, 4 or 5 points are selected in the ninth draw, and 3 or 4 points are selected in the tenth draw. As a result, in point get pattern C, the total long press points for a 3-second long press will go from 70 to 79 points.

Next, referring to Figure 207, we will explain the results of the long press point lottery for each point gain pattern.

(a) shows the points selected in each drawing for each long press point total when point get pattern A is selected. Here, the long press point total becomes a specific value (for example, "77") when 10 points are selected in the first through seventh drawings, 7 points are selected in the eighth drawing, and then the long press operation is interrupted before the ninth drawing is performed. This corresponds to the result of the long press point drawing in the point get pattern when the long press point drawing is performed up to the eighth drawing, in the case surrounded by the double-dashed line, where the result would be 90 or 91 points if the long press point drawing were performed up to the tenth drawing. In other words, in point get pattern A, if the drawing is interrupted at the time of the eighth long press point drawing, the long press point total may become a specific value depending on the drawing result.

(b) shows the points selected in each drawing for each long press point total value when point get pattern B is selected. Here, the long press point total value becomes a specific value (for example, "77") when 10 points are selected in the first to fourth drawings, 9 points are selected in the fifth drawing, 8 points are selected in the sixth drawing, 7 points are selected in the seventh drawing, 7 points are selected in the eighth drawing, and 6 points are selected in the ninth drawing, and then the long press operation is interrupted before the tenth drawing is performed. This corresponds to the drawing result of the long press point drawing in the point get pattern when the long press point drawing is performed up to the ninth drawing, in the case surrounded by the double-dashed line, in which the total number of points is 82 if the long press point drawing is performed up to the tenth drawing. In other words, in point get pattern B, if the drawing is interrupted at the time of the ninth long press point drawing, the long press point total value may become a specific value depending on the drawing result.

(c) shows the points selected in each drawing for each long press point total value when point get pattern C is selected. Here, the long press point total value at the time of interruption becomes a specific value (for example, "77") when 10 points are selected in the first to third drawings, 9 points are selected in the fourth drawing, 8 points are selected in the fifth drawing, 8 points are selected in the sixth drawing, 7 points are selected in the seventh drawing, 6 points are selected in the eighth drawing, 5 points are selected in the ninth drawing, and 4 points are selected in the tenth drawing, ending the long press point get performance. This corresponds to the drawing result of the long press point drawing in the point get pattern when the long press point drawing is performed up to the tenth drawing, in the case surrounded by the double chain line, in which the long press point drawing is performed up to the tenth drawing, and the result is 77 points. In other words, in point get pattern C, when the long press point drawing ends, the long press point total value may become a specific value depending on the drawing result.

Figure 208 is a time chart of point get pattern A. Figure 209 is another time chart of point get pattern A shown in Figure 208. Figure 210 is a time chart of point get pattern C. Figure 211 is another time chart of point get pattern C shown in Figure 210.

Here, we will explain the cases when the long press point gain effect does not reach a specific value, and the cases when the long press point gain effect is prevented from reaching a specific value when it is interrupted or ended.

Referring to FIG. 208, the timing of the long press point get effect when point get pattern A is selected and a long press operation for 3 seconds is performed will be described. Note that the explanations of (a) detection timing, (b) valid timing, (c) operation timing, (d) long press timer, (e) long press checkpoint, and (f) long press flag are the same as those in FIG. 179, so they will be omitted.

The long press point get image shown in (g) is an example of a case where it is determined that a long press operation has been performed at all checkpoints from the first to the tenth.

Specifically, if a press is detected 1.3 seconds after the start of the long press point get performance (first checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 1.6 seconds after the start. If a press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 1.9 seconds after the start, with an additional 10 points added, and a total of 20 points added. If a press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 2.2 seconds after the start, with an additional 10 points added, and a total of 30 points added. If a press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 2.5 seconds after the start, with an additional 10 points added, and a total of 40 points added. If a press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 2.8 seconds after the start, with an additional 10 points added, and a total of 50 points added. If pressing is detected at the sixth checkpoint 2.8 seconds after the start, an additional 10 points are added 3.1 seconds after the start, and an image is displayed indicating that a total of 60 points have been obtained. If pressing is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (the seventh checkpoint), an additional 10 points are added 3.4 seconds after the start, and an image is displayed indicating that a total of 69 points have been obtained.

If a press is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (the 8th checkpoint), an additional 7 points are added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image is displayed indicating that a total of 77 points have been obtained. If a press is detected 3.7 seconds after the start (the 9th checkpoint), an additional 7 points are added 4.0 seconds after the start, and an image is displayed indicating that a total of 85 points have been obtained. If a press is detected 4.0 seconds after the start (the 10th checkpoint), an additional 6 points are added 4.3 seconds after the start, and an image is displayed indicating that a total of 90 points have been obtained, and the long press point get performance ends.

In this way, if the total long press points for the long press point get effect does not reach a specific value, the total long press points can be displayed as is.

Referring to Figure 209, we will explain the timing of the long press point gain effect when point gain pattern A is selected, the operation shown in Figure 208 is interrupted midway, and a specific value is avoided.

The operation timing shown in (c) indicates that the long press operation is interrupted 3.50 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect, and the long press point get effect ends. The long press timer shown in (d) continues to measure time when the long press operation is interrupted, and stops measuring time when the long press flag becomes 0. The checkpoints shown in (e) indicate the judgment timings from the first to the tenth time, similar to the checkpoints shown in Figure 208 (e). The long press flag shown in (f) continues until just before the ninth checkpoint, which is the next checkpoint after the long press operation is interrupted (after the eighth checkpoint).

The long press point get image shown in (g) is displayed in response to the detection of a press at the first to seventh checkpoints, and is the same as the long press point get image corresponding to the first to seventh checkpoints shown in FIG. 208 (g). That is, since the press is detected 1.3 seconds after the start of the long press point get performance (first checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 1.6 seconds after the start. Since the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been acquired is displayed 1.9 seconds after the start, with an additional 10 points being added, and a total of 20 points being displayed. Since the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been added, and a total of 30 points being acquired is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), an image indicating that 10 points have been added, and a total of 40 points being acquired is displayed 2.5 seconds after the start. Pressing is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (the fifth checkpoint), so 2.8 seconds after the start, an additional 10 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 50 points obtained. Pressing is detected 2.8 seconds after the start, at the sixth checkpoint, so 3.1 seconds after the start, an additional 10 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 60 points obtained. Pressing is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (the seventh checkpoint), so 3.4 seconds after the start, an additional 9 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 69 points obtained.

Because the press is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (the 8th checkpoint), 8 more points should be added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 77 points should be displayed, and the game should end due to interruption. However, the game does not end even when an image showing a total of 77 points is displayed. In other words, in order to avoid the specific value of a total of 77 points, 1 point is subtracted 4.0 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 76 points is displayed and the game ends. As a result, an image showing a total of 76 points is displayed at the time of the end due to interruption, and the long press point get effect ends, so that even if the player sees this image at the end of the effect, the risk of the player mistaking it for indicating the occurrence of an advantageous state is reduced.

In this way, if the long press point total at the time the long press point get effect is interrupted becomes a specific value, it is possible to display a long press point total that avoids the specific value. Note that here, the long press point total that has become a specific value is displayed once, and then a long press point total that is not a specific value is displayed, but it is also possible to display a long press point total that is not a specific value from the beginning. For example, if the configuration does not display the added value for each long press point lottery, it is possible to display a long press point total that is not a specific value from the beginning without it feeling unnatural.

Referring to Figure 210, we will explain the timing of the long press point gain effect when point gain pattern C is selected and a long press operation is performed for 3 seconds to avoid reaching a specific value.

The long press point get image shown in (g) is detected as being pressed 1.3 seconds after the start of the long press point get performance (first checkpoint), so an image indicating 10 points gained is displayed 1.6 seconds after the start. Since the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), an image indicating 10 more points are added 1.9 seconds after the start, and a total of 20 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), an image indicating 10 more points are added 2.2 seconds after the start, and a total of 30 points are displayed. Since the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), an image indicating 9 more points are added 2.5 seconds after the start, and a total of 39 points are displayed. Since the press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), an image indicating 8 more points are added 2.8 seconds after the start, and a total of 47 points are displayed. Pressing is detected 2.8 seconds after the start (the sixth checkpoint), so 3.1 seconds after the start, a further 8 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 55 points obtained. Pressing is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (the seventh checkpoint), so 3.4 seconds after the start, a further 7 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 62 points obtained.

Because pressing is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (the 8th checkpoint), 6 more points are added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 68 points is displayed. Because pressing is detected 3.7 seconds after the start (the 9th checkpoint), 5 more points are added 4.0 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 73 points is displayed. Because pressing is detected 4.0 seconds after the start (the 10th checkpoint), originally, 4 more points would be added 4.3 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 77 points would be displayed, and the long press point get performance would end. However, in order to avoid ending with a specific value of 77 points, 1 point is added 4.3 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 78 points is displayed, and the long press point get performance ends. As a result, an image showing a total of 78 points is displayed, and the long press point get performance ends, so that even if the player sees this image at the end of the performance, the risk of mistaking it for indicating the occurrence of an advantageous state is reduced.

In this way, even if the long press point total at the end of the long press point gain effect becomes a specific value, it is possible to display a long press point total that avoids the specific value.

Referring to Figure 211, we will explain the timing of the long press point get presentation when point get pattern B is selected, the operation shown in Figure 208 is interrupted midway, and a specific value is displayed, but it is difficult to mistakenly believe that the specific value indicates an advantageous state for the player.

The long press point get image shown in (g) is detected as being pressed 1.3 seconds after the start of the long press point get performance (first checkpoint), so an image indicating 10 points gained is displayed 1.6 seconds after the start. Since the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), an image indicating 10 more points are added 1.9 seconds after the start, and a total of 20 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), an image indicating 10 more points are added 2.2 seconds after the start, and a total of 30 points are displayed. Since the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), an image indicating 10 more points are added 2.5 seconds after the start, and a total of 40 points are displayed. Since the press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), an image indicating 9 more points are added 2.8 seconds after the start, and a total of 49 points are displayed. Pressing is detected 2.8 seconds after the start (the sixth checkpoint), so 3.1 seconds after the start, a further 8 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 57 points obtained. Pressing is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (the seventh checkpoint), so 3.4 seconds after the start, a further 7 points are added, and an image is displayed showing a total of 64 points obtained.

Because pressing is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (the 8th checkpoint), 3.7 seconds after the start, an additional 7 points are added, and an image showing a total of 71 points is displayed. Because pressing is detected 3.7 seconds after the start (the 9th checkpoint), originally, 4.0 seconds after the start, an additional 6 points are added, and an image showing a total of 77 points is displayed, and the game ends due to interruption. However, 4.3 seconds after the start, an image showing a total of 77 points is displayed, along with an additional image (a text image of "It should actually be even more..." shown in FIG. 215) which will be described later. As a result, even if an image showing a total of 77 points is displayed at the time of interruption and the long press point get effect ends, the risk of the player mistaking this additional image at the end of the effect for an advantageous state is reduced.

In this way, when the long press point gain effect is interrupted or ended and the total long press point value reaches a specific value, even if the specific value is still displayed, it is possible to reduce the risk of mistaking this for indicating the occurrence of an advantageous state.

Next, the display mode of each point get pattern in the long press point get performance will be described. Figure 212 is a diagram showing the display mode corresponding to figure 208 of point get pattern A. Figure 213 is a diagram showing the display mode corresponding to figure 209 of point get pattern A. Figure 214 is a diagram showing the display mode corresponding to figure 210 of point get pattern C. Figure 215 is a diagram showing the display mode corresponding to figure 211 of point get pattern B.

With reference to FIG. 212, the display mode corresponding to FIG. 208 for point gain pattern A will be described. Note that the same symbols will be used for the display modes that are the same as those in the long press charge performance described with reference to FIG. 182, and the description will be omitted.

Long press point get effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 42, for example, during a reach development effect during a reach display effect, similar to the long press charge effect described using FIG. 182. This long press point get effect during a reach development effect is, for example, an effect in which the number of points gained is competed for, and the more points gained, the higher the chance of a jackpot occurring in the reach development effect. Points are earned according to the duration of the long press of the decision button 81.

Before executing the long press point get effect, a preview effect is executed on the third pattern display device 42 to notify the start of the long press point get effect as shown in (a). For example, a long press operation of the decision button 81, such as "Press and hold the button to get points! (The higher the points, the hotter it gets!?)" and a long press preview image 45a to notify the long press point get effect are displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The display time of the long press preview image 45a is, for example, about 2 seconds.

When the display of the long press warning image 45a ends, the third pattern display device 42 displays a long press request image 45b requesting a long press of the decision button 81 as shown in (b), and a long press point image 45c1 showing the points acquired. (b) shows the start point of the long press point acquisition performance. The long press point image 45c1 shows "0 points" because a long press of the decision button 81 has not been performed.

When it is determined that the operation of the decision button 81 is a long press operation, an image is displayed in which points are added according to the duration of the long press operation, as shown in (c) and subsequent images. (c) is an image 1.30 seconds after the start of the long press point get performance (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and a long press point image 45c1 is displayed showing the current long press point as "0 points", and a long press point addition image 45c2 is displayed showing "+10", indicating that 10 points have been gained. (d) is an image 1.60 seconds after the start of the long press point get performance (at the time of passing the second checkpoint), and a long press point image 45c1 is displayed showing "10 points" due to the addition of 10 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 is displayed showing "+10", indicating that a further 10 points have been gained.

As shown in FIG. 208 above, the long press operation continues even when the third through tenth checks are passed, and points are added. (e) is an image taken 3.40 seconds after the start of the performance (when the eighth checkpoint is passed), and a long press point image 45c1 showing "70 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 showing "+7" indicating that an additional seven points have been gained are displayed. (f) is an image taken 3.70 seconds after the start of the performance (when the ninth checkpoint is passed), and a long press point image 45c1 showing "77 points" due to the addition of seven points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 showing "+7" indicating that an additional seven points have been gained are displayed. (g) is an image taken 4.00 seconds after the start of the performance (when the 10th checkpoint is passed), and shows a long press point image 45c1 that displays "84 points" due to the addition of 7 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+6," indicating that an additional 6 points have been gained. (h) is an image taken 4.30 seconds after the start of the performance, and shows a long press point image 45c1 that displays "90 points" due to the addition of 6 points.

As shown in (i), 6.00 seconds after the start of the presentation, i.e., at the end of the long press point get presentation, a suggestion image 45c3 consisting of a text image saying "Over 90 points in total! Super hot!?" may be displayed, suggesting a high probability of a jackpot.

In this way, if the total long press points for the long press point get effect does not reach a specific value, the total long press points can be displayed as is.

The display mode corresponding to FIG. 209 for point get pattern A will be described with reference to FIG. 213. Note that the same symbols will be used for the display mode that is the same as the long press point get performance described with reference to FIG. 213, and the description will be omitted.

Here, it is assumed that the operation of the decision button 81 has already been determined to be a long press operation. (a) is an image taken 1.30 seconds after the start of the performance (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and displays a long press point image 45c1 displaying "0 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 displaying "+10", indicating that 10 points have been gained. As shown in FIG. 209 above, the second to fifth checkpoints are passed. (b) is an image taken 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press point gain performance (at the time of passing the sixth checkpoint), and displays a long press point image 45c1 displaying "50 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 displaying "+10", indicating that an additional 10 points have been gained.

(c) is an image 3.10 seconds after the start of the performance (when the seventh checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "60 points" after adding 10 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+9" indicating that an additional 9 points have been gained. (d) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the performance (when the eighth checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "69 points" after adding 9 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+8" indicating that an additional 8 points have been gained. (e) is an image 3.50 seconds after the start of the performance (before the ninth checkpoint is reached), and displays the same long press point image 45c1 and long press point addition image 45c2 as in (d). (e) also shows that the decision button 81 is released at this timing.

(f) is an image taken 3.70 seconds after the start of the performance (when the ninth checkpoint is passed), and it shows that the decision button 81 has still been released at this timing, and a long press point image 45c1 is displayed showing "77 points" due to the addition of 8 points. (g) is an image taken 3.80 seconds after the start of the performance, and shows a specific value avoidance image 45c4 showing "-1" indicating that 1 point is subtracted to avoid 77 points, and a long press point image 45c1 showing "77 points". (h) is an image taken 4.00 seconds after the start of the performance, and shows a long press point image 45c1 showing "76 points" indicating that 1 point has been subtracted.

As shown in (i), 4.30 seconds after the start of the presentation, i.e., at the end of the long press point get presentation, a suggestion image 45c5 consisting of a text image saying "70 points in total! We don't know yet!" may be displayed, suggesting that the original probability of a big win has not been predicted due to the interruption.

In this way, if the long press point total value at the time the long press point gain effect is interrupted becomes a specific value, a long press point total value that avoids the specific value is displayed, reducing the risk of mistaking it for indicating the occurrence of an advantageous state.

With reference to FIG. 214, the display mode corresponding to FIG. 210 for point-getting pattern C will be described. Note that the same symbols will be used for the display modes that are the same as those for the long-press point-getting performance described with reference to FIG. 213, and the description will be omitted.

Here too, it is assumed that the operation of the decision button 81 has already been determined to be a long press operation. (a) is an image taken 1.30 seconds after the start of the performance (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and displays a long press point image 45c1 displaying "0 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 displaying "+10", indicating that 10 points have been gained. As shown in FIG. 210 above, the second to sixth checkpoints are passed. (b) is an image taken 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press point gain performance (at the time of passing the seventh checkpoint), and displays a long press point image 45c1 displaying "55 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 displaying "+7", indicating that an additional seven points have been gained.

(c) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the performance (when the eighth checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "62 points" after adding 7 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+6" indicating that an additional 6 points have been gained. (d) is an image 3.70 seconds after the start of the performance (when the ninth checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "68 points" after adding 6 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+5" indicating that an additional 5 points have been gained. (e) is an image 4.00 seconds after the start of the performance (when the tenth checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "73 points" after adding 5 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+4" indicating that an additional 4 points have been gained.

(f) is an image 4.30 seconds after the start of the performance, and a long press point image 45c1 is displayed showing "77 points" due to the addition of 4 points. (g) is an image 4.60 seconds after the start of the performance, and a specific value avoidance image 45c4 showing "+1" indicating that 1 point is subtracted to avoid 77 points, and a long press point image 45c1 showing "77 points" are displayed. (h) is an image 4.90 seconds after the start of the performance, and a long press point image 45c1 showing "78 points" indicating that 1 point has been added.

As shown in (i), 5.20 seconds after the start of the presentation, i.e., at the end of the long press point get presentation, a suggestion image 45c5 consisting of a text image saying "Total of 70 points! We don't know yet!" may be displayed, suggesting that the chances of winning a jackpot are not that high.

In this way, even if the total long press points at the end of the long press point gain effect becomes a specific value, a total long press points value that avoids the specific value is displayed, reducing the risk of mistaking it for an indication of the occurrence of an advantageous state.

The display mode corresponding to FIG. 211 for point-getting pattern B will be described with reference to FIG. 215. Note that the same display modes as those for the long-press point-getting effect described with reference to FIG. 213 will be given the same reference numerals and will not be described.

Here too, it is assumed that the operation of the decision button 81 has already been determined to be a long press operation. (a) is an image taken 1.30 seconds after the start of the performance (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and displays a long press point image 45c1 displaying "0 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 displaying "+10", indicating that 10 points have been gained. As shown in FIG. 210 above, the second to sixth checkpoints are passed. (b) is an image taken 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press point gain performance (at the time of passing the seventh checkpoint), and displays a long press point image 45c1 displaying "57 points" and a long press point addition image 45c2 displaying "+7", indicating that an additional seven points have been gained.

(c) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the performance (when the eighth checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "64 points" after adding 7 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+7" indicating that an additional 7 points have been gained. (d) is an image 3.70 seconds after the start of the performance (when the ninth checkpoint is passed), and displays a long press point image 45c1 that displays "71 points" after adding 7 points, and a long press point addition image 45c2 that displays "+6" indicating that an additional 6 points have been gained. (e) is an image 3.80 seconds after the start of the performance (before the tenth checkpoint is reached), and displays the same long press point image 45c1 and long press point addition image 45c2 as in (d), but the decision button 81 is released at this timing.

(f) is an image taken 4.00 seconds after the start of the performance (when the 10th checkpoint is passed), in which a long press point image 45c1 is displayed showing "77 points" due to the addition of 6 points. (g) is an image taken 4.30 seconds after the start of the performance, in which a long press point image 45c1 showing "77 points" and an additional image 45c6 consisting of a text image saying "It should have gone up even more..." which adds information to suggest that the displayed "77 points" is not a specific value are displayed.

As shown in (h), 4.60 seconds after the start of the presentation, i.e., at the end of the long press point get presentation, a suggestion image 45c5 consisting of a text image saying "Total of 70 points! We don't know yet!" may be displayed, suggesting that the chances of winning a jackpot are not that high.

In this way, when the long press point gain effect is interrupted or ended and the total long press point value reaches a specific value, even if the specific value is still displayed, it is possible to reduce the risk of mistaking this for indicating the occurrence of an advantageous state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 50 is equipped with a decision button 81 operated by a player, a CPU 501 of the main control device 261 which performs the main control related to the game, and an effect execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 which causes the third pattern display device 42 to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of the jackpot determination by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The above-mentioned effect execution function is equipped with a numerical information display effect execution function which executes a numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect) which displays numerical information (e.g., a long press point total value) during a predetermined display effect based on the operation of the decision button 81 within a valid period in which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid, and the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function executes a specific change effect in which, when predetermined numerical information (e.g., 77 points or a number that becomes 77 points when a predetermined point is added) is displayed in the numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect), the specific change effect changes the predetermined numerical information to different specific information (e.g., a form in which additional information is added to "76 points", "78 points", or "77 points"). The unexpectedness of such a display can increase the entertainment value of the display presentation that includes the numerical change presentation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above.

The numerical information display effect execution function described above also executes a specific change effect that prevents the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display effect from becoming specific suggestive information (e.g., a specific value such as "77") that suggests specific information (e.g., jackpot winning information). This reduces misunderstandings about the results of the display effect, and improves the reliability of the display effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described in (Q1) above.

The specific change effect described above is a function that, when the numerical information displayed as a result of a numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect) becomes specific suggestive information as a result of increasing or decreasing numerical information based on the operation of the decision button 81, changes the specific suggestive information to non-specific information that does not suggest specific information (e.g., 78, which is 77 plus 1, or 76, which is 77 minus 1). This can improve the reliability of the display effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described in (Q2) above.

The specific change effect described above is a function that, when the numerical information displayed as a result of a numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect) becomes specific suggestion information as a result of increasing or decreasing numerical information based on the operation of the decision button 81, non-specific information that does not suggest specific information (e.g., additional information such as "It should go up even more...") is added to the specific suggestion information. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the display effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described in (Q3) above.

The numerical information display effect described above is a numerical change effect (e.g., a long press point get effect) in which the numerical information displayed during a specified display effect increases or decreases based on the operation of the decision button 81 during the valid period in which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid. This can improve the reliability of the display effect involving a numerical change effect. This is, for example, one example of the gaming machine described in (Q4) above.

The above-mentioned numerical value change effect may also increase or decrease the numerical value depending on the number of times the decision button 81 is pressed. This can improve the reliability of the display effect involving a numerical value change effect that changes numerical information depending on the number of times the decision button 81 is pressed. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (Q5) above.

In the above-mentioned Example 50, when the player performed the long press operation from start to finish in the long press point get performance, there was an example where the long press point image 45c1 displayed "77 points" at the end of the 3-second long press valid period. Since the variation pattern that displays this "77 points" includes both the jackpot super reach E and the miss super reach E, the suggestion image 45c5 that is displayed after the long press valid period ends only shows a somewhat hot (though not exactly passionate) suggestion of "70 points in total! We don't know yet!".

In this embodiment, we will explain an example in which a variation pattern in which the long press point image 45c1 displays "77 points" at the end of the 3-second long press valid period is determined to be not only a somewhat exciting variation pattern in which there is both a jackpot super reach E and a miss super reach E, but also a very exciting variation pattern for the player in which there is only a jackpot super reach E.

In the above-mentioned embodiment 50, when a fluctuating pattern that is extremely hot for the player is suggested, the suggestion image 45c3 displayed after the end of the long press valid period indicates 90 points or more, such as "Over 90 points in total! Extremely hot!?", but in this embodiment, since the fluctuating pattern is in the 70s (77 points), it is displayed in a different manner. That is, when "77 points" is displayed at the end of the long press, if there is a fluctuating pattern that includes both a winning super reach E and a losing super reach E (if the fluctuating type counter CS2 of the winning super reach E shown in FIG. 205 is 111 to 120 or the fluctuating type counter CS2 of the losing super reach E is 100 to 199), the text size is displayed as it is, but if there is a fluctuating pattern that includes only the winning super reach E (if the fluctuating type counter CS2 of the winning super reach E shown in FIG. 205 is 0 to 90), the text size is changed from the original to an enlarged text size. This gives the player a sense of anticipation that the long press period will end with 77 points.

In this way, in this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot is highest when a high number of points (90 points or more) is earned at the end of the valid long press period, or when 77 points are earned at the end of the valid long press period and the 77 points are changed to an enlarged character size. Note that a jackpot may be guaranteed, or there may be a slight possibility of a miss.

In this way, by creating a sense of anticipation about ending at "77 points," the player can be provided with two gameplay elements: one in which the player continues to hold down the button until the end of the valid long press period in the long press point get effect, in the hope of gaining a high number of points (90 points or more) at the end of the valid long press period; and the other in which the player can stop holding down the button during the long press point get effect when 77 points are gained, in order to maintain the number of points at 77, and then determine the likelihood of a jackpot depending on whether the 77 points change to an enlarged font size at the end of the valid long press period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 51, the numerical information display effect execution function described above executes a specific change effect in which, when predetermined numerical information (e.g., 77 points) is displayed in a numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect), the predetermined numerical information is changed to different specific information (an enlarged version of "77"). This makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the display effect that includes a numerical change effect. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above.

In the above-mentioned Example 51, "77 points" is displayed at the end of the valid long press period, and then an effect is executed in which the font size of "77 points" is changed from the normal font size to an enlarged font size. However, before displaying "77 points", an effect may be executed to indicate whether the probability of a jackpot is high.

For example, in this embodiment, when "73 points" (see FIG. 207(c) and FIG. 210) is acquired, which is one point before "77 points", a cut-in image is displayed, and while the cut-in image is displayed, a performance is performed suggesting whether or not the player will reach "77 points". Note that the suggestion is not limited to whether or not the player will reach "77 points", and may also suggest whether or not the player will reach "90 points" or more.

Specifically, for example, in the cut-in image, if "73", which is shown as another character image, catches up with "77", which is shown as a character image, "77" will gain "77 points", but if "77" manages to escape "73", "77" will not gain "77 points" (i.e., the game will end with "73 points").

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 52, the numerical information display effect execution function described above executes a specific change effect (e.g., a cut-in image display effect) in which, when a specific numerical information (e.g., 73 points, one point before 77 points) is displayed in a numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect), the specific numerical information is changed to different specific information (e.g., a cut-in image suggesting whether or not the number will reach 77 points). This makes the display effect accompanied by a numerical change effect more entertaining. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above.

In the above-mentioned examples 50 to 52, the likelihood of a jackpot is indicated by a number indicating the number of points acquired, such as "77 points," but it is also acceptable to use a design other than a number to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

For example, in this embodiment, while the long press point get effect is being performed (for example, between 60 points shown in FIG. 201(c) and 69 points shown in (d)), a text image "CHANCE" is displayed, suggesting a high possibility of a jackpot. If the decision button 81 is released within this period, the long press point get effect is erased at the end of this period (for example, at 69 points shown in FIG. 201(d)), and a different effect is switched to one that maintains the display of the "CHANCE" image. If the decision button 81 is kept pressed within this period, the "CHANCE" image is erased at the end of this period, and the long press point get effect continues.

If the "CHANCE" image remains displayed until the end of the long press valid period, and there is a high probability of winning (for example, if the pattern is one in which there is only a Super Reach E for a jackpot), the "CHANCE" image will be changed to an image such as "Very hot!", which suggests that there is a very high probability of winning. Also, if the "CHANCE" image remains displayed until the end of the long press valid period, and there is not a high probability of winning (for example, if there is a pattern in which there is both a Super Reach E for a jackpot and a Super Reach E for a miss), the "CHANCE" image will not be changed, and an image such as "We don't know yet!", which suggests that there is not a very high probability of winning, will be displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 53, the numerical information display effect execution function described above executes a specific change effect (e.g., a "CHANCE" image display effect) in which, when specific numerical information (e.g., 60 points) is displayed in a numerical information display effect (e.g., a long press point get effect), the specific numerical information changes to different specific information (e.g., a "CHANCE" image). This makes the display effect involving a numerical change effect more entertaining. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 counts the numerical information generated in relation to the display performance, and outputs a command to the display control device 45 to display the counted numerical information, and the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the counted numerical information, but the display control device 45 may also have a function to check whether the counted numerical information and the displayed numerical information are correct. In the following, the numerical information will be described using the value of the charge counter in the long press charge performance described in the above-mentioned embodiment 44 as an example, but it may be a color that changes as in the long press color change performance, the number of points acquired by lottery as in the long press point get performance, or a variable number of times such as the number of times the time is reduced.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 outputs a display command to cause the third pattern display device 42 to display display information including specified information (e.g., a long press charge image 45c1).
Based on the operation of the decision button 81, the CPU 521 of the sub-control device 262 outputs an instruction command (e.g., a long press charge +1 command) to the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 to instruct the display to change specified information from one information (e.g., the value of the long press charge counter) to another information (e.g., a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the long press charge counter).

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an error determination function that determines whether an error has occurred in which another piece of information instructed by an instruction command (e.g., the value of the long press charge counter increased by +1) does not match specified information displayed by a display command (e.g., the value of the long press charge image 45c1). At least one of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 or the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an error response function that performs a specified error response process corresponding to this error when this error occurs. As an example of the error response function, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has an error notification function that notifies the occurrence of an error.

First, the control system in the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 of Example 54 will be described. Fig. 216 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device of Example 54. Fig. 217 is a flowchart showing performance execution management processing by the sub-control device. Fig. 218 is a flowchart showing display/inter-sub counter consistency confirmation processing by the sub-control device.

Normal processing by the sub-controller 262 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. The basic explanation is the same as that explained with reference to FIG. 32 in the above-mentioned embodiment 1, so only the differences will be explained.

In other words, in this embodiment, as shown in step S2111A, the sub-control device 262 receives a command from the display control means 45 and confirms that the display control device 45 has displayed the above-mentioned counted numerical information.

The performance execution management process by the sub-control device 262 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The basic explanation is the same as that explained with reference to FIG. 37 in the above-mentioned embodiment 1, so only the differences will be explained.

In other words, in this embodiment, as shown in step S2404A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs processing to check whether there is consistency in the counters related to numerical information between the display control device 45 and the sub-control device 262. This processing is called display-sub counter consistency checking processing.

The display/sub counter consistency confirmation process performed by the sub-control device 262 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 218.

In step S4901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it has received a long press charge counter +1 completion command from the display control device 45, as shown in step S4709A described below. If it has received a long press charge counter +1 completion command, it proceeds to step S4902, otherwise it terminates this process. In step S4902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds 1 to the sub confirmation long press charge counter, and proceeds to step S4903. This allows the sub-control device 262 to confirm that the display control device 45 has displayed the above-mentioned counted numerical information on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S4903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 saves the numerical information of the sub-instruction charge counter in the memory area SC of the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S4904. The numerical information of the sub-instruction charge counter corresponds to the numerical information of the long press charge counter that is incremented by one according to the time that the player operates the decision button 81 in a long press manner in step S4508 of the above-mentioned Example 44. As shown in step S4611 of the above-mentioned Example 44, based on the numerical information of this long press charge counter, a long press charge +1 command is transmitted to instruct the display control device 45 to increment the numerical value of the long press charge by one according to the time that the player operates the decision button 81 in a long press manner.

In step S4904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the numerical information of the above-mentioned sub-confirmation charge counter in the memory area KC of the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the numerical information of the sub-instruction charge counter stored in memory area SC matches the numerical information of the sub-confirmation charge counter stored in memory area KC. If the two numerical information matches, this process ends, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4906.

In step S4906, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display count information error command. This enables the sub-control device 262 to notify the outside that a display count information error has occurred, in which the numerical information counted by the sub-control device 262 does not match the numerical information actually displayed by the display control device 45.

Next, the control system in the display control device 45 will be described. Figure 219 is a flowchart showing the button long press effect display processing by the display control device. Figure 220 is a flowchart showing the display count information error display processing by the display control device.

The button long press display process by the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 219. The basic explanation is the same as that explained with reference to FIG. 178 in the first embodiment above, so only the differences will be explained.

In step S4709A, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the long press charge +1 command (step S4708) and the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a long press charge +1 image (step S4709), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the long press charge +1 completion command to be sent to the sub-control device 262 as described above. This allows the display control device 45 to inform the sub-control device 262 that it has completed displaying the numerical information counted based on the command from the sub-control device 262.

Referring to FIG. 220, the display count information error display process performed by the display control device 45 will be described.

In step S4921, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display count information error command has been received from the sub-control device 262. If a display count information error command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4922; if not, the process ends.

In step S4922, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the third pattern display device 42 to display a display count information error. In addition to being displayed on the third pattern display device 42, the display count information error may also be indicated by turning on an error notification lamp or outputting an error notification sound. This allows a player or hall attendant to notice the display count information error and take action to resolve the display count information error.

In step S4923, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the display count information error has been resolved. For example, when an action to resolve the display count information error has been performed on the display control device 45, the display control device 45 determines that the display count information error has been resolved. This action to resolve the display count information error may be an action performed on the sub-control device 262. In this case, the sub-control device 262 on which the action has been performed may send a command to the display control device 45 indicating that the display count information error has been resolved. This allows the display control device 45 to determine that the display count information error has been resolved.

In step S4924, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the display count information error displayed on the third pattern display device 42. This indicates that the display count information error has been resolved.

Next, we will explain how to display a display count information error. Figure 221 is a diagram that explains how to display a display count information error.

(a) shows an image 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance shown in FIG. 182(f) of Example 44 described above. The third pattern display device 42 shows a long press request image 45b, a long press charge image 45c indicating that the long press charge is 50 percent, and a long press duration image 45f indicating the duration of the operation in the long press mode. The long press duration image 45f shows 1.50 seconds.

(b) shows an image 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, which is a continuation of (a) above. The third pattern display device 42 shows a long press request image 45b, a long press charge image 45c indicating that the long press charge is 60 percent, and a long press duration image 45f indicating that the duration of the long press operation is 1.80 seconds.

(c) shows an image 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, which is a continuation of (b) above. The third pattern display device 42 shows a long press request image 45b and a long press duration image 45f, which indicates that the operation in the long press mode will continue for 2.10 seconds, but the long press charge image 45c shows that the long press charge remains at 60 percent. In other words, a display count information error has occurred in the display of the long press charge image 45c.

(d) shows an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the long press charge performance, which is a continuation of (c) above. The third symbol display device 42 displays a long press request image 45b, a long press duration image 45f indicating that the operation in the long press mode continues for 2.40 seconds, a long press charge image 45c that has stopped at 60 percent, and a display count information error image 45g consisting of a text image such as "Display count information error occurred!" indicating that a display count information error has occurred in the display of the long press charge image 45c. This allows the player or hall attendant to notice the display count information error and take measures to resolve the display count information error.

After this, the hall attendant notices the error in the displayed count information and takes steps to resolve the error in the displayed count information, which then resolves the error.

In this embodiment, the error response function is, for example, an error notification function that notifies the occurrence of an error by displaying the display count information error image 45g, but the error response process may be performed without notifying the occurrence of an error. For example, when an error occurs, instead of displaying the display count information error image 45g, a hidden error image that has no meaning to the player, such as "???", is displayed, and while the hidden error image is being displayed, at least one of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 or the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process to resolve the error.

As a process for clearing the error, for example, the execution of the long press charge effect is cancelled and the error hidden image continues to be displayed. The error hidden image may be an image related to the story of the display effect that had been displayed up until that point, other than "???". As a process for clearing the error, for example, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the image that was scheduled to be displayed after the long press charge effect (for example, a long press charge attack image) in accordance with an instruction command from the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262. Because the image that was scheduled to be displayed next is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, a natural display can be continued even if the long press charge effect is hidden by "???" midway through.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 54, there are a decision button 81 operated by a player, a CPU 501 of the main control device 261 which performs the main control related to the game, a CPU 521 of the display control device 45 which outputs a display command for displaying display information including predetermined information (e.g., a long press charge image 45c1) on the third pattern display device 42, and an instruction command (e.g., a long press charge +1 command) for instructing the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 to display a change in the predetermined information from one information (e.g., the value of the long press charge counter) to another information (e.g., a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the long press charge counter) based on the operation of the decision button 81. ), an error determination function (for example, a display/sub counter consistency check processing function by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262) that determines whether an error has occurred in which another piece of information instructed by an instruction command (for example, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the long press charge counter) does not match the specified information displayed by a display command (for example, the value of the long press charge image 45c1), and an error response function that, if this error has occurred, performs a specified error response process corresponding to this error (for example, a count information error display processing function by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45).

As a result, when an instruction is given to change the specified information from one piece of information to another piece of information based on the operation of the decision button 81, if the instructed other piece of information does not match the specified information displayed by the display control device 45, an error handling process is carried out to deal with the error, which reduces the loss of excitement for the player due to the error and improves the interest of the display presentation, including the change in the specified information. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (R0).

It also has an error notification function (for example, a count information error display processing function by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45) that notifies the occurrence of an error. As a result, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the specified information, and therefore improving the interest of the display presentation that includes changes in the specified information. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (R1) above.

The display control device 45 also has a function (function of steps S4708, S3709, and S4709A by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45) of outputting a completion command (e.g., a long press charge +1 completion command) indicating that the change in the specified information has been executed to the sub-control device 262 when the change in the specified information has been executed, and the sub-control device 262 has an error determination function for determining whether an error has occurred in which the other information specified by the instruction command does not match the specified information indicated by the completion command. As a result, when the display control device 45 is unable to execute the change in the specified information despite the sub-control device 262 instructing a change to another information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the specified information, and thus improving the interest of the display presentation including the change in the specified information. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (R2) above.

The specified information is operation display information (e.g., long press charge image 45c1) that changes based on the operation of the decision button 81. As a result, if the sub-control device 262 instructs a change to different information (e.g., a value obtained by adding 1 to the long press charge value) but the display control device 45 is unable to execute a change to the operation display information (e.g., long press charge image 45c1), the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the operation display information, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the display presentation that includes a change in the operation display information. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described in (R5) above.

The operation display information is also operation numerical information (e.g., long press charge image 45c1) that changes based on the operation of the decision button 81. As a result, if the sub-control device 262 has instructed a change to different information (e.g., a value obtained by adding 1 to the long press charge value) but the display control device 45 is unable to execute a change to the operation numerical information (e.g., long press charge image 45c1), the occurrence of the error is reported, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the operation numerical information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes changes in the operation numerical information. This is, for example, an example of the gaming machine described above in (R6).

The error notification function described above also displays an error as a display count information error image 45g during the display performance, making it easier to notice the occurrence of an error. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R7) above.

The pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned Example 54 displays an error in the change of the predetermined information (e.g., the long press charge image 45c1) that changes based on the operation of the decision button 81, but it may also display an error in the number of changes counted in the advantageous game state. This point will be explained below.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 mainly controls the game, and generates a favorable game state (such as a time-saving state or a guaranteed bonus state) that is favorable to the player for a predetermined number of fluctuations or until the next big win occurs. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 outputs a display command to cause the third pattern display device 42 to display, as predetermined information, game count information indicating the current number of fluctuations or the remaining number of fluctuations in the favorable game state.

Every time the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command based on the result of a jackpot determination by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, it outputs an instruction command to the CPU 521 of the display controller 45 to instruct the display to change the number of times played from the previous number of times played to the next variation number of times information.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an error determination function that determines whether an error has occurred in which the next change count information instructed by the instruction command does not match the game count information instructed by the display command, and an error response function that performs a predetermined error response process corresponding to this error if this error has occurred. As the error response function, for example, an error notification function that displays the occurrence of an error in the third pattern display device 42 is provided. The error notification function displays the error as a change count information error image 45g1 during the change display performance.

The control system of the sub-control device 262 in this embodiment will be described. Figure 222 is a flowchart showing the display and inter-sub counter consistency confirmation process by the sub-control device 262 in Example 54.

In step S4901A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it has received a remaining change counter -1 completion command from the display control device 45, as shown in step S3216 described below. If it has received a remaining change counter -1 completion command, it proceeds to step S4902A, otherwise it terminates this process. In step S4902A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts 1 from the sub confirmation remaining change counter, and proceeds to step S4903A. This allows the sub-control device 262 to confirm that the display control device 45 has displayed the remaining change count with 1 subtracted from it on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S4903A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the numerical information of the sub-instruction remaining change count counter in the memory area SC of the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S4904A. The numerical information of the sub-instruction remaining change count counter is included in the high-probability support state transition command and low-probability support state transition command sent from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262 in steps S563 and S567 of the above-mentioned first embodiment.

In step S4904A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the numerical information of the sub-confirmation remaining fluctuation count counter described above in the memory area KC of the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the numerical information of the sub-instruction remaining change counter stored in memory area SC matches the numerical information of the sub-confirmation remaining change counter stored in memory area KC. If the two numerical information matches, this process ends, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4906.

In step S4906, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display count information error command. This enables the sub-control device 262 to notify the outside that a display count information error has occurred, in which the remaining number information counted by the sub-control device 262 does not match the remaining number information actually displayed by the display control device 45.

Next, the control system in the display control device 45 will be described. Figure 223 is a flowchart showing the pattern row variation display process by the display control device. The basic explanation is the same as that explained with reference to Figure 44 in the above-mentioned Example 1, so only the differences will be explained.

In step S3214, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game is in a favorable state after receiving the stop display command in step S3211 or step S3213 to stop the display of the varying pattern rows. The determination of whether or not the game is in a favorable state is made based on whether or not the display high probability/support state transition command in step S3113 or the display low probability/support state transition command in step S3115 described with reference to FIG. 43 has been received. If the game is in a favorable state, the process proceeds to step S3215; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a subtraction of 1 from the remaining number of variations displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S3216.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the remaining number of changes -1 completion command to be sent to the sub-control device 262, indicating that the remaining number of changes displayed on the third pattern display device 42 has been subtracted by 1. This allows the display control device 45 to inform the sub-control device 262 that it has completed the display of the remaining number of changes counted based on the command from the sub-control device 262, which has been reduced by 1.

If an error occurs regarding the remaining number of changes, the sub-control device 262 displays an error based on the display count information error display process described above in Example 54.

Next, we will explain the display mode of the remaining change count information error image. Figure 224 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the remaining change count information error.

In (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of the change display during 100 support plays in a favorable play state. The third symbol display device 42 displays right-hit information during high probability support state 44m, change count information during support state 44m2 that displays "89 spins remaining" indicating that the change count information during the 11th spin, i.e., the remaining number of changes is 89 spins, and a high-speed change screen 43c. In (b), an all-symbol stop screen 43e is displayed, indicating that the change display during the 11th spin was a miss.

In (c), based on the next change display command, an image of the next change display during 100 support plays as a favorable play state is displayed. The third symbol display device 42 displays right-hit information 44m during high probability/support state, change count information during support state displayed as "89 spins remaining" 44m2, and a high-speed change screen 43c. Here, the change count information during support state 44m2 is erroneously displayed as "89 spins remaining" instead of the correct "88 spins remaining". Therefore, in (d), a remaining change count information error image 45g1 consisting of a text image "Remaining change count information error occurred!" is displayed, indicating that the change count information during support state displayed as "89 spins remaining" 44m2 was incorrect.

After this, the player notices the remaining number of changes information error image 45g1 and calls a hall attendant, who then takes steps to resolve the remaining number of changes information error, thereby resolving the remaining number of changes information error.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 55, the predetermined information is game display information (e.g., game count information indicating the remaining number of changes) that changes based on the result of the jackpot determination by the main control device 261. As a result, if the sub-control device 262 instructs a change to other information (e.g., the remaining number of changes with one change subtracted), but the display control device 45 is unable to execute the change in the game display information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the game display information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes the change in the game display information. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (R3) above.

The game display information is game numerical information (for example, game count information indicating the remaining number of changes) that changes based on the result of the judgment by the main control device 261. As a result, if the sub-control device 262 has instructed a change to other information but the display control device 45 is unable to execute the change in the game numerical information, the occurrence of the error is notified, improving the reliability of the presentation that changes the game numerical information, thereby improving the interest of the display presentation that includes changes in the game numerical information. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described above in (R4).

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, but may be implemented in other configurations that provide similar effects, for example as follows:

[1] In the above-mentioned Example 1, the ending countdown information 44v is displayed descriptively, such as "Ending time: X seconds remaining", but is not limited to this. Another example of the ending countdown information 44v is a timer image showing numerical information. Since the player can know that the ending period has begun by looking at the ending screen 44j, the player can know that the ending time is counting down simply by displaying the timer image. This allows the ending screen 44j to be displayed in a cohesive manner. Another example is to represent the ending time as a bar graph, and replace it with a seek bar that visually shows the remaining time of the ending time by showing the current position on the bar graph-like bar.

In addition, in Example 1, the countdown information 44v counted down the ending time, but it may also count down the time of the jackpot round game state including the ending period. In other words, it may count down from the start of the jackpot round game or a midway point to the end timing of the ending period.

[2] In the above-mentioned Example 1, an example has been given in which the right-hit-during-ending information 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are displayed together as the "not-yet-arrival suggestion information" of the present invention, but each of these may be displayed alone as the "not-yet-arrival suggestion information", or a combination of the two may be displayed as the "not-yet-arrival suggestion information".

[3] In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the "predetermined game state" of the present invention is a jackpot round game state, and the "next game state" is a high probability/support state after the jackpot round game state, etc., but the "predetermined game state" and the "next game state" may be other game states. For example, the "predetermined game state" may be an advantageous game state such as a high probability/support state for a number of plays, and the "next game state" may be a game state after the advantageous game state ends (for example, a normal game state).

[4] In the above-mentioned Example 1, the "specific operation" of the present invention is a volume adjustment operation, but the "specific operation" may be another operation. For example, if the player can select a character image to appear in the display performance, and the period during which the selection can be made is set during high-speed fluctuation or during a jackpot round game state, the operation of selecting the character image is also included in the "specific operation" of the present invention.

[5] In the above-mentioned first embodiment, during the period in which the "specific operation" of the present invention is permitted, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed. However, it is also possible to display the specific operation period end approaching information 44e at a predetermined timing without displaying the specific operation period information 44a.

[6] In the above-mentioned first embodiment, pressing the decision button 81 on the normal screen 43a, demo screen 43b, high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, opening screen 43h, round screen 43i, ending screen 43j, etc. switches these screens to the specific operation screen 44b, but it may be configured so that pressing the left selection button 82 or right selection button 83 separate from the decision button 81 switches these screens to the specific operation screen 44b. In this case, the player is informed in advance that a specific operation can be performed by pressing any of the frame buttons 80 while the specific operation period information 44a ("volume change possible") is displayed. This is intuitive and easy to understand, and reduces the chance of failing to perform a specific operation.

Also, by bringing a hand close to a predetermined area of the display screen 42a in accordance with the timing when the specific operation period information 44a ("Volume can be changed") is displayed on the display screen 42a, these screens may be switched to the specific operation screen 44b. For example, information such as "Bring your hand close to the screen to change the volume" may be displayed on the display screen 42a. This makes it more intuitive and easy to understand, and reduces the chance of failing to perform the specific operation.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending presentation pattern shown in FIG. 58, the display time of each piece of ending information (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, addiction prevention information 44z) was the same, such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, but may be different times. For example, next game state suggestion information 44w is 6 seconds, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is 8 seconds, and addiction prevention information 44z is 10 seconds. In addition, even if the ending information is the same type, the display time of the ending information may be changed for each specified condition. For example, there is an example in which the display time of the ending information is changed depending on the length of the fluctuation time.

[8] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending presentation pattern shown in FIG. 58, each piece of ending information is displayed in a fixed order (roughly in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z). However, a pattern may be provided in which the display order of ending information with the same display time is changed, for example, by displaying next game state suggestion information 44w last or card removal forgetting prevention information 44y first.

Note that ending information with the same display time does not necessarily have to have exactly the same display time, but may have similar display times as long as they are within the range permitted by the production. In this case, the display order of the ending information can be changed by extending the shortfall in display time or reducing the excess display time within the range permitted by the production.

[9] In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, a top lamp such as the third illumination unit 304 was used as an example of the light-emitting area of the decorative cover disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, but it may also be a side lamp such as the first illumination unit 301 or the second illumination unit 302. It may also be another lamp that constitutes the front frame set 14.

[10] In the above-mentioned Examples 27 to 30, the movable illumination unit 305 is disposed on the rear side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 37 as an example of the light-emitting area of the decorative cover of the movable illumination unit 305. However, the movable illumination unit 305 may be disposed on the rear side of the left edge of the opening of the center frame 37, or may be disposed on the upper edge of the opening of the center frame 37. In addition, the movable illumination unit 305 may be one that is always exposed in whole or in part at the right edge, left edge, or upper edge of the opening of the center frame 37.

[11] In the above-mentioned Examples 27 to 30, the movable illumination unit 305 was arranged on the center frame 37, but the movable illumination unit 305 may be arranged at a location other than the center frame 37 of the game board 30 and be visible, or may be arranged on the inner frame 12 or the movable display unit 35 and be visible through an opening in the center frame 37.

[12] In the above-mentioned Examples 27 to 30, the light irradiation device 707 that irradiates the movable illumination unit 305 with light is a light-emitting substrate, but it is also possible to use something other than a light-emitting substrate that irradiates light. For example, it is also possible to use light irradiated from the third pattern display device 42 to illuminate the decorative cover of the movable illumination unit 305.

[13] In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the control of the light irradiation device 607 is posture control for setting the irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the light emitting substrate 611 to the first irradiation angle, or irradiation area control for setting the irradiation area of the light irradiated from the light emitting substrate 611 to the first irradiation area. However, it may be irradiation distance control for changing the irradiation distance between a predetermined point (e.g., center point) of the first light emitting region 605 or the second light emitting region 606 and a predetermined point (e.g., center point) of the light emitting substrate 611.

[14] In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 33, the irradiation means rotates (pivots), tilts, and moves left and right, but it may be capable of at least one of bending, curving, stretching and shrinking, and moving forward and backward. In addition, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending if the structure allows bending with a hinge or the like, curving if the substrate is flexible, or stretching and shrinking if the structure allows stretching and shrinking with a sliding mechanism or the like. It may also be possible to easily adjust the irradiation distance by moving forward and backward.

[15] In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, in regard to the input portion of the control means, the push-in portion 616 is a protrusion and the push-in receiving portion 617 is a surface that receives it. However, conversely, the push-in portion 616 may be a surface and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be a protrusion that contacts the surface.

[16] In the above-mentioned Example 24 and Example 28, the light-transmitting plates 631 and 731 are used as examples of a configuration in which the state of light is controlled by something other than the light irradiation means. However, the state of light may also be controlled by tilting or rotating a reflecting member that reflects light.

[17] In the above-mentioned Examples 34 to 40, the setting suggestion effect images (videos) of different durations were displayed using the jackpot time, but the setting suggestion effect images may be in the form of a mini-game. The setting suggestion effect images in the form of a mini-game are, for example, a quiz game in which setting suggestion information is given according to the number of correct answers given to quizzes by the player by operating the operating means. For example, in this mini-game, if the number of correct answers is 10 or more, the player is informed of which of settings 1 to 6 the setting is, and if the number of correct answers is less than 10, the player is only informed of whether the setting is 4 or higher. In the quiz, the longer the jackpot time, the more questions can be answered, making it easier to obtain advantageous information.

Also, instead of the setting suggestion effect image, the machine may be configured to allow selection of music. If the machine allows the player to change music during the ending time or create a medley of their choice, the longer the jackpot time, the easier it becomes to select a favorite music piece, and the more favorite music can be selected, making it easier for the player to obtain the benefit of being able to play in a favorable environment.

[18] In the above-mentioned embodiment 38, the fewer the number of fluctuations, the easier it is for the ball to enter the V area 32b. However, conversely, the more the number of fluctuations, the easier it is for the ball to enter the V area 32b. This can improve the interest of the big win round game state in that the more the number of fluctuations consumed in the number-limit high probability game state increases (Maharu), the higher the chance of the ball entering the V area 32b. This is, for example, an example of the game machine described in (M7).

[19] In the above-mentioned Example 35, the jackpot time corresponding image was an ending time corresponding image, but the jackpot time corresponding image may be an interval time corresponding image corresponding to an interval time, or an opening time corresponding image corresponding to an opening time, and the longer the interval time corresponding image or opening time corresponding image, the more advantageous information may be displayed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M5) and (M6), for example. Also, the image may be an opening/ending time corresponding image corresponding to the combined time of the opening time and the ending time, and the longer the opening time corresponding image or opening/ending time corresponding image, the more advantageous information may be displayed.

[20] The configurations of the above-mentioned Examples 1 to 33 may be applied to the pachinko machines 10 according to the above-mentioned Examples 34 to 40. Also, the configurations of the above-mentioned Examples 34 to 40 may be applied to the pachinko machines 10 according to the above-mentioned Examples 1 to 33. Also, the configurations of the above-mentioned Examples 34 to 40 may be applied to the pachinko machines 10 according to the other Examples 34 to 40.

[21] The present invention may be implemented in various types of gaming machines (e.g., first type, third type, etc.), or in pachinko machines of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, the present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (e.g., two or three times). The present invention may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which, after a jackpot pattern is displayed, a special gaming state is entered as a prerequisite for the ball to enter a specified area. The present invention may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a special gaming state is entered when a ball enters a specified winning hole. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines that use gaming balls, such as arranged ball type pachinko and mahjong balls, other than pachinko machines.

[22] As long as each of the means for carrying out the invention, the inventions described in the embodiments, and the inventions described in the variations described above are not mutually exclusive, they may be modified, substituted, deleted, or combined as appropriate.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

30 ... Game board 30a Game area 70 Main control device (main control device)
30 Game board 32 Variable winning device 32a Big winning port 33a Start winning device for special pattern 1 33b Start winning device for special pattern 2 34 Start port for normal pattern 35 Variable display unit 36 Out port 40 First pattern display device 41 Second pattern display device 42 Third pattern display device 43b Demo image 43a Normal screen surface 43c High-speed fluctuation screen 43d Left pattern stop screen 43e All patterns stop screen 43f Normal reach display screen 43g Development reach display screen 43g-1 Strong light flashing screen 43h Opening screen 43i Round screen 43j Ending screen 43k High probability state screen 43l Reach display screen during high probability state 44a Information during specific operation period 44b Specific operation screen 44c Change information display section 44d Operation method display section 44e: Information on approaching the end of a specific operation period 44e1: Information on approaching the end of a first specific operation period 44e2: Information on approaching the end of a second specific operation period 44f: Opening information 44g: Information on explanation of right-hitting during opening 44h: Information on right-hitting during a round 44i: Information on the number of rounds 44j: Ending information 44k: Information on right-hitting during an ending 44l: Information on approaching the next game state 44l1: First approaching the next game state 44l2: Second approaching the next game state 44l3: Third approaching the next game state 44l4: Fourth approaching the next game state 44l5: Fifth approaching the next game state 44m: Right-hitting information during a high probability/support state 44n: Bonus video 44o: Information on preventing gazing at light 44p: Bonus information 44q: Information with setting suggestion 44v: Ending countdown information 44w: Information on suggestion of next game state 44x 45c3 Suggestion image 45c4 Specific value avoidance image 45c5 Suggestion image 45c6 Additional image 45d-A Charge attack image 45d-B Charge attack image 45d-C Charge attack image 45e Long press release notification image 45e1 Retry operation prompt image 45e2 Blackout image 45e3 Long press end notification image 45f Long press duration image 45g Display count information error image 45g1 Remaining change count information error image 45h Color change image 80 Frame button 81 Confirm button 300 Illumination section 301 First illumination section 302 Second illumination section 303 Third illumination section 305 Movable illumination section 602 Transition mechanism 603 Slide groove 604 Separate third illumination section 605 First light-emitting area (first light-emitting area)
606 Second light emitting region (second light emitting region)
607 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
608 Control mechanism (control means)
609 3rd illumination cover (decorative cover)
610 Separate third decorative cover (separate decorative cover)
611 Light emitting substrate (light emitting substrate)
612 LED
613 Substrate support part 614 Input part (input means)
615 Output unit (output means)
616 Push-in portion 617 Push-in receiving portion 618 Shaft 619 Coil spring 620 Main body side fixed portion 621 Position regulating portion 630 Light transmitting portion (light transmitting means)
631: light-transmitting plate; 632: light-transmitting plate support portion; 641: separate cover detection sensor (detection means)
642 Tilting motor 643 Separate cover detection protrusion 650 Separate third illumination cover 651 Partial light-emitting area 642 Non-light-emitting area 703 Movable illumination part 705 First light-emitting area (first light-emitting area)
706 Second light emitting region (second light emitting region)
707 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
708 Control mechanism (control means)
709 Movable illumination cover (decorative cover)
710 Driving mechanism 711 Light emitting substrate 712 LED
713 Substrate support part 714 Input part (input means)
715 Output section (output means)
716 Push-in portion 717 Push-in receiving portion 718 Shaft 719 Coil spring 721 Position regulating portion 730 Light transmitting portion (light transmitting means)
731: light-transmitting plate; 732: light-transmitting plate support portion; 741: displacement detection sensor (detection means)
742 Rotation motor 750 Movable illumination unit (light guide plate)
751 Partial light-emitting region 752 Non-light-emitting region 753 Light-guiding plate light-emitting portion 754 Partial light-emitting portion 755 Non-light-emitting portion

Claims (1)

An operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
A main control means for performing main control regarding a game including a judgment regarding the game;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of executing a predetermined display performance based on the result of the judgment,
The gaming machine includes:
A valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid can be set during the predetermined display performance,
A measuring means is provided for measuring a predetermined period upon the start of the valid period,
The gaming machine includes:
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific manner during the valid period, a specific operation corresponding performance can be executed, and when an operation different from the operation in the specific manner is started thereafter, the specific operation corresponding performance can be continuously executed;
When the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the different operation, even if the different operation is then ended and an operation in at least the specific mode is performed, the specific operation corresponding performance is not continuously executed;
The specific operation corresponding performance is configured to be continuously executed even if the operation in the specific mode is interrupted during the valid period,
The gaming machine is configured such that, when the passage of the predetermined period is measured after the interruption is started, the specific operation corresponding presentation is not continuously executed even if the interruption is then ended and at least an operation is performed in the specific mode.

Images